HomeMy WebLinkAboutMCBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
Augusta Richmond GA
DOCUMENT NAME: '\(\c..~\l ~\\~ Cf!r\\e.,\{
DOCUMENT TYPE: ~~~
YEAR: '0\
BOX NUMBER: \5
FILE NUMBER: \ \0 C)3;~
NUMBER OF PAGES: 65C\
Change Order Number:
7
April 5, 2002
. Sheet
of 2
Date:
Project Title: Augusta Common Phase I-A
Original Contract Date:
Owner: City of Augusta
October 11,200 I Project Number: 327-04-296812009
P.O. Number:
Contractor: Advance Outdoor Services
The following change order is hereby made to the contract for the above project:
(See Attachment)
TOTAL AMOUNT OF THIS CHANGE ORDER
$ 33,104.90
The Contract time will be IncreasedIDccrc8:3cd by -10- calendar days as a result of this change.
The date of completion including this change order is October 28. 2002.
Original Contract Amount (Including Post Bid Addendum 4)
Previous Change Order
(IncreasedVI)eere8:3ed)
This Change Order
(IncreasedVI)ccrc8:3cd)
TOTAL CONTRACT WITH CHANGE ORDER(S)
Requested By:
Submitted By:
Finance Endorsement:
Recommended By:
Approved By:
Accepted By:
M?\r......
~~
Contractor
cc: Purchasing, Geri Sams
Finance Department, Kakoli Basu
$
1,577,931.90
$
10,512.81
$
$
33,104.90
1,621,549.61
Date:
Date: ~#~
Date: ~1;;~
Date: '-(~ 'J.-5- 0"2-
Date: %~'L
Date: S /4 /tf'V
, I
Date: <,tIF /0 d-
, I
Change Order Number:
7
,~
Sheet 2 of 2
Date: April 5, 2002
Project Title:
Augusta Common Phase I-A
Original Contract Date:
October 11, 2001
Project Number:
327-04-296812009
Owner:
City of Augusta
P.O. Number:
Contractor:
Advance Outdoor Services
Description of Changes
(Supplemental Plans and Specifications Attached) 129 Yes D No
DECREASE
in Contract Price
INCREASE
in Contract Price
1. Construction of Storm Drainage connection at Reynolds
Street at revised, deeper configuration to avoid unforeseen
underground utility conflicts, including test digging, manual
excavation, trench shoring and flowable fill backfill
installation, according to letters from the contractor dated
3/5/02 and 3/21/02, attached.
$
19,316.90
2. Construction of Storm Drainage connection at Broad Street at
revised alignment to avoid conflicts encountered with
unforeseen underground vaults, old foundations and utility
lines, including test digging, manual excavation, conflict
boxes, and appurtenances, according to the letter from the
contractor dated 4/1/02, attached.
3. Water line rerouting according to Supplemental Drawing No.
4 and revision of water meter box size required by Augusta
Utilities Department, according to letter from the contractor
dated 4/3/02, attached.
$
7,666.46
$
6,121.54
TOTALS $
NET CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE $
REVISED CONTRACT AMOUNT $
33,104.90
33,104.90
1,621,549.61
JUSTIFICATION
April 10, 2002
AUGUSTA COMMON, PHASE 1A
PROJECT NO.: 327-04-296812009
CHANGE ORDER NO.7
A) The maze of underground utilities and other various underground obstructions prevented
the Reynolds Street storm drain connections from being constructed in accordance with the
original plans. It became necessary to hand dig the trench to a depth of nine feet (As opposed
to the original plan depth of five feet), custom build wood shoring boxes and backfill with
flowable fill in order to achieve proper compaction and reopen the street for the ST, Patrick's
Day parade. All materials, equipment and labor were documented on a Force Accolmt type
basis because accurate prior quotes/quantities could not be provided.
All this is included in the attached Advanced Outdoor Services letter dated March 21, 2002
and attachments thereto.
B) The same type conditions were encountered on the Broad Street storm drain connections
but to a lesser degree. AOS was able to reroute the pipe location around the enormous
underground concrete structures and a Georgia Power underground vault by the addition of
three "conflict boxes" and additional pipe, This too, was documented on a Force Account
type basis and is supported by the AOS letter dated April 1, 2002 and attachments thereto
C) The original plans provided that six Water Meters and Appurtenances would be provided
by the County. Also required by the Augusta Utilities Department was four 2" elbows to go
over the sanitary sewer line and under the relocated storm drain; One 2"Gate Valve; Increase
the meter box size to compensate for the 1 1/2" strainers attached to the water meters; and the
six Water Meters. All this was purchased by AOS and will be billed to us under this Change
Order.
Item C was a critical path item that would have had a negative impact on pouring concrete,
work on adjacent owners walls connections and the irrigation system,
Total Cost Change Order No.7 = $33,104.90
~ ~~1t / 60 3 -:J-/
-
~
I i
I SPECIFICATIONS
AND
I CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
I FOR
I McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
I
I.
"
prepared for
I AUGUSTA-RICHMOND COUNTY COMMISSION
Augusta, Georgia
AUGUSTA-RICHMOND COUNTY RECREATION
AND PARKS DEPARTMENT
2027 Lumpkin Road
Augusta, Georgia 30906
Phone: (706) 796-5052 .:. Fax: (706) 796-4099
I
JOHNSON, LASCHOBER & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
00> ENGINEERS <0> DESIGNERS <0> CONSULTANTS +
1296 Broad Street, Augusta, GA 30901
DECEMBER 2001
JLA JOB No. 42,0103
ACORD", INSURANCE BINDER I DATE
03/26/2002
. THIS BINDER 1S A TEMPORARY INSURANCE CONTRACT, SUBJECT TO THE CONDITIONS SHOWU ml THE REVERSE SIDE OF THIS FORM,
, PRODutER I WgN~D Extl: (706)650-6000 COMPANY I BINDER II -
FAX (70G)650-6001 Cincinnati Insurance Company B02032603934 !
Blanchard & Calhoun Ins Agency, Inc. EFFE TlVE EXPIRATION
DATE TIME DATE TIME
POBox 212359 03/29/2002 12:01 H AM 03/29/2003 H 12:01 AM
Augusta, GA 30917-2359 PM NOON
-\ THIS BINDER IS ISSUED TO EXTEND COVERAGE IN THE ABOVE NAMED COMPANY
. CODE: 10 087 I SUB CODE: PER EXPIRING POLICY II:
. ~8~~8~ER 1090005595 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATlONSNEHICLES/PROPERTY (Including Location)
: INSURED MCBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
AUGUSTA-RICHMOND COUNTY COMMISSIONERS
530 GREENE STREET
AUGUSTA, GA 30911
I
i COVERAGES
LIMITS
TYPE OF INSURANCE COVERAGElFORMS DEDUCTIBLE COINS % AMOUNT
PROPERTY CAUSES OF LOSS
I- o BROAD 0 SPEC
BASIC
-
-
GENERAL L1ABIUTY EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000
X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY FIRE DAMAGE (Anyone fire) S
I CLAIMS MADE o OCCUR MED EXP (Anyone person) $
PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $
-
X OWNERS & CONTRACTORS GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 1,000,000
-
RETRO DATE FOR CLAIMS MADE: PROOUCTS . COM PlOP AGG $
AUTOMOBILE UABIUTY COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $
-
ANY AUTO BODILY INJURY (Per person) S
f-
ALL OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $
I--
SCHEDULED AUTOS PROPERTY DAMAGE S
I--
HIREO AUTOS MEDICAL PAYMENTS $
I--
NON-OWNED AUTOS PERSONAL INJURY PROT $
~-
I-- UNINSURED MOTORIST $
$
AUTO PHYSICAL DAMAGE DEDUCTIBLE ~ ALL VEHICLES SCHEDULED VEHICLES ACTUAL CASH VALUE
==i COLLISION: STATED AMOUNT $
OTHER THAN COL: OTHER
GARAGE LIABIUTY AUTO ONLY. EA ACCIDENT $
-
ANY AUTO OTHER THAN AUTO ONLY:
-
- EACH ACCIDENT S
AGGREGATE $
EXCESS UABIUTY EACH OCCURRENCE S
==i UMBRELLA FORM AGGREGATE $
OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM RETRO DATE FOR CLAIMS MADE: SELF.INSURED RETENTION $
, WC STATUTORY LIMITS
WORKER'S COMPENSATION E.L. EACH ACCIDENT S
AND
EMPLOYER'S UABIUTY E.L. DISEASE. EA EMPLOYEE $
E.L. DISEASE. POLICY LIMIT $
:SPECIAL FEES $
CONDITIDNSI
OTHER TAXES S
COVERAGES
ESTIMATED TOTAL PREMIUM $
; NAME & ADDRESS
AUGUSTA RICHMOND COUNTY COMMISSIONERS
COUNTY ADMINISTRATOR
530 GREENE STREET
AUGUSTA, GA 30911
MORTGAGEE
ADDITIONAL INSURED
Add'l insured lessor
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE
, ACORD 75-S (1/98)
Preston Moss/MAR
NOTE: IMPORTANT STATE INFORMATION ON REVERSE SIDE
~~ .-
@ACORDCORPORATION 1993
ACORD... CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE I DATE (Ml.l'uLlIYY)
03/2fi/2u02
. PRODUCER (706)650-6000 FAX (706)650-6001 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATIOI~
Blanthard & Calhoun Ins Agency, Inc. ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE
HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR
POBox 212359 ,. ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW.
Augusta, GA 30917-2359 INSURI::RS AFFORDING COVERAGE
. INSURED Contlnental Construction CO. INSURER A: Cincinnati Insurance Company
Po Box 204198 INSURER B: American Interstate
: Augusta, GA 30917-4198 INSURER C:
I INSURER D:
I INSURER E:
i COVERAGES
THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING
ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR
i MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH
POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS.
, INSR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLlC~~rFECTI~1' Pgk!flf~~~~N LIMITS
LTR DATE MMlDDIYY
GENERAl LIABILITY CPP5524455AWR 02/01/2002 02/01/2003 EACH OCCURRENCE S l,OOO,OO(J
I- 500,000
X COMMERCIAl GENERAL LIABILITY FIRE DAMAGE (Anyone fire) S
:=0 CLAIMS MADE 0 OCCUR MED EXP (Anyone person) S 5,OO(J
A PERSONAL & ADV INJURY S 1,000,000
I--
GENERAL AGGREGATE S
---J
GEN'L AGG~nE LIMIT APnS PER: PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG S 1,000,000
I PRO-
POLICY JECT LOC
AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ~PP5524455 02/01/2002 02/01/2005 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT
l- S
X ANY AUTO (Ea accldenl) l,OOO,OO(]
-
ALL OWNEO AUTOS BODILY INJURY
- (Per person) S
SCHEDULED AUTOS
A -
HIRED AUTOS BODILY INJURY
- (Per accidenl) S
NON.OWNED AUTOS
-
- PROPERTY DAMAGE S
(Per accident)
GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $
=i ANY AUTO OTHER THAN EA ACC $
AUTO ONLY: AGG $
EXCESS LIABILITY ~CC4392725 02/01/2002 02/01/2005 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 5,000,000
m OCCUR o CLAIMS MADE AGGREGATE S 5,000,000
A $
~ DEDUCTIBLE S
X RETENTION $ (] S
WORKERS COMPENSATION AND AVWCGA1064702002 01/01/2002 01/01/2003 X I T"'6~~I~JI~S I IUd~-
EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY 1,000,000
B E.L. EACH ACCIDENT S
E.L. DISEASE. EA EMPLOYEE $ 1,000,000
E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ 1,000,000
B~rt'DERS RISK - ALL PP5524455AWR 02/01/2002 .02/01/2005 $5,000,000 LIMIT
A RISK $1,000 DEDUCTIBLE
,
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATlONSlLOCATlONSNEHICLESlEXCLUSlONS ADDELJ BY ENDORSEMENT/SPECIAL PROVISIONS
,
fCERTIECATE HOLDER I I ADDmONAL INSURED; INSURER LETTER: CANCELLATION
SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE
EXPIRATION DATE THEREC.F, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL
AUGUSTA-RICHMOND COUNTY COMMISSION ....1!L- DAYS WRITTEN NOr.CE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT,
MUNICIPAL BUILDING BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR L1ABILllY
530 GREENE STREET OF ANY KIND UPON THE CuMPANY, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES,
AUGUSTA, GA 30911 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE -
Preston Moss/MAR C --....~ -
ACORD 25-5 (7/97)
@ACORD CORPORATION 1988
Fil S A FEe o~
POWER
01= ATTORNEY
SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA
GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA
HOME OFFICE: SAFECO PLAZA
SEATILE, WASHINGTON 98185
No. 6744
KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS:
That SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA, each a Washington corporation, does each hereby
appoint
.....FRANK W. HAFNER, JR.; JANE MCCOY; CAROLYN D, O.vENS; ALFRED T. JOHNSON; DELLA B. CASE; ROBERT J. LA VISKY; DUAINETTE H. CULLUM;
Col umbia, South Carolina................ ..... ............. ... ........ ........ ....... ...... ..... ............... ... ..... ... ..... ..... ........ .......................... *.*
its true and lawful attomey(s)-In-fact. with full authority to execute on its behalf fidelity and surety bonds or undertakings and other documents of a similar character
issued in the course of its business, and to bind the respective company thereby.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA have each executed and
attested these presents
day of August
, 2000
this 2nd
.kR1f(~~
1D~~
R.A. PIERSON, SECRETARY
W, RANDALL STODDARD, PRESIDENT
CERTIFICATE
Extract from the By-Laws of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA
and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA:
"Artide V, Section 13, _ FIDELITY AND SURETY BONDS ... the President, any Vice President, the Secret;ry, and any Assistant Vice President appointed for that
purpose by the officer In 'charge of surety operations, shall C<._h have authority to appoint Individuals as attomeys-in-fact or under other appropriate titles with authority to
execute on behalf of the company fidelity and surety bonds and other documents of similar character Issued by the company in the course of its business... On any
instrument making or evidendng such appointment, the sign..tures may be affixed by facsimile. On any Instrument conferring such authority or on any bond or
undertaklng of the company, the seal, or a facsimile thereof. may be Impressed or affixed or In any other manner reproduced; provided, however, that the seal shall not
be necessary to the validity of any such Instrument or undertaking."
Extract from a Resolution of .t.d Board of Directors of SAFECO INSURANCE COrllPANY OF AMERICA
and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA adopted July 28,1970.
"On any certificate executed by the Secretary or an assistant 5eu-etary of the Company setting out.
(I) The provisions of Artlcle V. Section 13 of the By-Laws, and
(i1) A copy of the power-of-attomey appointment, executed pursuant thereto, and
(ill) Certifying that said power-of-attomey appointment is in full force and effect,
the signature of the certifying officer may be by facsimile, and the seal of the Company may be a facsimile thereof..
I. R.A, Pierson. Secretary of SAFECO INSURANCE COMP';;. ( OF AMERICA and of GENERAL INSURAN;:;E COMPANY OF AMERICA, do hereby certify that the
foregoing extracts of the By-laws and of a Resolution of the Board of Directors of these corporations, and of a Power of Attomey issued pursuant thereto, arc true and
correct, and that both the By-Laws. the Resolution and the r ,;]Wer of Attomey are sUllln full force and effect.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and.,lffiJled the facsimile seal of said corporation
,this
day of
..t!R If( 2? ~
R,A, PIERSON, SECRETARY
S-0974/SAEF 7/98
Ill> Registered trademark of SAFECO Corp;JraliOll.
C/2/00 POF
equipment or machinery was fun1i;lbed or supplied by him for which claim iz made, shall have the right to sue
on such payment bond for the amount, or the balance thereat: uupaid at the time of the commencement of
such action and to prosecute such :.ction to final execution and judgement for the sum or sums due him,
provided, howem, that any pt::son haYing direct contractual relaticJJE1llp with a subcontract, but no
contractual relati.onship express or ~lied with the Contractor f\1mishtlg said payment bond upon giving
written notice to said contractor within ninety (90) days from the day on which such person did or performed
tho last of the labor, or furnished the last of the materials or machinery or equipment for which such claim i3
made stating with substantial accuracy the amount claimed and the name of the party to whom the material3
were furnished or supplied from whom the labor was performed or done; provided further that nothing
contained herein sbal1limit the right of action to said 90-day period. NotiCE: may be servcd by the depositing
of a notice, registered mail, pO$tage paid. duly addressed to the Contractor at any place he maintains an office
or conducts his business, or his residence, in any post office or branch po~ office or any letter box under the
control of the Post Office Department or notice may be SOlVed in any manner in which the sheriffs of Georgia
are authorized by law to senre su:mmons or process, Every suit instituted under this section shall be brought
in the name of the claimaDt witham Owner being made a party thereof. The official who has custody of said
bond is authorized and directed to fumish, to any person making application thereof who submits an affidavit
that he has supplied labor or materials for such work and payment therefore has not been made, or that he is
being sued on any such bond, a ;opy of such bond and the contract for whic~ it was given, certified, by the
official who has custody of sa:d bond and contract shall be admitted ill cvidence without further proof.
App1:l.canrs shall pay for such certified statements and such fees as the. official fixes to cover the cost of
preparation thereo~ but in no cas:: shall the fee which the cl=rks of the superior courts are ptmnitted to charge
for similar copies.
(4) Na,action can be instib.1ted on tr":~ bond aftEr one year from the date ofthc final certificate of the Architect
(5) Further, this bond shall be consi.tert;J the same as a bond furnished under O.C.G.A. Section 13-10-1 &
Secti.0l136-82-101, et. seq.
(6) For the purposes of this bond, thL; ..ame and address of the Authorized SlA:.e of Georgia 1.icCDSed Agent to
whom conespoll~ence and telecommunicatioIlS may be addressed and/or with whom business concerning this
bond may be couducted will be as follows:
. Travis G, Huffines / BB&T Huffines Russell
Nama
3100 Royal Boulevard South
Address
AI oharetta
City
770-664-6818
Telephone Number
Signed and sealed this ~ Cj day of
In the presence of: ,
CU--t:''('-Jr\.:~ Drt 9-t>4-L'
Wilness
Georgia
Stale
30022
Zip Code
,/VIA Rcl-/
AD .~? {'C' :/
,
(SEAL)
Continental Construction Co., Inc.
~11tb' .
TI~ Richard L. Horton, President
~G.~
Wllnesa
(SEAL)
Safeco Insurance Company of America
SUllIty
KDu ()J/nJ[tV J)J Cd(2l~
nlte
Duainette H. Culltnn, Attorney-in-Fact
PAYMENT BOND
THIS BOND IS EXECUfEI)'TPOETHER WITH ANOTHER BOND IN FAVOR OF THE OWNER AS
OBUGEE CONDmONED UPON P~ORMANCE OF THE CONTRACT.
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
!bat Continental Construction Company, Inc.
(lBgal TIlle and Address of \he Conb8Ctll)
P.O. Box 204198 Augusta, Geor~ia 30917-4198
as Principal (herei:nafter referred to as "Principal"). and Safeco Insurance Comoanv of America
(Legal Nama and Address of the Surety)
Safeco Plaza, Seattle, Washington 98185
as Surety (hereinafter referred to as "Surety"), are held and fumly bound unto C~ tv of Augusta Commission
(OWner Nama and Address)
530 Greene Street. Augusta. Georgia 30911
as Obligee (hereinafter referred to as "O'o'tcer") for the use and benefit of clairnan~ defined, hereinafter in the
8J:lOunt of:
Eight Hundred Forty Nine Tho~and, Seven
Hundred Fifty Six and 00(100 DOLLARS(S 849.756.00
(Contract PrIce)
to which payment Principal and Sm:ety bi..d themselves. their hears, ~ecutors, admi.I.!strators, successors and
assigns jointly and severally, Mnly by these presents. .
WHEREAS, the above bQunded Principallus entered into a contract with Owner cfut;2:d
for
Construction of McBean Commurdtv Center
(Insert Name of Work)
in accordance with the drawings and spec.ifi~J.tiot1S prepared by; Johnson Laschober & Associates, P. C.
rlllSert Fun N8IIl8 and TlUe)
which contract is incorporated herein by I'Cfem1Ce and made a part hereof. and is hereinafter referred to as the
Contract
NOW, TIIEREFORE, THE CONDITIOl ~ OF THIS O~UGA TION is such that if t1~ Principal shall promptly make
payment to all claiIoants as hereinafter de1ined. for alllabor and materials supplied in the prosecution of the work
provided for in said Coutract, then this obligation shall be void. o~se it shall remain in full force and effect
subject, however, to the following conditions:
(1) The said Surety to this bond, for "alue received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change or changes,
~teDsion of time or oxtcnSions of time, alteration or alterations or addition -Dr additions to the terms of the
contract or to the work to be performed thereunder, or the specificatioJlS or drawings accompanying same
shall in any wise affect its obligation on this bond. and it does hereby wrdve notice of any such change or
changes, extension of time or e~te:.sions of time, alteration or alterations or addition or additions to the terms
of the contract' or to the Wark or t) the specifications or drawings.
(2) A claimant is defined as any suhcontractor and any person supplyinli1abor, matt:rials, machinery or
equipment iD the prosecution of the work provided fot' in said contract
(3) Every penOIl entitled to the prow~~on hereunder and who has not been paid in full for labor or materials
furnished in the prosecution of the work metred to iD said bond before th:: expintioIl of a period of ninety
(90) days after the day on which.lhc last of the labor was done or performed by him, or materials or
PA-l
~~~ Z01 OJ>Aomln\S :=',~1P,,'/!l"l "~O nj .doc
default or defaults promptly or to perform the contract prompdy, time being of the essence. In said notice of
election, the Surety shall indicate the date on which the remedy or perfoIm.-..nce will commence. and it shall
then be the duty 'of the Surety to give prompt notice in writing to the Owner immediately upon completion of
(B) the remedyand/or correction cf c:lcb. default, (b) the remedy andlor correction or each item of condemned
work, (c) the f\Imil:hing of each "mitted item of work, and (d) the performance of the contract The Surety
shall not assert its Principal all justification for its failure to give notice of election or for its failure to
promptly remedy 1he default or defaults or perform the Contract
(3) Supplemel'ltary to and in 'addition to the foregoing, whenever the Owner shall notify the Surety that the
Owner bas notice that the Contractor has failed to pay any subcontractor, materialman, or laborer for labor or
materials certified by the Contractor as having been paid for by the Contractor in accordance with said
Contract, which said laborer or materials have. been included in a periodical estimate and certified by the
Axchitect for payment and paid fcr by the Ov,ucr, the Surety shall, within 20 days of receipr of such notice,
cause to be paid any unpaid aDlOl.Crs for such labor and materials.
(4) It is expressly agreed by the Principal and the Surety that the Owner, is be desires to do so, is at liberty to
make inquiries :1t any time of sub.-contractors, :aborers. materialmen. or other parties concerning the status of
payments for labor, materials, or s:rvices furnished in the prosecution of the work.
(5) No right of action shall accrue on this bond to or for the use of any person 01' corporation other than the
Owner named herein or the legal successors of the Owner.
(6) Fo!: the purposes of this bond, the ;.aII1e and address of the AuthoI'ized State of Georgia Licensed Agent to
whom cmrespondcnce ami tclcco:::unmicationJ; may b~ addressed and/or with whom business concerning this
bond. may be conducted will be as follows:
Travis G. HuffiQes / BB&T Huffines Russell
Name
. 3100 Royal Boulevard South
Address
Alpharetta
City
770-664-6818
Telephone Number
Signed and sealed this f2 CJ cia y of
In the presence of:
~o..-l,""""'LL On..LCL~
Wltnas9 '
Georgia
Slalo
30022
Zip Code
/YJf}RcJf
AD .) C' C' 'J.
_ J .-.......
(SEAL)
Continental Construction Co., Inc.
fJTiti7 ...
-l1tle ic. ard L. Horton, President
'P-L\.a ~. C O\.~O
WItness .......
(SEAL)
Safeco Insurance Company of America
SWBty
~JJ ~vyJ-J
TItle
Duainette H. Cullum, Attorney-in-Fact
"'l-r: ~
PERFORMANCE BOND'
That Continental Construction Company. Inc.
(Legal TWe and Address oIlhe Conlraclo~
P.O. Box 204198 Augusta, Georgia 30917-4198
as Principal (hereinafter referred to as "Pr:.ncipaln), and Safeco Insurance CCJnpany of America
(Legal Name and Addl'B&S of !he Surely)
Safeco Plaza, Seattle, Washington 98185
as Surety (hc:reina.fter referred to as "Suretj'). are held and fumlybound unto City of Augusta Corrnnission
(Owner Name and Address)
530 Greene Street. Augusta. Ge0rgia 30911
as Obligee (hereinafter referred to as "OWl1.;r'I) for the use and bentfit of claimants de~ined. hereinafter in the
amount of:
Eight Hundred Forty Nine Thou~Lnd, Seven
Hundred Fifty Six and 00/100 DOLLARS ($ R49, 7'56 .00
(Connct Prlce)
to which payment Principal and Surety bir..~ themselves, their hears, executors. admici.. trIltors, successors and
~signs jointly and severally, fim1ly by these presents.
WHEREAS, the above bounded Principa11a:i entered into a c01ltract with Owner dated
for
Construction of the NcBean COhJr.ltmity Center
(Name 01 Wo~
in accotdanee with the drawings and specific:ltions prepared by: Johnson Laschober & Associates. P. C.
(Isert FilII Name and TdIe)
which contract is incorporated herein bJ ~~ference and made a part hereof, and is hereinafter referred tei as the
Coutracl .
NOW THEREFORE. THE CONDmON OF THIS OBLIGA nON is such that, if thi: Contractor shall promptly and
faithfully perfonn and comply with the terms and conditions of said contract; and shall indemnify aud save hannless
the Owner against and from all cost, expenses, damages, injury or loss to which said Owner may be subjected by
reason of any wrongdoing, including patent infringement, misconduct, want of care or skill. default or failure of
performance on the part of said Principal, his agents, subcontractors or employees, in the execution or performance
of said contract, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise it shall rt:maiD in full fOICe and effect.
\
(1) The said Surety to this bond. for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change or changes,
extension of time or extensions of, time, alteration or alterations or addition ct additions to the terms of the
contract or to the work to be perfomlfld thereunder, or the specifications or drawings accompanying same
shall in any wise affect its obligatio!l on this bond. and it does hereby waiv~ notice of any such change or
chau.:.cres, e7'tension of time or ell;tensiQns of tUne, alteration or alterations or addition or additions to the terms
of the contract or to the Wotlc or to the specifications or drawings.
(2) If pursuant to the Contract Documents the Contractor shall be declared ill default by the Owner under the
aforesaid Contract, the Surety nmy promptly perform the Contract in acco.xdance with its terms and
conditioDS. It shall be the duty of. ~ Surety to give an unequivocal notice in writing to the Owner within
twenty-five (25) days afblr receipt of a declaration of default of the Surety's election to either remedy the
II
PE-l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SPECIFICATIONS
AND
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
FOR
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
prepared for
AUGUSTA-RICHMOND COUNTY COMMISSION
Augusta, Georgia
AUGUSTA-RICHMOND COUNTY RECREATION
AND PARKS DEPARTMENT
2027 Lumpkin Road
Augusta, Georgia 30906
Phone: (706) 796.5052 .:. Fax: (706) 796-4099
prepared by
JOHNSON, LASCHOBER & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
<0> ENGINEERS <0> DESIGNERS <0> CONSULTANTS <0>
1296 Broad Street, Augusta, GA 30901
DECEMBER 2001 JLA JOB No. 42.0103
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
FOR
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
IDivision Section Title
Pagesl
BIDDING REQUIREMENTS
I n vi ta ti 0 n to Bid ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1
Bid r:orm ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5
In stru cti on s to Bid d e rs --------------------------------------------------------'------------------------------------- 6
G e n e ra I Con d itio ns ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 29
Su pplemental Ge neral Cond itions ---m------------------____m____m_______________mmm__m__m------3
Standard r:orm of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor on the basis of a
Sti pula ted P ri ce --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
Not ice of A wa rd ------------------- --------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------- 2
N oti ce to P roceed ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1
Ap P I i cation fo r P a ym e nt ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
C h a n g e 0 rd e r ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
Ce rtificate of S u bsta nt i a I Co m p letio n---------------------------------m_______________m____----------------- 2
Bid Bo n d ---------- ------------------------------- ----------------- -------------------------------------------------- 2
P e rforma n ce Bon d -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
P a yme nt Bon d ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 01 0 Sum ma ry af W ark ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1
01027 Applications for Payment ---------------------------______m_m______m___m________m__-------4
o 1 200 Project M ee ti n g s ----------------------------------------------------:..--------------------------------- 3
01230 Alte rnates----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
01 300 Su bmitta Is ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
01 71 0 r: i n a I C I ea n i n g ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION
02230 Site C I ea ri n 9 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
02300 Ea rthwork ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
02361 Termite Control ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
0251 0 W ate r D i s tri b uti 0 n --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14
02511 Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving -----------------------------_________________________m___--------------- 10
02530 Sa n ita ry Sewe ra g e ________m______________________________________________________---------'--------- 5
02540 Septic Tan k Systems -_______________________m_____________________________------------------------6
02630 Sto rm 0 ra i nag e --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6
02751 Ce ment Con crete Pave ment -------------------------________________m___m____________------- 17
TOC-1
K:\420 1 O3lAdmin\Specs\Fron~TOC.doc
SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
FOR
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
02764
02831
02900
Pave me nt J oi n t Sea I a nts ---------------------------------------------------------------------------4
Cha i n Li n k Fences And Gates---------------------------------------------------------------------6
La n d s ca pin 9 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 0
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03300 Cast-I n-Place Con crete --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
0481 0 Unit Mason ry Assem b I ies------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 0
DIVISION 5 - METALS
05500 Meta I Fa b ri ca tion s -----:------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
061 00 R 0 ugh Ca rpe ntry ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
06105 Miscellaneous Carpentry ---------------------------------------------------------------------------3
06150 Wood Decki ng ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
06176 Meta 1- P I ate-Con n e cted Wood T ru sses ---------------------------------------------------------- 6
06402 1 nterior Arch itectu ral W oodwork -------------------------------------------------------------------5
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
0721 0 B u i I din gin s u lati 0 n ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3
07460 Fi be r C e men t Sid in 9 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
07511 B u i It -u p Aspha It Roofi ng ----------------------------------------------------------------------------6
0761 0 S h ee t Me ta I Roofi n 9 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
07620 S h ee t Meta I F la s h i n 9 and T ri m -------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
07650 Th ro ugh - Wall F las h i ng ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3
07841 Through Penetration Firestop Systems --------------------------------------------------------5
07920 J 0 i n t Sea I e rs ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 6
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08110 Steel Doors and Frames ----------------------------------------------------------------------------4
08211 Flu s h Wood 000 rs ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
08550 Wood Win d ows -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
TOC-2
K:\420103\AdrrdnlSpecs\FrontlTOC.doc
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
FOR
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
08710
08800
Doo r H a rdwa re ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
C3lazing--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09260 C3 yps u m Boa rd Ass e m b Ii es ------------------------------------------------------------------------4
09310 Ceramic Tile -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5
09512 Acoustical Tile Ceilings -----------------------------------------------------------------------------4
09651 Res il ient Floor Ti Ie -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4
09653 Resilient Wall Base and Accessories------------------------------------------------------------5
09680 Carp e t ------------------------------------------------------ ---~----------------------------------------- 3
09770 Special Wall Surfaces -------------------------------------------------------------------------------3
09773 Sport Rub ber F I oori ng ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
09912 Painting ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11
09920 Deco rative La m i n ate E po xy F I omi n 9 ------------------------------------------------------------ 8
09931 Exte ri or Sta i ns ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4
DIVISION 10- SPECIALTIES
10155 Toilet Compartments --------------------------------------------------------------------------------3
1 0200 Louve rs a nd Vents -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------5
1 0520 Fire P rotecti on S p e ci a Iti es-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
1 0651 0 pe ra b I e Pane I P a rtiti 0 n s -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
1080 1 Toilet And Bath Accessories -----------------------------------------------------------------------4
DIVISION 11 - EQ'UIPMENT
11400 Food Service Eq u ipment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------4
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12491 H orizo n ta I Lo uve r B I i n d s ----------------------------------------------------------------------------4
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
15050 Basic Mechanical Materials And Methods----------------------------------------------------12
1 5055 Mot 0 rs --------------------------------------- ------------ ------------------------------------------------4
1 5060 Hang e rs And Sup ports ------------------------------------------------------------------------------6
1 5071 M ech ani ca I Vi b ra tio n Contro I s--------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
15081 Du ct Ins u lation ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6
TOC-3
K:\4201 O3lAdmin\Specs\Fron~TOC.doc
15083
15100
1 5411
15420
15430
15440
15530
15738
15815
15820
15838
15855
15861
15990
SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
FOR
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Pipe Ins u I ati 0 n ______m_____________m_______________________m____________m______________m_____ 9
\lalves---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8
Water D istri bution Pi pi ng _______________________________m___________________m_________---------- 7
D ra i n ag e And \lent Pip i n 9 __________m_m________________________________________________m______ 6
PI u m bin 9 S pe ci a Iti es ________________________________________________m___m__m_----------------- 9
PI u m bing F ixtu res ___________________u_________________________________________---------------------- 6
Refri 9 era nt Pip in 9 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4
Split -Syste m Ai r -Cond ition i ng Units ___________________________________________m___________-----4
Meta I Ducts ---------------------------------------------------- ------------------ --------- ------------- 8
Duct Accesso ries ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
Powe r \Ie n ti lators _________m__m______m__________________________m______________m_____m_____ 7
Diffusers, Reg isters. And Gri lies ___m_______________m_______________m_________________m__,.._ 3
Ai r F i I te rs --------------------------------------------------- ---------------------- ------------- --------- 3
Testing, Adjusting. And Balancing __________________________________________________m_____---- 11
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16050
16060
16075
16120
16130
16140
16145
16410
16442
16491
16511
16750
16851
TOC-4
Sa sic E I e ctri ca I Ma te ri a I s An d Me th od S ------------------m------------------------------------4
G rou n din 9 An d Bo n din 9 ____________________________m________________________m__m------------- 3
E lectri ca I Ide ntifi ca ti 0 n _____m_____________mm__m_________________________________------------- 2
Cond uctors and Ca b les ________m____mm______________________________________________m_______ 2
Ra ceways and Boxe s _________m________________________________________________m________________ 3
Wi ri ng Devi ces ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
Li 9 hti ng Co ntro I Devi ces ___________________________________________________m__mm____--mum 2
En cI osed Switch es ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
Pan e I boa rd s -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4
F use s ------------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------- - - ----- ------- 2
In te ri 0 r L ig hti ng ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4
\loice and Data Communication System-----m-m---------------n----m--m----------m--1
Fire Alarm ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8
K:\4201 03Vldmjn\Specs\Fron~TOC,doc
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
BID FORM
Date:
PROJECT NAME:
McBean Community Center
TillS BID IS SUBMITTED TO:
Augusta-Richmond County Commission
Purchasing Department, Room 605
Municipal Building
530 Greene Street
Augusta, GA 30911
1. The undersigned BIDDER proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an
agreement with OWNER in the form included in the Contract Documents to perform and
furnish all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents for the Contract Price
and within the Contract Time indicated in this Bid and in accordance with the other terms
and conditions of the Contract Documents,
2, BIDDER accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid
and Instructions to Bidders, including without limitation those dealing with the disposition of
Bid security. This Bid will remain subject to acceptance for sixty days after the day of Bid
opening. BIDDER will sign and submit the Agreement with the Bonds and other documents
required by the Bidding Requirements within fifteen days after the date of OWNER'S Notice
of Award.
3. In submitting this Bid, BIDDER represents, as more fully set forth in the Agreement, that:
a, BIDDER has examined copies of all the Bidding Documents and of the following
Addenda (receipt of all which is hereby acknowledged):
Date
Number
b, BIDDER has familiarized itself with the nature and extent of the Contract
Documents, Work, site, locality, and all local conditions and Laws and Regulations
that in any manner may affect cost, pro gress, performance or furnishing of the Work.
c. BIDDER has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for obtaining
and carefully studying) all such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and
studies which pertain to the subsurface or physical conditions at the site or otherwise
BF-l
K:\420103\AdrrinlSpecsIFronl\BIDFORM.DOC
BF-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
may affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing ofthe Work at the Contract
Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and
conditions of the Contract Documents, including specifically the provisions of
paragraph 4,2 of the General Conditions; and no additional examinations,
investigations, explorations, tests, reports or similar information or data are or will be
required by BIDDER for such purposes,
d, BIDDER has reviewed and checked all information and data shown or indicated on
the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or
contiguous to the site and assumes responsibility for the accurate location of said
Underground Facilities, No additional examinations, investigations, explorations,
tests, reports or similar information or data in respect of said Underground Facilities
are or will be required by BIDDER in order to perform and furnish the WORK at the
Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and
conditions of the Contract Documents, including specifically the provisions of
paragraph 4,3 of the General Conditions,
e. BIDDER has correlated the results of all such observations, examinations,
investigations, explorations, tests, reports and studies with the terms and conditions
of the Contract Documents.
f. BIDDER has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies
that it has discovered in the Contract Documents and the written resolution thereof by
ENGINEER is acceptable to BIDDER,
g, This bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed
person, firm or corporation and is not submitted in conformity with any agreement or
rules of any group, association, organization or corporation; BIDDER has not directly
or indirectly induced or solicited any other Bidder to submit a false or sham Bid;
BIDDER has not solicited or induced any person, firm or corporation to refrain from
bidding; and BIDDER has not sought by collusion to obtain for itself any advantage
over any other Bidder or over OWNER,
BIDDER will complete the WORK for the following price(s):
BASE BID
Total Lump Sum $
5,
Reference Specification Section 01230 - Alternates, paragraph 3.1.A - 3.1.E,
A. Alternate No, 1: Add $
B. Alternate No, 2: Add $
C. Alternate No.3: Add $
1<:\420103IAdrrinlSpecsIFroot\BIDFDRM.DDC
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
The Owner may elect to accept any Add Alternate in any order that may be advantageous to
the owner, and incorporate sum as a Change Order. Contractor shall notify the Owner when
the decision of accepting an Add Alternate must be made for the Contractor to be able to
hold the stated "Add Cost" in the above bid form.
A. A tabulation of subcontractors, suppliers [and other] individuals and entities is
required to be identified in this bid,
6, BIDDER agrees that the work will be completed and ready for final payment in accordance
with paragraph 14.13 of the General Conditions on or before 240 days after notice to
proceed,
7. The following documents are attached to and made a condition of this Bid:
a) Bid Bond
b) Bidder's Qualification Statement
8. Corrununications concerning this Bid shall be addressed to:
The address of BIDDER indicated below,
9. The terms used in this Bid which are defined in the General Conditions of the Construction
Contract included as part ofthe Contract Documents have the meanings assigned to them in
the General Conditions.
SUBMITTED on
If BIDDER is:
An Individual
By
(Individual's Name)
doing business as
Business address:
Phone No,:
BF-3
K:\420103\AdminlSpecsIFronl\8IDFORM.DOC
BF-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
K:\4201 03\Adrrin\Specslfronll8IDFDR~tDOC
A Partnership
By
(Individual's Name)
(General Partner)
Business address:
Phone No,:
A Corporation
By
(Corporation Name)
By
(State of Incorporation)
By
(Name of Person Authorized to Sign)
By
(Title)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
.
iiii
.
(Corporation Seal)
Attest
(Secretary)
Business address:
Phone No:
A Joint Venture
By
(Name)
(Address)
By
(Name)
(Address)
(Each joint venturer must sign, The manner of signing for each individual, partnership and
corporation that is a party to the joint venture should be in the manner indicated above),
BF-5
1<:1420103\AdminlSpecsIFrontIBlDFORM.DOC
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1.
Defined Terms.
Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders which are defmed in the Standard General
Conditions of the Construction Contract (No, 1910-8, 1983 ed,) have the meanings assigned to
them in the General Conditions, The term "Bidder" means one who submits a Bid directly to
Owner, as distinct from a sub-bidder, who submits a bid to a Bidder. The term "Successful
Bidder" means the lowest, qualified, responsible and responsive Bidder to whom Owner (on
the basis of Owner's evaluation as hereinafter provided) makes an award, The term "Bidding
Documents" includes the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, the Bid
Form, and the proposed Contract Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of
Bids),
2.
Copies of Bidding Documents.
2,1 Complete sets of the Bidding Documents in the number and for the deposit sum stated in
the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid may be obtained from Engineer.
2.2 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing Bids; neither Owner nor
Engineer assume any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use
of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents,
2,3 Owner and Engineer in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above
terms do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and do not confer a
license or grant for any other use.
3.
Qualifications of Bidders.
To demonstrate qualifications to perform the Work, each Bidder must be prepared to submit
within five (5) days of Owner's request written evidence, such as financial data, previous
experience, present commitments and other such data as may be called for below (or in the
Supplementary Instructions). Each Bid must contain evidence of Bidder's qualification to do
business in the state where the Project is located or covenant to obtain such qualification prior
to award of the contract.
4.
Examination of Contract Documents and Site.
4.1 It is the responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the
Contract Documents thoroughly, (b) visit the site to become familiar with local
conditions that may affect cost, progress performance or furnishing of the Work, (c)
consider federal, state and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress,
performance or furnishing of the Work, (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's
IB-l
K.-14201 03\ADMINISPECS'FRON1\lNST .BID .ooc
observations with the Contract Documents, and (e) notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors
or discrepancies in the Contract Documents.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4.2 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground
Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based upon information and data furnished to
Owner and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and Owner
does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless it is
expressly provided otherwise in the Supplementary Conditions.
4.3 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective
Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities and other physical conditions,
and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing conditions appear in
Paragraphs 4,2 and 4,3 of the General Conditions,
4.4 Before submitting a Bid each Bidder will be responsible to make or obtain such
explorations, tests and data concerning physical conditions (surface, subsurface and
Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site, or otherwise which may affect cost,
progress, performance or furnishing ofthe Work and which Bidder deems necessary to
determine its Bid for performing and furnishing the Work in accordance with the time,
price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents,
4.5 On request in advance, Owner will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct
such explorations and tests as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid.
Bidder shall fill all holes, clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon
completion of such explorations,
4,6 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for
access thereto and other lands designated for use by Contractor in performing the Work
are identified in the Contract Documents. Easements are to be obtained and paid for by
the Owner.
4,7 The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that
Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article 4, that without exception the
Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract
Documents. and such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of
construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the
Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey
understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing the Work,
5. Interpretations and Addenda.
5,1 All questions about the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed
to Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by Engineer in
response to such questions will be issued by Addenda mailed or delivered to all parties
recorded by Engineer as having received the Bidding Documents, Questions received
IB-2
K:\420103\A0MINISPECS\FRONnlNST -BID ,DOC
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
less than ten (10) days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be answered. Only
questions answered by formal written Addenda will be binding, Oral and other
interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect.
5.2 Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by
Owner or Engineer.
6.
Bid Security.
6.1 Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid security made payable to Owner in an amount of
ten percent of the Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of a certified or bank
check or a Bid Bond issued by a surety meeting the requirements of Paragraph 5,1 ofthe
General Conditions,
6.2 The Bid security ofthe Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed
the Agreement and furnished the required contract security, whereupon the Bid security
will be returned. Ifthe Successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Agreement and
furnish the required contract security within fifteen (15) days after the Notice of Award,
Owner may annul the Notice of Award and the Bid security of that Bidder will be
forfeited, The Bid security of other Bidderswhom Owner believes to have a reasonable
chance of receiving the award may be retained by Owner until the earlier ofthe seventh
(7th) day after the Effective Date of the Agreement or the sixtieth (60) day after the Bid
opening, whereupon Bid security furnished by such Bidders will be returned. Bid
security with Bids which are not competitive will be returned within seven (7) days after
the Bid opening.
7.
Contract Time.
The numbers of days within which, or the dates by which, the Work is to be substantially
completed and also completed and ready for final payment (the Contract Time) are set forth in
the Bid Form and the Agreement.
8.
Substitute or "Or Equal" Items.
The materials and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of
required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution.
No substitution will be considered unless written request for approval has been submitted by
the Bidder and has been received by Engineer at least ten (10) days prior to the date for receipt
of Bids. Each such request shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is
to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitute including drawings,
cuts, performance and test data and any other information necessary for an evaluation. A
statement setting forth any changes in other materials, equipment ofW ork that incorporation of
the substitute would require shall be included, The burden of proof of the merit of the
proposed substitute is upon the Bidder. The Engineer's decision of approval or disapproval of
a proposed substitution shall be final. If Engineer approves any proposed substitution, such
IB-3
K:1420 1 03\ADMlNISPECSlFRONnINST .BID ,DOC
11,2 If, within twenty-four (24) hours after Bids are opened, any Bidder files a duly signed
and notarized written notice with Owner and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the
reasonable satisfaction of Owner that there was a material and substantial mistake in the
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
approval will be set forth in an Addendum issued to all prospective Bidders. Bidders shall not
rely upon approvals made in any other manner.
9. Bid Form.
9.1 The Bid Form is included with the Bidding Documents; additional copies may be
obtained from Engineer (or the issuing office),
9,2 All blanks on the Bid Form must be completed in ink or by typewriter.
9,3 Bids by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-
president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and
the corporate seal must be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary.
The corporate address and state of incorporation must be shown below the signature,
9.4 Bids by partnerships must be executed in the partnership name and signed by a partner,
whose title must appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership
must be shown below the signature,
9,5 All names must be typed or printed below the signature,
9,6 The Bid shall contain an acknowledgement of receipt of all Addenda (the numbers of
which must be filled in on the Bid Form),
9.7 The address and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid must be
shown,
10. Submission of Bids.
Bids shall be submitted at the time and place indicated in the Advertisement or Invitation to
Bid and shall be enclosed in an opaque sealed envelope, marked with the Project title (and, if
applicable, the designated portion of the Project for which the Bid is submitted) and name and
address of the Bidder and accompanied by the Bid security and other required documents, If
the Bid is sent through the mail or other delivery system the sealed envelope shall be enclosed
in a separate envelope with the notation "BID ENCLOSED" on the face of it.
11. Modification and Withdrawal of Bids.
11,1 Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the
manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered to the place where Bids are to be
submitted at any time prior to the opening of Bids,
IB-4
K:\4201 03\ADMINlSPECS\FRONT\lNST -BID .DOC
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
preparation of its Bid, that Bidder may withdraw its Bid and the Bid security will be
returned. Thereafter, that Bidder will be disqualified from further bidding on the Work
to be provided under the Contract Documents,
12.
Opening of Bids.
Bids will be opened and (unless obviously non-responsive) read aloud publicly, An abstract of
the amounts of the base Bids and major alternates (if any) will be made available to Bidders
after the opening of Bids,
13.
Bids to Remain Subject to Acceptance.
All bids will remain subject to acceptance for sixty (60) days after the day ofthe Bid opening,
but Owner may, in its sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid security prior to that
date,
14.
Award of Contract.
14,1 Owner reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, to waive any and all informalities not
involving price, time or changes in the Work and to negotiate contract terms with the
Successful Bidder, and the right to disregard all nonconforming, nonresponsive,
unbalanced or conditional Bids, Also, Owner reserves the right to reject the Bid of any
Bidder if Owner believes that it would not be in the best interest of the Project to make
an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsible or the Bidder is
unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or
criteria established by Owner. Discrepancies in the multiplication of units ofW ork and
unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices, Discrepancies between the
indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in
favor of the correct sum,
14.2 In evaluating Bids, Owner will consider the qualifications ofthe Bidders, whether or not
the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit prices and
other data, as may be requested in the Bid Form or prior to the Notice of Award,
14,3 Owner may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and
other persons and organizations proposed for those portions ofthe Work as to which the
identity of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations must be
submitted as provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner also may consider the
operating costs, maintenance requirements, performance data and guarantees of major
items of materials and equipment proposed for incorporation in the Work when such
data is required to be submitted prior to the Notice of Award,
14.4 Owner may conduct such investigations as Owner deems necessary to assist in the
evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial
ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and
IB-5
K:1420103\ADMIN\SPECSIFRDN1\INST.BID ,DOC
organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents to Owner's satisfaction within the prescribed time.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
14.5 Ifthe contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest Bidder whose evaluation
by Owner indicates to Owner that the award will be in the best interests of the Project.
14,6 If the contract is to be awarded, Owner will give the Successful Bidder a Notice of
Award within forty-five (45) days after the day of the Bid opening.
15. Contract Security.
Paragraph 5.1 ofthe General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions set forth Owner's
requirements as to performance and payment Bonds, When the Successful Bidder delivers the
executed Agreement to Owner, it must be accompanied by the required performance and
payment Bonds,
16. Signing of Agreement.
When owner gives a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it will be accompanied by the
required number of unsigned counterparts of the Agreement with all other written Contract
Documents attached, Within fifteen (15) days thereafter Contractor shall sign and deliver the
required number of counterparts of the Agreement and attached documents to Owner with the
required Bonds, Within ten (10) days thereafter Owner shall deliver one (1) fully signed
counterpart to Contractor. Each counterpart is to be accompanied by a complete set of the
Drawings with appropriate identification.
IB-6
K:1420103lADMIN\$PECSlFRONTIINST -BID .DOC
I
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS
ARTICLE I--DEFINITIONS
I
Wherever used in these General Conditions or in the other
Contract Documents the following tenns have the meanings
indicated which are applicable to both the singular and
plural thereof:
I
I
Addenda- Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the
opening of Bids which clarify, correct or change the bidding
documents or the Contract Documents,
I
Agreement--The written agreement between OWNER and
CONTRACTOR covering the Work to be performed; other
Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and
made a part thereof as provided therein.
I
Application for Payment-The form accepted by
ENGINEER which is to be used by CONTRACTOR in
requesting progress or fInal payments and which is to
include such supporting documentation as is required by the
Contract Documents.
I
I
Bid-- The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the
prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Wark to be
performed.
I
Bonds--Bid, performance and payment bonds and other
instruments of security.
I
Change Order--A document recommended by ENGINEER,
which is signed by CONTRACTOR and OWNER and
authorizes an addition, deletion or revision in the Work or
an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract T~e
issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement. '
I
I
Contract Documents-- The Agreement, Addenda (which
pertain to the Contract Documents), CONTRACTOR's Bid
(including documentation accompanying the Bid and any
post Bid documentation submitted prior to the Notice of
Award) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the
Bonds, these General Conditions, the Supplementary
Conditions, the SpecifIcations and the Drawings as the same
are more specifIcally identifIed in the Agreement, together
with all amendments, modifications and supplements issued
pursuant to paragraphs 3.4 and 3.5 on or after the Effective
Date of the Agreement.
I
I
I
Contract Price-- The moneys payable by OWNER to
CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents as stated in
the Agreement (subj ect to the provisions of paragraph 11.9.1
in the case of Unit Price Work),
I
I
Contract Time-- The number of days (computed as provided
in paragraph 17,2) or the date stated in the Agreement for
I
the Completion of the Work.
CONTRACTOR-The person, firm or corporation with whom
OWNER has entered into the Agreement.
Defective--An adjective which when modifying the word Work
refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty or deficient, or does
not conform to the Contract Documents, or does not meet the
requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or
approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been
damaged prior to ENGINEER's reconrrnendation of final
payment (unless responsibility for the protection thereofhas been
assumed by OWNER at Substantial Completion in accordance
with paragraph 14,X or 14,10).
Drawings-- The drawings which show the character and scope of
the Work to be performed and which have been prepared or
approved by ENGINEER and are referred to in the Contract
Documents,
Effective Date of the Agreemen t- The date indicated in the
Agreement on which it becomes effective, but if no such date is
indicated it means the date on which the Agreement is signed and
delivered by the last of the two parties to sign and deliver.
ENGINEER-- The person, firm or corporation named as such in
the Agreement.
Field Order--A written order issued by ENGINEER which
orders minor changes in the Work in accordance with paragraph
9.5 but which does not involve a change in the Contract Price or
the Contract Time,
General Requirements-Sections of Division I of the
SpecifIcations ,
Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations--Laws rules
regulations, ordinances, codes and/or orders. "
Notice of Award-- The written notice by OWNER to the apparent
successful bidder stating that upon compliance by the apparent
successful bidder with the conditions precedent enumerated
therein, within the time specified, OWNER will sign and deliver
the Agreement.
Notice to Proceed--A written notice given by OWNER to
CONTRACTOR (with a copy to ENGINEER) fIxing the date on
which the Contract Time will conrrnence to run and on which
CONTRACTOR shall start to perform CONTRACTOR'S
obligations under the Contract Documents.
o WNER --The public body or authority, corporation, association,
finn or person with whom CONTRACTOR has entered into the
Agreement and for whom the Wark is to be provided.
Partial Utilization--Placing a portion of the Work in service for
K:\4201 03\AdminlSpecsIFronM 91 O.8-1.doc
the purpose for which it is intended (or a related purpose)
before reaching Substantial Completion for all the Work.
Project-- The total construction of which the Work to be
provided under the Contract Documents may be the whole,
or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
Resident Project Representative-- The authorized
representative of ENGINEER who is assigned to the site or
any part thereof.
Shop Drawings--All drawings, diagrams, illustrations,
schedules and other data which are specifically prepared by
or for CONTRACTOR to illustrate some portion of the
Work and all illustrations, brochures, standard schedules,
performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other
information prepared by a Supplier and submitted by
CONTRACTOR to illustrate material or equipment for some
portion of the Work.
Specifications-- Those portions of the Contract Documents
consisting of written technical descriptions of materials,
equipment, construction systems, standards and
workmanship as applied to the Work and certain
administrative details applicable thereto.
Subcontractor--An individual, firm or corporation having a
direct contract with CONTRACTOR or with any other
Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at
the cite,
Substantial Completion-- The Work (or a specified part
thereof) has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of
ENGINEER as evidenced by ENGINEER's definitive
certificate of Substantial Completion, it is sufficiently
complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so
that the Work (or specified part) can be utilized for the
purposes for which it is intended; or if there be no such
certificate issued, when [mal payment is due in accordance
with paragraph 14,13. The tenns "substantially complete"
and "substantially completed" as applied to any Work refer
to Substantial Completion thereof.
Supplementary Conditions-- The part of the Contract
Documents which amends or supplements these General
Conditions,
Supplier--A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor,
materialman or vendor.
Underground Facilities--All pipelines, conduits, ducts,
cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other
such facilities or attachments, and any encasements
containing such facilities which have been installed
underground to furnish any of the following services or
materials: electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum
I
products, telephone or other communications, cable
television, sewage and drainage removal, traffic or other
control systems or water.
I
Unit Price Work--Work to be paid for on the basis of unit
pnces .
I
Work-- The entire completed construction or the various
separately identifiable parts thereof required to be furnished
under the Contract Documents. Work is the result of
performing services, furnishing labor and furnishing and
incorporating materials and equipment into the construction,
all as required by the Contract Documents.
I
I
Work Directive Change--A written directive to
CONTRACTOR, issued on or after the Effective Date of the
Agreement and signed by OWNER and recommended by
ENGINEER, ordering an addition, deletion or revision in the
Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen physical
conditions under which the Work is to be performed as
provided in paragraph 4.2 or 4.3 or to emergencies under
paragraph 6.22. A Work Directive Change may not change
the Contract Price or the Contract Time, but is evidence that
the parties expect that the change directed or documented by a
Work Directive Change will be incorporated in a
subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by
the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or
Contract Time as provided in paragraph 10.2.
I
I
I
I
I
Written Amendment--A written amendment of the Contract
Documents, signed by OWNER and CONTRACTOR on or
after the Effective Date of the Agreement and normally
dealing with the non engineering or nontechnical rather than
strictly Work-related aspects of the Contract Documents,
I
I
ARTICLE 2--PRELIl\flNARY MATTERS
I
Delivery of Bonds:
2,1. When CONTRACTOR delivers the executed
Agreements to OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall also deliver
to OWNER such Bonds as CONTRACTOR may be required
to furnish in accordance with paragraph 5.1.
I
I
Copies of Documents:
2.2. OWNER shall furnish to CONTRACTOR up to ten
copies (unless otherwise specified in the Supplementary
Conditions) of the Contract Documents as are reasonably
necessary for the execution of the Work. Additional copies
will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction.
I
I
Commencement of Contract Time; Notice to Proceed:
2.3. The Contract Time will commence to run on the th.irtieth
day after the Effective Date of the Agreement, or, if a Notice
I
2
I
1(;\4201 03111<!n>nlSpecsIFronft 191 0,8-1 ,doc
I
I
to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to
Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time
within thirty days after the Effective Date of the
Agreement. In no event will the Contract Time
commence to run later than the seventy-fifth day after the
day of Bid opening or the thirtieth day after the Effective
Date of the Agreement, whichever date is earlier.
I
I
Starting the Project:
2.4, CONTRACTOR shall start to perform the Work on
the date when the Contract Time commences to run, but
no Work shall be done at the site prior to the date on
which the Contract Time commences to run,
I
I
Before Starting Construction:
2,5, Before undertaking each part of the Work,
CONTRACTOR shall carefully study and compare the
Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent
figures shown
thereon and all applicable field measurements,
CONTRACTOR shall promptly report in writing to
ENGINEER any conflict, error or discrepancy which
CONTRACTOR may discover and shall obtain a written
interpretation or clarification from ENGINEER before
proceeding with any Work affected thereby; however,
CONTRACTOR shall not be liable to OWNER or
ENGINEER for failure to report any conflict, error or
discrepancy rn the Contract Documents, unless
CONTRACTOR had actual knowledge thereof or should
reasonably have known thereof.
I
I
I
I
I
2,6, Within ten days after the Effective Date of the
Agreement (unless otherwise specified in the General
Requirements), CONTRACTOR shall submit to
ENGINEER for review:
I
I
2.6.1, an estimated progress schedule indicating
the starting and completion dates of the various stages
of the Work
I
2,6.2. a preliminary schedule of Shop Drawing
submissions; and
I
2,6,3. a preliminary schedule of values for all of
the Work which will include quantities and prices of
items aggregating the Contract Price and will
subdivide the Work into component parts in sufficient
detail to serve as the basis for progress payments
during construction, Such prices will include an
appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable
to each item of Work which will be confirmed in
writing by CONTRACTOR at the time of submission.
I
I
I
2,7, Before any Work at the site IS started,
I
CONTRACTOR shall deliver to OWNER, with a copy to
ENGINEER, certificates (and other evidence of insurance
requested by OWNER) which CONTRACTOR is required to
purchase and maintain in accordance with paragraphs 5.3 and
5.4, and OWNER shall deliver to CONTRACTOR certificates
(and other evidence of insurance requested by
CONTRACTOR) which OWNER is required to purchase and
maintain in accordance with paragraphs 5,6 and 5.7,
Preconstruction Conference:
2.8, Within twenty days after the Effective Date of the
Agreement, but before CONTRACTOR starts the Work at the
site, a conference attended by CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER
and others as appropriate will be held to discuss the schedules
referred to in paragraph 2,6, to discuss procedures for
handling Shop Drawings and other submittals and for
processing Applications for Payment, and to establish a
working understanding among the parties as to the Work.
Finalizing Schedules:
2,9, At least ten days before submission of the first
Application for Payment a conference attended by
CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER and others as appropriate will
be held to frnalize the schedules submitted in accordance with
paragraph 2,6, The finalized progress schedule will be
acceptable to ENGINEER as providing an orderly progression
of the Work to completion within the Contract Time, but such
acceptance will neither impose on ENGINEER responsibility
for the progress or scheduling of the Work nor relieve
CONTRACTOR from full responsibility there for. The
finalized schedule of Shop Drawing submissions will be
acceptable to ENGINEER as providing a workable
arrangement for processing the submissions. The frnalized
schedule of values will be acceptable to ENGINEER as to
form and substance,
ARTICLE 3-CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT,
AMENDING, REUSE
Intent:
3,1. The Contract Documents comprise the entire
agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR
concerning the Work. The Contract Documents are
complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if
called for by all, The Contract Documents will be construed
in accordance with the law of the place of the Project.
3.2. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a
functionally complete Project (or part thereof) to be
constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any
Work, materials or equipment that may reasonably be inferred
from the Contract Documents as being required to produce
the intended result will be supplied whether or not
specifically called for. When words which have a well-known
3
K:\4201 03\AdminlSpecsIFronft 191 O.1l-1.doc
technical or trade meaning are used to describe Work,
materials or equipment such words shall be interpreted in
accordance with that meaning. Reference to standard
specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society,
organization or association, or to the Laws or Regulations
of any governmental authority, whether such reference be
specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard
specification, manual, code or Laws or Regulations in
effect at the time of opening of Bids (or, on the Effective
Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids), except as
may be otherwise specifically stated. However, no
provision of any referenced standard specification,
manual or code (whether or not specifically incorporated
by reference in the Contract Documents) shall be
effective to change the duties and responsibilities of
OWNER, CONTRACTOR or ENGINEER, or any of
their consultants, agents or employees from those set
forth in the Contract Documents, nor shall it be effective
to assign to ENGINEER, or any of ENGINEER's
consultants, agents or employees, any duty or authority to
supervise or direct the furnishing or performance of the
Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility
contrary to the provisions of paragraph 9.15 or 9.16.
Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract
Documents shall be issued by ENGINEER as provided in
paragraph 9.4,
3,3, If, during the performance of the Work,
CONTRACTOR finds a conflict, error or discrepancy in
the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall so report
to ENGINEER in writing at once and before proceeding
with the Work affected thereby shall obtain a written
interpretation or clarification from ENGINEER; however,
CONTRACTOR shall not be liable to OWNER or
ENGINEER for failure to report any conflict, error or
discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless
CONTRACTOR had actual knowledge thereof or should
reasonably have known thereof.
Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents:
3.4. The Contract Documents may be amended to
provide for additions, deletions and revisions in the Work
or to modify the terms and conditions thereof in one or
more of the following ways:
3.4.1, a formal Written Amendment,
3.4,2, a Change Order (pursuant to paragraph
10.4), or
3.4,3. a Work Directive Change (pursuant to
paragraph 10.1).
As indicated in paragraphs 11.2 and 12.1, Contract Price
I
and Contract Time may only be changed by a Change Order
or a Written Amendment.
I
3.5. In addition, the requirements of the Contract
Documents may be supplemented, and minor variations and
deviations in the Work may be authorized, in one or more of
the following ways:
I
3,5.1. A Field Order (pursuant to paragraph 9,5),
I
3,5,2, ENGINEER's approval of a Shop Drawing or
Sample (pursuant to paragraphs 6.26 and 6.27), or
I
3,5.3. ENGINEER's written interpretation or
clarification (pursuant to paragraph 9.4).
I
Reuse of Documents:
3.6. Neither CONTRACTOR nor any Subcontractor or
Supplier or other person or organization performing or
furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract
with OWNER shall have or acquire any title to or ownership
rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications or other
documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing
the seal of ENGINEER; and they shall not reuse any of them
on extensions of the Project or any other project without
written consent of OWNER and ENGINEER and specific
written verification or adaptation by ENGINEER.
I
I
I
I
ARTICLE 4-A V AILABILITY OF LANDS; PHYSICAL
CONDITIONS: REFERENCE POINTS
I
Availability of Lands:
4,1. OWNER shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract
Documents, the lands upon which the Work is to be
performed, rights-of-way and easements for access thereto,
and such other lands which are designated for the use of
CONTRACTOR, Easements for permanent structures or
permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and
paid for by OWNER, unless otherwise provided in the
Contract Documents. If CONTRACTOR believes that any
delay in OWNER's furnishing these lands, rights-of-way or
easements entitles CONTRACTOR to an extension of the
Contract Time, CONTRACTOR may make a claim there for
as provided in Article 12. CONTRACTOR shall provide for
all additional lands and access thereto that may be required
for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials
and equipment.
I
I
I
I
I
Physical Conditions:
4.2.1, Explorations and Reports: Reference is made to
the Supplementary Conditions for identification of those
reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions
at the site that have been utilized by ENGINEER in
I
I
4
I
K:\4201 03\AdminlSpecslFronM 91 O.a-l.doc
I
I
preparation of the Contract Documents.
CONTRACTOR may rely upon the accuracy of the
technical data contained in such reports, but not upon
nontechnical data, interpretations or opinions
contained therein or for the completeness thereof for
CONTRACTOR's purposes. Except as indicated in
the immediately preceding sentence and in paragraph
4,2,6, CONTRACTOR shall have full responsibility
with respect to subsurface conditions at the site.
I
I
I
4.2.2. Existing structures: Reference is made to the
Supplementary Conditions for identification of those
drawings of physical conditions in or relating to
existing surface and subsurface structures (except
Underground Facilities referred to in paragraph 4,3)
which are at or contiguous to the site that have been
utilized by ENGINEER in preparation of the Contract
Documents. CONTRACTOR may rely upon the
accuracy of the technical data contained in such
drawings, but not for the completeness thereof for
CONTRACTOR's purposes, Except as indicated in
the immediately preceding sentence and in paragraph
4,2.6, CONTRACTOR shall have full responsibility
with respect to physical conditions in or relating to
such structures.
I
I
I
I
I
4.2,3, Report of Differing Conditions: If
CONTRACTOR believes that:
4,2,3.1. any technical data on which
CONTRACTOR is entitled to rely as provided in
paragraphs 4,2.1 and 4.2.2 is inaccurate, or
I
I
4.2.3.2, any physical condition uncovered or
revealed at the site differs materially from that
indicated, reflected or referred to in the Contract
Documents,
I
CONTRACTOR shall, promptly after becoming aware
thereof and before performing any Work in connection
therewith (except in an emergency as permitted by
paragraph 6,22), notify OWNER and ENGINEER in
writing about the inaccuracy or difference,
I
I
4,2.4. ENGINEER's Review: ENGINEER will
promptly review the pertinent conditions, determine
the necessity of obtaining additional explorations or
tests with respect thereto and advise OWNER in
writing (with a copy to CONTRACTOR) of
ENGINEER's findings and conclusions.
I
I
4,2.5. Possible Document Change: If ENGINEER
concludes that there is a material error in the Contract
Documents or that because of newly discovered
conditions a change in the Contract Documents is
I
.
-
required, a Work Directive Change or a Change Order will
be issued as provided in Article 10 to reflect and
document the consequences of the maccuracy or
difference.
4,2,6. Possible Price and Time Adjustments: In each
such case, an increase or decrease in the Contract Price or
an extension or shortening of the Contract Time, or any
combination thereof, will be allowable to the extent that
they are attributable to any such inaccuracy or difference.
If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree as to
the amount or length thereof, a claim may be made there
for as provided in Articles 11 and 12.
Physical Conditions--Underground Facilities:
4,3.1. Shown or Indicated: The information and data
shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to
existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is
based on information and data furnished to OWNER or
ENGINEER by the owners of such Underground Facilities or
by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the
Supplementary Conditions:
4,3.1.1. OWNER and ENGINEER shall not be
responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such
information or data; and,
4,3,1.2. CONTRACTOR shall have full responsibility
for reviewing and checking all such information and data,
for locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated
in the Contract Documents, for coordination of the Work
with the owners of such Underground Facilities during
construction, for the safety and protection thereof as
provided in paragraph 6,20 and repairing any damage
thereto resulting from the Work, the cost of all of which
will be considered as having been included in the Contract
Price,
4.3.2, Not Shown or Indicated, If an Underground Facility
is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to the site which
was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents and
which CONTRACTOR could not ~easonably have been
expected to be aware of, CONTRACTOR shall, promptly
after becoming aware thereof and before performing any
Work affected thereby (except in an emergency as pennitted
by paragraph 6.22), identify the owner of such Underground
Facility and give written notice thereof to that owner and to
OWNER and ENGINEER. ENGINEER will promptIyreview
the Underground Facility to determine the extent to which the
Contract Documents should be modified to reflect and
document the consequences of the existence of the
Underground Facility, and the Contract Documents will be
amended or supplemented to the extent necessary, During
such time, CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the safety
5
K:\4201 03\Admln\Specs\Fron~ 191 O.8-1.doc
and protection of such Underground Facility as provided
in paragraph 6,20. CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an
increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the
Contract Time, or both, to the extent that they are
attributable to the existence of any Underground Facility
that was not shown or indicated in the Contract
Documents and which CONTRACTOR could not
reasonably have been expected to be aware of. If the
parties are unable to agree as to the amount or length
thereof, CONTRACTOR may make a claim there for as
provided in Articles 11 and 12.
Reference Points:
4.4. OWNER shall provide engineering surveys to
establish reference points for construction, which in
ENGINEER's judgment are necessary to enable
CONTRACTOR to proceed with the Work.
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for laying out the
Work (unless otherwise specified in the General
Requirements), shall protect and preserve the established
reference points and shall make no changes or relocations
without the prior written approval of OWNER.
CONTRACTOR shall report to ENGINEER whenever
any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires
relocation because of necessary changes in grades or
locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate
replacement or relocation of such reference points by
professionally qualified personnel.
ARTICLE 5-BONDS AND INSURANCE
Performance and Other Bonds:
5,1. CONTRACTOR shall furnish performance and
payment Bonds, each in an amount at least equal to the
Contract Price as security for the faithful performance
and payment of all CONTRACTOR's obligations under
the Contract Documents. These Bonds shall remain in
effect at least until one year after the date when final
payment becomes due, except as otherwise provided by
Law or Regulation or by the Contract Documents.
CONTRACTOR shall also furnish such other Bonds as
are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds
shall be in the forms prescribed by Law or Regulation or
by the Contract Documents and be executed by such
sureties as are named in the current list of "Companies
Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties
on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring
Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by
the Audit Staff Bureau of Accounts, U.S, Treasury
Department. All Bonds signed by an agent must be
accompanied by a certified copy of the authority to act.
5,2, If the surety on any Bond furnished by
I
CONTRACTOR is declared a bankrupt or becomes insolvent
or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any
part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the
requirements ofparagraph 5.1, CONTRACTOR shall within
five days thereafter substitute another Bond and Surety, both
of which must be acceptable to OWNER.
I
I
Contractor's Liability Insurance:
5.3, CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain such
comprehensive general liability and other insurance as is
appropriate for the Work being performed and furnished and
as will provide protection from claims set forth below which
may arise out of or result from CONTRACTOR's
performance and furnishing of the Work and
CONTRACTOR's other obligations under the Contract
Documents, whether it is to be performed or furnished by
CONTRACTOR, by any Subcontractor, by anyone directly or
indirectly employed by any ofthem to perform or furnish any
of the Work, orby anyone for whose acts any of them may be
liable:
I
I
I
I
I
5.3.1. Claims under workers' or workmen's
compensation, disability benefits and other similar
employee benefit acts;
I
5,3.2, Claims for damages because of bodily injury,
occupational sickness or disease, or death of
CONTRACTOR's employees;
I
5,3.3. Claims for damages because of bodily injury,
sickness or disease, or death of any person other than
CONTRACTOR's employees;
I
5.3.4. Claims for damages insured by personal injury
liability coverage which are sustained (a) by any person as
a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the
employment of such person by CONTRACTOR, or (b) by
any other person for any other reason;
I
I
5.3.5. Claims for damages, other than to the Work
itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible
property wherever located, including loss of use resulting
therefrom;
I
I
5,3,6, Claims ansmg out of operation of Laws or
Regulations for damages because of bodily injury or death
of any person or for damage to property; and
I
5.3,7. Claims for damages because of bodily injury or
death of any person or property damage arising out of the
ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle.
I
The insurance required by this paragraph 5,3 shall include the
specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits
I
6
I
1(;\4201 03\AdminlSpecs'fronfi 191 O.5-1.doc
I
I
of liability and coverages provided in the Supplementary
Conditions, or required by law, whichever is greater. The
comprehensive general liability insurance shall include
completed operations insurance. All of the policies of
insurance so required to be purchased and maintained (or
the certificates or other evidence thereof) shall contain a
provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will
not be cancelled, materially changed or renewal refused
until at least thirty days' prior written notice has been
given to OWNER and ENGINEER by certified mail. All
such insurance shall remain in effect until [mal payment
and at all times there aft when CONTRACTOR may be
correcting, removing or replacing defective Work in
accordance with paragraph 13,12. In addition,
CONTRACTOR shall maintain such complete operations
insurance for at least two years after final pay me q and
furnish OWNER with evidence of continuation of such
insurance at [mal payment and one year thereafter,
I
I
I
I
I
I
Contractual Liability Insurance:
5.4. The comprehensive general liability insurance
required by paragraph 5,3 will include contractual
liability insurance applicable to CONTRACTOR' s
obligations under paragraphs 6,30 and 6,31.
I
Owner's Liability Insurance:
5,5, OWNER shall be responsible for purchasing and
maintaining OWNER's own liability insurance and, at
OWNER's option, may purchase and maintain such
insurance as will protect OWNER against claims which
may arise from operations under the Contract
Documents,
I
I
I
Property Insurance:
5.6, Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary
Conditions, OWNER shall purchase and maintain
property insurance upon the Work at the site to the full
insurable value thereof (subject to such deductible
amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary
Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations), This
insurance shall include the interests of OWNER,
CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, ENGINEER and
ENGINEER's consultants in the Work, all of whom shall
be listed as insureds or additional insured parties, shall
insure against the perils of fire and extended coverage
and shall include" all risk" insurance for physical loss and
damage including theft, vandalism and malicious
mischief, collapse and water damage, and such other
perils as may be provided in the Supplementary
Conditions, and shall include damages, losses and
expenses arising out of or resulting from any insured loss
or incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured
property (including but not limited to fees and charges of
engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals).
I
I
I
I
.
-
.
.
If not covered under the "all risk" insurance or otherwise
provided in the Supplementary Conditions, CONTRACTOR
shall purchase and maintain similar property insurance on
portions of the Work stored on and off the site or in transit
when such portions of the Work are to be included in an
Application for Payment.
5 ,7 . OWNER shall purchase and maintain such boiler
and machinery insurance or additional property insurance as
may be required by the Supplementary Conditions or Laws
and Regulations which will include the interests ofO\VNER,
CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, ENGINEER AND
ENGINEER's consultants in the Work, all of whom shall be
listed as insured or additional insured parties,
5,8, All the policies of insurance (or the certificates or
other evidence thereof) required to be purchased and
maintained by OWNER in accordance with paragraphs 5.6
and 5,7 will contain a provision or endorsement that the
coverage afforded will not be cancelled or materially changed
or renewal refused until at least thirty days' prior written
notice has been given to CONTRACTOR by certified mail
and will contain waiver provisions in accordance with
paragraph 5,11.2,
5,9, OWNER shall not be responsible for purchasing and
maintaining any property insurance to protect the interests of
CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors or others in the Work to the
extent of any deductible amounts that are provided in the
Supplementary Conditions. The risk of loss within the
deductible amount, will be borne by CONTRACTOR,
Subcontractor or others suffering any such loss and if any of
them wishes property insurance coverage within the limits of
such amounts, each may purchase and maintain it at the
purchaser's own expense,
5.10. If CONTRACTOR requests in writing that other
special insurance be included in the property insurance
policy, OWNER shall, if possible, include such insurance,
and the cost thereof will be charged to CONTRACTOR by
appropriate Change Order or Written Amendment. Prior to
commencement of the Work at the site, OWNER shall in
writing advise CONTRACTOR whether or not such other
insurance has been procured by OWNER.
Waiver of Rights:
5,11.1. OWNER and CONTRACTOR waive all rights
against each other for all losses and damages caused by
any of the perils covered by the policies of insurance
provided in response to paragraphs 5,6 and 5,7 and any
other property insurance applicable to the Work, and also
waive all such rights against the Subcontractors,
ENGINEER, ENGINEER's consultants and all other
parties named as insureds in such policies for losses and
7
K;\420 1 03\Admln\SpecsIFronfi 191 O.8-1.doc
damages so caused. As required by paragraph 6.11,
each subcontract between CONTRACTOR and a
Subcontractor will contain similar waiver provisions
by the Subcontractor in favor of OWNER,
CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's
consultants and all other parties named as insureds,
None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights
that any of the insured parties may have to the
proceeds of insurance held by OWNER as trustee or
otherwise payable under any policy so issued.
5.11.2. OWNER and CONTRACTOR intend that
any policies provided in response to paragraphs 5,6
and 5,7 shall protect all of the parties insured and
provide primary coverage for all losses and damages
caused by the perils covered thereby. Accordingly, all
such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that
in the event of payment of any loss or damage the
insurer will have no rights of recovery against any of
the parties named as insureds or additional insureds,
and if the insurers require separate waiver forms to be
signed by ENGINEER or ENGINEER's consultant
OWNER will obtain the same, and if such waiver
forms are required of any Subcontractor,
CONTRACTOR will obtain the same.
Receipt and Application of Proceeds:
5.12. Any insured loss under the policies of insurance
required by paragraphs 5.6 and 5.7 will be adjusted with
OWNER and made payab Ie to OWNER as trustee for the
insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to the
requirements of any applicable mortgage clause and of
paragraph 5.13, OWNER shall deposit in a separate
account any money so received, and shall distribute it in
accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest
may reach. If no other special agreement is reached the
damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced, the moneys
so received applied on account thereof and the Work and
the cost thereof covered by an appropriate Change Order
or Written Amendment.
5.13. OWNER as trustee shall have power to adjust
and settle any loss with the insurers unless one of the
parties in interest shall object in writing within fifteen
days after the occurrence ofloss to OWNER's exercise of
this power. If such objection be made, OWNER as
trustee shall make settlement with the insurers in
accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest
may reach. If required in writing by any party in interest,
OWNER as trustee shall, upon the occurrence of an
insured loss, give bond for the proper performance of
such duties,
I
Acceptance of Insurance:
5.14. If OWNER has any objection to the coverage
afforded by or other provisions of the insurance required to be
purchased and maintained by CONTRACTOR in accordance
with paragraphs 5,3 and 5.4 on the basis of its not complying
with the Contract Documents, OWNER shall notify
CONTRACTOR in writing thereof within ten days of the date
of delivery of such certificates to OWNER in accordance with
paragraph 2.7, If CONTRACTOR has any objection to the
coverage afforded by or other provisions of the policies of
insurance required to be purchased and maintained by
OWNER in accordance with paragraphs 5.6 and 5.7 on the
basis of their not complying with the Contract Documents,
CONTRACTOR shall notify OWNER in writing thereof within
ten days of the date of delivery of such certificates to
CONTRACTOR in accordance with paragraph 2,7. OWNER
and CONTRACTOR shall each provide to the other such
additional information in respect of insurance provided by
each as the other may reasonably request. Failure by OWNER
or CONTRACTOR to give any such notice of objection
within the time provided shall constitute acceptance of such
insurance purchased by the other as complying with the
Contract Documents .
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Partial Utilization-Property Insurance:
5.15, If OWNER finds it necessary to occupy or use a
portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial
Completion of all the Work, such use or occupancy may be
accomplished in accordance with paragraph 14.10; provided
that no
such use or occupancy shall conunence before the insurers
providing the property insurance have acknowledged notice
thereof and in writing effected the changes in coverage
necessitated thereby. The insurers providing the property
insurance shall consent by endorsement on the policy or
policies, but the property insurance shall not be cancelled or
lapse on account of any such partial use or occupancy.
I
I
I
I
ARTICLE 6--CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
I
Supervision and Superintendence:
6.1. CONTRACTOR shall supervise and direct the Work
competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto
and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to
perform the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for
the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of
construction, but CONTRACTOR shall not be responsible for
the negligence of others in the design or selection of a specific
means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of
construction which is indicated in and required by the
Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to
see that the finished Work complies accurately with the
Contract Documents.
I
I
I
I
I
8
I
-
K:\4201 03\AdminlSpecsIFronfi 191 O.8-1.doc
I
I
6.2. CONTRACTOR shall keep on the Work at all
times during its progress a competent resident
superintendent, who shall not be replaced without written
notice to OWNER and ENGINEER except under
extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be
CONTRACTOR's representative at the site and shall
have authority to act on behalf of CONTRACTOR. All
communications given to the superintendent shall be as
binding as if given to CONTRACTOR.
I
I
I
Labor, Materials and Equipment:
6.3. CONTRACTOR shall provide competent,
suitably qualified personnel to survey and layout the
Work and perform construction as required by the
Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall at all times
maintain good discipline and order at the site. Except in
connection with the safety or protection of persons or the
Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and
except as otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents,
all Work at the site shall be performed during regular
working hours, and CONTRACTOR will not permit
overtime work or the performance of Work on Saturday,
Sunday or any legal holiday without OWNER's written
consent given after prior written notice to ENGINEER.
I
I
I
I
I
6.4. Unless otherwise specified in the General
Requirements, CONTRACTOR shall furnish and assume
full responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor,
transportation, construction equipment and machinery,
tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone,
water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities and all other
facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing,
performance, testing, start-up and completion of the
Work.
I
I
I
6.5. All materials and equipment shall be of good
quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the
Contract Documents. If required by ENGINEER,
CONTRACTOR shall furnish satisfactory evidence
(including reports of required tests) as to the kind and
quality of materials and equipment. All materials and
equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected,
used, cleaned and conditioned in accordance with the
instructions of the applicable Supplier except as
otherwise provided in the Contract Documents; but no
provision of any such instructions will be effective to
assign to ENGINEER, or any of ENGINEER's
consultants, agents or employees, any duty or authority to
supervise or direct the furnishing or performance of the
Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility
contrary to the provisions of paragraph 9.15 or 9.16.
I
I
I
I
I
I
Adjusting Progress Schedule:
6.6. CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for
acceptance (to the extent indicated in paragraph 2.9)
adjustments in the progress schedule to reflect the impact
thereon of new developments; these will conform generally to
the progress schedule then in effect and additionally will
comply with any provisions of the General Requirements
applicable thereto.
Substitutes or "OrEqual" Items:
6.7.1. Whenever materials or equipment are specified
or described in the Contract Documents by using the name
of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier
the naming of the item is intended to establish the type,
function and quality required. Unless the name is followed
by words indicating that no substitution is permitted,
materials or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted
by ENGINEER if sufficient information is submitted by
CONTRACTOR to allow ENGINEER to determine that
the material or equipment proposed is equivalent or equal
to that named. The procedure for review by ENGINEER
will include the following as supplemented in the General
Requirements. Requests for review of substitute items of
material and equipment will not be accepted by
ENGINEER from anyone other than CONTRACTOR. If
CONTRACTOR wishes to furnish or use a substitute item
of material or equipment, CONTRACTOR shall make
written application to ENGINEER for acceptance thereof,
certifying that the proposed substitute will perform
adequately the functions and achieve the results called for
by the general design, be similar and of equal substance to
that specified and be suited to the same use as that
specified. The application will state that the evaluation
and acceptance of the proposed substitute will not
prejudice CONTRACTOR's achievement of Substantial
Completion on time, whether or not acceptance of the
substitute for use in the Work will require a change in any
of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any
other direct contract with OWNER for work on the
Project) to adapt the design to the proposed substitute and
whether or not incorporation or use of the substitute in
connection with the Work is subject to payment of any
license fee or royalty. All variations of the proposed
substitute from that specified will be identified in the
application and available maintenance, repair and
replacement service will be indicated. The application will
also contain an itemized estimate of all costs that will
result directly or indirectly from acceptance of such
substitute, including costs of redesign and claims of other
contractors affected by the resulting change, all of which
shall be considered by ENGINEER in evaluating the
proposed substitute. ENGINEER may require
CONTRACTOR to furnish at CONTRACTOR's expense
additional data about the proposed substitute.
9
1<;\4201 03lAdminlSpecs\Fronfi 191 O.Sol.doc
6.7.2. If a specific means, method, technique,
sequence or procedure of construction is indicated in
or required by the Contract Documents,
CONTRACTOR may furnish or utilize a substitute
means, method, sequence, technique or procedure of
construction acceptable to ENGINEER, if
CONTRACTOR submits sufficient information to
allow ENGINEER to determine that the substitute
proposed is equivalent to that indicated or required by
the Contract Documents. The procedure for review by
ENGINEER will be similar to that provided in
paragraph 6.7.1 as applied by ENGINEER and as may
be supplemented in the General Requirements.
6.7.3. ENGINEER will be allowed a reasonable
time within which to evaluate each proposed
substitute. ENGINEER will be the sole judge of
acceptability, and no substitute will be ordered,
installed or utilized without ENGINEER's prior
written acceptance which will be evidenced by either
a Change Order or an approved Shop Drawing.
OWNER may require CONTRACTOR to furnish at
CONTRACTOR's expense a special performance
guarantee or other surety with respect to any
substitute. ENGINEER will record time required by
ENGINEER and ENGINEER's consultants in
evaluating substitutions proposed by CONTRACTOR
and in making changes in the Contract Documents
occasioned thereby. Whether or not ENGINEER
accepts a proposed substitute, CONTRACTOR shall
reimburse OWNER for the charges of ENGINEER
and ENGINEER's consultants for evaluating each
proposed substitute.
Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers and Others:
6.8.1. CONTRACTOR shall not employ any
Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or
organization (including those acceptable to OWNER
and ENGINEER as indicated in paragraph 6.8.2),
whether initially or as a substitute, against whom
OWNER or ENGINEER may have reasonable
objection. CONTRACTOR shall not be required to
employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or
organization to furnish or perform any of the Work
against whom CONTRACTOR has reasonable
objection.
6.8.2. If the Supplementary Conditions require the
identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers or other
persons or organizations (including those who are to
furnish the principal items of materials and
equipment) to be submitted to OWNER in advance of
the specified date prior to the Effective Date of the
I
Agreement for acceptance by OWNER and ENGINEER
and if CONTRACTOR has submitted a list thereof in
accordance with the Supplementary Conditions,
OWNER's or ENGINEER's acceptance (either in writing
or by failing to make written objection thereto by the date
indicated for acceptance or objection in the bidding
documents or the Contract Documents) of any such
Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization so
identified may be revoked on the basis of reasonable
objection after due investigation, in which case
CONTRACTOR shall submit an acceptable substitute, the
Contract Price will be increased by the difference in the
cost occasioned by such substitution and an appropriate
Change Order will be issued or Written Amendment
signed. No acceptance by OWNER or ENGINEER of any
such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or
organization shall constitute a waiver of any right of
OWNER or ENGINEER to reject defective Work.
I
I
I
I
I
I
6.9. CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible to
OWNER and ENGINEER for all acts and omissions of the
Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and organizations
performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or
indirect contract with CONTRACTOR just as
CONTRACTOR is responsible for CONTRACTOR's O\vn
acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall
create any contractual relationship between OWNER or
ENGINEER and any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other
person or organization, nor shall it create any obligation on
the part of OWNER or ENGINEER to payor to see to the
payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier
or other person or organization except as may otherwise be
required by Laws and Regulations.
I
I
I
I
I
6.10. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and
the identifications of any Drawings shall not control
CONTRACTOR in dividing the Work among Subcontractors
or Suppliers or delineating the Work to be performed by any
specific trade.
I
6.11. All Work performed for CONTRACTOR by a
Subcontractor will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement
between CONTRACTOR and the Subcontractor which
officially binds the Subcontractor to the applicable terms and
conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of
OWNER and ENGINEER and contains waiver provisions as
required by paragraph 5.11. CONTRACTOR shall pay each
Subcontractor a just share of any insurance moneys received
by CONTRACTOR on account of losses under policies
issued pursuant to paragraphs 5.6 and 5.7.
I
I
I
I
Patent Fees and Royalties:
6.12. CONTRACTOR shall pay all license fees and
royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the
I
10
I
K:\4201 03lAdrrinlSpecs\Fronfi 191 0.8-1.doc
I
I
performance of the Work or the incorporation in the
Work of any invention, design, process, product or device
which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by
others. If a particular invention, design, process, product
or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use
in the performance of the Work and if to the actual
knowledge of OWNER or ENGINEER its use is subject
to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of
any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such
rights shall be disclosed by OWNER in the Contract
Documents. CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold
harmless OWNER and ENGINEER and anyone directly
or indirectly employed by either of them from and against
all claims, damages, losses and expenses (including
attorneys' fees and court and arbitration costs) arising out
of any infringement of patent rights or copyrights
incident to the use in the performance of the Work or
resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any
invention, design, process, product or device not
specified in the Contract Documents, and shall defend all
such claims in connection with any alleged infringement
of such rights.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Permits:
6.13. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary
Conditions, CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for all
construction permits and licenses. OWNER shall assist
CONTRACTOR, when necessary, in obtaining su\h
permits and licenses. CONTRACTOR shall pay all
governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for
the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the
time of opening of Bids, or if there are no Bids on the
Effective Date of the Agreement. CONTRACTOR shall
pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the
Work, and OWNER shall pay all charges of such utility
owners for capital costs related thereto such as plant
investment fees.
I
I
I
I
Laws and Regulatio1ls:
6.14.1. CONTR..A.CTOR shall give all notices and
comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to
furnishing and performance of the Work. Except
where otherwise expressly required by applicable
Laws and Regulations, neither OWNER nor
ENGINEER shall be responsible for monitoring
CONTRACTOR's compliance with any Laws or
Regulations.
I
I
I
6.14.2. If CONTRACTOR observes that the
Specifications or Drawings are at variance with any
Laws or Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall give
ENGINEER prompt written notice thereof, and any
necessary changes will be authorized by one of the
methods indicated m paragraph 3.4. If
I
I
I
CONTRACTOR performs any Work knowing or having
reason to know that it is contrary to such Laws or
Regulations, and without such notice to ENGINEER,
CONTRACTOR shall bear all costs arising therefrom;
however, it shall not be CONTRACTOR's primary
responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and
Drawings. are in accordance with such Laws and
Regulations.
Taxes:
6.15. CONTRACTOR shall pay all sales, consumer, use
and other similar taxes required to be paid by
CONTRACTOR in accordance with the Laws and
Regulations of the place of the Project which are applicable
during the performance of the Work.
Use of Premises:
6.16. CONTRACTOR shall confme construction
equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the
operations of workers to the Project site and land and areas
identified in and permitted by the Contract Documents and
other land and areas permitted by Laws and Regulations,
rightsof-way, permits and easements, and shall not
unreasonably encumber the premises with construction
equipment or other materials or equipment. CONTRACTOR
shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such
land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any
land or areas contiguous thereto, resulting from the
performance of the Work. Should any claim be made against
OWNER or ENGINEER by any such owner or occupant
because of the performance of the Work, CONTRACTOR
shall promptly attempt to settle with such other party by
agreement or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or at
law. CONTRACTOR shall, to the fullest extent permitted by
Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold OWNER and
ENGINEER harmless from and against all claims, damages,
losses and expenses (including, but not limited to, fees of
engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and
court and arbitration costs) arising directly, indirectly or
consequentially out of any action, legal or equitable, brought
by any such other party against OWNER or ENGINEER to
the extent based on a claim arising out of CONTRACTOR's
performance of the Work.
6.17. During the progress of the Work, CONTRACTOR
shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste
materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the work. at
the completion of the work CONTRACTOR shall remove all
waste materials, rubbish and debris from and about the
premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction
equipment and machinery, and surplus materials, and shall
leave the site clean and ready for occupancy by OWNER.
CONTRACTOR shall restore to original condition all
property not designated for alteration by the Contract
11
K:\4201 03lAdminlSpecs\Fronfi 191 0.8-1.doc
Documents.
6.18. CONTRACTOR shall not load nor permit any
part of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will
endanger the structure, nor shall CONTRACTOR subject
any part of the Work or adjacent property to stresses or
pressures that will endanger it.
Record Documents:
6.19. CONTRACTOR shall maintain in a safe place at
the site one record copy of all Drawings, Specifications,
Addenda, Written Amendments, Change Orders, Work
Directive Changes, Field Orders and written
interpretations and clarifications (issued pursuant to
paragraph 9.4) in good order and annotated to show all
changes made during construction. These record
documents together with all approved samples and a
counterpart of all approved Shop Drawings will be
available to ENGINEER for reference. Upon completion
of the Work, these record documents, samples and Shop
Drawings will be delivered to ENGINEER for OWNER.
Safety and Protection:
6.20. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for
initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety
precautions and programs in connection with the Work.
CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary precautions for
the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection
to prevent damage, injury or loss to:
6.20.1. all employees on the Work and other
persons and organizations who may be affected
thereby;
6.20.2. all the Work and materials and equipment
to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or
off the site; and
6.20.3. other property at the site or adjacent
thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks,
pavements, roadways, structures, utilities and
Underground Facilities not designated for removal,
relocation or replacement in the course of
construction.
CONTRACTOR shall comply with all applicable Laws
and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction
for the safety of persons or property or to protect them
from damage, injury or loss; and shall erect and maintain
all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection.
CONTRACTOR shall notify owners of adjacent property
and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when
prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall
cooperate with them in the protection, removal,
I
relocation and replacement of their property. All damage,
injury or loss to any property referred to in paragraph 6.20.2
or 6.20.3 caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by
CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any other
person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any
of them to perform or furnish any of the Work or anyone for
whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by
CONTRACTOR (except damage or loss attributable to the
fault of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions
of OWNER or ENGINEER or anyone employed by either of
them or anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable,
and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part,
to the fault or negligence of CONTRACTOR).
CONTRACTOR's duties and responsibilities for the safety
and protection of the Work shall continue until such time as
all the Work is completed and ENGINEER has issued a
notice to OWNER and CONTRACTOR in accordance with
paragraph 14.13 that the Work is acceptable (except as
otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial
Completion).
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6.21. CONTRACTOR shall designate a responsible
representative at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of
accidents. This person shall be CONTRACTOR's
superintendent unless otherwise designated in writing by
CONTRACTOR to OWNER.
I
Emergencies:
6.22. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of
persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto,
CONTRACTOR, without special instruction or authorization
from ENGINEER or OWNER, is obligated to act to prevent
threatened damage, injury or loss. CONTRACTOR shall give
ENGINEER prompt written notice if CONTRACTOR
believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations
from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If
ENGINEER determines that a change in the Contract
Documents is required because of the action taken in response
to an emergency, a Work Directive Change or Change Order
will be issued to document the consequences of the changes
or variations .
I
I
I
I
I
Shop Drawings and Samples:
6.23. After checking and verifying all field measurements
and after complying with applicable procedures specified in
the General Requirements, CONTRACTOR shall submit to
ENGINEER for review and approval in accordance with the
accepted schedule of Shop Drawing submissions (see
paragraph 2.9), or for other appropriate action ifso indicated
in the Supplementary Conditions, five copies (unless
otherwise specified in the General Requirements) of all Shop
Drawings, which will bear a stamp or specific written
indication that CONTRACTOR has satisfied
CONTRACTOR's responsibilities under the Contract
I
I
I
I
12
I
1<;\4201 03lAdmin\Specs\Fronfi 191 0.8-1.doc
I
I
Documents with respect to the review of the submission.
All submissions will be identified as ENGINEER may
require. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will be
complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified
performance and design criteria, materials and similar
data to enable ENGINEER to review the information as
required.
I
I
6.24. CONTRACTOR shall also submit to
ENGINEER for review and approval with such
promptness as to cause no delay in Work, all samples
required by the Contract Documents. All samples will
have been checked by and accompanied by a specific
written indication that CONTRACTOR has satisfied
CONTRACTOR's responsibilities under the Contract
Documents with respect to the review of the submission
and will be identified clearly as to material, Supplier,
pertinent data such as catalog numbers and the use for
which intended.
I
I
I
I
6.25.1. Before submission of each Shop Drawing
or sample CONTRACTOR shall have determined and
verified all quantities, dimensions, specified
performance criteria, installation requirements,
materials, catalog numbers and similar data with
respect thereto and reviewed or coordinated each
Shop Drawing or sample with other Shop Drawings
and samples and with the requirements of the Work
and the Contract Documents.
I
I
I
6.25.2. At the time of each submission,
CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER specific
written notice of each variation that the Shop
Drawings or samples may have from the requirements
of the Contract Documents, and, in addition, shall
cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop
Drawing submitted to ENGINEER for review and
approval of each such variation.
I
I
I
6.26. ENGINEER will review and approve with
reasonable promptness Shop Drawings and samples, but
ENGINEER's review and approval will be only for
conformance with the design concept of the Project and
for compliance with the information given in the Contract
Documents and shall not extend to means, methods,
techniques, sequences or procedures of construction
(except where a specific means, method, technique,
sequence or procedure of construction is indicated in or
required by the Contract Documents) or to safety
precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and
approval of a separate item as such will not indicate
approval of the assembly in which the item functions.
CONTRACTOR shall make corrections required by
ENGINEER, and shall return the required number of
I
I
.
.
I
corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit as required
new samples for review and approval. CONTRACTOR shall
direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the
corrections called for by ENGINEER on previous submittals.
6.27. ENGINEER's review and approval of Shop
Drawings or samples shall not relieve CONTRACTOR from
responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the
Contract Documents unless CONTRACTOR has in writing
called ENGINEER's attention to each such variation at the
time of submission as required by paragraph 6.25.2 and
ENGINEER has given written approval of each such variation
by a specific written notation thereof incorporated in or
accompanying the Shop Drawing or sample approval; nor will
any approval by ENGINEER relieve CONTRACTOR from
responsibility for errors or omissions in the Shop Drawings or
from responsibility for having complied with the provisions of
paragraph 6.25.].
6.28. Where a Shop Drawing or sample is required by the
Specifications, any related Work performed prior to
ENGINEER's review and approval of the pertinent
submission will be the sole expense and responsibility of
CONTRACTOR.
Continuing the Work:
6.29. CONTRACTOR shall carry on the Work and adhere
to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements
with OWNER. No Work shall be delayed or postponed
pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except
as permitted by paragraph 15.5 or as CONTRACTOR and
OWNER may otherwise agree in writing.
Indemnification:
6.30. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and
Regulations CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harm-
less OWNER and ENGINEER and their consultants, agents
and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses
and expenses, direct, indirect or consequential (including but
not limited to fees and charges of engineers, architects,
attorneys and other professionals and court and arbitration
costs) arising out of or resulting from the performance of the
Work, such claim, damage, loss or expense (a) is attributable
to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or
destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself)
including the loss of use resulting therefrom and (b) is caused
in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of
CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any person or
organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to
perform or furnish any of the Work or anyone for whose acts
any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not it is
caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder or arises by
or is imposed by Law and Regulations regardless of the
negligence of any such party.
13
1(;\4201 03lAdminlSpecs\Fronfi 191 0.8-1.doc
6.31. In any and all claims against OWNER or
ENGINEER or any of their consultants, agents or
employees by any employee of CONTRACTOR, any
Subcontractor, any person or organization directly or
indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish
any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them
may be liable, the indemnification obligation under
paragraph 6.30 shall not be limited in any way by any
limitation on the amount or type of damages,
compensation or benefits payable by or for
CONTRACTOR or any such Subcontractor or other
person or organization under workers' or workmen's
compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other
employee benefit acts.
6.32. The obligations of CONTRACTOR under
paragraph 6.30 shall not extend to the liability of
ENGINEER, ENGINEER's consultants, agents or
employees arising out of the preparation or approval of
maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, Change
Orders, designs or specifications.
ARTICLE 7 - OTHER WORK
Related Work at Site:
7.1. OWNER may perform other work related to the
Project at the site by OWNER's own forces, have other
work performed by utility owners or let other direct
contracts there for which shall contain General
Conditions similar to these. If the fact that such other
work is to be performed was not noted in the Contract
Documents, written notice thereof will be given to
CONTRACTOR prior to starting any such other work;
and, if CONTRACTOR believes that such performance
will involve additional expense to CONTRACTOR or
requires additional time and the parties are unable to
agree as to the extent thereof, CONTRACTOR may make
a claim there for as provided in Articles 11 and 12.
7.2. CONTRACTOR shall afford each utility owner
and other contractor who is a party to such a direct
contract (or OWNER, if OWNER is performing the
additional work with OWNER's employees) proper and
safe access to the site and a reasonable opportunity for
the introduction and storage of materials and equipment
and the execution of such work, and shall properly
connect and coordinate the Work with theirs.
CONTRACTOR shall do all cutting, fitting and patching
of the Work that may be required to make its several
parts come together properly and integrate with such
other work. CONTRACTOR shall not endanger any work
of others by cutting, excavating or otherwise altering their
I
work and will only cut or alter their work with the written
consent of ENGINEER and the others whose work will be
affected. The duties and responsibilities of CONTRACTOR
under this paragraph are for the benefit of such utility owners
and other contractors to the extent that there are comparable
provisions for the benefit of CONTRACTOR in said direct
contracts between OWNER and such utility owners and other
contractors.
I
I
I
7.3. If any part of CONTRACTOR's Work depends for
proper execution or results upon the work of any such other
contractor or utility owner (or OWNER), CONTRACTOR
shall inspect and promptly report to ENGINEER in writing
any delays, defects or deficiencies in such work that render it
unavailable or unsuitable for such proper execution and
results. CONTRACTOR's failure so to report will constitute
an acceptance of the other work as fit and proper for
integration with CONTRACTOR's Work except for latent or
nonapparent defects and deficiencies in the other work.
I
I
I
Coordination:
7.4. If OWNER contracts with others for the performance
of other work on the Project at the site, the person or
organization who will have authority and responsibility for
coordination of the activities among the various prime con
I
I
tractors will be identified in the Supplementary Conditions,
and the specific matters to be covered by such authority and
responsibility will be itemized, and the extent of such
authority and responsibilities will be provided, in the
Supplementary Conditions. Unless otherwise provided in the
Supplementary Conditions, neither OWNER nor ENGINEER
shall have any authority or responsibility in respect of such
coordination.
I
I
I
ARTICLE 8-0WNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES
I
8.1. OWNER shall issue all communications to
CONTRACTOR through ENGINEER.
I
8.2. In case of termination of the employment of
ENGINEER, OWNER shall appoint an engineer against
whom CONTRACTOR makes no reasonable objection,
whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of
the former ENGINEER. Any dispute in connection with such
appointment shall be subject to arbitration.
I
I
8.3. OWNER shall furnish the data required of OWNER
under the Contract Documents promptly and shall make
payments to CONTRACTOR promptly after they are due as
provided in paragraphs 14.4 and 14.13.
I
8.4. OWNER's duties in respect of providing lands and
I
14
I
1<;\420103lAdminlSpecs\Fronfi1910.8-1.doc
I
I
easements and providing engineering surveys to establish
reference points are set forth in paragraphs 4.1 and 4.4.
Paragraph 4.2 refers to OWNER's identifying and making
available to CONTRACTOR copies of reports of
explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site
and in existing structures which have been utilized by
ENGINEER in preparing the Drawings and
Specifications.
I
I
I
8.5. OWNER's responsibilities in respect of
purchasing and maintaining liability and property
insurance are set forth in paragraphs 5.5 through 5.8.
I
8.6. OWNER is obligated to execute Change Orders
as indicated in paragraph 10.4.
I
8.7. OWNER's responsibility in respect of certain
inspections, tests and approvals is set forth in paragraph
13.4.
I
8.8. In connection with 0 WNER's right to stop Work
or suspend Work, see paragraphs 13.10 and 15.1.
Paragraph 15.2 deals with OWNER's right to terminate
services of CONTRACTOR under certain circumstances.
I
I
ARTICLE 9--ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING
CONSTRUCTION
I
Owner's Representative:
9.1. ENGINEER will be OWNER's representative
during the construction period. The duties and
responsibilities and the limitations of authority of
ENGINEER as OWNER's representative during
construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and
shall not be extended without written consent of OWNER
and ENGINEER.
I
I
Visits to Site:
9.2. ENGINEER will make visits to the site at
intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction
to observe the progress and quality of the executed Work
and to determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in
accordance with the Contract Documents. ENGINEER
will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous
on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the
Work. ENGINEER's efforts will be directed toward
providing for OWNER a greater degree of confidence
that the completed Work will conform to the Contract
Documents. On the basis of such visits and on-site
observations as an experienced and qualified design
professional, ENGINEER will keep OWNER informed
of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard
OWNER against defects and deficiencies in the Work.
I
I
I
I
I
Project Representation:
9.3. If OWNER and ENGINEER agree, ENGINEER will
furnish a Resident Project Representative to assist
ENGINEER in observing the performance of the Work. The
duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of any such
Resident Project Representative and assistants will be as
provided in the Supplementary Conditions. If OWNER
designates another agent to represent OWNER at the site who
is not ENGINEER's agent or employee, the duties,
responsibilities and limitations of authority of such other
person will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions.
Clarifications and Interpretations:
9.4. ENGINEER will issue with reasonable promptness
such written clarifications or interpretations of the
requirements of the Contract Documents (in the fOlm of
Drawings or otherwise) as ENGINEER may detemline
necessary, which shall be consistent with or reasonably
inferable from the overall intent of the Contract Documents.
If CONTRACTOR believes that a written clarification or
interpretation justifies an increase in the Contract Price 'Jr an
extension of the Contract Time and the parties are unable to
agree to the amount or extent thereof, CONTRACTOR may
make a claim there for as provided in Article 11 or Article 12.
Authorized Variations in Work:
9.5. ENGINEER may authorize minor variations ;11 the
Work from the requirements of the Contract Documents
which do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or
the Contract Time and are consistent with the overall intent of
the Contract Documents. These may be accomplished by a
Field Order and will be binding on OWNER, and also on
CONTRACTOR who shall perform the Work involved
promptly. If CONTRACTOR believes that a Field Order
justifies an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of
the Contract Time and the parties are unable to agree as to the
amount or extent thereof, CONTRACTOR may make a claim
there for as provided in Article lIar 12.
Rejecting Defective Work:
9.6. ENGINEER will have authority to disapprove or
reject Work which ENGINEER believes to be defective, and
will also have authority to require special inspection or testing
of the Work as provided in paragraph 13.9, whether or not the
Work is fabricated, installed or completed.
Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments:
9.7. In connection with ENGINEER's responsibility for
Shop Drawings and samples, see paragraphs 6.23 through
6.29 inclusive.
9.8. In connection with ENGINEER's responsibilities as
to Change Orders, see Articles 10, 11 and 12.
15
K:\4201 03lAdminlSpecs\Fronfi 191 0.8-1.doc
9.9. In connection with ENGINEER's responsibilities
in respect of Applications for Payment, etc., see Article
14.
Determinations for Unit Prices:
9.10. ENGINEER will determine the actual
quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work
performed by CONTRACTOR. ENGINEER will review
with CONTRACTOR ENGINEER's preliminary
determinations on such matters before rendering a written
decision thereon (by recommendation of an Application
for Payment or otherwise). ENGINEER's written
decisions thereon will be [mal and binding upon
OWNER and CONTRACTOR, unless, within ten days
after the date of any such decision, either OWNER or
CONTRACTOR delivers to the other party to the
Agreement andto ENGINEER written notice of intention
to appeal from such a decision.
Decisions on Disputes:
9.11. ENGINEER will be the initial interpreter of the
requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the
acceptability of the Work thereunder. Claims, disputes
and other matters relating to the acceptability of the Work
or the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract
Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing
of the Work and claims under Articles 11 and 12 in
respect of changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time
will be referred initially to ENGINEER in writing with a
request for a formal decision in accordance with this
paragraph, which ENGINEER will render in writing
within a reasonable time. Written notice of each such
claim, dispute and other matter will be delivered by the
claimant to ENGINEER and the other party to the
Agreement promptly (but in no event later than thirty
days) after the occurrence of the event giving rise thereto,
and written supporting data will be submitted to
ENGINEER and the other party within sixty days after
such occurrence unless ENGINEER allows an additional
period oftime to ascertain more accurate data in support
of the claim.
9.12. When functioning as interpreter and judge
under paragraphs 9.10 and 9.11, ENGINEER will not
9.16. ENGINEER will not be responsible for the acts
or omissions of CONTRACTOR or of any Subcontractor,
any Supplier, or of any other person or organization
performing or furnishing any of the Work.
ARTICLE 10--CHANGES IN THE WORK
10.1. Without invalidating the Agreement and without
I
show partiality to OWNER or CONTRACTOR and will not
be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision
rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a
decision by ENGINEER pursuant to paragraphs 9.10 and 9.11
with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter (except
any which have been waived by the making or acceptance of
[mal payment as provided in paragraph 14.16) will be a
condition precedent to any exercise by OWNER or
CONTRACTOR of such rights or remedies as either may
otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or
Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute or other
matter.
I
I
I
I
Limitations on ENGINEER 's Responsibilities:
9.13. Neither ENGINEER's authority to act under this
Article 9 or elsewhere in the Contract Documents nor any
decision made by ENGINEER in good faith either to exercise
or not exercise such authority shall give rise to any duty or
responsibility of ENGINEER to CONTRACTOR. any
Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any other person or
organization performing any of the Work, or to any surety for
any of them.
I
I
I
9.14. Whenever in the Contract Documents the terms "as
ordered", "as directed", "as required", "as allowed", "as
approved" or terms of like effect or import are used, or the
adjectives" "reasonable", "suitable", "acceptable", "proper" or
"satisfactory" or adjectives oflike effect or import are used to
describe a requirement, direction, review or judgment of
ENGINEER as to the Work, it is intended that such
requirement, direction, review or judgment will be solely to
evaluate the Work for compliance with the Contract
Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating
otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective shall not be
effective to assign to ENGINEER any duty or authority to
supervise or direct the furnishing or performance of the Work
or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to
the provisions of paragraph 9.15 or 9.16.
I
I
I
I
I
9.15. ENGINEER will not be responsible for
CONTRACTOR's means, methods, techniques, sequences or
procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and
programs incident thereto, and ENGINEER will not be
responsible for CONTRACTOR's failure to perform or
furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
notice to any surety, OWNER may, at any time or from
time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the
Work; these will be authorized by a Written Amendment, a
Change Order, or a Work Directive Change. Upon receipt
of any such document, CONTRACTOR shall promptly
proceed with the Work involved which will be performed
under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents
(except as otherwise specifically provided).
I
I
I
I
I
16
I
1<;\4201 03lAdrrinlSpeos\Fronft 191 0.8-1.doc
I
I
10.2. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to
agree as to the extent, if any, of an increase or decrease in
the Contract Price or an extension or shortening of the
Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a Work
Directive Change, a claim may be made there for as
provided-in Article 11 or Article 12
I
I
10.3. CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to an
increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the
Contract Time with respect to any Work performed that is
not required by the Contract Documents as amended,
modified and supplemented as provided in paragraphs 304
and 3.5, except in the case of an emergency as provided in
paragraph 6.22 and except in the case of uncovering Work
as provided in paragraph 13.9.
I
I
I
lOA. OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall execute
appropriate Change Orders (or Written Amendments)
covenng:
I
10.4.1. changes in the Work which are ordered by
OWN ER pursuant to paragraph 10.1, are required
because of acceptance of defective Work under
paragraph 13 .13 or correcting detective Work under
paragraph 13.14, or are agreed to by the parties;
I
I
1004.2. changes in the Contract Price or Contract
Time which are agreed to by the parties; and
I
lOA. 3 . changes in the Contract Price or Contract
Time which embody the substance of any written
decision rendered by ENGINEER pursuant to paragraph
9.11; provided that, in lieu of executing any such
Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such
decision in accordance with the provisions of the
Contract Documents and applicable Laws and
Regulations, but during any such appeal,
CONTRACTOR shall carry on the Work and adhere to
the progress schedule as provided in paragraph 6.29.
I
I
I
10.5. If notice of any change affecting the general scope
of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents
(including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract
Time) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given
to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be
CONTRACTOR's responsibility, and the amount of each
applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly.
I
I
I
ARTICLE ll--CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE
I
11.1. The Contract Price constitutes the total
compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable
to CONTRACTOR for performing the Work. All duties,
I
responsibilities and obligations assigned to or undertaken
by CONTRACTOR shall be at his expense without change
in the Contract Price.
11.2. The Contract Price may only be changed by a
Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any claim for
an increase or decrease in the Contract Price shall be based
on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to
the other party and to ENGINEER promptly (but in no
event later than thirty days) after the occurrence of the
event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature
of the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with
supporting data shall be delivered within sixty days after
such occurrence (unless ENGINEER allows an additional
period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of
the Claim) and shall be accompanied by claimant's written
statement that the amount claimed covers all known
amounts (direct, indirect and consequential) to which the
claimant is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said
event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract Price shall
be determined by ENGINEER in accordance with
paragraph 9.11 if OWNER and CONTRACTOR cannot
otherwise agree on the amount involved. No claim for an
adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not
submitted in accordance with this paragraph 11.2.
11.3. The value of any Work covered by a Change
Order or of any claim for an increase or decrease in the
Contract Price shall be determined in one of the following
ways:
11.3.1. Where the Work involved is covered by unit
prices contained in the Contract Documents, by
application of unit prices to the quantities of the items
involved (subject to the provisions of paragraphs 11.9.1.
through 1 1.9.3, inclusive).
11.3.2. By mutual acceptance of a lump sum (which
may include an allowance for overhead and profit not
necessarily in accordance with paragraph 11.6.2.1).
11.3.3. On the basis of the Cost of the Work
(determined as provided in paragraphs 1104 and 11.5)
plus a CONTRACTOR's Fee for overhead and profit
(determined as provided in paragraphs 11.6 and 11.7).
Cost of the Work:
1104. The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all
costs necessarily incurred and paid by CONTRACTOR in
the proper performance of the Work. Except as otherwise
may be agreed to in writing by OWNER, such costs shall be
in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of
the Project, shall include only the following items and shall
not include any of the costs itemized in paragraph 11.5:
17
1<;\4201 03\Admin\Specs\Fron~ 191 0.8-1.doc
11.4.1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct
employ of CONTRACTOR in the performance of the
Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon
by OWNER and CONTRACTOR. Payroll costs for
employees not employed full time on the Work shall be
apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the
Work. Payroll costs shall include, but not be limited to,
salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits which
shall include social security contributions,
unemployment, excise and payroll taxes, workers' or
workmen's compensation, health and retirement
benefits, bonuses, sick leave, vacation and holiday pay
applicable thereto. Such employees shall include
superintendents and foremen at the site. The expenses of
performing Work after regular working hours, on
Saturday, Sunday or legal holidays, shall be included in
the above to the extent authorized by OWNER.
1104.2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished
and incorporated in the Work, including costs of
transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers' field
services required in connection therewith. All cash
discounts shall accrue to CONTRACTOR unless
OWNER deposits funds with CONTRACTOR with
which to make payments, in which case the cash
discounts shall accrue to OWNER. All trade discounts,
rebates and refunds and all returns from sale of surplus
materials and equipment shall accrue to OWNER, and
CONTRACTOR shall make provisions so that they may
be obtained.
11.4.3. Payments made by CONTRACTOR to the
Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors.
If required by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall obtain
competitive bids from Subcontractors acceptable to
CONTRACTOR and shall deliver such bids to OWNER
who will then determine, with the advice of
ENGINEER, which bids will be accepted. If a
subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid
on the basis of Cost of the Work Plus a Fee, the
Subcontractor's Cost of the Work shall be determined in
the same manner as CONTRACTOR's Cost of the
Work. All subcontracts shall be subject to the other
provisions of the Contract Documents insofar as
applicable.
110404. Costs of special consultants (including but
not limited to engineers, architects, testing laboratories,
surveyors, attorneys and accountants) employed for
services specifically related to the Work.
11.4.5. Supplemental costs including the following:
18
I
11.4.5.1. The proportion of necessary
transportation, travel and subsistence expenses of
CONTRACTOR's employees incurred in discharge
of duties connected with the Work.
I
I
11.4.5.2. Cost, including transportation and
maintenance, of all materials, supplies, equipment,
machinery, appliances, office and temporary
facilities at the site and hand tools not owned by the
workers, which are consumed in the performance of
the Work, and cost less market value of such items
used but not consumed which remain the property of
CONTRACTOR.
I
I
11.4.5.3. Rentals of all construction equipment
and machinery and the parts thereof whether rented
from CONTRACTOR or others in accordance with
rental agreements approved by OWNER with the
advice of ENGINEER, and the costs of
transportation, loading, unloading, installation,
dismantling and removal thereof-all in accordance
with terms of said rental agreements. The rental of
any such equipment, machinery or parts shall cease
when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the
Work.
I
I
I
I
11.4.504. Sales, consumer, use or similar taxes
related to the Work, and for which CONTRACTOR
is liable, imposed by Laws and Regulations.
I
11.4.5.5. Deposits lost for causes other than
negligence of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor or
anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of
them or for whose acts any of them may be liable,
and royalty payments and fees for permits and
licenses.
I
I
11.4.5.6. Losses and damages (and related
expenses), not compensated by msurance or
otherwise, to the Work or otherwise sustained by
CONTRACTOR in connection with the performance
and furnishing of the Work (except losses and
damages within the deductible amounts of property
insurance established by OWNER in accordance with
paragraph 5.9), provided they have resulted from
causes other than the negligence of CONTRACTOR,
any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly
employed by any of them or for whose acts any of
them may be liable. Such losses shall include
settlements made with the written consent and
approval of OWNER. No such losses, damages and
expenses shall be included in the Cost of the Work
for the purpose of determining CONTRACTOR's
Fee. If, however, any such loss or damage requires
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
K:14201 03\AdrrinlSpecs\Fronfi 191 0.8-1.doc
I.
I
I
reconstruction and CONTRACTOR is placed in
charge thereof, CONTRACTOR shall be paid for
services a fee proportionate to that stated in
paragraph 11.6.2.
11.4.5.7. The cost of utilities, fuel and sanitary
facilities at the site.
I
11.4.5.8. Minor expenses such as telegrams,
long distance telephone calls, telephone service at
the site, express age and similar petty cash items in
connection with the Work.
I
I
1104.5.9. Cost of premiums for additional Bonds
and insurance required because of changes in the
Work and premiums for property insurance
coverage within the limits of the deductible
amounts established by OWNER in accordance with
paragraph 5.9.
I
I
11.5. The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of
the following:
I
I
I
11.5.1. Payroll costs and other compensation of CON
TRACTOR's officers, executives, principals (of partner
ship and sole proprietorships), general managers,
engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors.
accountants, purchasing and contracting agents,
expediters, timekeepers, clerks and other personnel
employed by CONTRACTOR whether at the site or in
CONTRACTOR's principal or a branch office for
general administration of the Work and not specifically
included in the agreed upon schedule of job
classifications referred to in par a graph 1104.1 or
specifically covered by paragraph 11.404 all of which
are to be considered administrative costs covered by the
CONTRACTOR's Fee.
I
I
11.5.2. Expenses of CONTRACTOR's principal and
branch offices other than CONTRACTOR's office at the
site
I
I
11.5.3. Any part of CONTRACTOR's capital
expenses, including interest on CONTRACTOR'S
capital employed for the Work and charges against
CONTRACTOR for delinquent payments.
I
11.504. Cost of premiums for all Bonds and for all
insurance whether or not CONTRACTOR is required by
the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain the
same (except for the cost of premiums covered by sub
paragraph 11.4.5.9 above).
I
I
11.5.5.
Costs due to the negligence of
I
CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly
or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts
any of them may be liable, including but not limited to,
the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials
or equipment wrongly supplied and making good any
damage to property.
11.5.6. Other overhead or general expense costs of
any kind and the costs of any item not specifically and
expressly included in paragraph 1104.
CONTRACTOR'S Fee:
11.6. The CONTRACTOR's Fee allowed to
CONTRACTOR for overhead and profit shall be
determined as follows:
11.6.1. a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or if none
can be agreed upon,
11.6.2. a fee based on the following percentages of
the various portions of the Cost of the Work:
11.6.2.1. for costs incurred under paragraphs
1104.1 and 1104.2, the CONTRACTOR's Fee shall be
fifteen percent;
11.6.2.2. for costs incurred under paragraph
1104.3, the CONTRACTOR's Fee shall be five
percent; and if a subcontract is on the basis of Cost
of the Work Plus a Fee, the maximum allowable to
CONTRACTOR on account of overhead and profit
of all Subcontractors shall be fifteen percent;
11.6.2.3. no fee shall be payable on the basis of
costs itemized under paragraphs 110404, 1104.5 and
11.5:
11.6.2.4. the amount of credit to be allowed by
CONTRACTOR to OWNER for any such change
which results in a net decrease in cost will be the
amount of the actual net decrease plus a deduction in
CONTRACTOR's Fee by an amount equal to ten
percent of the net decrease: and
11.6.2.5. when both additions and credits are
involved in anyone change, the adjustment in
CONTRACTOR's Fee shall be computed on the
basis of the net change in accordance with
paragraphs 11.6.2.1 through 11.6.204. inclusive.
11.7. Whenever the cost of any Work is to be
determined pursuant to paragraph 11.4 or 11.5,
CONTRACTOR will submit in form acceptable to
ENGINEER an itemized cost breakdown together with
19
K:\4201 03IAdmin\Specs\Fron~ 191 0.8-1.doc
supporting data.
Cash Allowances:
11.8. It is understood that CONTRACTOR has included
in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the
Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered
to be done by such Subcontractors or Suppliers and for
such sums within the limit of the allowances as may be
acceptable to ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR agrees that:
11.8.1. The allowances include the cost to
CONTRACTOR (less any applicable trade discounts) of
materials and equipment required by the allowances to
be delivered at the site, and all applicable taxes: and
11.8.2. CONTRACTOR's costs for unloading and
handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead,
profit and other expenses contemplated for the
allowances have been included in the Contract Price and
not in the allowances. No demand for additional
payment on account of any thereof will be valid.
Prior to fmal payment, an appropriate Change Order will be
issued as recommended by ENGINEER to reflect actual
amounts due CONTRACTOR on account ofW ork covered
by allowances, and the Contract Price shall be
correspondingly adjusted.
Unit Price Work:
11.9.1. Where the Contract Documents provide that
all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially
the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit
Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the
established unit prices for each separately identified
item of Unit Price Work times the estimated quantity of
each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated
quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not
guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison
of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price.
Determinations of the actual quantities and
classifications of Unit Price Work performed by
CONTRACTOR will be made by ENGINEER in
accordance with Paragraph 9.10.
11.9.2. Each unit price will be deemed to include an
amount considered by CONTRACTOR to be adequate
to cover CONTRACTOR's overhead and profit for each
separately identified item.
11.9.3. Where the quantity of any item of Unit Price
Work performed by CONTRACTOR differs materially
and significantly from the estimated quantity of such
item indicated in the Agreement and there is no
corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item
,I
of Work and if CONTRACTOR believes that
CONTRACTOR has incu~ed additional expense as a
result thereof, CONTRACTOR may make a claim for an
increase in the Contract Price in accordance with Article
11 if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of
any such increase.
I
I
ARTICLE 12-CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIME
I
12.1. The Contract Time may only be changed by a
Change Order or a Written Amendment. Any claim for an
extension or shortening of the Contract Time shall be based
on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to
the other party and to ENGINEER promptly (but in no
event later than thirty days) after the occurrence of the
event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature
of the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim with
supporting data shall be delivered within sixty days after
such occurrence (unless ENGINEER allows an additional
period oftime to ascertain more accurate data in support of
the claim) and shall be accompanied by the claimant's
written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire
adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is
entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All
claims for adjustment in the Contract Time 24 shall be
determined by ENGINEER in accordance with paragraph
9.11 if OWNER and CONTRACTOR cannot otherwise
agree. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Time will
be valid if not submitted in accordance with the
requirements of this Paragraph 12.1.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
12.2. The Contract Time will be extended in an amount
equal to time lost due to delays beyond the control of
CONTRACTOR if a claim is made there for as provided in
paragraph 12.1. Such delays shall include, but not be
limited to, acts or neglect by OWNER or others performing
additional work as contemplated by Article 7, or to fires,
floods, labor disputes, epidemics, abnormal weather
conditions or acts of God.
I
I
I
12.3. All time limits stated in the Contract Documents
are of the essence of the Agreement. The provisions of this
Article 12 shall not exclude recovery for damages
(including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers,
architects, attorneys and other professionals and court and
arbitration costs) for delay by either party.
I
I
I
I
20
I
K:\420103lAdminlSpecs\FronM910.8-1.doc
I
I
ARTICLE 13-- WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE;
TESTS AND INSPECTIONS;
CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR
ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE
WORK
I
I
Warranty and Guarantee:
13.1. CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees to
OWNER and ENGINEER that all Work will be in
accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be
defective. Prompt notice of all defects shall be given to
CONTRACTOR. All defective Work, whether or not in
place, may be rejected, corrected or accepted as provided in
this Article 13 .
I
I
Access to Work:
13.2. ENGINEER and ENGINEER's representatives,
other representatives of OWNER, testing agencies and
governmental agencies with jurisdictional interests will
have access to the Work at reasonable times for their
observation, inspecting and t~sting. CONTRACTOR shall
provide proper and safe conditions for such access.
I
I
I
Tests and Inspections:
13.3. CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER timely
notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections,
tests or approvals.
I
13 A. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having
jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) to
specifically be inspected, tested or approved.
CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility there for,
pay all costs in connection therewith and furnish
ENGINEER the required certificates of inspection, testing
or approval. CONTRACTOR shall also be responsible for
and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspection or
testing required in connection with OWNER's or
ENGINEER's acceptance of a Supplier of materials or
equipment proposed to be incorporated in the Work, or of
materials or equipment submitted for approval prior to
CONTRACTOR's purchase thereof for incorporation in the
Work. The cost of all inspections, tests and approvals in
addition to the above which are required by the Contract
Documents shall be paid by OWNER (unless otherwise
specified).
I
I
I
I
I
I
13.5. All inspections, tests or approvals other than those
required by Laws or Regulations of any public body having
jurisdiction shall be performed by organizations acceptable
to OWNER and CONTRACTOR (or by ENGINEER if so
specified) .
I
I
13.6. If any Work (including the work of others) that is
to be inspected, tested or approved is covered without
I
written concurrence of EN G INEER, it must, if requested by
ENGINEER, be uncovered for observation. Such
uncovering shall be at CONTRACTOR's expense unless
CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER timely notice of
CONTRACTOR's intention to cover the same and
ENGINEER has not acted with reasonable promptness in
response to such notice.
13.7. Neither observations by ENGINEER nor
inspections, tests or approvals by others shall relieve
CONTRACTOR from CONTRACTOR's obligations to
perform the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
Uncovering Work:
13.8. If any Work is covered contrary to the written
request of ENGINEER, it must, if requested by
ENGINEER, be uncovered for ENGINEER's observation
and replaced at CONTRACTOR's expense.
13.9. If ENGINEER considers it necessary or advisable
that covered Work be observed by ENGINEER or inspected
or tested by others, CONTRACTOR, at ENGINEER's
request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available
for observation, inspection or testing as ENGINEER may
require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all
necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that
such Work is defective, CONTRACTOR shall bear all
direct, indirect and consequential costs of such uncovering,
exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of
satisfactory reconstruction, (including but not limited to
fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and
other professionals), and OWNER shall be entitled to an
appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the
parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, may
make a claim there for as provided in Article 11. If,
however, such Work is not found to be defective,
CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an increase in the
Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time, or
both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure,
observation, inspection, testing and reconstruction: and, if
the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent
thereof, CONTRACTOR may make a claim there for as
provided in Articles 11 and 12.
Owner May Stop the Work:
13.10. If the Work is defective, or CONTRACTOR fails
to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or
equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a
way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract
Documents, OWNER may order CONTRACTOR to stop
the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such
order has been eliminated; however, this right of OWNER
to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part
21
K:\4201 03IAdminlSpecs\Front\ 191 0.8-1.doc
of OWNER to exercise this right for the benefit of
CONTRACTOR or any other party.
Correction or Removal of Defective Work:
13 .11. If required by ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall
promptly, as directed, either correct all defective Work,
whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the
Work has been rejected by ENGINEER, remove it from the
site and replace it with non defective Work.
CONTRACTOR shall bear all direct, indirect and
consequential costs of such correction or removal
(including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers,
architects, attorneys and other professionals) made
necessary thereby.
One Year Correction Period:
13 .12. If within one year after the date of Substantial
Completion or such longer period of time as may be
prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any
applicable special guarantee required by the Contract
Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract
Documents, any Work is found to be defective,
CONTRACTOR shall promptly, without cost to OWNER
and in accordance with OWNER's written instructions,
either correct such defective Work, or, if it has been
rejected by OWNER, remove it from the site and replace it
with non defective Work. If CONTRACTOR does not
promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in
an emergency where delay would cause serious risk ofloss
or damage, OWNER may have the defective Work
corrected or the rejected Work removed and replaced, and
all direct, indirect and consequential costs of such removal
and replacement (including but not limited to fees and
charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other
professionals) will be paid by CONTRACTOR. In special
circumstances where a particular item of equipment is
placed in continuous service before Substantial Completion
of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start
to run from an earlier date if so provided in the
Specifications or by Written Amendment.
Acceptance of Defective Work:
13.13. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and
replacement of defective Work, OWNER (and, prior to
ENGINEER's recommendation of fmal payment, also
ENGINEER) prefers to accept it, OWNER may do so.
CONTRACTOR shall bear all direct, indirect and
consequential costs attributable to OWNER's evaluation of
and determination to accept such defective Work (such
costs to be approved by ENGINEER as to reasonableness
and to include but not be limited to fees and charges of
engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals). If
any such acceptance occurs prior to ENGINEER's
recommendation of fmal payment, a Change Order will be
issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract
I
Documents with respect to the Work; and OWNER shall be
entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price,
and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount
thereof, OWNER may make a claim there for as provided
in Article 11. If the acceptance occurs after such
recommendation, an appropriate amount will be paid by
CONTRACTOR to OWNER.
I
I
I
OWNER May Correct Defective Work:
13.14. If CONTRACTOR fails within a reasonable time
after written notice of ENGINEER to proceed to correct
and to correct defective Work or to remove and replace
rejected Work as required by ENGINEER in accordance
with paragraph 13.11, or if CONTRACTOR fails to
perform the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents, or if CONTRACTOR fails to comply with any
other provision of the Contract Documents, OWNER may,
after seven days' written notice to CONTRACTOR, correct
and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rights
and remedies under this paragraph OWNER shall proceed
expeditiously. To the extent necessary to complete
corrective and remedial action, OWNER may exclude
CONTRACTOR from all or part of the site, take possession
of all or part of the Work, and suspend CONTRACTOR's
services related thereto, take possession of
CONTRACTOR's tools, appliances, construction
equipment and machinery at the site and incorporate in the
Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for
which OWN ER has paid CONTRACTOR but which are
stored elsewhere. CONTRACTOR shall allow OWNER,
OWNER's representatives, agents and employees such
access to the site as may be necessary to enable OWNER to
exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All
direct, indirect and consequential costs of OWNER in
exercising such rights and remedies will be charged against
CONTRACTOR in an amount approved as to
reasonableness by ENGINEER, and a Change Order will be
issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract
Documents with respect to the Work; and OWNER shall be
entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price,
and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount
thereof, OWNER may make a claim there for as provided
in Article 11. Such direct, indirect and consequential costs
will include but not be limited to fees and charges of
engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals, all
court and arbitration costs and all costs of repair and
replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by
correction, removal or replacement of CONTRACTOR's
defective Work. CONTRACTOR shall not be allowed an
extension of the Contract Time because of any delay in
performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by
OWNER of OWNER's rights and remedies hereunder.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
22
I
K:\4201 03lAdminlSpecs\Fronfi 191 0.8-1.doc
I
I
ARTICLE 14-- PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR
AND COMPLETION
I
Schedule of Values:
14.1. The schedule of values established as provided in
paragraph 2.9 will serve as the basis for progress payments
and will be incorporated into a form of Application
I
for Payment acceptable to ENGINEER. Progress
payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on
the number of units completed.
I
I
Application for Progress Payment:
14.2. At least twenty days before each progress payment
is scheduled (but not more often than once a month),
CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for review an
Application for Payment filled out and signed by
CONTRACTOR covering the Work completed as of the
date of the Application and accompanied by such
supporting documentation as is required by the Contract
Documents. If payment is requested on the basis of
materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but
delivered and suitably stored at the site or at another
location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment
shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice or other
documentation warranting that OWNER has received the
materials and equipment free and clear of all liens, charges,
security interests and encumbrances (which are hereinafter
in these General Conditions referred to as "Liens") and
evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by
appropriate property insurance and other arrangements to
protect OWNER's interest therein, all of which will be
satisfactory to OWNER. The amount of retain age with
respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the
Agreement.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CONTRACTOR's Warranty of Title:
14.3. CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees that title
to all Work, materials and equipment covered by any
Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the
Project or not, will pass to OWNER no later than the time
of payment free and clear of all Liens.
I
I
Review of Applications for Progress Payment:
1404. ENGINEER will, within ten days after receipt of
each Application for Payment, either indicate in writing a
recommendation of payment and present the Application to
OWNER, or return the Application to CONTRACTOR
indicating in writing ENGINEER's reasons for refusing to
recommend payment. In the latter case, CONTRACTOR
may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the
Application. Ten days after presentation ofthe Application
for Payment with ENGINEER's recommendation, the
amount recommended will (subj ect to the provisions of the
I
I
I
.
.
-
last sentence of paragraph 14.7) become due and when due
will be paid by OWNER to CONTRACTOR.
14.5. ENGINEER's recommendation of any payment
requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a
representation by ENGINEER to OWNER, based on
ENGINEER's on-site observations of the Work in progress
as an experienced and qualified design professional and on
ENGINEER's review of the Application for Payment and
the accompanying data and schedules that the Work has
progressed to the point indicated; that, to the best of
ENGINEER's knowledge, information and belief, the
quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract
Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a
functioning whole prior to or upon Substantial Completion,
to the results of any subsequent tests called for in the
Contract Documents, to a fmal determination of quantities
and classifications for Unit Price Work under paragraph
9.10, and to any other qualifications stated in the
recommendation); and that CONTRACTOR is entitled to
payment of the amount recommended. However, by
recommending any such payment ENGINEER will not
thereby be deemed to have represented that exhaustive or
continuous on-site inspections have been made to check the
quality or the quantity of the Work beyond the
responsibilities specifically assigned to ENGINEER in the
Contract Documents or that there may not be other matters
or issues between the parties that might entitle
CONTRACTOR to be paid additionally by OWNER or
OWNER to withhold payment to CONTRACTOR.
14.6. ENGINEER's recommendation of final payment
will constitute an additional representation by ENGINEER
to OWNER that the conditions precedent to
CONTRACTOR's being entitled to fmal payment as set
forth in paragraph 14.13 have been fulfilled.
14.7. ENGINEER may refuse to recommend the whole
or any part of any payment if, in ENGINEER's opinion, it
would be incorrect to make such representations to
OWNER. ENGINEER may also refuse to recommend any
such payment, or, because of subsequently discovered
evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or tests,
nullify any such payment previously recommended, to such
extent as may be necessary in ENGINEER's opinion to
protect OWNER from loss because:
14.7.1. the Work is defective, or completed Work
has been damaged requiring correction or replacement,
14.7.2. the Contract Price has been reduced by
Written Amendment or Change Order,
14.7.3. OWNER has been required to correct
defective Work or complete Work in accordance with
23
1<;\420103lAdmln\Specs\FronM910.8-1.doc
paragraph 13.14, or
14.7.4. of ENGINEER's actual knowledge of the
occurrence of any of the events enumerated m
paragraphs 15.2.1 through 15.2.9 inclusive.
OWNER may refuse to make payment of the full amount
recommended by ENGINEER because claims have been
made against OWNER on account of CONTRACTOR's
performance or furnishing of the Work or Liens have been
filed in connection with the Work or there are other items
entitling OWNER to a set-off against the amount
recommended, but OWNER must give CONTRACTOR
immediate written notice (with a copy to ENGINEER)
stating the reasons for such action.
Substantial Completion:
14.8. When CONTRACTOR considers the entire Work
ready for its intended use CONTRACTOR shall notify
OWNER and ENGINEER in writing that the entire Work is
substantially complete (except for items specifically listed
by CONTRACTOR as incomplete) and request that
ENGINEER issue a certificate of Substantial Completion.
Within a reasonable time thereafter, OWNER,
CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER shall make an inspection
of the Work to deterinine the status of completion. If
ENGINEER does not consider the Work substantially
complete, ENGINEER will notify CONTRACTOR in
writing giving the reasons there for. If ENGINEER
considers the Work substantially complete, ENGINEER
will prepare and deliver to OWNER a tentative certificate
of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of
Substantial Completion. There shall be attached to the
certificate a tentative list of items to be completed or
corrected before final payment. OWNER shall have seven
days after receipt of the tentative certificate during which to
make written objection to ENGINEER as to any provisions
of the certificate or attached list. If, after considering such
objections, ENGINEER concludes that the Work is not
substantially complete, ENGINEER will within fourteen
days after submission of the tentative certificate to OWNER
notify CONTRACTOR in writing, stating the reasons there
for. If, after consideration of OWNER's objections,
ENGINEER considers the Work substantially complete,
ENGINEER will within said fourteen days execute and
deliver to OWNER and CONTRACTOR a defmitive
certificate of Substantial Completion (with a revised
tentative list of items to be completed or corrected)
reflecting such changes from the tentative certificate as
ENGINEER believes justified after consideration of any
objections from OWNER. At the time of delivery of the
tentative certificate of Substantial Completion ENGINEER
will deliver to OWNER and CONTRACTOR a written
recommendation as to division of responsibilities pending
I
fmal payment between OWNER and CONTRACTOR with
respect to security, operation, safety, maintenance, heat,
utilities, insurance and warranties. Unless OWNER and
CONTRACTOR agree otherwise in writing and so inform
ENGINEER prior to ENGINEER's issuing the defmitive
certificate of Substantial Completion, ENGINEER's
aforesaid recommendation will be binding on OWNER and
CONTRACTOR until fmal payment.
I
I
I
14.9. OWNER shall have the right to exclude
CONTRACTOR from the Work after the date of
Substantial Completion, but OWNER shall allow
CONTRACTOR reasonable access to complete or correct
items on the tentative list.
I
I
I
Partial Utilization:
14.10. Use by OWNER of any fmished part of the
Work, which has specifically been identified in the Contract
Documents, or which OWNER, ENGINEER and
CONTRACTOR agree constitutes a separately functioning
and use able part of the Work that can be used by OWNER
without significant interference with CONTRACTOR's
performance of the remainder of the Work, may be
accomplished prior to Substantial Completion of all the
Work subject to the following:
I
I
14.10.1. OWNER at any time may request
CONTRACTOR in writing to permit OWNER to use
any such part of the Work which OWNER believes to
be ready for its intended use and substantially complete.
If CONTRACTOR agrees, CONTRACTOR will certify
to OWN ER and ENGINEER that said part of the Work
is substantially complete and request ENGINEER to
issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part
of the Work. CONTRACTOR at any time may notify
OWNER and ENGINEER in writing that
CONTRACTOR considers any such part of the Work
ready for its intended use and substantially complete and
request ENGINEER to issue a certificate of Substantial
Completion for that part of the Work. Within a
reasonable time after either such request, OWNER,
CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER shall make an
inspection of that part of the Work to determine its
status of completion. If ENGINEER does not consider
that part of the, Work to be substantially complete,
ENGINEER will notify OWNER and CONTRACTOR
in writing giving the reasons there for. If ENGINEER
considers that part of the Work to be substantially
complete, the provisions of paragraphs 14.8 and 14.9
will apply with respect to certification of Substantial
Completion of that part of the Work and the division of
responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
14.10.2. OWNER may at any time request
I
24
I
1<;\4201 03lAdminlSpecs\Fronfi 191 0.8-1.doc
I
I
CONTRACTOR in writing to permit OWNER to take
over operation of any such part of the Work although it
is not substantially complete. A copy of such request
will be sent to ENGINEER and within a reasonable time
thereafter OWNER, CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER
shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to
determine its status of completion and will prepare a list
of the items remaining to be completed or corrected
thereon before fmal payment. If CONTRACTOR does
not object in writing to OWNER and ENGINEER that
such part of the Work is not ready for separate operation
by OWNER, ENGINEER will finalize the list of items
to be completed or corrected and will deliver such list to
OWNER and CONTRACTOR together with a written
recommendation as to the division of responsibilities
pending final payment between OWNER and
CONTRACTOR with respect to security, operation,
safety, maintenance, utilities, insurance, warranties and
guarantees for that part of the Work which will become
binding upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR at the time
when OWNER takes over such operation (unless they
shall have otherwise agreed in writing and so informed
ENGINEER). During such operation and prior to
Substantial Completion of such part of the Work,
OWNER shall allow CONTRACTOR reasonable access
to complete or correct items on said list and to complete
other related Work.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
14.10.3. No occupancy or separate operation of part
of the Work will be accomplished prior to compliance
with the requirements of paragraph 5.15 in respect of
property insurance.
I
I
I
Final Inspection:
14.11. Upon written notice from CONTRACTOR that
the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete,
ENGINEER will make a fmal inspection with OWNER and
CONTRACTOR and will notify CONTRACTOR in writing
of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the
Work is incomplete or defective. CONTRACTOR shall
immediately take such measures as are necessary to remedy
such deficiencies.
I
I
I
Final Application for Payment:
14.12. After CONTRACTOR has completed all such
corrections to the satisfaction of ENGINEER and delivered
all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules,
guarantees, Bonds, certificates of inspection, marked-up
record documents (as provided in paragraph 6.19) and other
documents--all as required by the Contract Documents, and
after ENGINEER has indicated that the Work is acceptable
(subject to the provisions of paragraph 14.16),
CONTRACTOR may make application for fmal payment
following the procedure for progress payments. The fmal
I
I
I
Application for Payment shall be accompanied by all
documentation called for in the Contract Documents,
together with complete and legally effective releases or
waivers (satisfactory to OWNER) of all Liens arising out of
or filed in connection with the Work. In lieu thereof and as
approved by OWNER, CONTRACTOR may furnish
receipts or releases in full; an affidavit of CONTRACTOR
that the releases and receipts include all labor, services,
material and equipment for which a Lien could be filed, and
that all payrolls, material and equipment bills. and other
indebtedness connected with the Work for which OWNER
or OWNER's property might in any way be responsible,
have been paid or otherwise satisfied; and consent of the
surety, if any, to fmal payment. If any Subcontractor or
Supplier fails to furnish a release or receipt in full,
CONTRACTOR may furnish a Bond or other collateral
satisfactory to OWNER to indemnify OWNER against any
Lien.
Final Payment and Acceptance:
14.13. If, on the basis of ENGINEER's observation of
the Work during construction and fmal inspection, and
ENGINEER's review of the fmal Application for Payment
and accompanying documentation--all as required by the
Contract Documents, ENGINEER is satisfied that the Work
has been completed and CONTRACTOR's other
obligations under the Contract Documents have been
fulfilled, ENGINEER will, within ten days after receipt of
the fmal Application for Payment, indicate in writing
ENGINEER's recommendation of payment and present the
Application to OWNER for payment. Thereupon
ENGINEER will give written notice to OWNER and
CONTRACTOR that the Work is acceptable subject to the
provisions of paragraph 14.16. Otherwise, ENGINEER
will return the Application to CONTRACTOR, indicating
in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final
payment, in which case CONTRACTOR shall make the
necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. Thirty
days after presentation to OWNER of the Application and
accompanying documentation, in appropriate form and
substance, and with ENGINEER's recommendation and
notice of acceptability, the amount recommended by
ENGINEER will become due and will be paid by OvVNER
to CONTRACTOR.
14.14. If, through no fault of CONTRACTOR, final
completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if
ENGINEER so confirms, OWNER shall, upon receipt of
CONTRACTOR's fmal Application for Payment and
recommendation of ENGINEER, and without ternunating
the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that
portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the
remaining balance to be held by OWNER for Work not
fully completed or corrected is less than the retain age
25
K:\4201 03IAdmin\Specs\Fron~ 191 0.8-1.doc
stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been
furnished as required in paragraph 5.1, the written consent
of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that
portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be
submitted by CONTRACTOR to ENGINEER with the
Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made
under the terms and conditions governing fmal payment,
except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims.
Contractor's Continuing Obligation:
14.15. CONTRACTOR's obligation to perform and
complete the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents shall be absolute. Neither recommendation of
any progress or fmal payment by ENGINEER, nor the
issuance ofa certificate of Substantial Completion, nor any
payment by OWNER to CONTRACTOR under the
Contract Documents, nor any use or occupancy of the Work
or any part thereof by OWNER, nor any act of acceptance
by OWNER nor any failure to do so, nor any review and
approval of a Shop Drawing or sample submission, nor the
issuance of a notice of acceptability by ENGINEER
pursuant to paragraph 14.13, nor any correction of defective
Work by OWNER will constitute an acceptance of Work
not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release
of CONTRACTOR's obligation to perform the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents (except as
provided in paragraph 14.16).
Waiver olClaims:
14.16. The making and acceptance of final payment
will constitute:
14.16.1. a waiver of all claims by OWNER against
CONTRACTOR, except claims arising from unsettled
Liens, from defective Work appearing after fmal
inspection pursuant to paragraph 14.1 1 or from failure
to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of
any special guarantees specified therein; however, it will
not constitute a waiver by OWNER of any rights in
respect of CONTRACTOR's continuing obligations
under the Contract Documents; and
14.16.2. a waiver of all claims by CONTRACTOR
against OWNER other than those previously made in
writing and still unsettled.
ARTICLE 15- SUSPENSION OF WORK AND
TERMINATION
Owner May Suspend Work:
15.1. OWNER may, at any time and without cause,
suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not
more than ninety days by notice in writing to
I
CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER which will fix the date
on which Work will be resumed. CONTRACTOR shall
resume the Work on the date so fixed. CONTRACTOR
shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an
extension of the Contract Time, or both, directly
attributable to any suspension if CONTRACTOR makes an
approved claim there for as provided in Articles 11 and 12.
I
I
I
Owner May Terminate:
15.2. Upon the occurrence of anyone or more of the
following events:
I
15.2.1. if CONTRACTOR commences a voluntary
case under any chapter of the Bankruptcy Code (Title
11, United States Code), as now or hereafter in effect, or
if CONTRACTOR takes any equivalent or similar
action by filing a petition or otherwise under any other
federal or state law in effect at such time relating to the
bankruptcy or insolvency;
I
I
15.2.2. if a petition is filed against CONTRACTOR
under any chapter of the Bankruptcy Code as now or
hereafter in effect at the time of ftling, or if a petition is
filed seeking any such equivalent or similar relief
against CONTRACTOR under any other federal or state
law in effect at the time relating to bankruptcy or
insolvency;
I
I
I
15.2.3. if CONTRACTOR makes a general
assignment for the benefit of creditors;
I
15.204. if a trustee, receiver, custodian or agent of
CONTRACTOR is appointed under applicable law or
under contract, whose appointment or authority to take
charge of property of CONTRACTOR is for the purpose
of enforcing a Lien against such property or for the
purpose of general administration of such property for
the benefit of CONTRACTOR's creditors;
I
I
15.2.5. if CONTRACTOR admits in writing an
inability to pay its debts generally as they become due:
I
15.2.6. if CONTRACTOR persistently fails to
perform the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to
supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or
equipment or failure to adhere to the progress schedule
established under paragraph 2.9 as revised from time to
time);
I
I
15.2.7. if CONTRACTOR disregards Laws or
Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction;
I
15.2.8. if CONTRACTOR disregards the authority
I
26
I
1<;\4201 03IAdmin\Specs\Fron~ 191 0.8-1.doc
I
I
of ENGINEER; or
I
15.2.9. if CONTRACTOR otherwise violates in any
substantial way any provisions of the Contract
Documents:
I
OWNER may, after gtvmg CONTRACTOR (and the
surety, if there be one) seven days' written notice and to the
extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the
services of CONTRACTOR, exclude CONTRACTOR
from the site and take possession of the Work and of all
CONTRACTOR's tools, appliances, construction
equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the
full extent they could be used by CONTRACTOR (without
liability to CONTRACTOR for trespass or conversion),
incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored
at the site or for which OWNER has paid CONTRACTOR
but which are stored elsewhere, and fmish the Work as
OWNER may deem expedient. In such case
CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to receive any further
payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of
the Contract Price exceeds the direct, indirect and
consequential costs of completing the Work (including but
not limited to fees and charges of engineers, architects,
attorneys and other professionals and court and arbitration
costs) such excess will be paid to CONTRACTOR. Ifsuch
costs exceed such unpaid balance, CONTRACTOR shall
pay the difference to OWNER. Such costs incurred by
OWNER will be approved as to reasonableness by
ENGINEER and incorporated in a Change Order, but when
exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph
OWNER shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for
the Work performed.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
15.3. Where CONTRACTOR's services have been so
terminated by OWNER, the termination will not affect any
rights or remedies of OWNER against CONTRACTOR
then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention
or payment of moneys due CONTRACTOR by OWNER
will not release CONTRACTOR from liability.
I
1504. Upon seven days' written notice to
CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER, OWNER may, without
cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy,
elect to abandon the Work and terminate the Agreement. In
such case. CONTRACTOR shall be paid for all Work
executed and any expense sustained plus reasonable
termination expenses, which will include, but not be limited
to, direct, indirect and consequential costs (including, but
not limited to, fees and charges of engineers, architects,
attorneys and other professionals and court and arbitration
costs).
I
I
I
I
Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate:
I
15.5. If, through no actorfaultofCONTRACTOi\, the
Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety day'> by
OWN ER or under an order of court or other public
authority, or ENGINEER fails to act on any Application for
Payment within thirty days after it is submitted, or OWNER
fails for thirty days to pay CONTRACTOR any sum finally
determined to be due, then CONTRACTOR may, upon
seven days' written notice to OWNER and ENGINEER,
terminate the Agreement and recover from 0 WNER
payment for all Work executed and any expense sustained
plus reasonable termination expenses. In addition and in
lieu of terminating the Agreement, if ENGINEER has failed
to act on an Application for Payment or OWNER has failed
to make any payment as aforesaid, CONTRACTOR may
upon seven days' written notice to OWNER and
ENGINEER stop the Work until payment of all amounts
then due. The provisions of this paragraph shall not relieve
CONTRACTOR of the obligations under paragraph 6.2C; to
carry on the Work in accordance with the progress sched ule
and without delay during disputes and disagreements with
OWNER.
[The remainder of this page was left blank intentionally]
27
K:\4201 03IAdminlSpecs\Front.191 0.8-1.doc
ARTICLE 16--ARBITRATION
16.1. All claims, disputes and other matters in question
between OWNER and CONTRACTOR arising out of, or
relating to the Contract Documents or the breach thereof
(except for claims which have been waived by the making
or acceptance of final payment as provided by paragraph
14.16) will be decided by arbitration in accordance with the
Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American
Arbitration Association then obtaining subject to the
limitations of this Article 16. This agreement so to arbitrate
and any other agreement or consent to arbitrate entered into
in accordance herewith as provided in this Article 16 will
be specifically enforceable under the prevailing law of any
court having jurisdiction.
16.2. No demand for arbitration of any claim, dispute or
other matter that is required to be referred to ENGINEER
initially for decision in accordance with paragraph 9.11 will
be made until the earlier of (a) the date on which
ENGINEER has rendered a decision or (b) the tenth day
after the parties have presented their evidence to
ENGINEER if a written decision has not been rendered by
ENGINEER before that date. No demand for arbitration of
any such claim, dispute or other matter will be made later
than thirty days after the date on which ENGINEER has
rendered a written decision in respect thereof in accordance
with paragraph 9.11; and the failure to demand arbitration
within said thirty days' period shall result in ENGINEER's
decision being final and binding upon OWNER and
CONTRACTOR. If ENGINEER renders a decision after
arbitration proceedings have been initiated, such decision
may be entered as evidence but will not supersede the
arbitration proceedings, except where the decision is
acceptable to the parties concerned. No demand for
arbitration of any written decision of ENGINEER rendered
in accordance with paragraph 9.10 will be made later than
ten days after the party making such demand has delivered
written notice of intention to appeal as provided in
paragraph 9.10.
16.3. Notice of the demand for arbitration will be filed
in writing with the other party to the Agreement and with
the American Arbitration Association, and a copy will be
sent to ENGINEER for information. The demand for
arbitration will be made within the thirty-day or ten-day
period specified in paragraph 16.2 as applicable, and in all
other cases within a reasonable time after the claim, dispute
or other matter in question has arisen, and in no event shall
any such demand be made after the date when institution of
legal or equitable proceedings based on such claim, dispute
or other matter in question would be barred by the
applicable statute of limitations.
I
16.4. No arbitration arising out of or relating to the
Contract Documents shall include by consolidation, joinder
or in any other manner any other person or entity (including
ENGINEER, ENGINEER's agents, employees or
consultants) who is not a party to this contract unless:
I
I
16.4.1. the inclusion of such other person or entity is
necessary if complete relief is to be afforded among
those who are already parties to the arbitration,
I
I
1604.2. such other person or entity is substantially
involved in a question of law or fact which is common
to those who are already parties to the arbitration and
which will arise in such proceedings, and
I
16.4.3. the written consent of the other person or
entity sought to be included and of OWNER and
CONTRACTOR has been obtained for such inclusion,
which consent shall make specific reference to this
paragraph; but no such consent shall constitute consent
to arbitration of any dispute not specifically described in
such consent or to arbitration with any party not
specifically identified in such consent.
I
I
I
16.5. The award rendered by the arbitrators will be
final, judgment may be entered upon it in any court having
jurisdiction thereof, and will not be subject to modification
or appeal except to the extent permitted by Sections 10 and
11 of the Federal Arbitration Act (9 US.C. 10,11).
I
I
I
[The remainder of this page was left blank intentionally.]
I
I
I
I
I
I
28
I
K:\4201 03lAdminlSpecs\FronM 91 0.8-1.doc
I
I
ARTICLE 17--MISCELLANEOUS
I
Giving Notice:
17.1. Whenever any prOV1SlOn of the Contract
Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will be
deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to
the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of
the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or
sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the
last business address known to the giver of the notice.
I
I
Computation Or Time:
17.2.1. When any period oftirne is referred to in the
Contract Documents by days, it will be computed to
exclude the first and include the last day of such period.
If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or
Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of
the applicable jurisdiction, such day will be omitted
from the computation.
I
I
I
17.2.2. A calendar day of twenty-four hours
measured from midnight to the next midnight shall
constitute a day.
I
General:
17.3. Should OWNER or CONTRACTOR suffer injury
or damage to person or property because of any error,
omission or act of the other party or of any of the other
party's employees or agents or others for whose acts the
other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to
the other party within a reasonable time of the first
observance of such injury or damage. The provisions of this
paragraph 17.3 shall not be construed as a substitute for or
a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of
limitations or repose.
I
I
I
I
1704. The duties and obligations imposed by these
General Conditions and the rights and remedies available
hereunder to the parties hereto, and, in particular but
without limitation, the warranties, guarantees and
obligations imposed upon CONTRACTOR by paragraphs
6.30, 13.1,13.12, 13.14, 14.3 and 15.2 and all of the rights
and remedies available to OWNER and ENGINEER
thereunder, are in addition to, and are not to be construed in
any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies
available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed
or available by Laws or Regulations, by special warranty or
guarantee or by other provisions of the Contract
Documents, and the provisions of this paragraph will be as
effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract
Documents in connection with each particular duty,
obligation, right and remedy to which they apply. All
representations, warranties and guarantees made in the
Contract Documents will survive fmal payment and
termination or completion of the Agreement.
I
I
I
I
I
I
29
1<;\4201 03\AdmlnlSpecs\Fronfi191 0.8-1.doc
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SC-l.
SC-2.
SC-3.
SC-4.
SC-5.
SC-6.
SC-7.
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
These supplementary conditions amend or supplement the Standard General Conditions of the
Construction Contract and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below. All
provisions which are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect.
The terms used in the supplementary condition which are defined in the Standard General
Conditions to the Construction Contract have the meanings assigned to them in the General
Conditions.
Amend first sentence of paragraph 2.2.
Owner shall furnish to Contractor up to five (5) copies. . .
Revise paragraph 2.7 in its entirety and insert the following.
Before any work at the site is started, CONTRACTOR shall deliver to OWNER, with a copy
to ENGINEER, certificates (and other evidence of insurance requested by OWNER) which
CONTRACTOR is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with paragraphs 5.3 and
504.
Amend paragraph 4.1.
Add: Contractor shall schedule work as prioritized in the Pre-construction meeting.
Amend paragraph 4.2.1
Add: Soil boring report is available.
The limits of liability for the insurance required by paragraph 5.3 of the General Conditions shall
provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by Laws and
Regulations:
a. Policies, Certificates, Limits and Disposition of Documents. - The Contractor shall obtain at
his expense insurance with limits as shown hereinbelow unless the Contractor desires to
broaden the limits and obtain more protection.
[I] OWNER'S PROTECTNE LIABILITY INSURANCE - Taken out in name of the
owner as insured. (See Invitation to Bid for exact legal name of owner.)
Bodily injury, including death -limits of $1,000,000.00 for each person and
$2,000,000.00 for each accident.
Property damage -limits of $500,000.00 for each accident and $1,000,000.00 for the
aggregate of operations.
DISPOSITION: Original policy must be deposited with owner prior to
commencement of work.
[2] CONTRACTOR'S PROTECTNE LIABILITY INSURANCE - Taken out in the
name of the Contractor.
Bodily injury, including death -limits of $1,000,000.00 for each person and
$2,000,000.00 for each accident.
-1-
K:\420103\ADMINlSPECS'FROt-ffiSUPPLMCONOmONS.OOC
[3]
Property damage -limits of$SOO,OOO.OO for each accident and $1,000,000.00 for the
aggregate of operations.
DISPOSITION: Certificate of insurance must be sent to owner prior to
commencement of work.
CONTRACTOR'S PUBLIC LIABILITY INSURANCE - Taken out in the name of
the Contractor.
Bodily injury, including death -limits of $1,000,000.00 for each person and
$2,000,000.00 for each accident.
Property damage -limits of$SOO,OOO.OO for each accident and $1,000,000.00 for the
aggregate of operations.
DISPOSITION: Certificate of insurance must be sent to Owner prior to
commencement of work.
BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE - Payable to the Contractor and Owner, as their
interests may appear, upon the entire structure and upon all materials in or adjacent
thereto which are to be made a part of the insured structure to 100% of the insurable
value thereof covering fIre, extended coverage, vandalism and malicious mischief.
DISPOSITION: Original policy must be deposited with Owner prior to
commencement of work.
I
I
I
I
I
I
[4]
I
I
b.
Acceptability of Insurers to Owner. - No insurance will be acceptable unless written by a
company licensed by the State Insurance Commissioner to do business in Georgia at the time
the policy is issued, and the company must in addition be acceptable to the Owner. To avoid
inconvenience, any general contractor or subcontractor must get in touch with the Owner to
determine whether the insurance company or companies he expects to use is or are acceptable to
the Owner. All policies and certificates must be signed or countersigned, as the case may be, by
resident Georgia agents.
I
I
c.
Termination of Obligation to Insure. - Unless otherwise expressly provided to the contrary, the
obligation to insure as prescribed herein shall not terminate until the Engineer shall have
executed the final certificate.
I
I
I
d.
Contractor shall purchase and maintain during the full course of construction "All Risk"
Builder's Risk Insurance coverage which names the Contractor, Owner and Engineer as co-
insured.
e.
The Contractor will turn over areas completed for construction prior to substantial completion.
Contractor shall maintain insurance on work he performs within "battery limits".
I
SC-8. Add to paragraph 6.8.2.
The CONTRACTOR shall identify Utility Contractor at time of bid and mark the Bid with the
Utility Contractor's Georgia License Number. Within two (2) days of being notifIed that the
CONTRACTOR is the apparent low bidder, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a list to the
ENGINEER of the following SUBCONTRACTORS that he plans to use on this project. The
list shall include:
I
I
a.
b.
Masonry subcontractor
Building subcontractor
Electrical subcontractor
Mechanical subcontractor
I
c.
d.
I
-2-
I
1<;\420103\ADMINlSPECSlFRONT\SUPPLMCONDmONS.DOC
I
I
SC-9. Add paragraph 7.5
I
I
7.5.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Should CONTRACTOR cause damage to the work or property of any separate
contractor at the site, or should any claim arising out of CONTRACTOR's
performance of the Work at the site be made by any separate contractor against
CONTRACTOR, OWNER, ENGINEER, the Construction Coordinator or any other
person, CONTRACTOR shall promptly attempt to settle with such other contractor
by agreement, or to otherwise resolve the dispute by arbitration or at law.
CONTRACTOR shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations,
indemnify and hold OWNER, ENGINEER and the Construction Coordinator
harmless from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses (including, but
not limited to, fees of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and
court and arbitration costs) arising directly, indirectly or consequentially out of any
action, legal or equitable, brought by any separate contractor against OWNER,
ENGINEER, or the Construction Coordinator to the extent based on a claim arising
out of CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work. Should a separate contractor
cause damage to the Work or property of CONTRACTOR or should the performance
of Work by any separate contractor at the site give rise to any other claim,
CONTRACTOR shall not institute any action, legal or equitable, against OWNER,
ENGINEER or the Construction Coordinator or permit any action against any of
them to be maintained and continued in its name or for its benefit in any court or
before any arbiter which seeks to impose liability on or to recover damages from
OWNER, ENGINEER or the Construction Coordinator on account of any such
damage or claim. If CONTRACTOR is delayed at any time in performing or .
furnishing Work by any act or neglect of a separate contractor and OWNER and
CONTRACTOR are unable to agree as to t he extent of any adjustment in Contract
Time attributable thereto, CONTRACTOR may make a claim for an extension of
time in accordance with Article 12. An extension of the Contract Time shall be
CONTRACTOR's exclusive remedy with respect to OWNER, ENGINEER and
Construction Coordinator for any delay, disruption, interference or hindrance caused
by any separate contractor. This paragraph does not prevent recovery from OWNER,
ENGINEER or Construction Coordinator for activities that are their respective
responsibi li ti es.
SC-lO. Delete paragraph 9.10 of the General Conditions in its entirety and insert the following in its place:
I
I
I
I
9.10 ENGINEER will have authority to determine the actual quantities and classifications
of items of Unit Price Work performed by CONTRACTOR, and the written
decisions of ENGINEER on such matters will be final, binding on OWNER and
CONTRACTOR and not subject to appeal (except as modified by ENGINEER to
reflect changed factual conditions).
SC-ll. Delete ARTICLE 16.
I
I
-3-
K:\420103IADMINlSPECS\FRONT\SUPPLMCONOmONS.OOC
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT
BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR
ON THE BASIS OF A STIPULATED PRICE
TillS AGREEMENT is dated as of the 29th day of March in the year 2002 by and between
AU2usta-Richmond County (hereinafter called OWNER) and Continental Construction. Inc.
(hereinafter called CONTRACTOR).
OWNER and CONTRACTOR, in consideration ofthe mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree
as follows:
Article 1. WORK.
CONTRACTOR shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The
Work is generally described as follows:
New McBean Community Center
The Project for which the Work under the Contract Documents may be the whole or only a part is
generally described as follows:
Article 2. ENGINEER.
The Project has been designed by: Johnson, Laschober & Associates, P.c.
1296 Broad Street
Augusta, GA 30901
who is hereinafter called ENGINEER and who is to act as OWNER's representative, assume all
duties and responsibilities and have the rights and authority assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract
Documents in connection with completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Article 3. CONTRACT TIME.
3.1. The Work will be substantially completed on or before 210 days after notice to proceed,
and completed and ready for final payment in accordance with paragraph 14.13 of the General
Conditions on or before 240 days after notice to proceed.
-1-
K:\420103\AOMlNlSPECSlFROt'ffi 191 0.8A 1.0OC
3.2. Liquidated Damages. OWNER and CONTRACTOR recognize that time is of the essence
of this Agreement and that OWNER will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed
within the times, specified in paragraph 3.1 above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in
accordance with Article 12 ofthe General Conditions. They also recognize the delays, expense
and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered
by OWNER if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such
proof, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a
penalty) CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER One Hundred dollars ($
100.00 ) for each day that expires after the time specified in paragraph 3.1 for Substantial
Completion until the Work is substantially complete. After Substantial Completion if
CONTRACTOR shall neglect, refuse or fail to complete the remaining Work within the
Contract Time or any proper extension thereof granted by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shallpay
OWNER One Hundred dollars ($ 100.00) for each day that expires after
the time specified in paragraph 3.1 for completion and readiness for final payment.
Article 4. CONTRACT PRICE.
4.1. OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR for completion of the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents in current funds as follows:
Base Bid
$849,756.00
Add Alternates
Deductive Alternates
$0.00
Total Contract Amount
$849,756.00
Article 5. PAYMENT PROCEDURES.
CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 14 of the General
Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by ENGINEER as provided in the General
Conditions.
5.1. Progress Payments. OWNER shall make progress payments on account of the Contract
Price on the basis of CONTRACTOR's Applications for Payment as recommended by
ENGINEER, on or about the 15th day of each month during construction as provided
below. All progress payments will be on the basis of the progress ofthe Work measured by the
schedule of values established in paragraph 2.9 of the General Conditions (and in the case of
Unit Price Work based on the number of units completed) or, in the event there is no schedule
of values, as provided in the General Requirements.
5.1.1. Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an amount
equal to the percentage indicated below, but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments
previously made and less such amounts as ENGINEER shall determine, or OWNER may
-2-
K:\4201 03\AOMINlSPECSlFRONT\ 191 0.8A 1.0OC
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
withhold, in accordance with paragraph 14.7 of the General Conditions.
If Work has been 50% completed as determined by ENGINEER, and if the
character and progress of the Work have been satisfactory to OWNER and
ENGINEER, OWNER on recommendation of ENGINEER, may determine that as
long as the character and progress of the Work remain satisfactory to them, there
will be no additional retain age on account of Work completed in which case the
remaining progress payments prior to Substantial Completion will be in an amount
equal to 100% of the Work completed.
5.1.2. Upon Substantial Completion, in an amount sufficient to increase total payments
to CONTRACTOR to 95 % of the Contract Price, less such amounts as ENGINEER
shall determine, or OWNER may withhold, in accordance with paragraph 14.7 of the
General Conditions.
5.2. Final Payment. Upon [mal completion and acceptance of the \-Vork in accordance with
paragraph 14.13 of the General Conditions, OWNER shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as
recommended by ENGINEER as provided in said paragraph 14.13.
Article 6. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS.
In order to induce OWNER to enter into this Agreement CONTRACTOR makes the following
representations:
6.1. CONTRACTOR has familiarized itself with the nature and extent of the Contract
Documents, Work, site, locality, and all local conditions and Laws and Regulations that in any
manner may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work.
6.2. CONTRACTOR has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for
obtaining and carefully studying) all such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests,
reports and studies which pertain to the subsurface or physical conditions at or contiguous to
the site or otherwise may affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work as
CONTRACTOR considers necessary for the performance or furnishing of the Work at the
Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions
of the Contract Documents, including specifically the provisions of paragraph 4.2 of the
General Conditions; and no additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports,
studies or similar information or data are or will be required by CONTRACTOR for such
purposes.
6.3. CONTRACTOR has reviewed and checked all information and data shown or indicated
on the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to
the site and assumes responsibility for the accurate location of said Underground Facilities. No
additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, studies or similar
-3-
K:\4201 03lAOMINlSPECS\FRON1\ 191 0.8A 1.DOC
information or data in respect of said Underground Facilities are or will be required by
CONTRACTOR in order to perform and furnish the Work at the Contract Price, within the
Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract
Documents, including specifically the provisions of paragraph 4.3 of the General Conditions.
6.4. CONTRACTOR has correlated the results of all such observations, examinations,
investigations, explorations, tests, reports and studies with the terms and conditions of the
Contract Documents.
6.5. CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors or
discrepancies that he has discovered in the Contract Documents and the written resolution
thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to CONTRACTOR.
Article 7. CONTRACT DOClTh'IENTS.
The Contract Documents which comprise the entire agreement between OWNER and
CONTRACTOR concerning the Work consist of the following but not limited to:
7.1. This Agreement (pages 1 to 7 , inclusive).
7.2. Exhibits to this Agreement
7.3. Performance and Payment Bonds
7.4. Notice of Award.
7.5. General Conditions (pages I to 29 inclusive) .
7.6. Supplementary Conditions (pages I to 3, inclusive).
7.7. Specifications consisting of Divisions 1,23,4,5,6, 7, 8,9, 10, 15 and 16, as listed in
table of contents thereof.
7.8. Drawings, consisting of a cover sheet and sheets numbered CS.I through E-4 inclusive
with each sheet bearing the following general title:
CS.1
A-I.l
A-2.1
A-3.1
Cover Sheet
Legends and Schedules
Floor Plan and Plan Details
Roof Plan, Details and Legend, Reflected Ceiling Plan, Details and
Legend
Enlarged Plans, Interior Elevations and Schedules
Exterior Elevations
Door and Frame Types and Details
A-4.1
A-5.1
A-6.1
-4-
K;\4201031A0MINlSPECSU'RONl\ 191 0.8A 1.DOC
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A-6.2
A-7.1
A-7.2
A-8.l
A-8.2
A-8.3
C-O
C-l
C-2
C-2.l
C-3
C-3.l
C-3.2
S-l
S-2
S-3
P-l
P-2
P-3
M-l
,:M-2
E-O
E-l
E-2
E-3
E-4
Window Types and Details, Mezzanine Access Details
Building Sections
Building Sections
Wall Sections and Miscellaneous Details
Wall Sections and Miscellaneous Details
Wall Sections and Miscellaneous Details
Topographic Survey & Demolition Plan
Layout and Utility Plan
Grading, Drainage and Erosion Control Plan
Erosion & Sediment Control Notes and Details
Miscellaneous Details
Miscellaneous Details
Miscellaneous Details
Foundation and Slab Plan
Roof Framing Plan
Structural Sections and Details
Waste & Roof Drain Piping Plans
Potable Water Piping Plan
Plumbing Schedules and Details
HV AC Plan
HV AC Schedules and Details
Electrical Site Plan
Lighting Plan
Power and Signal Plan
Electrical Details
Electrical Details
7.9. Addenda number, inclusive.
7.10. CONTRACTOR's Bid (pages I to 5, inclusive).
7.11. The following which may be delivered or issued after the Effective Date of the
Agreement and are not attached hereto: All Written Amendments and other documents
amending, modifying, or supplementing the Contract Documents pursuant to paragraphs 3.4
and 3.5 of the General Conditions.
7.12. The documents listed in paragraphs 8.2 et seq. above are attached to this Agreement
(except as expressly noted otherwise above).
-5-
K:I420103\A0MlN\SPECS\FRONT\ 1910.8A I.DOC
There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 8. The Contract
Documents may only be amended, modified or supplemented as provided in paragraphs 3.4 and 3.5
of the General Conditions.
Article 8. MISCELLANEOUS.
8.1. Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in Article I of the General Conditions
will have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions.
8.2. No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract
Documents will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party
sought to be bound; and specifically but without limitation moneys that may become due and
moneys that are due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the
effect ofthis restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in
any written consent to an assignment no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from
any duty or responsibility under the Contract Documents.
8.3. OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns and legal
representatives to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns and legal
representatives in respect of all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the
Contract Documents.
Article 9. OTHER PROVISIONS.
9.1 GEORGIA PROMPT PAY ACT
This agreement is intended by the parties to, and does, supercede any and all provisions
of the Georgia Prompt Pay Act, O.c.G.A. ~ 13-11-1, et seq. In the event any provision of
this Agreement is inconsistent with any provision ofthe Prompt Pay Act, the provisions
of this Agreement shall control.
9.2 CONSENT TO JURISDICTION
All claims, disputes and other matters in question between the OWNER and the
CONTRACTOR arising out of or related to the Agreement, or the breach thereof, shall
be decided in the Superior Court of Richmond County, Georgia. The Contractor, by
executing this Agreement, specifically consents to venue in Richmond County and
waives any right to contest the venue in the Superior Court of Richmond County,
Georgia.
-6-
K:\4201 O3IAOMlNlSPECSIFRONTI 191 0.8A 1.00c
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
9.3 RETAlNAGE
Notwithstanding any provision of the law to the contrary, the parties agree that no
interest shall be due CONTRACTOR on any sum held as retainage pursuant to this
Agreement and CONTRACTOR specifically waives any claim to same.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, OWNER and CONTRACTOR have signed this Agreement in triplicate. One
counterpart each has been delivered to OWNER, CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER. All portions of the
Contract Documents have been signed or identified by OWNER and CONTRACTOR or by ENGINEER on
their behalf.
This Agreement will be effective on March 29. 2002.
OWNER Angnsta-Ri,hmond Conntv commi,,;oo(6-
Inc.
r;:n
Address for giving notices
. ...... _'7"
..; ::.""~
""'---. " -
-
"'--
[CORPORATE SEAL]
- .
.....:..--;..7 ~
Attest
Attest
Addr ss for giving tices
:j;~s~~ ~~I
License No. bttr10 .;(.(;} 1& '3 7
If CONTRACTOR is a corporation, attach
evidence of authority to sign.)
-7-
1<;14201 O3IAOMlNlSPECSlFRON1\191 0.8A 1.DOC
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
NOTICE OF AWARD
Date:
TO:
(Bidder)
ADDRESS:
PROJECT: McBean Community Center
ENGINEER'S PROJECT NO
42.0103
CONTRACT FOR
You are notified that your Bid dated for the above Contract has been
considered. You are the apparent successful bidder and have been awarded a contract for the Base
Bid.
The Contract Price of your contract is
Three (3) copies of each of the proposed Contract Documents (including Drawings) accompany this
Notice of Award.
You must comply with the following conditions precedent within fifteen days of the date of this
Notice of Award, that is by
-1-
1<;\4201 03\ADMINlSPECSlFRONTI 191 O.22.DOC
-2-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I. You must deliver to the OWNER three fully executed counterparts of the Agreement including
all the Contract Documents. This includes the triplicate sets of Drawings. Each ofthe Contract
Documents must bear your signature on the cover of the specifications and every page of the
Drawings.
2. You must deliver with the executed Agreement the Contract Security (Bonds) as specified in
the Instructions to Bidders (paragraph 16), General Conditions (paragraph 5.1) and
Supplementary Conditions (paragraph SC-4).
General Contractors of America.
3. (List other conditions precedent).
Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified will entitle OWNER to consider
your bid abandoned, to annul this Notice of Award and to declare your Bid Security forfeited.
Within ten days after you comply with those conditions, OWNER will return to you one fully signed
counterpart of the Agreement with the Contract Documents attached.
Augusta-Richmond County Commission
(Owner)
By:
Authorized Signature)
Charles J. Johnson, P.E. - Project Engineer
(Title)
Copy to ENGINEER
(Use Certified Mail,
Return Receipt Requested
or Hand Deliver)
K:\4201 O3lADMINlSPECSIFRDN1\ 191 O.22.DOC
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
NOTICE TO PROCEED
Dated
TO:
( Contractor)
ADDRESS:
PROJECT: McBean Community Center
ENGINEER'S PROJECT NO
42.0103
CONTRACT FOR Construction of the McBean Community Center and all other
improvements as deshmed and detailed in the construction drawin2:s and specifications.
You are notified that the Contract Time under the above contract will commence to run on 02/01102.
By that date, you are to start performing your obligations under the Contract Documents. In
accordance with Article 3 of the Agreement, the dates of Substantial Completion and Pinal
Completion are 210 Days and 240 Days after this notice to proceed respectively.
Before you may start any Work at the site, paragraph 2.7 of the General Conditions provides that you
must each deliver to the owner (with copies to ENGINEER) certificates of insurance which each is
required to purchase and maintain in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Augusta-Richmond County Commission
(Owner)
By:
Authorized Signature)
Charles J. Johnson, P.E. - Project Engineer
(Title)
K:\4201 03\ADMIN\SPECS\FRONl\ 191 0.23.DOC
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT NO.
To:
Augusta-Richmond County Board of Commissioners
(OWNER)
Contract for: Construction of the McBean Community Center
ENGINEER's Project No: 42.0103
For Work accomplished through the date of
ITEM CONTRACTOR's Schedule of Values Work Completed
Unit Price Quantity Amount Quantity Amount
$ $ $
$
$
Total
(Orig. Contract)
C. O. No.1
C. O. No.2
Accompanying Documentation:
GROSS AMOUNT DUE.............................. $
LESS % RETAINAGE................................. $
AMOUNT DUE TO DATE.......................... $
LESS PREVIOUS PAYMENTS .................. $
AMOUNT DUE THIS APPLICATION....... $
CONTRACTOR'S Certification:
The undersigned CONTRACTOR certifies that (I) all previous progress payments received from OWNER on account of
Work done under the Contract referred to above have been applied to discharge in full all obligations of CONTRACTOR
incurred in connection with Work covered by prior Applications for Payment numbered I through
inclusive; and (2) title to all materials and equipment incorporated in said Work or otherwise listed in or covered by this
Application for Payment will pass to OWNER at time of payment free and clear of all liens, claims, security interests and
encumbrances (except such as covered by Bond acceptable to OWNER).
Dated:
Contractor
By:
Payment of the above AMOUNT DUE THIS APPLICATION is recommended.
Dated:
JOHNSON,LASCHOBER & ASSOCIATES, P.c., Engineer
By:
-1-
K:\4201 OJlAdminlSpecs\Fronfi 191 0.8E.doc
I
APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
INSTRUCTIONS
I
A. GENERAL INFORMATION
I
This standard form is intended as a guide only. Many projects require a much more extensive form with space for
numerous items, descriptions of Change Orders, identification of variable quantity adjustments, summary of materials and
equipment stored at the site and other information. It is expected that a separate form will be developed by Engineer or
Contractor at the time Contractor's Schedule of Values is fmalized. Note also that the format for retain age must be
changed if the Agreement permits (or the Law provides), and Contractor elects, the deposit of securities in lieu of retain
age. Refer to Article 14 of the General Conditions for provisions concerning payments to Contractor.
I
B. COMPLETING THE FORM
I
The Schedule of Values, submitted and approved as provided in paragraphs 2.6.3 and 2.9 of the General Conditions,
should be copied in the space indicated on the Application For Payment form. Note that the cost of materials and
equipment is often listed separately from the cost of their installation. All Change Orders affecting the Contract Price
should be identified and include such supplemental Schedules of Values as required for progress payments.
I
The form is suitable for use in the Final Application for Payment as well as for Progress Payments; however, the required
accompanying documentation is usually more extensive for final payment. All accompanying documentation should be
identified in the space provided on the form.
I
C . ENGINEER'S REVIEW
I
Engineer must review all Applications for Payment with care to avoid recommending any payments not yet earned by
Contractor. All accompanying documentation of legal nature, such as lien waivers, should be reviewed by an attorney,
and Engineer should so advise Owner.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
K:\4201 03lAdrrin\Specs\Fron~ 191 0.8E.doc
I
-2-
I
I
I
I
CHANGE ORDER
No. 001
PROJECT: McBean Community Center
OWNER: Augusta-Richmond County Board
of Commissioners
DATE OF ISSUANCE:
CONTRACTOR:
ENGINEER: Johnson, Laschober & Associates, P.C.
I CONTRACT FOR: McBean Community
ENGINEER's Project No. 42.0103
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
You are directed to make the following changes in the Contract Documents.
Description:
Purpose of Change Order: McBean Community Center Improvements
Attachments: (List documents supporting change)
CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE:
CHANGE IN CONTRACT TIME:
Original Contract Price
Original Contract Time
$
Previous Change Orders No. --L to No. ~
$ 0 00
Net change from previous Change Orders
Contract Price prior to this Change Order
Contract Time Prior to this Change Order
c;;
Net Increase (decrease) of this Change Order
Order
Net Increase (decrease) of this Change
$
Contract Price with all approved Change Orders
Contract Time with all approved Change Orders
$
RECOMMENDED:
APPROVED:
APPROVED:
by
by
by
Engineer
Owner
Contractor
-1-
1<;\42Q1 03IADMINlSPECSlFRONn 191 O.88.DOC
I
CHANGE ORDER
INSTRUCTIONS
I
A. GENERALINFO~ATION
I
.This document was developed to provide a uniform format for handling contract changes that affect Contract Price or
Contract Time. Changes that have been initiated by a Work Directive Change must be incorporated into a subsequent
Change Order if they affect Price or Time.
Changes that affect Contract Price or Contract Time should be promptly covered by a Change Order. The practice of
accumulating change order items to reduce the administrative burden may lead to wmecessary disputes.
For supplemental instructions and minor changes not involving a change in the Contract Price or Contract Time. a Field
Order may be used.
I
I
B. COMPLETING THE CHANGE ORDER FO~
I
Engineer initiates the form, including a description of the changes involved and attachments based upon documents and
proposals submitted by Contractor, or requests from Owner, or both.
Once Engineer has completed and signed the form, all copies should be sent to Contractor for approval. After approval
by Contractor, all copies should be sent to Owner for approval. Engineer should make distribution of executed copies
after approval by Owner.
If a change only applies to price or to time, cross out the part of the tabulation that does not apply.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
K:I4201 03\ADMIm;PECSlFRorm 1910.88. DOC
I
-2-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
ENGINEER's Project No: 42.0103
Project: McBean Community Center
CONTRACTOR Contract Date
Contract For
Construction of Proposed Improvements for McBean Community Center
AUl!usta-Richmond County, GA
This Certificate of Substantial Completion applies to all Work under the Contract Documents or to
the following specified parts thereof:
Construction of the new McBean Community Center and all associated site
improvements as designed and specified in the contract documents.
To: AUl!usta-Richmond County Commission
(OWNER)
And To:
(CONTRACTOR)
The Work to which this Certificate applies has been inspected by authorized representatives of
OWNER, CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER, and that Work is hereby declared to be substantially
complete in accordance with the Contract Documents
210 Days After Notice To Proceed
Date of Substantial Completion
-1-
K:\4201 03lADMINlSPECSlFRONT\191 0.8D.DOC
A tentative list of items to be completed or corrected is attached hereto. This list may not be all
inclusive, and the failure to include an item in it does not alter the responsibility of CONTRACTOR
to complete all the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The items in the tentative list
shall be completed or corrected by CONTRACTOR by
The responsibilities between OWNER and CONTRACTOR for security, operation, safety,
maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance and warranties shall be as follows:
RESPONSIBILITIES:
OWNER:
CONTRACTOR:
The following documents are attached to and made a part of this Certificate:
This certificate does not constitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract
Documents nor is it a release of CONTRACTOR's obligation to complete the Work in accordance
with the Contract Documents.
Executed by ENGINEER on
JOHNSON, LASCHOBER & ASSOCIATES, P.c.
By
ENGINEER
CONTRACTOR accepts this Certificate of Substantial Completion on
CONTRACTOR
By
OWNER accepts this Certificate of Substantial Completion on
OWNER
-2-
1<;\4201 03lADMINlSPECS\FRONT\ 191 0.8D.DOC
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
BID BOND
BIDDER (Name and Address):
SURETY (Name and Address of Principal Place of Business):
OWNER (Name and Address):
BID
BID DUE DATE:
PROJECT (Brief Description Including Location):
BOND
BOND NUMBER:
DATE (Not later than Bid due date):
PENAL SUM:
(Words)
(Figures)
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Surety and Bidder, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms printed on
the reverse side hereof, do each cause this Bid Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent,
or representative.
BIDDER
SURETY
(Seal)
(Seal)
Bidde(s Name and Corporate Seal
Surety's Name and Corporate Seal
By:
By:
Signature and Title
Signature and Title
(Attach Power of Attorney)
Attest:
Attest:
Signature and Title
Signature and Title
Note:
(1 )
(2)
Above addresses are to be used for giving required notice.
Any singular reference to Bidder, Surety, OWNER or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.
00411-1
K:\4201 03lAdrrinlSpecs\Fronfi 191 0-28D.DOC
1. Bidder and Surety, jointly and severally, bind
themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators,
successors and assigns to pay to OWNER upon default of
Bidder any difference between the total amount of
Bidders Bid and the total amount of the Bid of the next
lowest, responsible and responsive Bidder as determined
by OWNER for the Work required by the Contract
Documents, provided that:
1.1. If there is no such next lowest, responsible and
responsive Bidder, and OWNER does not abandon the
Project, then Bidder and Surety shall pay to OWNER the
penal surn set forth on the face of this Bond, and
1.2. In no event shall Bidder's and Surety's
obligation hereunder exceed the penal sum set forth on
the face of this Bond.
2. Default of Bidder shall occur upon the failure of
Bidder to deliver within the time required by the Bidding
Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing
by OWNER) the executed Agreement required by the
Bidding Docurnents and any performance and payment
Bonds required by the Bidding Documents.
3. This obligation shall be null and void if:
3.1. OWNER accepts Bidder's Bid and Bidder
delivers within the time required by the Bidding
Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing
by OWNER) the executed Agreement required by the
Bidding Docurnents and any performance and payment
Bonds required by the Bidding Documents, or
3.2. All Bids are rejected by OWNER, or
3.3. OWNER fails to issue a Notice of Award to
Bidder within the time specified in the Bidding
Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing
by Bidder and, if applicable, consented to by Surety
when required by paragraph 5 hereof).
4. Payment under this Bond will be due and payable
upon default by Bidder and within 30 calendar days after
receipt by Bidder and Surety of written notice of default
from OWNER, which notice will be given with
reasonable promptness, identifying this Bond and the
Project and including a statement of the amount due.
5. Surety waives notice of and any and all defenses based
on or arising out of any time extension to issue Notice of
Award agreed to in writing by OWNER and Bidder,
provided that the total time for issuing Notice of Award
including extensions shall not in the aggregate exceed
120 days from Bid due date without Surety's written
consent.
6. No suit or action shall be corrunenced under this Bond
prior to 30 calendar days after the notice of default
required in paragraph 4 above is received by Bidder and
I
DAMAGES FORM
I
Surety and in no case later than one year after Bid due
date.
I
7. Any suit or action under this Bond shall be
commenced only in a court of competent jurisdiction
located in the state in which the Project is located.
I
8. Notices required hereunder shall be in writing and sent
to Bidder and Surety at their respective addresses shown
on the face of this Bond. Such notices may be sent by
personal delivery, corrunercial courier or by United States
Registered or Certified Mail, return receipt requested,
postage pre-paid, and shall be deemed to be effective
upon receipt by the party concerned.
I
I
9. Surety shall cause to be attached to this Bond a
current and effective Power or Attomey evidencing the
authority of the officer, agent or representative who
executed this Bond on behalf of Surety to execute, seal
and deliver such Bond and bind the Surety thereby.
I
I
10. This Bond is intended to conform to all applicable
statutory requirements. Any applicable requirement of
any applicable statute that has been omitted from this
Bond shall be deemed to be included herein as if set forth
at length. If any provision of this Bond conflicts with any
applicable statute, then the provision of said statute shall
govem and the remainder of this Bond that is not in
conflict therewith shall continue in full force and effect.
I
I
11. The term "Bid" as used herein includes a Bid, offer
or proposal as applicable.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
00411-2
I
K:\4201 03\Admin\Specs\Fron~ 191 D-28D.DOC
I
I
I
I
I.
1
1
I
I
I
1
I
I
1
I
I.
I
I
I
PERFORMANCE BOND
That
(Legal Title and Address of the Contractor)
as Principal (hereinafter referred to as "Principal"), and
(Legal Name and Address of the Surety)
as Surety (hereinafter referred to as "Surety"), are held and fmnly bound unto
(Owner Name and Address)
as Obligee (hereinafter referred to as "Owner") for the use and benefit of claimants defmed, hereinafter in the
amount of:
DOLLARS ($
(Contract Price)
to which payment Principal and Surety bind themselves, their hears, executors, administrators, successors and
assigns jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, the above bounded Principal has entered into a contract with Owner dated
for
(Name of Work)
in accordance with the drawings and specifications prepared by:
(Isert Full Name and Title)
which contract is incorporated herein by reference and made a part hereof, and is hereinafter referred to as the
Contract.
NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that, if the Contractor shall promptly and
faithfully perform and comply with the terms and conditions of said contract; and shall indemnify and save harmless
the Owner against and from all cost, expenses, damages, injury or loss to which said Owner may be subjected by
reason of any wrongdoing, including patent infringement, misconduct, want of care or skill, default or failure of
performance on the part of said Principal, his agents, subcontractors or employees, in the execution or performance
of said contract, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect.
(1) The said Surety to this bond, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change or changes,
extension of time or extensions of time, alteration or alterations or addition or additions to the terms of the
contract or to the work to be performed thereunder, or the specifications or drawings accompanying same
shall in any wise affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change or
changes, extension of time or extensions of time, alteration or alterations or addition or additions to the terms
of the contract or to the Work or to the specifications or drawings.
(2) If pursuant to the Contract Documents the Contractor shall be declared in default by the Owner under the
aforesaid Contract, the Surety may promptly perform the Contract in accordance with its terms and
conditions. It shall be the duty of the Surety to give an unequivocal notice in writing to the Owner within
twenty-five (25) days after receipt of a declaration of default of the Surety's election to either remedy the
PE-l
K:\4 201 03lAdminlSpecs\F rontIPeriormanceBo n d. doc
I
I
default or defaults promptly or to perform the contract promptly, time being of the essence. In said notice of
election, the Surety shall indicate the date on which the remedy or performance will commence, and it shall
then be the duty of the Surety to give prompt notice in writing to the Owner immediately upon completion of
(a) the remedy and/or correction of each default, (b) the remedy and/or correction or each item of condemned
work, (c) the furnishing of each omitted item of work, and (d) the performance of the contract. The Surety
shall not assert its Principal as justification for its failure to give notice of election or for its failure to
promptly remedy the default or defaults or perform the Contract.
I
I
(3) Supplementary to and in addition to the foregoing, whenever the Owner shall notify the Surety that the
Owner has notice that the Contractor has failed to pay any subcontractor, materialman, or laborer for labor or
materials certified by the Contractor as having been paid for by the Contractor in accordance with said
Contract, which said laborer or materials have been included in a periodical estimate and certified by the
Architect for payment and paid for by the Owner, the Surety shall, within 20 days of receipt of such notice,
cause to be paid any unpaid amounts for such labor and materials.
I
I
(4) It is expressly agreed by the Principal and the Surety that the Owner, is he desires to do so, is at liberty to
make inquiries at any time of sub-contractors, laborers, materialmen, or other parties concerning the status of
payments for labor, materials, or services furnished in the prosecution of the work.
I
(5) No right of action shall accrue on this bond to or for the use of any person or corporation other than the
Owner named herein or the legal successors of the Owner.
I
(6) For the purposes of this bond, the name and address of the Authorized State of Georgia Licensed Agent to
whom correspondence and telecommunications may be addressed and/or with whom business concerning this
bond may be conducted will be as follows:
I
I
Name
I
Address
City
State
Zip Code
I
Telephone Number
I
Signed and sealed this
In the presence of:
day of
AD,
I
Principal
I
Witness
(SEAL)
Title
,I
Witness
Surety
(SEAL)
I
Title
I
PE-2
I
K:\4201031AdrrinlSpecs\FrnnllPerformanceBond.doc
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PAYMENT BOND
THIS BOND IS EXECUTED TOGETHER WITH ANOTHER BOND IN FAVOR OF THE OWNER AS
OBLIGEE CONDITIONED UPON PERFORMANCE OF THE CONTRACT.
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
That
(Legal Title and Address of the Contractor)
as Principal (hereinafter referred to as "Principal"), and
(Legal Name and Address of the Surety)
as Surety (hereinafter referred to as "Surety"), are held and firmly bound unto
(Owner Name and Address)
as Obligee (hereinafter referred to as "Owner") for the use and benefit of claimants defined, hereinafter in the
amount of:
DOLLARS ($
(Contract Price)
to which payment Principal and Surety bind themselves, their hears, executors, administrators, successors and
assigns jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, the above bounded Principal has entered into a contract with Owner dated
for
(Insert Name of Work)
in accordance with the drawings and specifications prepared by:
(insert Full Name and Title)
which contract is incorporated herein by reference and made a part hereof, and is hereinafter referred to as the
Contract.
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that if the Principal shall promptly make
payment to all claimants as hereinafter defmed, for a1f labor and materials supplied in the prosecution of the work
provided for in said Contract, then this obligation shall be void, otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect
subject, however, to the following conditions:
(1) The said Surety to this bond, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change or changes,
extension of time or extensions of time, alteration or alterations or addition or additions to the tenns of the
contract or to the work to be performed thereunder, or the specifications or drawings accompanying same
shall in any wise affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change or
changes, extension of time or extensions of time, alteration or alterations or addition or additions to the terms
of the contract or to the Work or to the specifications or drawings.
(2) A claimant is defined as any subcontractor and any person supplying labor, materials, machinery or
equipment in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract.
(3) Every person entitled to the protection hereunder and who has not been paid in full for labor or materials
furnished in the prosecution of the work referred to in said bond before the expiration of a period of ninety
(90) days after the day on which the last of the labor was done or performed by him, or materials or
PA-l
K:\420103lAdmin\Specs\FrontIPaymentBond.doc
I
equipment or machinery was furnished or supplied by him for which claim is made, shall have the right to sue
on such payment bond for the amount, or the balance thereof, unpaid at the time of the commencement of
such action and to prosecute such action to fInal execution and judgement for the sum or sums due him,
provided, however, that any person having direct contractual relationship with a subcontract, but no
contractual relationship express or implied with the Contractor furnishing said payment bond upon giving
written notice to said contractor within ninety (90) days from the day on which such person did or performed
the last of the labor, or furnished the last of the materials or machinery or equipment for which such claim is
made stating with substantial accuracy the amount claimed and the name of the party to whom the materials
were furnished or supplied from whom the labor was performed or done; provided further that nothing
contained herein shall limit the right of action to said 90-day period. Notice may be served by the depositing
of a notice, registered mail, postage paid, duly addressed to the Contractor at any place he maintains an office
or conducts his business, or his residence, in any post offIce or branch post office or any letter box under the
control of the Post Office Department or notice may be served in any manner in which the sheriffs of Georgia
are authorized by law to serve sunnnons or process. Every suit instituted under this section shall be brought
in the name of the claimant without Owner being made a party thereof. The official who has custody of said
bond is authorized and directed to furnish, to any person making application thereof who submits an affidavit
that he has supplied labor or materials for such work and payment therefore has not been made, or that he is
being sued on any such bond, a copy of such bond and the contract for which it was given, certified, by the
official who has custody of said bond and contract shall be admitted in evidence without further proof.
Applicants shall pay for such certified statements and such fees as the official fixes to cover the cost of
preparation thereof, but in no case shall the fee which the clerks of the superior courts are permitted to charge
for similar copies.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
(4) No action can be instituted on this bond after one year from the date of the [mal certificate of the Architect.
(5) Further, this bond shall be considered the same as a bond furnished under O.C.G.A. Section 13-10-1 &
Section 36-82-101, et. seq.
I
(6) F or the purposes of this bond, the name and address of the Authorized State of Georgia Licensed Agentto
whom correspondence and telecommunications may be addressed and/or with whom business concerning this
bond may be conducted will be as follows:
I
Name
I
Add ress
I
City
State
Zip Code
I
Telephone Number
AD,
I
Signed and sealed this
In the presence of:
day of
Principal
I
Witness
(SEAL)
Title
I
Surety
I
Witness
(SEAL)
Title
I
PA-2
I
K:\420103\AdminlSpecs\FronWaymentBond.doc
I
I
I
SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
1.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.2
I
I
I
I
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A.
The Project consists of the construction of the New McBean Community Center and all associated site
improvements.
1. Project Location: Hephzibah-McBean Road, Richmond County, GA
2. Owner: Richmond County Board of Commissioners, Augusta, GA
3. Contract Documents, dated December, 2001 were prepared for the Project by Johnson, Laschober
and Associates, P.c..
B.
The Work consists of construction of a new community center.
1.
The Work includes :
a. Construction of a new community center building.
b. New asphalt driveway, parking and concrete sidewalks
c. New playground fencing
d. Construction of an asphalt walking track
e. Site work including septic tank and drain field installation, potable and fire water utilities,
storm drainage and other site utilities
C.
The Work will be constructed under a single prime contract.
CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES
A.
General: During the construction period the Contractor shall have LIMITED use of the premises for
construction operations, including use of the site. The Contractor's use of the premises is limited only by
the Owner's right to perform work or to CONTINUE OPERATIONS OF THE PARK.
B.
Use of the Site: Limit use of the premises to work in areas indicated. Comme operations to areas within
contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of the site beyond the areas in which the Wark is indi-
cated.
1. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and available
to the Owner, the Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas
for parking or storage of materials. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements
for storage of materials and equipment on-site.
END OF SECTION 01010
I
I
I
I
SUMMARY OF WORK
01010 - 1
I
I
SECTION 01027 - APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
1.1
SUM:MARY
I
A.
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's Applica-
tions for Payment.
I
B.
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing each prime contractor's Ap-
plications for Payment.
I
1.
I
1.2
Coordinate the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment with the Contractor's Construc-
tion Schedule, Submittal Schedule, and List of Subcontracts.
A.
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of the Contractor's
Construction Schedule.
I
1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative schedules and
forms, including:
I
I
2.
I
B.
a.
b.
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Application for Payment forms, including Continuation Sheets.
List of subcontractors.
Schedule of submittals.
c.
d.
Submit the Schedule of Values to the Engineer at the earliest possible date but no later than 7 days
before the date scheduled for submittal of the initial Applications for Payment.
Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish the format for the
Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
I
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:
I
I
2.
I
I
I
I
a.
b.
Project name and location.
Name of the Engineer.
Project number.
Contractor's name and address.
Date of submittal.
c.
d.
e.
Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following
for each item listed:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Related Specification Section or Division.
Description of Work.
Name of subcontractor.
Name of manufacturer or fabricator.
Name of supplier.
Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.
e.
f.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01027 - 1
I
I
g. Dollar value.
1)
Percentage of Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100
percent.
I
3.
Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate continued evaluation of
Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of con-
tents. Break principal subcontract amounts down into several line items.
Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; the total shall equal the Contract Sum
Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applica-
tions for Payment may include materials or equipment, purchased or fabricated and stored, but not
yet installed.
I
4.
5.
I
a.
Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Include requirements
for insurance and bonded warehousing, if required.
I
6.
Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values prior to the next Applications
for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the
Contract Sum.
I
I
1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by
the Engineer and paid for by the Owner.
I
1.
The initial Application for Payment, the Application for Payment at time of Substantial Comple-
tion, and the [mal Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
I
Payment-Application Times: Each progress-payment date is indicated in the Agreement. The period of
construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
I
Payment-Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and Continuation Sheets G703 as the form for
Applications for Payment.
I
Application Preparation: Complete every entry on the form. Include notarization and execution by a per-
son authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of the Contractor. The Engineer will return incomplete
applications without action.
I
1.
Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and the Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued prior to the last day
of the construction period covered by the application.
I
2.
Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to the Engi-
neer by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall be complete, including waivers of lien
and similar attachments, when required.
I
1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate informa-
tion related to the application, in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.
I
Waivers of Mechanics Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanics liens
from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors and suppliers for the construction period covered by the previous
application.
I
I
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01027 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
G.
I
I
I
I
H.
I
I
I
I
I
1.
I
I
I
I
1.
Submit partial waivers on each item for the amount requested, prior to deduction for retainage, on
each item.
When an application shows completion of an item, submit fma1 or full waivers.
The Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waiv-
ers.
Waiver Delays: Submit each Application for Payment with the Contractor's waiver of mechanics
lien for the period of construction covered by the application.
2.
3.
4.
a.
Submit final Applications for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity
involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled
to a lien.
5.
Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, and executed in a manner, acceptable to the
Owner.
Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals, that must precede or coincide
with submittal of the fIrst Application for Payment, include the following:
1. List of subcontractors.
2. List of principal suppliers and fabricators.
3. Schedule of Values.
4. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not fmal).
5. Submittal Schedule (preliminary if not fmal).
6. Initial progress report.
7. Report of pre construction meeting.
8. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
9. Performance and payment bonds.
Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following issuance of the Certificate of Substantial
Completion, submit an Application for Payment.
1. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for
Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
2. Administrative actions and submittals that shall precede or coincide with this application include:
a. Occupancy permits and similar approvals.
b. Warranties (guarantees) and maintenance agreements.
c. TesUadjust/balance records.
d. Maintenance instructions.
e. Final cleaning.
f. Application for reduction of retain age and consent of surety.
g. Advice on shifting insurance coverages.
h. List of incomplete Work, recognized as exceptions to Engineer's Certificate of Substantial
Completion.
Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with
submittal of the final Application for Payment include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Completion of Project closeout requirements.
Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion.
Ensure that unsettled claims will be settled.
Ensure that incomplete Work is not accepted and will be completed without undue delay.
Transmittal of required Project construction records to the Owner.
Removal of temporary facilities and services.
Removal of surplus materials, rubbish, and similar elements.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01027 - 3
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01027 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
8. Change of door locks to Owner's access.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01027
I
I
SECTION 01200 - PROJECT MEETINGS
I
PART 1- GENERAL
I
1.1
I
I
I
1.2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SUMMARY
A.
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project meetings, including, but not
limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
Preconstruction conferences.
Progress meetings.
Coordination meetings.
PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A.
Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to the Owner and
the Engineer, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at the Pro-
ject Site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel as-
signments.
B.
Attendees: Authorized representatives of the Owner, Engineer, and their consultants; the Contractor and
its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall at-
tend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to
conclude matters relating to the Work.
C.
Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:
1. Tentative construction schedule.
2. Critical work sequencing.
3. Designation of responsible personnel.
4. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
5. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
6. Distribution of Contract Documents.
7. Submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.
8. Preparation of record documents.
9. Use of the premises.
10. Parking availability.
11. Office, work, and storage areas.
12. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
13. Safety procedures.
14. First aid.
15. Security.
16. Housekeeping.
17. Working hours.
I
1.3 PROGRESS :MEETINGS
A.
Conduct progress meetings at the Project Site at regular intervals. Notify the Owner and the Engineer of
scheduled meeting dates. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of the payment request.
-
.
.
.
PROJECT :MEETINGS
01200 - 1
1.4
I
B.
Attendees: In addition to representatives of the Owner and the Engineer, each subcontractor, supplier, or
other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of fu-
ture activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar
with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
I
I
c.
Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous progress meeting. Review other items
of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to the status of the
Project.
I
1.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine where
each activity is in relation to the Contractor's Construction Schedule, whether on time or ahead or
behind schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure com-
mitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to in-
sure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
Review the present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
I
I
2.
a.
b.
Interface requirements.
Time.
Sequences.
Status of submittals.
Deliveries.
Off-site fabrication problems.
Access.
Site utilization.
Temporary facilities and services.
Hours of work.
Hazards and risks.
Housekeeping.
Quality and work standards.
Change Orders.
Documentation of information for payment requests.
I
c.
d.
I
e.
f.
g.
h.
I
1.
J.
k.
1.
m.
n.
o.
I
I
D.
Reporting: No later than 3 days after each meeting, distribute minutes of the meeting to each party pre-
sent and to parties who should have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress
since the previous meeting and report.
I
1.
Schedule Updating: Revise the Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting
where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue the revised schedule concur-
rently with the report of each meeting.
I
COORDINATION MEETINGS
I
A.
Conduct project coordination meetings at regular intervals convenient for all parties involved. Project
coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as regular pro-
gress meetings.
I
B.
Request representation at each meeting by every party currently involved in coordination or planning for
the construction activities involved.
I
C.
Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions
or actions resulting from each meeting.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
I
PROJECT MEETINGS
01200 - 2
I
I
I PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
I END OF SECTION 01200
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
.
.
. PROJECT MEETINGS 01200 - 3
.
I
I
I
SECTION 01230 - ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
I
1.1
I
I
I
1.2
1.3
I
I
I
I
I
1.4
I
I
I
I
I
I
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi-
tions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defmed
in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if
Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be
completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described
in the Contract Documents.
1.
The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract
Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Con-
tract Sum.
PROCEDURES
A.
Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate
work of the alternate into Project.
I. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar
items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part
of alternate.
B.
Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in VVTit-
ing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or de-
ferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to al-
ternates.
c.
Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.
D.
Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sec-
tions referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work
described under each alternate.
AL TERNA TES
01230 - I
ALTERNATES
01230-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E. Acceptance of Alternates and Determination of Low Bid: The Owner may accept any or all al-
ternates in any order as it most favorably affects the Owner and the Project. The Low Bid will
be determined based on Base Bid in the Bid Form and any Alternate that the Owner accepts
prior to signing the "STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND
CONTRACTOR ON THE BASIS OF A STIPULATED PRICE" .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A. Alternate No. I: Add for the construction of the clock tower and all associated materials and
equipment as designed and detailed in the construction drawings and specifications.
B. Alternate No.2: Add shrub and sod landscaping adjacent to the community center building-
complete with irrigation as designed and detailed in the construction drawings and specifica-
tions.
C. Alternate No.3: Add concrete sidewalk from the northwest parking lot along the entrance drive
to Hephzibah-McBean Road and along Hephzibah-McBean Road as designed and detailed in
the construction drawings and specifications.
END OF SECTION 01230
I
I
SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS
I
PART 1- GENERAL
I
1.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.2
I
I
I
I
A.
B.
A.
B.
C.
SUMMARY
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for performance
of the Work, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Contractor's construction schedule.
Submittal schedule.
Daily construction reports.
Shop Drawings.
Product Data.
Samples.
Quality assurance submittals.
Administrative Submittals: Refer to other Division 1 Sections and other Contract Documents for re-
quirements for administrative submittals. Such submittals include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Permits.
Applications for Payment.
Performance and payment bonds.
Insurance certificates.
List of subcontractors.
DEFINITIONS
Coordination Drawings show the relationship and integration of different construction elements that re-
quire careful coordination during fabrication or installation to fit in the space provided or to function as
intended.
1.
Preparation of Coordination Drawings is specified in Division 1 Section "Coordination" and may
include components previously shown in detail on Shop Drawings or Product Data.
Field samples are full-size physical examples erected on-site to illustrate finishes, coatings, or finish ma-
terials. Field samples are used to establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.
Mockups are full-size assemblies for review of construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are
not Samples.
I
1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
I
.
I
A.
SUBMITTALS
Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction ac-
tivities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities
to avoid delay.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and re-
lated activities that require sequential activity.
01300 - 1
2.
3.
I
Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work so process-
ing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.
I
a. The Engineer reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination
with other submittals until all related submittals are received.
I
Processing: To avoid the need to delay installation as a result of the time required to process sub-
mittals, allow sufficient time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals.
I
a.
Allow 2 weeks for initial review. Allow additional time if the Engineer must delay proc-
essing to permit coordination with subsequent submittals.
If an intermediate submittal is necessary, process the same as the initial submittal.
Allow 2 weeks for reprocessing each submittal.
No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals
to the Engineer sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing.
I
b.
c.
d.
I
B.
Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. Indi-
cate the name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the label or title block.
I
1.
2.
Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches on the label or beside the title block on Shop Draw-
ings to record the Contractor's review and approval markings and the action taken.
Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action taken.
I
a.
b.
c.
d.
Project name.
Date.
Name and address of the Engineer.
Name and address of the Contractor.
Name and address of the subcontractor.
Name and address of the supplier.
Name of the manufacturer.
Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
I
I
e.
f.
g.
h.
I
1.
C.
Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each
submittal from the Contractor to the Engineer using a transmittal form. The Engineer will not accept
submittals received from sources other than the Contractor.
I
1.
On the transmittal, record relevant information and requests for data. On the form, or separate
sheet, record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including variations and limita-
tions. Include Contractor's certification that information complies with Contract Document re-
quirements.
I
I
1.4
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
I
A.
Bar-Chart Schedule: Prepare a fully developed, horizontal bar-chart-type, contractor's construction
schedule. Submit within 30 days after the date established for "Commencement of the Work."
I
1. Provide a separate time bar for each significant construction activity. Provide a continuous verti-
calline to identify the first working day of each week. Use the same breakdown of units of the
Work as indicated in the "Schedule of Values."
2. Within each time bar, indicate estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments. As
Work progresses, place a contrasting mark in each bar to indicate Actual Completion.
3. Prepare the schedule on a sheet, or series of sheets, of stable transparency, or other reproducible
media, of sufficient width to show data for the entire construction period.
I
I
SUB:MITIALS 01300 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4.
Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Wark from parties involved.
Coordinate each element on the schedule with other construction activities; include minor ele-
ments involved in the sequence of the Work. Show each activity in proper sequence. Indicate
graphically the sequences necessary for completion of related portions of the Work.
Coordinate the Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcon-
tracts, Submittal Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other schedules.
Indicate completion in advance of the date established for Substantial Completion. Indicate Sub-
stantial Completion on the schedule to allow time for the Engineer's procedures necessary for cer-
tification of Substantial Completion.
5.
6.
B.
Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including
submittal review, testing, and installation.
c.
Area Separations: Provide a separate time bar to identify each major construction area for each major
portion of the Work. Indicate where each element in an area must be sequenced or integrated with other
activities.
D.
Cost Correlation: At the head of the schedule, provide a cost correlation line, indicating planned and ac-
tual costs. On the line, show dollar volume of Work performed as of the dates used for preparation of
payment requests.
E.
Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the Engineer,
Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with scheduled dates
1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete
parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no
longer involved in construction activities.
F.
Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting, event, or activity where revisions have been
recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
1.5 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
I
I
A.
After development and acceptance of the Contractor's Construction Schedule, prepare a complete sched-
ule of submittals. Submit the schedule within 10 days of the date required for submittal of the Contrac-
tor's Construction Schedule.
1. Coordinate Submittal Schedule with the list of subcontracts, Schedule of Values, and the list of
products as well as the Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Prepare the schedule in chronological order. Provide the following information:
a. Scheduled date for the fIrst submittal.
b. Related Section number.
c. Submittal category (Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples).
d. Name of the subcontractor.
e. Description of the part of the Work covered.
f. Scheduled date for resubmittal.
g. Scheduled date for the Engineer's final release or approval.
B.
Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the Engineer,
Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with submittal dates indicated. Post copies
in the Project meeting room and field office.
SUB MITT ALS
01300 - 3
C.
1.6
A.
1.7
A.
B.
1.8
SUBMITTALS
I
1.
When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete
parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no
longer involved in construction activities.
I
I
Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity where revisions have been recog-
nized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
I
DAILY CONSTRUCTION REPORTS
I
Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at the site, and
submit duplicate copies to the Engineer at weekly intervals:
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
List of subcontractors at the site.
Approximate count of personnel at the site.
High and low temperatures, general weather conditions.
Accidents and unusual events.
Meetings and significant decisions.
Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
Meter readings and similar recordings.
Emergency procedures.
Orders and requests of governing authorities.
Change Orders received, implemented.
Services connected, disconnected.
Equipment or system tests and startups.
Partial Completions, occupancies.
Substantial Completions authorized.
I
I
I
I
SHOP DRAWINGS
I
Submit newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate
deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard infor-
mation as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the
Project is not a Shop Drawing.
I
Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation Drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, tem-
plates and similar Drawings. Include the following information:
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Dimensions.
Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number.
Compliance with specified standards.
Notation of coordination requirements.
Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full-size Drawings, submit Shop Drawings
on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 36 by 48 inches
Final Submittal: Submit 3 blue- or black-line prints; submit 5 prints where required for mainte-
nance manuals. The Engineer will retain 2 prints and return the remainder.
I
I
I
7.
8. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken.
I
PRODUCT DATA
I
01300 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.9
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Product Data in-
cludes printed information, such as manufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard color
charts, roughing-in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams, and performance curves.
1. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data includes in-
formation on several products that are not required, mark copies to indicate the applicable infor-
mation. Include the following information:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Manufacturer's printed reconunendations.
Compliance with trade association standards.
Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement.
Notation of coordination requirements.
2.
Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents has
been confirmed.
Submittals: Submit 2 copies of each required submittal; submit 4 copies where required for main-
tenance manuals. The Engineer will retain one and will return the other marked with action taken
and corrections or modifications required.
3.
a.
Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the submittal may
serve as the final submittal.
4.
Distribution: Furnish copies of fmal submittal to installers, subcontractors, suppliers, manufactur-
ers, fabricators, and others required for performance of construction activities. Show distribution
on transmittal forms.
a.
Do not proceed with installation until a copy of Product Data is in the Installer's posses-
SIOn.
Do not permit use of unmarked copies of Product Data in connection with construction.
b.
SAMPLES
A.
Submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with
the material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated compo-
nents, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture, and pattern.
1.
Mount or display Samples in the manner to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare Sam-
ples to match the Engineer's sample. Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Specification Section number and reference.
Generic description of the Sample.
Sample source.
Product name or name of the manufacturer.
Compliance with recognized standards.
Availability and delivery time.
e.
f.
2.
Submit Samples for review of size, kind, color, pattern, and texture. Submit Samples for a [mal
check of these characteristics with other elements and a comparison of these characteristics be-
tween the [mal submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed.
a.
Where variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the material
or product represented, submit at least 3 multiple units that show approximate limits of the
variations.
SUBMITTALS
01300 - 5
I
b. Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate workman-
ship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation, and similar con- .
struction characteristics.
c. Refer to other Sections for Samples to be returned to the Contractor for incorporation in the
Work. Such Samples must be undamaged at time of use. On the transmittal, indicate spe-
cial requests regarding disposition of Sample submittals.
d. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as the Owner's property,
are the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site prior to Substantial
Completion.
I
I
I
3.
Preliminary Submittals: Submit a full set of choices where Samples are submitted for selection of
color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics from a range of standard choices.
I
a.
The Engineer will review and return preliminary submittals with the Engineer's notation,
indicating selection and other action.
I
4.
Submittals: Except for Samples illustrating assembly details, workmanship, fabrication tech-
niques, connections, operation, and similar characteristics, submit 3 sets. The Engineer will return
one set marked with the action taken.
Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at the Project Site, for quality comparisons throughout the
course of construction.
I
5.
I
a.
Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the submittal may
serve as the fmal submittal.
Sample sets may be used to obtain fmal acceptance of the construction associated with each
set.
I
b.
B.
Distribution of Samples: Prepare and distribute additional sets to subcontractors, manufacturers, fabrica-
tors, suppliers, installers, and others as required for performance of the Work. Show distribution on
transmittal forms.
I
1. Field samples are full-size examples erected on-site to illustrate fInishes, coatings, or fInish mate-
rials and to establish the Project standard.
I
a.
Comply with submittal requirements to the fullest extent possible. Process transmittal
forms to provide a record of activity.
I
1.10
QUALITY ASSURANCE SUBMITTALS
I
A.
Submit quality-control submittals, including design data, certifications, manufacturer's instructions,
manufacturer's fIeld reports, and other quality-control submittals as required under other Sections of the
SpecifIcations.
I
B.
Certifications: Where other Sections of the Specifications require certification that a product, material, or
installation complies with specified requirements, submit a notarized certification from the manufacturer
certifying compliance with specified requirements.
I
1. Signature: Certification shall be signed by an officer of the manufacturer or other individual au-
thorized to sign documents on behalf of the company.
I
C.
Inspection and Test Reports: Requirements for submittal of inspection and test reports from independent
testing agencies are specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Control."
I
I
SUBMITI ALS
01300 - 6
I
I
I
1.11
ENGINEER'S ACTION
I
A.
Except for submittals for the record or information, where action and return is required, the Engineer will
review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return promptly.
I
1.
Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility.
2.
Action Stamp: The Engineer will stamp each submittal with a unifonn, action stamp. The Engi-
neer will mark the stamp appropriately to indicate the action taken.
I
B.
Unsolicited Submittals: The Engineer will return unsolicited submittals to the sender without action.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
I
END OF SECTION 01300
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SUBMITTALS
01300 - 7
I
I
SECTION 01710 - FINAL CLEANING
I
PART 1- GENERAL
I
1.1
I
A.
I
I
SUMMARY
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for final cleaning at Substantial Com-
pletion.
1.
Do not dispose of volatile wastes, such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner, in storm or sanitary
drains.
Burning or burying of debris, rubbish, or other waste material on the premises is not permitted.
2.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
I
A.
I
MA TERlALS
Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by the manufacturer or fabricator of
the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property
or that might damage fInished surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
A.
I
I
B.
I
I
I
I
I
I
FINAL CLEANING
FINAL CLEANING
General: Provide final-cleaning operations when indicated. Employ experienced workers or professional
cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit of Work to the condition expected from a commer-
cial building cleaning and maintenance program Comply with manufacturer's instructions.
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial
Completion for the entire Project or a portion of the Project.
1.
Clean the Project Site, yard and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including
landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and foreign substances.
Sweep paved areas broom clean. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth,
even-textured surface.
Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.
Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from the site.
Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains,
fIlms, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces.
Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.
Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts,
trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
Broom clean concrete floors in unoccupied spaces.
Remove labels that are not permanent labels.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed fInishes and surfaces. Replace fin-
ishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence
of repair or restoration.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
01710 - 1
I
a.
Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates.
I
11.
Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mor-
tar droppings, and other foreign substances.
Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers,
registers, and grills.
Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction.
Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace bumed-
out bulbs and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent. Leave the Project clean and ready for oc-
cupancy.
I
10.
12.
13.
I
I
c.
Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a fmal inspection and rid the Project
of rodents, insects, and other pests. Comply with regulations of local authorities.
D.
Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed during construction to pro-
tect previously completed installations during the remainder of the construction period.
I
E.
Compliances: Comply with governing regulations and safety standards for cleaning operations. Remove
waste materials from the site and dispose of lawfully.
I
1.
Where extra materials of value remain after completion of associated Work, they become the
Owner's property. Dispose of these materials as directed by the Owner.
I
END OF SECTION 01710
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
FINAL CLEANING
01710-2
I
I
I
SECTION 02230 - SITE CLEARING
I
PART 1- GENERAL
I
1.1
I
I
I
1.2
I
I
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Protecting existing trees and vegetation to remain.
Removing trees and other vegetation.
Clearing and grubbing.
Topsoil stripping.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay parti-
cles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; rea-
sonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter;
and free of weeds, roots, and other deleterious materials.
1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
I
I
1.4
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Except for materials indicated to be stockpiled or to remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall be-
come Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used
facilities during site-clearing operations.
1.
Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without per-
mission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having
jurisdiction.
2.
B.
Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing indicated removal and alteration work
on property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract.
c.
Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises
where indicated.
D.
Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
I
2.1
I
SOIL MATERIALS
SITE CLEARING
02230 - 1
I
A.
Satisfactory Soil Materials: Requirements for satisfactory soil materials are specified in Division 2 Sec-
tion "Earthwork."
I
1. Obtain approved borrow soil materials off-site when satisfactory soil materials are not available
on-site.
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
PREPARATION
I
A.
Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.
I
B.
Provide erosion-control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or
airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
I
C.
Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated.
D.
Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.
I
1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.
UTILITIES
I
A.
Contractor will arrange for proper utility locators to verify and locate existing utilities.
I
1. Verify that all existing utilities have been located and clearly flagged prior to any site work.
B.
Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by adjacent property owners.
I
1.
2.
Notify Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Engineer's written permission.
I
C. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.
I
3.3 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A.
Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction.
Removal includes digging out stumps and obstructions and grubbing roots.
I
1.
2.
Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated.
Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where
such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction.
Completely remove stumps, roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth of 18 inches (450
mm) below exposed sub grade.
Use only hand methods for grubbing within drip line of remaining trees.
I
3.
I
4.
B.
Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material, unless further
excavation or earthwork is indicated.
I
1.
Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 8-inch (200-mm) loose depth, and compact
each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.
I
SITE CLEARING
02230 - 2
I
I
I
3.4
TOPSOIL STRIPPING
I
A.
Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.
B.
Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying
subsoil or other waste materials.
I
1. Strip surface soil of unsuitable topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste mate-
rials.
I
C.
Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and
shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
I
1.
2.
3.
Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches (1800 mm).
Dispose of excess topsoil as specified for waste material disposal.
Stockpile surplus topsoil and allow for respreading deeper topsoil.
I
3.5 SITE IMPROVEMENTS
I
A.
Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new
construction.
I
3.6
DISPOSAL
I
A.
Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste
materials, including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
I
END OF SECTION 02230
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SITE CLEARING
02230 - 3
I
I
I
SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK.
PART 1- GENERAL
I
1.1
I
I
I
I
1.2
I
I
I
I
A.
A.
B.
C.
D.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, lawns, and plantings.
Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.
Drainage course for slabs-on-grade.
Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements.
Base course for asphalt paving.
Excavating and backfilling trenches within building lines.
Excavating and backfIlling trenches for buried mechanical and electrical utilities and pits for bur-
ied utility structures.
DEFINITIONS
Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation.
1.
Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support
sides of pipe.
Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fIll a trench.
2.
Base Course: Layer placed between the subbase course and asphalt paving.
Bedding Course: Layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.
Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
E. Drainage Course: Layer supporting slab-on-grade used to minimize capillary flow of pore water.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
F.
G.
H.
1.
Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations.
1. Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations as directed by Engineer. Addi-
tional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for
changes in the Work.
2. Bulk Excavation: Excavations more than 10 feet (3 m) in width and pits more than 30 feet (9 m)
in either length or width.
3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below sub grade elevations or beyond indicated dimensions
without direction by Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by
Engineer, shall be without additional compensation.
Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electri-
cal appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.
Subbase Course: Layer placed between the subgrade and base course for asphalt paving, or layer placed
between the subgrade and a concrete pavement or walk.
EARTHWORK
02300 - 1
1.3
1.4
I
I
J.
Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a flil or backfill
immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
I
K.
Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services
within buildings.
I
L.
Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compli-
ance of the following with requirements indicated:
1.
Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site or borrow soil material proposed for fill
and backfill.
Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for each on-site or borrow soil material
proposed for fill and backfill.
Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557 for each on-site or borrow soil material
proposed for fill and backfill.
I
2.
3.
I
QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
A.
Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to
ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials and rock-defmition testing, as documented according to
ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 548.
I
PROJECT CONDITIONS
I
A.
Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permit-
ted in writing by Engineer and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to
requirements indicated:
I
1. Notify Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Engineer's written permission.
3. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating.
I
B.
Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Co-
ordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
SOIL MATERIALS
I
A.
General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from
excavations.
I
B.
Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM, or a combi-
nation of these group symbols; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches (75 mm) in any dimension, de-
bris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.
I
C.
Unsatisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, IvIH, CL, CR, OL, OR, and
PT, or a combination of these group symbols.
I
1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum
moisture content at time of compaction.
I
EARTHWORK 02300 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.2
I
I
I
I
I
D.
Backfill and Fill: Satisfactory soil materials.
E.
Subbase: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural
or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2- inch (38-mrn) sieve and not
more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
F.
Base: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or
crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a l-l/2-inch (38-mm) sieve and not more
than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
G.
Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and
natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-l/2-inch (38-mrn) sieve and
not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
H.
Bedding: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural
or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a I-inch (25-mm) sieve and not more
than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
1.
Drainage Fill: Washed, narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel;
ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-l/2- inch (38-mm) sieve
and 0 to 5 percent passing a No.8 (2.36-mm) sieve.
1.
Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand;
ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a I-inch (25-mm) sieve and 0
to 5 percent passing a No.4 (4.75-mm) sieve.
K.
Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and
identifying underground utilities, 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously in-
scribed with a description of the utility; colored as follows:
B.
Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for
marking and identifying underground utilities, minimum 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm)
thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket
for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches (750 mm) deep;
colored as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Red: Electric.
Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials.
Orange: Telephone and other communications.
Blue: Water systems.
Green: Sewer systems.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement,
lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations.
EARTHWORK
02300 - 3
I
B.
Protect sub grades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulat-
ing materials as necessary.
I
I
c.
Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-
bearing water runoff or airbome dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
I
3.2 DEWATERING
3.3
3.4
3.5
A.
Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades,
and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.
I
B.
Protect sub grades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation.
I
1.
Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in ex-
cavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.
Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from excava-
tions. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required.
I
2.
EXCAVATION, GENERAL
I
A.
Unclassified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and
subsurface conditions encountered, including rock, soil materials, and obstructions.
I
1.
If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock,
replace with satisfactory soil materials.
I
EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
I
A.
Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). Ex-
tend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for
installing services and other construction, and for inspections.
I
1.
Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by
hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and
grades to leave solid base to receive other work.
I
EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS
I
A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated cross sections, elevations, and grades.
I
3.6 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
A.
Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Ex-
cavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher than top of pipe or con-
duit, unless otherwise indicated.
I
1.
Clearance: 12 inches (300 mm) on each side of pipe or conduit.
I
B.
Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes
and conduit. Shape sub grade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for
I
EARTHWORK
02300 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.7
I
I
I
I
I
3.8
I
I
3.9
I
I
joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench sub-
grade.
1.
For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter and flat-bottomed, multi-
ple-duct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undis-
turbed sub grade.
For pipes and conduit 6 inches (150 mm) or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to
support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill.
Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding
bearing material to allow for bedding course.
2.
3.
APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE
A.
Notify Engineer when excavations have reached required subgrade.
B.
If Engineer detennines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with com-
pacted backfill or fill material as directed.
1.
Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions
for changes in the Work.
C.
Proof roll subgrade with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess
yielding. Do not proof roll wet or saturated subgrades.
D.
Reconstruct sub grades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction
activities, as directed by Engineer.
UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
A.
Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of con-
crete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill may
be used when approved by Engineer.
1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Engineer.
STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
A.
Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory excavated soil materials. Stockpile soil materials without in-
termixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
1.
Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations.
3.10 BACKFILL
I
-
.
A.
Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:
1.
Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofmg, waterproofing, and
perimeter insulation.
Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents.
Inspecting and testing underground utilities.
Removing concrete formwork.
2.
3.
4.
EARTHWORK
02300 - 5
3.11
3.12
3.13
I
I
5.
6.
7.
Removing trash and debris.
Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.
Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.
I
UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
I
A.
Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to pro-
vide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of con-
duits.
I
B.
Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches (450 rnm) of bottom of footings; fill with
concrete to elevation of bottom of footings.
I
C.
Provide 4-inch- (100-rnm-) thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 inches
(750 rnm) below surface ofroadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in
a minimum of 4 inches (100 rnm) of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase.
I
D.
Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch (25 rnm), to a
height of 12 inches (300 rnm) over the utility pipe or conduit.
I
1. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both sides and
along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of utility system
I
E.
Coordinate backfill:ing with utilities testing.
F.
Fill voids with approved backfill materials while shoring and bracing, and as sheeting is removed.
I
G. Place and compact [mal backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade.
H.
Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 rnm) below finished grade, except 6 inches
(150 rnm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
I
FILL
I
A.
Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleteri-
ous materials from ground surface before placing fills.
I
B.
Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material
will bond with existing material.
I
C. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.
Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.
Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill.
Under building slabs, use engineered fill.
Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.
I
I
MOISTURE CONTROL
I
A.
Uniformly moisten or aerate sub grade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before compaction to
within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
I
EARTHWORK
02300 - 6
I
I
I
I
I
3.14
I
I
I
I
I
1.
2.
Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.
Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds opti-
mum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.
COM:? ACTION OF BACKFILLS AND FILLS
A.
Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) in loose depth for material
compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches (100 mm) in loose depth for ma-
terial compacted by hand-operated tampers.
B.
Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly
along the full length of each structure.
c.
Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to
ASTM D 698:
1.
Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches (300
mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent.
Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each
layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent.
Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 rnm) below subgrade and
compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 90 percent.
2.
3.
3.15 GRADING
I
I
I
I
.
.
3.16
A.
General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Comply with
compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.
1.
2.
Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.
Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances.
B.
Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish sub-
grades to required elevations within the following tolerances:
1.
2.
3.
Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
c.
Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch (13 mm) when tested with a
10-foot (3-m) straightedge.
SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES
A.
Under pavements and walks, place subbase course on prepared sub grade and as follows:
1. Place base course material over subbase.
2. Compact subbase and base courses at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross
sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to
ASTM D 1557.
3. Shape subbase and base to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.
4. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course is 6 inches (150 mm) or less, place materials
in a single layer.
EARTHWORK 02300 - 7
3.17
3.18
3.19
I
I
5.
When thickness of compacted subbase or base course exceeds 6 inches (150 mm), place materials
in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than 3 inches (75 rum)
thick when compacted.
I
B.
Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase and base course to prevent lateral move-
ment. Construct shoulders, at least 12 inches (300 mm) wide, of satisfactory soil materials and compact
simultaneously with each subbase and base layer to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight
according to ASTM D 1557.
I
DRAINAGE COURSE
I
A.
Under slabs-on-grade, place drainage course on prepared subgrade and as follows:
I
1.
Compact drainage course to required cross sections and thickness to not less than 95 percent of
maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.
When compacted thickness of drainage course is 6 inches (150 mm) or less, place materials in a
single layer.
When compacted thickness of drainage course exceeds 6 inches (150 nun), place materials in
equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches (150 rom) thick or less than 3 inches (75 rum) thick
when compacted.
I
2.
I
3.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
I
A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to
perform field quality-control testing.
I
B.
Allow testing agency to inspect and test sub grades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subse-
quent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.
I
c.
Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify
design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing sub grades may be based
on a visual comparison of sub grade with tested sub grade when approved by Engineer.
I
D.
Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167,
ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and
frequencies:
I
1.
Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least
one test for every 2000 sq. ft. (186 sq. m) or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case
fewer than three tests.
Foundation Wall Backf11l: At each compacted backfill layer, at least one test for each 100 feet (30
m) or less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests.
Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and fmal backfill layer, at least one test for each 150
feet (46 m) or less of trench length, but no fewer than two tests.
I
I
2.
3.
E.
When testing agency reports that sub grades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction
specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and re-
test until specified compaction is obtained.
I
I
PROTECTION
I
EARTHWORK
02300 - 8
ii
II
-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.20
I
I
A.
Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of
trash and debris.
B.
Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces be-
come eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or
weather conditions.
1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Engineer; reshape and recom-
pact.
c.
Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with
additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1.
Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and
eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible.
DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A.
Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and
debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.
1.
Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it
off Owner's property.
I
END OF SECTION 02300
I
I
I
.
.
EARTHWORK
02300 - 9
I
I
SECTION 02361- TER11ITE CONTROL
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
1.1
I
I
1.2
I
I
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following for termite control:
1. Soil treatment.
DEFINITIONS
A.
EP A: Environmental Protection Agency.
B. PCO: Pest control operator.
1.3 SUBMIrr ALS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.4
I
.
-
I
A.
Product Data: Treatments and application instructions, including EP A-Registered Label.
B.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of termite control products certifying that treatments fur-
nished comply with requirements.
c.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their .
capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names
and addresses of Engineers and owners, and other information specified.
D.
Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide IS completed, submit report for
Owner's record information, including the following as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Date and time of application.
Moisture content of soil before application.
Brand name and manufacturer oftermiticide.
Quantity of undiluted termiticide used.
Dilutions, methods, volumes, and rates of application used.
Areas of application.
Water source for application.
E.
Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Applicator Qualifications: A PCO who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having jurisdic-
tion to apply termite control treatment in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced and
has completed termite control treatment similar to that indicated for this Project and whose work has a re-
cord of successful in-service performance.
B.
Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides, and label with a Federal registration num-
ber, to comply with EP A regulations and authorities having jurisdiction.
TERMITE CONTROL
02361 - 1
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
I
I
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or frozen. Do
not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with EP A-Registered Label requirements and re-
quirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
I
I
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, and grading and concreting operations.
Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground-supported slabs, before construction.
I
WARRANTY
I
A.
General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights
Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run
concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
I
B.
Special Warranty: Written warranty, signed by applicator and Contractor certifying that termite control
work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If
subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or
replace damage caused by termite infestation.
I
c.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
I
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
I
A.
Continuing Service: Provide a proposal for continuing service, including monitoring, inspection, and re-
treatment for occurrences of termite activity, from applicator to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly
(or other period) continuing service agreement, starting on the date of Substantial Completion. State ser-
vices, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options.
I
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
I
SOIL TREATMENT
A.
Termiticide: Provide an EP A-registered termiticide complying with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction, in a soluble or emulsible, concentrated formulation that dilutes with water or foaming agent,
and formulated to prevent termite infestation. Use only soil treatment solutions that are not harmful to
plants. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiti-
cide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to the product's EP A-Registered Label.
I
I
B.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
AgrEvo Environmental Health, Inc.; a Company of Hoechst and Schering, Berlin.
American Cyanamid Co.; Agricultural Products Group; Specialty Products Department.
Bayer Corp.; Garden & Professional Care.
DowElanco.
FMC Corp.; Pest Control Specialties.
Zeneca Professional Products.
I
I
TERMITE CONTROL
02361 - 2
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
I
I
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for
moisture content of the soil, interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, and other
conditions affecting performance of termite control. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
I
I
I
I
I
3.3
I
I
3.4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manu-
facturer's written instructions for preparing substrate. Remove all extraneous sources of wood cellulose
and other edible materials such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction
waste wood from soil and around foundations.
B.
Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease
treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated, except previ-
ously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted
fill under slabs if recommended by termiticide manufacturer.
c.
Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer, complying with require-
ments of authorities having jurisdiction.
APPLICATION, GENERAL
A.
General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manu-
facturer's EPA-Registered Label for products.
APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT
A.
Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity required
for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of termiticide, ac-
cording to manufacturer's EP A-Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal and ver-
tical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction. Distribute
the treatment evenly.
1.
Slabs-on-Grade and Basement Slabs: Under ground-supported slab construction, including foot-
ings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before con-
crete footings and slabs are placed.
Foundations: Adjacent soil including soil along entire inside perimeter of foundation walls, along
both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating slab,
and around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; and along entire outside perimeter,
from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings.
Masonry: Treat voids.
Penetrations: At expansionjoints, control joints; and areas where slabs will be penetrated.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry.
C.
Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground-supported
slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-Registered Label instructions.
TERMITE CONTROL
02361 - 3
I
I
D. Post warning signs in areas of application.
E.
Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or
other construction activities following application.
I
END OF SECTION 02361
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TERMITE CONTROL
02361 - 4
I
I
I
SECTION 02510- WATERDISTRlBUTION
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
1.1
I
A.
SUMMARY
B. This Section includes piping and specialties for fire-protection water service outside the building.
This Section includes piping and specialties for potable-water service outside the building.
I
I
1.2
I
A.
DEFINITIONS
The following are industry abbreviations for plastic and rubber materials:
1. Polyvinyl chloride.
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
I
I
I
1.4
I
I
I
A.
A.
B.
Minimum Working Pressures: The following are mmnnum pressure requirements for plpmg and
specialties, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Potable-Water Service: 160 psig (1 LOO kPa).
2. Fire-Protection Water Service: 200 psig (1035 kPa).
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Water meters.
Backflow preventers.
Pipe and fittings.
Flexible pipe fittings.
Valves.
Fire hydrants.
C. Purging and Disinfecting Reports: As specified in "Cleaning" Article in Part 3.
Test Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3.
I
I
I
1.5
.
D.
Maintenance Data: For specialties to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
Include data for the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Water meters.
Backflow preventers.
Valves.
Fire hydrants.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
-
WATER DISTRIBUTION
02510 - 1
I
A.
Comply with requirements of utility supplying water. Include tapping of water mains and backflow
prevention.
I
B.
Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for potable water-service plpmg. Include
materials, installation, testing, and disinfection.
I
C.
Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for materials for potable
water.
I
D.
Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection water-service piping. Include
materials, hose threads, installation, and testing.
I
E.
Comply with NFP A 24, "Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances," for
materials, installations, tests, flushing, and valve and hydrant supervision.
I
F.
Comply with ASTM F 645, "Guide for Selection, Design, and Installation of Thermoplastic Water
Pressure Piping Systems."
I
G.
Comply with NFP A 70, "National Electrical Code," for electrical connections between WJImg and
electrically operated devices.
I
H.
Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on piping and specialties made to specified
standards.
I
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following:
I
A.
1.
2.
3.
Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion.
Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces.
Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.
I
B.
During Storage: Use precautions for valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following:
I
1.
2.
Do not remove end protectors, unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage.
Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dew-point
temperature. Support off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures when outdoor storage is
necessary.
I
c.
Handling: Use sling to handle valves and fire hydrants whose size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig
valves to avoid damage to exposed valve parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging
points.
I
D.
Deliver piping with factory-applied end-caps. Maintain end-caps through shipping, storage, and handling
to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
I
E.
Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural capacity of
floor when storing inside.
I
F.
Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt.
I
G. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
I
WATER DISTRIBUTION
02510 - 2
I
I.
I
I
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.7
Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact utility-
locating service for area where Project is located.
I
B.
Verify that water-service piping may be installed to comply with original design and referenced
standards.
I
1.8
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
I
B.
A. Coordinate connection to water main with utility company.
Coordinate piping materials, sizes, entry locations, and pressure requirements with building water
distribution piping.
I
C.
Coordinate with other utility work.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
A.
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
I
1.
I
I
2.
I
I
I
3.
I
I
4.
I
I
WATER DISTRIBUTION
Drilling-Machine, Sleeves, and Corporation Stops:
a.
b.
Ford Meter Box Co., Inc.
Grinnell Corp.; Mueller Co.; Water Products Div.
Lee Brass Co.
c.
Bronze Corporation Stops and Valves:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Ford Meter Box Co., Inc.
Grinnell Corp.; Mueller Co.; Water Products Div.
Lee Brass Co.
Master Meter, Inc.
McDonald: A.Y. McDonald Mfg. Co.
Red Hed Manufacturing Co.
Watts Industries, Inc.; James Jones Co.
e.
f.
g.
Tapping Sleeves and Valves:
a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co.
b. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc.
c. Grinnell Corp.; Mueller Co.; Water Products Div.
d. McWane, Inc.; Claw Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa)
e. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
f. United States Pipe & Foundry Co.
Gate Valves:
a.
American A VK Co.
02510 - 3
a. Badger Meter, Inc.
b. Grinnell Corp.; Grinnell Supply Sales Co.
c. Grinnell Corp.; Mueller Co.; Hersey Products Div.
d. Schlumberger Industries, Inc.; Water Div.
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
02510-4 I
b. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; American Flow Control Div.
c. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co.
d. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc.
e. Grinnell Corp.; Grinnell Supply Sales Co.
f. Grinnell Corp.; Mueller Co.; Water Products Diy.
g. Hammond Valye Corp.
h. McWane, Inc.; Clow Va1ye Co. Diy. (Oskaloosa)
1. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valye Diy.
J. McWane, Inc.; Tyler Pipe; Utilities Div.
k. Milwaukee Valye Co., Inc.
1. Nibco, Inc.
m. Pratt: Henry Pratt Co.
n. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.
o. United States Pipe & Foundry Co.
5. Water-Regulating Valves:
a. Ames Co., Inc.
b. Bermad, Inc.
c. Cia-Val Co.
d. GA Industries, Inc.
e. IMI Cash Valve, Inc.
f. OCV Control Valves.
g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
6. Dry-Barrel, Post Fire Hydrants:
a. American A VK Co.
b. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; American Flow Control Div.
c. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co.
d. American Foundry & Mfg. Co.
e. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc.
f. Grinnell Corp.; Mueller Co.; Water Products Div.
g. McWane, Inc.; C10w Valve Co. Diy. (Oskaloosa)
h. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Diy.
1. McWane, Inc.; M&H Valve Co. Diy.
J. Penn-Troy Machine Co.
k. United States Pipe & Foundry Co.
7. Water Meters:
a. Badger Meter, Inc.
b. Carlon Meter Co.
c. Grinnell Corp.; Mueller Co.; Hersey Products Diy.
d. Kent Meters, Inc.
e. Lee Brass Co.; Hays Div.
f. Schlumberger Industries, Inc.; Water Div.
g. Sensus Technologies, Inc.
h. Water Specialties Corp.
8. Detector-Type Water Meters:
WATER DISTRIBUTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.2
2.3
e.
Sensus Technologies, Inc.
9.
Detector Check Valves:
a.
b.
Ames Co., Inc.
Grinnell Corp.; Mueller Co.; Hersey Products Diy.
McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valye Diy.
Viking Corp.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
c.
d.
e.
10.
Backflow Preyenters:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Ames Co., Inc.
Cia-Val Co.
CMB Industries; Febco Div.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
Grilmell Corp.; Mueller Co.; Hersey Products Diy.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Diy.
Zam Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.
e.
f.
g.
PIPES AND TUBES
A.
General: Applications of the following pIpe and tube materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping
Applications" Article.
B.
Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, seamless water tube, annealed temper.
c.
Ductile-Iron, Push-on-Joint Pipe: AWWA C151, with cement-mortar lining and seal coat according to
A WW A C104. Include rubber compression gasket according to A WW A Cl11.
D.
PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, with marking "NSF-pw" according to NSF 14.
E.
PVC Plastic, Fire-Service Pipe: UL 1285 and A WW A C900. Include elastomeric seal according to
ASTM F 477.
PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS
A.
General: Applications of the following pipe and tube fitting materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping
Applications" Article.
B. Copper Fittings: ASME B 16.22; wrought-copper, solder-joint pressure type.
C.
Ductile-Iron, Push-on-Joint Fittings: AWWA ClIO, ductile-iron or cast-iron; or AWWA C153, ductile-
iron, compact type. Include cement-mortar lining and seal coat according to A WW A C1 04 and rubber
compression gaskets according to A WW A C 111.
D.
Ductile-Iron, Mechanical-Joint Fittings: A WW A ClIO, ductile-iron or cast-iron; or A WW A C153,
ductile-iron, compact type. Include cement-mortar lining and seal coat according to A WW A C104 and
glands, rubber gaskets, and bolts and nuts according to A WW A C111.
E.
Ductile-Iron, Flanged Fittings: AWWACI10, with cement-mortar lining and seal coat according to
A WW A CI04 or epoxy, interior coating according to A WW A C550. Include gaskets and bolts and nuts.
-
WATER DISTRIBUTION
02510-5
I
F.
PVC Plastic, Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2467, Schedule 80.
I
G.
PVC Plastic Fittings: UL 1285 and A WW A C907, Class 150. Include elastomeric seals according to
ASTM F 477.
I
H.
Ductile-Iron Fittings for PVC Pipe: A WW A ClIO, ductile-iron or cast-iron; or A WW A C153, ductile-
iron, compact type; push-on- or mechanical-joint type. Include dimensions matching PVC pipe, cement-
mortar lining and seal coat according to A WW A C 104, and rubber compression gaskets according to
AWWAClll.
I
I
2.4 JOINING MATERIALS
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.5
2.6
A.
A.
General: Applications of the following plpmg joining materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping
Applications" Article.
I
B.
Ductile-Iron Piping: The following materials apply:
I
1.
2.
Push-on Joints: A WW A Cll1 rubber gaskets and lubricant.
Mechanical Joints: A WW A C111 ductile-iron or gray-iron glands, high-strength steel bolts and
nuts, and rubber gaskets.
Flanged Joints: A WW A C115 ductile-iron or gray-iron pipe flanges, rubber gaskets, and high-
strength steel bolts and nuts.
I
I
3.
a. Gaskets: Rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring
type, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B 18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
I
Brazing Filler Metals: A WS A5.8, BCuP Series.
Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B 32, Alloy Sn95, Alloy Sn94, or Alloy E, with 0.10 percent maximum lead
content.
I
Primers for PVC Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: ASTM F 656.
I
Solvent Cement for PVC Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: ASTM D 2564.
PIPING SPECIALTIES
I
VAL YES
I
Nonrising-Stern, Metal-Seated Gate Valves, 3-Inch NPS and Larger: A WW A C500, gray- or ductile-iron
body and bOlUlet; with cast-iron or bronze, double-disc gate, bronze gate rings, bronze stern, and stem nut.
Include 200-psig minimum working-pressure design; interior coating according to A WW A C550; and
mechanical-joint ends, unless otherwise indicated.
I
I
B.
Nonrising-Stern, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves, 3-Inch NPS and Larger: A WW A C509, gray- or ductile-
iron body and bonnet; with bronze or gray- or ductile-iron gate, resilient seats, bronze stern, and stem nut.
Include 200-psig minimum working-pressure design, interior coating according to A WW A C550, and
push-on- or mechanical-joint ends.
I
I
WATER DISTRIBUTION
02510 - 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.7
I
2.8
I
C.
Rising-Stem Gate Valves, 3-Inch NPS and Larger: A WW A C500, cast-iron double disc, bronze disc and
seat rings, cast-iron or ductile-iron body and bonnet, OS&Y, bronze stern, 200-psig working pressure, and
flanged ends.
D.
Rising-Stem Gate Valves, 3-Inch NPS and Larger: A WW A C509, resilient seated; cast-iron or ductile-
iron body and bonnet, OS&Y, bronze stern, 200-psig working pressure, and flanged ends.
E.
Nonrising-Stem Gate Valves, 2-Inch NPS and Smaller: MSS SP-SO; body and screw bonnet of
ASTM B 62 cast bronze; with Class 125 threaded ends, solid wedge, nonrising copper-silicon-alloy stem,
brass packing gland, PTFE-impregnated packing, and malleable-iron handwheel.
F.
Valve Boxes: Cast-iron box with top section and cover with lettering "WATER," bottom section with
base of size to fit over valve and barrel approximately 5 inches in diameter, and adjustable cast-iron
extension oflength required for depth of bury of valve.
1.
Provide steel tee-handle operating wrench with each valve box. Include tee handle with one
pointed end, stem oflength to operate valve, and socket-fitting valve-operating nut.
G.
Curb Stops: Bronze body, ground-key plug or ball, and wide tee head, with inlet and outlet to match
service piping material.
H.
Service Boxes for Curb Stops: Cast-iron box with telescoping top section of length required for depth of
bury of valve. Include cover with lettering "WATER," and bottom section with base of size to fit over
curb-stop and barrel approximately 3 inches in diameter.
1. Provide steel tee-handle shutoff rod with each service box. Include tee handle with one pointed
end, stem of length to operate curb stop, and slotted end fitting curb-stop head.
1.
Tapping Sleeve and Tapping Valve: Complete assembly, including tapping sleeve, tapping valve, and
bolts and nuts. Use sleeve and valve compatible with tapping machine.
1. Tapping Sleeve: Cast- or ductile-iron, 2-piece bolted sleeve with flanged outlet for new branch
connection. Sleeve may have mechanical-joint ends with rubber gaskets or sealing rings in sleeve
body. Include sleeve matching size and type of pipe material being tapped and of outlet flange
required for branch connection.
J.
Check Valves: A WW A C508, with l75-psig working-pressure rating. Include interior coating according
to AWWA C550.
SPECIALTY VAL YES
WATER METERS
A.
Water meters shall be in accordance with by utility company standards. Verify type with utility company
prior to purchase.
2.9 WATER-METER BOXES
I
I
I
A.
Description: Cast-iron body and cover for disc-type water meter. Include lettering "WATER METER"
in cover; and slotted, open-bottom base section of length to fit over service piping.
WATER DISTRIBUTION
02510-7
2.10
I
I
PITS
A.
Description: Precast, reinforced-concrete pit, designed for A-16 load designation according to
ASTM C 857, and made according to ASTM C 858.
I
B.
Ladder: ASTM A 36, steel or polyethylene-encased steel steps.
I
C.
Manhole: ASTM A 48, Class No. 35 minimum tensile strength, gray-iron, traffic frame and cover.
1.
Weight and Dimensions: Not smaller than 24-inch diameter, unless otherwise indicated.
I
D. Manhole: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile-iron, 24-inch- minimum-diameter traffic frame and
cover.
I
1.
Weight and Dimensions: Not smaller than 24-inch diameter, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Drain: ASME A 112.21.1M, cast-iron area drain, of size indicated. Include body anchor flange, light-
duty cast-iron grate, bottom outlet, and integral or field-installed bronze ball or clapper-type backwater
valve.
I
I
2.11 FREESTANDING FIRE HYDRANTS
2.12
A.
Description: Cast-iron body, compression-type valve, opening against pressure and closing with
pressure, 6-inch mechanical-joint inlet, and 150-psig minimum working-pressure design.
I
B.
Outlet Threads: NFPA 1963, with extemal hose thread used by local fire department. Include cast-iron
caps with steel chains.
I
C.
Operating and Cap Nuts: Pentagon 1-1/2 inch point to flat.
I
D.
Direction of Opening: Open hydrant valve by turning operating nut to left or counterclockwise.
E.
Exterior Finish: Red alkyd-gloss enamel paint, unless otherwise indicated.
I
F.
Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants: AWWA C502, two 2-1/2-inch NPS and one 4-1/2-inch NPS outlets, 5-1/4-
inch main valve, drain valve, and 6-inch NPS mechanical-joint inlet. Include 250-psig minimum
working-pressure design and interior coating according to A WW A C550
I
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
I
A.
General: Manufactured backflow preventers, of size indicated for maximum flow rate and maximum
pressure loss indicated.
I
B. Working Pressure: 200 psig minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
c.
2-Inch NPS and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
I
D. 2-1/2-Inch NPS and Larger: Bronze, cast-iron, steel, or stainless-steel body with flanged ends.
I
E.
Interior Lining: A WW A C550, epoxy coating for backflow preventers with cast-iron or steel body.
F.
Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials.
I
WATER DISTRIBUTION
02510 - 8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.13
I
I
I
I
I
G.
Strainer on inlet if strainer is indicated.
H.
Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011, nickel plated, with nomemovable and manual drain
features, and ASME B 1.20.7, 3/4-11.5NH threads for garden hose on outlet. Units attached to rough-
bronze-finish hose connections may be rough bronze.
1.
Double-Check Backilow Prevention Assemblies: ASSE 1015, with valves on inlet and outlet and strainer
on inlet. Include test cocks with 2 positive-seating check valves for continuous-pressure application.
1.
Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum through middle third of flow range.
ANCHORAGES
A.
Clamps, Straps, and Washers: ASTM A 506, steel.
B.
Rods: ASTM A 575, steel.
C. Rod Couplings: ASTM A 197, malleable iron.
D.
Bolts: ASTM A 307, steel.
E.
Cast-Iron Washers: ASTM A 126, gray iron.
F.
Concrete Reaction Backing: Portland cement concrete mix, 3000 psig.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1.
Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand.
Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel.
Water: Potable.
2.14 IDENTIFICATION
I
I
I
A.
Arrange for detectable warning tapes made of solid blue film with metallic core and continuously printed
black-letter caption "CAUTION-- WATER LINE BURIED BELOW."
B.
Nonmetallic Piping Label: Engraved, plastic-laminate label at least 1 by 3 inches, with caption
"CAUTION--THIS STRUCTURE HAS NONMETALLIC WATER-SERVICE PIPING," for installation
on main electrical meter panel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
I
I
3.2
I
I
EARTHWORK
A.
Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavation, trenching, and backfilling.
PIPING APPLICATIONS
A.
General: Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following
applications:
WATER DISTRIBUTION
02510 - 9
3.3
I
B.
Transition couplings and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may
be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
I
C.
Do not use flanges or keyed couplings for underground piping.
I
D.
Potable Water-Service Piping: Use the following:
I
1. 3/4- to 2-Inch NPS: Copper tube, Type K; copper fittings; and soldered joints.
2. 3/4- to 2-Inch NPS: PVC plastic, Schedule SO pipe; PVC plastic, Schedule SO, socket fittings; and
solvent-cemented joints.
3. 2-112- to 3-1I2-Inch NPS: PVC plastic, Schedule SO pipe; PVC plastic, Schedule SO, socket
fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
4. 4-Inch NPS: PVC plastic, Schedule SO pipe; PVC plastic, Schedule 80, socket fittings; and
solvent-cemented joints.
5. 6-Inch NPS: Ductile-iron, push-on-joint pipe; ductile-iron, push-on-joint fittings; and gasketed
joints.
6. 5- and 6-Inch NPS: PVC plastic, Schedule SO pipe; PVC plastic, Schedule 80, socket fittings; and
solvent-cemented joints.
7. 6 and S-Inch NPS: PVC plastic, Schedule 80 pipe; PVC plastic, Schedule SO, socket fittings; and
solvent-cemented joints.
I
I
I
I
E.
Fire-Protection Water-Service Piping: Use the following:
1.
6- to 8-Inch NPS: Ductile-iron, push-on-joint pipe; ductile-iron, push-on-joint fittings; and
gasketed joints.
6- to S-Inch NPS: PVC plastic, Class 200, fire-service pipe; ductile-iron fittings for PVC plastic
pipe; and gasketedjoints.
I
2.
I
VALVE APPLICA nONS
I
A.
Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following
requirements apply:
I
1.
Underground Valves, 3-Inch NPS and Larger: A WW A, gate valves, nonrising stem, with valve
box.
Pit and Aboveground Installation Valves, 2-Inch NPS and Smaller: ULIFM, OS&Y gate valves.
I
2.
3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
I
A.
Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints: According to A WW A C600.
B.
Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Fire-Service Piping: According to UL 194 and A WW A C600.
I
c.
Flanged Joints: Align flanges and install gaskets. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening. Use
lubricant on bolt threads.
I
D.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipes with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B 1.20.1, apply tape or joint
compound, and apply wrench to fitting and valve ends into which pipes are being threaded.
E.
Copper Tubing, Soldered Joints: According to A WS's "Soldering Manual," Chapter "The Soldering of
Pipe and Tube."
I
I
WATER DISTRIBUTION
02510 - 10
I
I
I
I
I
F.
PVC Piping, Gasketed Joints: Use joining materials according to A WW A C900. Construct joints with
elastomeric seals and lubricant according to ASTM D 2774 or ASTM D 3139 and pipe manufacturer's
written instructions.
G.
PVC Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: According to ASTM D 2672 and ASTM D 2855. Handle cleaner,
primer, and solvent cement according to ASTM F 402.
I
3.5 PIPING SYSTEMS - CO:MMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings indicate general location and arrangement of piping.
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,
expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated, unless deviations to
layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.6
I
I
I
I
3.7
I
I
I
B.
Install piping at indicated slope.
c.
Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
D.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
E.
Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.
F.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
G. Piping Connections: Unless otherwise indicated, make piping connections as specified below:
1.
Install unions, in piping 2-inch NPS and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to
each piece of equipment with 2-inch NPS or smaller threaded pipe connection.
Install flanges, in piping 2-l/2-inch NPS and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at [mal
connection to each piece of equipment with flanged pipe connection.
Install dielectric fittings to connect piping of dissimilar metals.
2.
3.
SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING
A.
Extend water-service piping and connect to water-supply source and building water piping systems at
outside face of building wall in locations and pipe sizes indicated.
1.
Terminate water-service piping at building wall until building water piping systems are installed.
Terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges as required for piping material. Make connections
to building water piping systems when those systems are installed.
B.
Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in direction. Use
restrained-joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie-rods and clamps, and other supports.
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Water-Main Connection: Arrange for tap in water main, of size and in location indicated, from water
utility.
B.
Water-Main Connection: Tap water main with SIZe and in location as indicated according to
requirements of water utility.
WATER DISTRIBUTION
02510 - 11
3.8
3.9
3.10
I
C.
Make connections larger than 2-inch NPS with tapping machine according to the following:
I
1.
2.
3.
Install tapping sleeve and tapping valve according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Install tapping sleeve on pipe to be tapped. Position flanged outlet for gate valve.
Install gate valve onto tapping sleeve. Comply with A WW A C600. Install valve with stem
pointing up and with cast-iron valve box.
Use tapping machine compatible with valve and tapping sleeve; cut hole in main. Remove
tapping machine and connect water-service piping.
I
4.
I
D.
Comply with NFP A 24 for [lie-protection water-service piping materials and installation.
I
E. Install ductile-iron piping according to A WW A C600.
F.
Install copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
I
G.
Install A WW A PVC plastic pipe according to A WW A M23 and ASTM F 645.
I
H.
Bury piping with depth of cover over top at least 30 inches, with top at least 12 inches below level of
maximum frost penetration, and according to the following:
I
1.
2.
Under Driveways: With at least 36 inches cover over top.
In Loose Gravelly Soil and Rock: With at least 12 inches additional cover.
ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION
I
A.
Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant branches. Include
anchorages for the following piping systems:
I
1.
2.
3.
Gasketed-Joint, Ductile-Iron, Potable-Water Piping: According to A WW A C600.
Gasketed-Joint, PVC Potable-Water Piping: According to A WW A M23.
Fire-Service Piping: According to NFPA 24.
I
B.
Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-retarding material to surfaces of installed ferrous
anchorage devices.
I
VALVE INSTALLATION
I
A.
General Application: Use mechanical-joint-end valves for 3-inch NPS and larger underground
installation. Use threaded- and flanged-end valves for installation in pits. Use nonrising-stem UL/FM
gate valves for installation with indicator posts. Use bronze corporation stops and valves, with ends
compatible with piping, for 2-inch NPS and smaller installation.
I
B.
AWWA-Type Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600. Install underground valves with stem pointing
up and with cast-iron valve box.
I
C.
UL/FM-Type Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24. Install underground valves and valves in pits with
stem pointing up and with vertical cast-iron indicator post.
I
D.
Bronze Corporation Stops and Curb Stops: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install
underground curb stops with head pointed up and with cast-iron curb box.
I
FIRE HYDRANT INST ALLA TION
I
WATER DISTRIBUTION
02510 - 12
I
I
I
I
I
A.
General: Install each fire hydrant with separate gate valve in supply pipe, anchor with restrained joints or
thrust blocks, and support in upright position.
B.
Wet-Barrel Fire Hydrants: Install with valve below frost line. Provide for drainage.
c.
A WW A-Type Fire Hydrants: Comply with A WW A M17.
3.11 WATER-METER INSTALLATION
I
I
3.12
I
I
3.13
I
I
I
3.14
I
I
3.15
I
I
I
.
.
3.16
.
.
A.
Install water meters, piping, and specialties according to utility company's written requirements.
ROUGHING-IN FOR WATER METERS
A.
Rough-in piping and specialties for water-meter installation according to utility company's written
instructions and requirements.
PIT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION
A.
Construct pits of cast-in-p1ace concrete pits, with manhole frame and cover, ladder, and drain. Include
sleeves with waterproof mechanical sleeve seals for pipe entry and exit. Refer to Division 3 Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
B. Install precast concrete pits according to ASTM C 891.
C.
Connect area drain outlet to storm drainage piping.
DETECTOR CHECK VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
Install detector check valves in pits for proper direction of flow. Install bypass with water meter, gate
valves on each side of meter, and check valve downstream from meter.
B. Support detector check valves, meters, shutoff valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers.
BACKFLOW PREVENTER INSTALLATION
A.
Install backflow preventers of type, size, and capacity indicated. Include valves and test cocks. Install
according to plumbing and health department authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Do not install reduced-pres sure-principle type in pit.
C.
Do not install bypass around backflow preventer.
D.
Support backflow preventers, valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers.
IDENTIFICATION INSTALLATION
A. Install continuous plastic underground warning tape during back-filling of trench for underground water-
service piping. Locate 6 to 8 inches below fInished grade, directly over piping.
WATER DISTRIBUTION
02510 - 13
I
B.
Attach nonmetallic piping label permanently to main electrical meter panel.
I
3.17
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
I
A.
Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after thrust blocks have hardened
sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use only
potable water.
I
B.
Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than 1-1/2 times working pressure for 2 hours.
I
1.
Increase pressure in 50-psig increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold at test
pressure for one hour; decrease to 0 psig. Slowly increase again to test pressure and hold for one
more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts per hour per 100 joints. Remake leaking
joints with new materials and repeat test until leakage is within above limits.
I
C.
Prepare reports for testing activities.
I
3.18
CLEANING
I
A. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping as follows:
1.
Purge new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered,
extended, or repaired before use.
Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method
is not prescribed by that authority, use procedure described in NFP A 24 for flushing of piping.
Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at points of outlet.
Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method
is not prescribed by authorities, use procedure described in A WW A C651 or as described below:
I
2.
I
3.
a. Fill system or part of system with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 ppm of
chlorine. Isolate system or part thereof and allow to stand for 24 hours.
b. Drain system or part of system of previous solution and refill with water/chlorine solution
containing at least 200 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours.
c. Following allowed standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until chlorine does
not remain in water coming from system.
d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure
ifbiologica1 examination shows evidence of contamination.
I
I
I
B.
Prepare reports for purging and disinfecting activities.
I
END OF SECTION 02510
I
I
I
I
WATER DISTRIBUTION
02510 - 14
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02741 - HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
I. Hot-mix asphalt paving.
2. Hot-mix asphalt patching.
3. Pavement-marking paint.
4. Wheel stops.
B. Related Sections include the following:
I. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for aggregate subbase and base courses and aggregate
pavement shoulders.
2. Division 7 Section "Paving Joint Sealants" for joint sealants and fillers at paving
terminations.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide hot-mix asphalt pavement according to the materials, workmanship, and other
applicable requirements of the standard specifications of the state or of authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Standard Specification: As indicated.
2. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in standard
specifications do not apply to this Section.
1.4 SUBMIIT ALS
A. Job-Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each job mix
proposed for the Work.
B. Job-Mix Designs: For eachjob mix proposed for the Work.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pavement markings, lane separations, and defmed parking spaces.
Indicate dedicated handicapped spaces with international graphics symbo1.
D. Samples: 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm) minimum, of paving fabric.
HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING
02511 - I
1.5
I
E.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
I
I
F.
Material Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance of materials with
requirements indicated.
I
G.
Material Certificates: Certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that each material
complies with requirements.
I
QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed hot-mix asphalt
paving similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record
of successful in-service performance.
I
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing hot-mix asphalt
similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
I
1.
Firm shall be a registered and approved paving mix manufacturer with authorities having
jurisdiction or with the DOT of the state in which Project is located.
I
c.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Demonstrate to Engineer's satisfaction, based on Engineer's
evaluation of criteria conforming to ASTM D 3666, that the independent testing agency has the
experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated without delaying the
Work.
I
I
D.
Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable standards of authorities having jurisdiction
for asphalt paving work on public property.
I
E.
Asphalt-Paving Publication: Comply with AI's "The Asphalt Handbook," except where more
stringent requirements are indicated.
I
F.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of
Division I Section "Project Meetings" Review methods and procedures related to asphalt
paving including, but not limited to, the following:
I
1. Review proposed sources of paving materials, including capabilities and location of plant
that will manufacture hot-mix asphalt.
2. Review condition of substrate and preparatory work performed by other trades.
3. Review requirements for protecting paving work, including restriction of traffic during
installation period and for remainder of construction period.
4. Review and finalize construction schedule for paving and related work. Verify
availability of materials, paving Installer's personnel, and equipment required to execute
the Work without delays.
5. Review inspection and testing requirements, governing regulations, and proposed
installation procedures.
6. Review forecasted weather conditions and procedures for coping with unfavorable
conditions.
I
I
I
I
HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING
02511 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pavement-marking materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken
and bearing manufacturer's labels containing brand name and type of material, date of
manufacture, and directions for storage.
B. Store pavement-marking materials in a clean, dry, protected location and within temperature
range required by manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if substrate is wet or excessively
damp or if the following conditions are not met:
1. Prime and Tack Coats: Minimum surface temperature of60 deg F (15.5 deg C).
2. Slurry Coat: Comply with weather limitations of ASTM D 3910.
3. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F (4 deg C) and rising at
time of placement.
4. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.5 deg C) at time
of placement.
B. Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a
minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F (4 deg C) for oil-based materials,
50 deg F (10 deg C) for water-based materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F (35 deg C).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 AGGREGATES
A. General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily ill preVIOUS
installations.
B. Coarse Aggregate: Sound; angular crushed stone; crushed gravel; or properly cured, crushed
blast-furnace slag; complying with ASTM D 692.
c.
Fine Aggregate: Sharp-edged natural sand or sand prepared from stone; gravel, properly cured
blast-furnace slag, or combinations thereof; complying with ASTM D 1073.
1. For hot-mix asphalt, limit natural sand to a maximum of 20 percent by weight of the total
aggregate mass.
D.
Mineral Filler: Rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other inert material complying with
ASTM D 242.
2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS
A. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 3381 for viscosity-graded material; ASTM D 946 for penetration-
graded material.
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING
02511 - 3
2.3
204
B.
Prime Coat: Asphalt emulsion prime conforming to state DOT requirements.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
c.
Tack Coat: ASTM D 977, emulsified asphalt or ASTM D 2397, cationic emulsified asphalt,
slow setting, factory diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application.
D.
Water: Potable.
AUXILIARY MATERlALS
A.
Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by Environmental Protection
Agency (EP A). Provide granular, liquid, or wettable powder form.
B.
Sand: ASTM D 1073, Grade Nos. 2 or 3.
c.
Pavement-Marking Paint: Alkyd-resin type, ready-mixed, complying with FS TT-P-115,
Type I, or AASHTO M-248, Type N.
D.
Pavement-Marking Paint: Latex, water-base emulsion, ready-mixed, complying with FS TT-P-
1952.
1. Color: As required.
E.
Glass Beads: AASHTO M-247.
F.
Wheel Stops: Precast, air-entrained concrete, 2500-psi (l7.2-MPa) minimum compressive
strength, approximately 6 inches (150 mm) high, 9 inches (225 mm) wide, and 84 inches (2130
mm) long. Provide chamfered comers and drainage slots on underside, and provide holes for
anchoring to substrate.
1. Dowels: Galvanized steel, diameter 3/4 inch (19 mm), minimum length 14 inches (254
mm).
MIXES
A.
Hot-Mix Asphalt: Provide dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by authorities
having jurisdiction; designed according to procedures in AI's "Mix Design Methods for Asphalt
Concrete and Other Hot-Mix Types"; and complying with the following requirements:
I. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where
Proj ect is located.
2. Base Course: As indicated.
3. Surface Course: As indicated.
B.
Hot-Mix Asphalt: Provide dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by authorities
having jurisdiction and designed according to procedures in AI's "Mix Design Methods for
Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot-Mix Types."
I. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where
Proj ect is located.
HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING
02511 - 4
.
==
-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
-
2. Provide mixes complying with the composition, grading, and tolerance requirements of
ASTM D 3515 for the following nominal, maximum aggregate sizes:
a. Base Course: 1 inch (25 mm).
b. Surface Course: 1/2 inch (13 mm).
C. Emulsified-Asphalt Slurry: ASTM D 3910, consisting of emulsified asphalt, fine aggregates,
and mineral fillers and as follows:
1. Composition: Type 2.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that sub grade is dry and in suitable condition to support paving and imposed loads.
B. Proof-roll subbase using heavy, pneumatic-tired rollers to locate areas that are unstable or that
require further compaction.
C. Notify Engineer in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions. Do not begin paving installation
until these conditions have been satisfactorily corrected.
3.2 COLD MILLING
A. Clean existing paving surface of loose and deleterious material immediately before cold milling.
Remove existing asphalt pavement, including hot-mix asphalt and, as necessary, unbound-
aggregate base course, by cold milling to grades and cross sections indicated.
1. Repair or replace curbs, manholes, and other construction damaged during cold milling.
3.3 PATCHING AND REPAIRS
A. Patching: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound base.
Recompact new subgrade. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches
(300 mm) into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces
vertically.
1. Tack coat faces of excavation and allow to cure before paving.
2. Fill excavation with dense-graded, hot-mix asphalt base mix and, while still hot, compact
flush with adjacent surface.
3. Partially fill excavation with dense-graded, hot-mix asphalt base mix and compact while
still hot. Cover asphalt base course with compacted, hot-mix surface layer [mished flush
with adjacent surfaces.
B. Portland Cement Concrete Pavement: Break cracked slabs and roll as required to reseat
concrete pieces finnly.
HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING
02511-5
3.4
I
1.
Pump hot undersealing asphalt under rocking slabs until slab is stabilized or, if necessary,
crack slab into pieces and roll to reseat pieces finnly.
Remove disintegrated or badly broken pavement. Prepare and patch with hot-mix
asphalt.
I
2.
I
C.
Leveling Course: Install and compact leveling course consisting of dense-graded, hot-mix
asphalt surface course to level sags and fill depressions deeper than 1 inch (25 mm) in existing
pavements.
I
1.
Install leveling wedges in compacted lifts not exceeding 2 inches (75 mm) thick.
I
D.
Crack and Joint Filling: Remove existing filler material from cracks or joints to a depth of 1/4
inch (6 rum). Refill with asphalt joint-filling material to restore watertight condition. Remove
excess filler that has accumulated near cracks or joints.
I
I
E.
Tack Coat: Apply unifonnly to existing surfaces of previously constructed asphalt or portland
cement concrete paving and to surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix asphalt
pavement. Apply at a uniform rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gaL/sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.7 L/sq. m) of surface.
I
1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before paving.
2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.
Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.
I
SURF ACE PREPARATION
I
A.
General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material
from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared sub grade is ready to receive paving.
I
1. Sweep loose granular particles from surface of unbound-aggregate base course. Do not
dislodge or disturb aggregate embedded in compacted surface of base course.
I
B.
Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended rates and
written application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared sub grade or surface of compacted-
aggregate base before applying paving materials.
I
1. Mix herbicide with prime coat when formulated by manufacturer for that purpose.
C.
Prime Coat: Apply uniformly over surface of compacted-aggregate base at a rate of 0.15 to
0.50 gal.lsq. yd. (0.7 to 2.3 L/sq. m). Apply enough material to penetrate and seal, but not
flood, surface. Allow prime coat to cure for 72 hours minimum.
I
I
1. If prime coat is not entirely absorbed within 24 hours after application, spread sand over
surface to blot excess asphalt. Use just enough sand to prevent pickup under traffic.
Remove loose sand by sweeping before pavement is placed and after volatiles have
evaporated.
2. Protect primed substrate from damage until ready to receive paving.
I
I
3.5 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING
I
HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING
02511 - 6
iii
ii
-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.6
I
I
I
I
I
3.7
I
I
.
-
!!!!e
.
.
A.
Machine place hot-mix asphalt mix on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place
asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of
mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness, when compacted.
1.
2.
3.
Place hot-mix asphalt base course in number of lifts and thicknesses indicated.
Spread mix at minimum temperature of250 deg F (121 deg C).
Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side of
one-way slopes, unless otherwise indicated.
Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and
tears in asphalt-paving mat.
4.
B.
Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 8 feet (3 m) wide, except where infill edge strips
of a lesser width are required.
1. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to
overlap previous strips. Complete asphalt base course for a section before placing asphalt
surface course.
C.
Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools
to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent
segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.
JOINTS
A.
Construct joints to ensure continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints
free of depressions with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix asphalt
course.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat.
Offset longitudinal joints in successive courses a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).
Offset transverse joints in successive courses a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm).
Construct transverse joints by bulkhead method or sawed vertical face method as
described in AI's "The Asphalt Handbook."
Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive
di sp lacemen t.
Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course density.
5.
6.
COMPACTION
A.
General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without
excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or vibratory-plate
compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.
1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F (85 deg C).
B.
Breakdown Rolling: Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints
and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown,
grade, and smoothness. Repair surfaces by loosening displaced material, filling with hot-mix
asphalt, and rerolling to required elevations.
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING
02511 -7
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING
02511 - 8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling, while
hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix
asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density:
1. Average Density: 92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density according to
ASTM D 2041, but not less than 90 percent nor greater than 96 percent.
D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still
warm.
E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and [mished, trim edges of pavement to
proper alignment. Bevel edges while still hot, with back of rake or smooth iron. Compact
thoroughly using tamper or other satisfactory method.
F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials.
Remove paving course over area affected and replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by
rolling to specified density and surface smoothness.
G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled
and hardened.
H. Erect barricades as per SCDOT standards to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled
enough not to become marked.
3.8 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following
tolerances:
1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus.
B. Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the
following tolerances as determined by using a lO-foot (3-m) straightedge applied transversely or
longitudinally to paved areas:
1. Base Course: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch (3 mm).
3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown.
Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch (6 mm).
3.9 SURFACE TREATMENTS
A. Fog Seals: Apply fog seal at a rate of 0.10 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. (0.45 to 0.70 Llsq. m) to existing
asphalt pavement and allow to cure. Lightly dust areas receiving excess fog seal with a fine
sand.
B. Slurry Seals: Apply slurry coat in a uniform thickness according to ASTM D 3910 and allow to
cure.
1. Roll slurry seal to smooth ridges and provide a uniform, smooth surface.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.10
3.11
3.12
.
~
....
-
PAVEMENT MARKING
A.
Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified
with Engingeer.
B.
Allow paving to cure for 20 days before starting pavement marking.
c.
Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.
D.
Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings of dimensions indicated
with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a
minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils (0.4 mm).
1. Broadcast glass spheres uniformly into wet pavement markings at a rate of 6lb/gal. (0.72
kg/L).
WHEEL STOPS
A.
Securely attach wheel stops into pavement with not less than 2 galvanized steel dowels
embedded in precast concrete at one-third points. Firmly bond each dowel to wheel stop and to
pavement.
1. Extend upper portion of dowel 5 inches (125 mm) into wheel stop and lower portion a
minimum of9 inches (125 mm) into pavement.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field
inspections and tests and to prepare test reports.
1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether tested
Work complies with or deviates from specified requirements.
B.
Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of
corrected Work with specified requirements.
C.
Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined
according to ASTM D 3549.
D.
Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested for
compliance with smoothness tolerances.
E.
In-Place Density: Samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and compacted pavement will be
secured by testing agency according to ASTM D 979.
1. Reference laboratory density will be determined by averaging results from 4 samples of
hot-mix asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared according to
ASTM D 1559, and compacted according to job-mix specifications.
HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING
02511-9
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING
02511 - 10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results from 4
samples of hot-mix asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared according to
ASTM D 2041, and compacted according to job-mix specifications.
3. In-place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core samples
according to ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.
a. One core sample will be taken for every 1000 sq. yd. (836 sq. m) or less of
installed pavement, but in no case will fewer than 3 cores be taken.
b. Field density of in-place compacted pavement may also be determined by nuclear
method according to ASTM D 2950 and correlated with ASTM D 1188 or
ASTM D 2726.
F. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements
indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION 02511
I
I
I
SECTION 02530 - SANITARY SEWERAGE
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
I
I
I
1.2
I
I
1.3
I
1.4
I
I
I
I
C.
D.
1.5
A.
B.
C.
I
I
-
-
-
A.
This Section includes sanitary sewerage outside the building.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section "Septic Systems" for septic tank system structures and piping.
DEFINITIONS
A.
PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure-Piping Pressure Ratings: At least equal to system test pressure.
SUBMITI ALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1. Stainless-steel drainage systems.
2. Backwater valves and cleanouts.
3. Manhole cover inserts.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, details, and attachments for the following:
1.
2.
Precast concrete manholes, including frames and covers.
Cast-in-place concrete manholes and other structures, including frames and covers.
Design Mix Reports and Calculations: For each class of cast-in-place concrete.
Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Do not store plastic structures, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight.
Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.
Handle precast concrete manholes and other structures according to manufacturer's written rigging
instructions.
SANITARY SEWERAGE
02530 - 1
I
I
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Site Information: Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
I
I
2.2 PIPING MATERIALS
A.
Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe and fitting materials.
I
2.3
PIPES AND FITTINGS
I
A. Ductile-Iron Sewer Pipe: ASTM A 746, for push-on joints.
1.
2.
3.
Standard-Pattern, Ductile-Iron Fittings: A WW A ClIO, ductile or gray iron, for push-on joints.
Compact-Pattern, Ductile-Iron Fittings: A WW A CI53, for push-on joints.
Gaskets: A WW A C111, rubber.
I
B.
PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: According to the following:
I
1.
PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 15 (DN375) and Smaller: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, for
solvent-cemented or gasketedjoints.
I
a. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.
I
2.
PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 18 (DN450) and Larger: ASTM F 679, T-l wall thickness,
bell and spigot for gasketed joints.
a.
Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.
I
2.4
CLEAN OUTS
I
A.
PVC Cleanouts: PVC body with PVC threaded plug. Include PVC sewer pipe fitting and riser to
cleanout of same material as sewer piping.
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1 EARTHWORK
A.
Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
I
3.2
IDENTIFICATION
I
SANITARY SEWERAGE
02530 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
3.3
I
I
I
I
3.4
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
.
3.5
-
A.
Materials and their installation are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." Arrange for installing
green warning tapes directly over piping and at outside edges of underground structures.
1.
2.
Use warning tape or detectable warning tape over ferrous piping.
Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground structures.
PIPING APPLICATIONS
A.
General: Include watertight joints.
B.
Refer to Part 2 of this Section for detailed specifications for pipe and fitting products listed below. Use
pipe, fittings, and joining methods according to applications indicated.
C.
Gravity-Flow Piping: Use the following:
1. NPS 4 and NPS 6: PVC sewer pipe and fittings, solvent-cemented joints, or gaskets and gasketed
joints.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and
arrangement of underground sanitary sewerage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take
design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical.
B.
Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of
invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according
to manufacturer's written instructions for using lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.
Maintain swab or drag in line, and pull past each joint as it is completed.
c.
Use manholes for changes in direction, unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections,
unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.
D.
Use proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings
are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
E.
Install gravity-flow piping and connect to building's sanitary drains, of sizes and in locations indicated.
Tenninate piping as indicated.
1.
Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 2 percent, unless otherwise
indicated.
Install piping with 36-inch minimum cover.
2.
F.
Extend sanitary sewerage piping and connect to building's sanitary drains, of sizes and in locations
indicated. Terminate piping as indicated.
PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION
A. General: Join and install pipe and fittings according to installations indicated.
B. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: As follows:
1. Join pipe and gasketed fittings with gaskets according to ASTM D 2321.
SANITARY SEWERAGE
02530 - 3
3.6
3.7
c.
D.
A.
A.
B.
C.
I
2.
Join profile sewer pipe fittings with gaskets according to ASTM D 2321 and manufacturer's
written instructions.
Install according to ASTM D 2321.
I
3.
I
Join piping made of different materials or dimensions with couplings made for this application. Use
couplings that are compatible with and that fit both systems' materials and dimensions.
I
Install with top surfaces of components, except piping, flush with finished surface.
CLEAN OUT INSTALLATION
I
Install cleanouts and extension from piping to cleanout at grade as indicated. Use 4-inch- (100-mm-)
PVC pipe with threaded PVC cap. Set top of cleanout 2 inches (50 rom) above surrounding grade and
install precast concrete valve ring with #5 rebar around as per Richmond County standards.
I
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
I
Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab
or drag in piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed.
I
1.
2.
Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops.
Flush piping between manholes and other structures to remove collected debris, if required by
authorities having jurisdiction.
I
Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect
after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.
I
1.
2.
Submit separate reports for each system inspection.
Defects requiring correction include the following:
I
a.
b.
Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures.
Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of size
not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.
Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.
Infiltration: Water leakage into piping.
Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.
I
I
c.
d.
e.
3.
Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within
allowances specified.
Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.
I
4.
Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for
leaks and defects.
I
1.
2.
3.
Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval.
Test completed piping systems according to authorities having jurisdiction.
Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours' advance
notice.
Submit separate reports for each test.
If authorities having jurisdiction do not have published procedures, perform tests as follows:
I
I
4.
5.
a.
Sanitary Sewerage: Perform hydrostatic test.
I
SANITARY SEWERAGE
02530 - 4
I
I
I
I
6.
7.
1) Allowable leakage is maximum of 50 gal. per inch of nominal pipe size per mile of
pipe, during 24-hour period.
2) Close openings in system and fill with water.
3) Purge air and refill with water.
4) Disconnect water supply.
5) Test and inspect joints for leaks.
6) Option: Test ductile-iron piping according to A\VW A C600, Section "Hydrostatic
Testing." Use test pressure of at least 1 0 psig.
Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances
specified.
I
I
I
END OF SECTION 02530
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
.
-
SANITARY SEWERAGE
02530 - 5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02540 - SEPTIC TANK SYSTEMS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sewage disposal systems consisting of the following:
1. Septic tanks.
2. Septic tank filters.
3. Distribution boxes.
4. Distribution piping.
5. Leaching piping and chambers.
6. Absorption fill materials.
B. Related Sections include the following:
I. Division 2 Section "Sanitary Sewerage" for sewer piping from buildings and structures to
septic tank system.
2. Division 15 Section "Drainage and Vent Piping" for sewer piping from buildings and
structures to septic tank system.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene.
B. Absorption Field: Subsurface or mound wastewater disposal process.
C. Absorption Trench: System of single leaching pipes or leaching chambers and filtering
materials installed in trenches for wastewater disposal.
D. Distribution Piping: Solid pipe and pipe fittings installed with tight joints between septic tank
and other septic tank system structures to, but not including, leaching piping or leaching
chambers.
E. HDPE: High-density polyethylene.
F. Leaching Chambers: Perforated plastic structures installed horizontally in absorption field.
G. PE: Polyethylene.
H. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.
SEPTIC TANK SYSTEMS
02540 - 1
1.4
1.5
I
I
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and fmishes for the following:
1. Septic tank filters.
2. Pipe and fittings.
3. Leaching chambers.
I
I
I
B.
Shop Drawings: Include manhole openings, covers, pipe connections, and accessories for the
following precast, reinforced-concrete structures:.
1. Septic tanks.
2. Distribution boxes.
I
I
c.
Coordination Drawings: Show piping, underground structures, and other utilities. Indicate size
and invert elevations of piping and structures.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
I
A.
Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
I
1. Notify Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Engineer's written permission.
I
I
I
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
PRECAST CONCRETE SEPTIC TANKS
A.
Description: Two-chamber, precast, reinforced-concrete tank and covers; designed for
structural loading according to ASTM C 890 and made according to ASTM C 1227.
B.
Manhole: 24 inches (600 mm) in diameter, reinforced-concrete access lid with steel lift rings.
Include manhole in center of each septic tank compartment top. Include coal-tar epoxy coating,
l5-mil (0.38-mm) minimum thickness over entire surface of access lid.
I
I
C.
Inlet and Outlet Access: 12 inches (300 mm) in diameter, reinforced-concrete access lids with
steel lift rings. Include access centered over inlet and outlet.
FILTERS
I
I
A.
Septic Tank Outlet Filters: Removable filter that restricts discharge solids to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm),
is enclosed in HDPE or PVC housing, has a 4-inch- (lOO-mm-) outlet pipe connection, and has
access from surface for service.
SEPTIC TANK SYSTEMS
02540 - 2
I
I
2.3 DISTRIBUTION BOXES
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. Description: Precast, reinforced-concrete distribution box and cover; designed for structural
loading according to ASTM C 890 and made according to ASTM C 913. Include baffle,
manhole, and inlet and outlet pipe connections.
1. Coating: Coal-tar epoxy coating, IS-mil (0.38-nun) minimum thickness covering internal
areas above the water line and extending at least 4 inches (100 mm) below that point.
2. Resilient Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), of size required for piping, fitted
into inlet and outlet openings.
3. Manhole: 24 inches (600 mm) in diameter, reinforced-concrete access lid with steel lift
rings. Include manhole in center of distribution box top. Include coal-tar epoxy coating,
15-mil (0.38-mm) minimum thickness over entire surface of access lid.
2.4 DISTRIBUTION PIPES AND FITIINGS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for identification of systems where plpmg
materials specified below are used.
B. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, nonperforated, for solvent-cement or
elastomeric gasket joints.
1. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.
2. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal.
C. Sleeve-Type Couplings: Rubber or elastomeric sleeve and band assembly fabricated to match
OD of pipes to be joined.
1. Sleeves for Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal.
2. Sleeves for Dissimilar Pipes: Compatible with pipe materials being joined.
3. Bands: Stainless steel, at least one at each pipe insert.
D. Gasket-Type Couplings: Rubber or elastomeric compression gasket, made to match OD of
smaller pipe and ill or hub of adj oining larger pipe.
1. Gaskets for Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal.
2. Gaskets for Dissimilar Pipes: Compatible with pipe materials being joined.
2.5 LEACHING CHAMBERS
A. Description: Molded arched structures of PE, easily interlocked, with solid top, perforated
sides, and open bottom. For each row, include solid end piece and solid end piece with pipe
opening. Leaching chambers shall be the "high capacity" unit as manufactured by
INFILTRATOR Systems Inc.
2.6 ABSORPTION TRENCH FILL MATERIALS
A. Filtering Material: ASTM D 448, Size No. 24, 3/4 to 2-1/2 inches (19 to 63 mm), washed,
crushed stone or gravel; or broken, hard-burned clay brick.
B. Filter Mat: Geotextile woven or spun filter fabric, in 1 or more layers, for minimum total unit
weight of3 oz./sq. yd. (101 g/sq. m).
SEPTIC TANK SYSTEMS
02540 - 3
E. Backfill: Use soil removed from trench.
I
I
I
I
I
C. Filter Mat: Untreated building paper or similar porous material.
D. Joint Covers for Open-Joint Pipe: Geotextile woven filter fabric, in 1 or more layers, for
minimum total unit weight of 3 oz./sq. yd. (101 g/sq. m); copper mesh screening; or commercial
corrosion-resistant metal clips made for this application.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
B.
Examine soil structure, materials, and conditions.
I
I
I
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Survey the area for septic tank system installation. Locate and mark eXIstmg utilities,
underground structures, and aboveground obstructions before beginning and avoid disruption of
and damage to services.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
I
3.2
PREPARATION
1. Stockpile topsoil for reuse in finish grading without intermixing with other excavated
material. Stockpile materials away from edge of excavation and do not store within drip
line of remaining trees.
2. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown
dust.
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Clean exposed surfaces of tanks and other structures and protect as necessary to ensure freedom
from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
3.3
EARTHWORK
A.
Excavating, trenching, and backfilling for distribution pIpe and fittings are specified m
Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
B. Excavating and Backfilling for Septic and Dosing Tanks: As follows:
1. Excavate sufficient width and length for tanks to a depth determined by tank inlet
elevation. Provide level bottom.
2. Backfill with excavated soil, mounding soil above original grade without compacting.
I
1. Excavate trenches 36 inches in width and 50 inches in depth, minimum, for a single pipe
or chamber.
I
I
C.
Excavating and Backfilling for Absorption Fields: As follows:
I
SEPTIC TANK SYSTEMS
02540 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
I
I
I
I
I
I
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identification materials and their installation are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
Arrange for installation of green warning tape directly over piping (including absorption field
piping), at outside edges of underground structures, and at outside edges of absorption fields.
B.
Use detectable warning tape over piping, over edges of underground structures, and over edges
of absorption fields.
SEPTIC TANK INSTALLATION
A.
Install precast concrete septic tanks level according to ASTM C 891.
B.
Fill septic tank with water.
DISTRIBUTION BOX INSTALLATION
A.
Install reinforced-concrete distribution boxes at invert elevations indicated according to
ASTM C 891 and manufacturer's written instructions. Set level and plumb.
PIPING APPLICATIONS
A.
Use pipes, fittings, and joining methods, for all piping sizes, according to the following
applications:
1. Install solid PVC piping from building and grease trap to septic tank with cleanouts as
shown on plans.
2. Install solid PVC piping connecting septic tank to distribution box.
3. Install solid PVC piping from distribution box to individual chambers.
PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION AND PIPING INSTALLATION
Join and install PE pipe and tube with loose joints or couplings, according to ASTM D 2321 and
ASTM F 481.
Join and install solvent-cement-type PVC pipe and fittings according to ASTM D 2855 and
ASTM F 402.
Join gasketed PVC pipe and fittings with elastomeric seals according to ASTM D 3212.
Install distribution PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321.
Join HDPE piping with electro-fusion couplings.
Join dissimilar pipe materials with standard manufactured couplings and fittings made for that
purpose.
3.9 ABSORPTION FIELD INSTALLATION
SEPTIC TANK SYSTEMS
02540 - 5
A. System Tests: Perform testing of completed septic tank system piping and structures according
to authorities having jurisdiction.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. Install leaching chambers with no slope.
B. Install drain field using conventional procedures as specified In the Georgia "Rules and
Regulations for Onsite Sewage Management System".
3.10 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION
A. Install cleanouts and extension from piping to cleanout at grade as indicated. Use 4-inch- (100-
mm-) PVC pipe with threaded PVC cap. Set top of cleanout 2 inches (50 mm) above
surrounding grade and install precast concrete valve ring with #5 rebar around as per Richmond
County standards.
3.11 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect sanitary sewerage piping to septic tank.
B. Connect piping between septic tank system structures and absorption fields.
3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
SEPTIC TANK SYSTEMS
02540 - 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Additional Tests: Fill underground structures with water and let stand overnight. If water level
recedes, locate and repair leaks and retest. Repeat tests and repairs until there is no leakage.
3.13 CLEANING
A. Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses.
B. Maintain swab or drag in piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plugs in ends
,
of uncompleted pipe at end of workday or when work stops.
END OF SECTION 02540
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02630 - STORM DRAINAGE
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes storm drainage outside the building.
DEFINITIONS
A.
PVC: Polyvinyl cWo ride plastic.
1.3 SUBMITI ALS
1.4
1.5
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1. Plastic and Concrete Piping.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, details, and attachments for the following:
1.
2.
Precast concrete manholes and other structures, including frames, covers, and grates.
Cast-in-place concrete manholes and other structures, including frames, covers, and grates.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Do not store plastic structures, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight.
B.
Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.
C.
Handle precast concrete manholes and other structures according to manufacturer's written rigging
instructions.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Site Information: Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe and fitting materials.
STORM DRAINAGE
02630 - 1
I
I
2.3 PIPES AND FITTINGS
A.
Corrugated PE Drainage Tubing and Fittings: AASHTO M 252, Type S, with smooth waterway for
coupling joints.
1. Silttight Couplings: PE sleeve with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 2 gasket material that
mates with tube and fittings to form silttight joints.
I
B.
Corrugated PE Pipe and Fittings: AASHTO M 294, Type S, with smooth waterway for coupling joints.
I
1.
Soiltight Couplings: AASHTO M 294, corrugated, matching pipe and fittings to form soiltight
joints.
Silttight Couplings: PE sleeve with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 2 gasket material that
mates with pipe and fittings to form silttight joints.
I
2.
I
C. Reinforced-Concrete Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 76, Class ill, Wall B, for gasketedjoints.
1.
Gaskets: ASTM C 443, rubber.
I
2.4
CATCH BASINS
I
A.
Normal-Traffic, Precast Concrete Catch Basins: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth
indicated, with provision for rubber gasketed joints.
1. Base Section: 6-inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch minimum thickness for walls
and base riser section, and having separate base slab or base section with integral floor.
2. Riser Sections: 4-inch minimum thickness, 48-inch diameter, and lengths to provide depth
indicated.
3. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type, unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is indicated. Top
of cone of size that matches grade rings.
4. Gaskets: ASTM C 443, rubber.
5. Grade Rings: Include two or three reinforced-concrete rings, of 6- to 9-inch total thickness, that
match 24-inch- diameter frame and grate.
6. Steps: Fiberglass, individual steps or ladder. Include width that allows worker to place both feet
on one step and is designed to prevent lateral slippage off step. Cast steps or anchor ladder into
base, riser, and top section sidewalls at 12- to l6-inch intervals. Omit steps for catch basins less
than 60 inches deep.
I
I
I
I
B.
Cast-in-Place Concrete, Catch Basins: Construct of reinforced concrete; designed according to
ASTM C 890 for structural loading; of depth, shape, dimensions, and appurtenances indicated.
I
1. Bottom, Walls, and Top: Reinforced concrete.
2. Channels and Benches: Concrete.
3. Steps: Fiberglass, individual steps or ladder. Include width that allows worker to place both feet
on one step and is designed to prevent lateral slippage off step. Cast steps or anchor ladder into
sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch intervals. Omit steps for catch basins less than 60 inches deep.
I
I
C.
Frames and Grates: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile iron designed for heavy-duty service.
Include flat grate with small square or short-slotted drainage openings.
I
1.
2.
Size: 24 by 24 inches minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
Grate Free Area: Approximately 50 percent, unless otherwise indicated.
I
2.5
STORMW ATER INLETS
I
STORM DRAINAGE
02630 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Curb Inlets: Made with vertical curb opening, of materials and dimensions according to utility standards.
B.
Combination Inlets: Made with vertical curb and horizontal gutter openings, of materials and dimensions
according to utility standards. Include heavy-duty frames and grates.
c.
Frames and Grates: Heavy-duty frames and grates according to utility standards.
D.
Curb Inlets: Vertical curb opening, of materials and dimensions indicated.
E.
Combination Inlets: Vertical curb and horizontal gutter openings, of materials and dimensions indicated.
Include heavy-duty frames and grates.
F.
Frames and Grates: Dimensions, opening pattern, free area, and other attributes indicated.
1. Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18 minimum, ductile-iron casting.
2. Grate Free Area: Approximately 50 percent, unless otherwise indicated.
2.6 CONCRETE
I
I
I
I
I
2.7
I
I
I
A.
General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318, ACI 350R, and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II.
Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand.
Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel.
Water: Potable.
B.
Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water-cementitious ratio.
1.
2.
Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain.
Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed steel.
PIPE OUTLETS
A. Head Walls: Cast-in-place reinforced concrete, with apron and tapered sides.
B.
Riprap Basins: Broken, irregular size and shape, graded stone.
1. Average Size: NSA No. R-4, screen opening 3 inches.
c.
Filter Stone: NSA No. FS-2, No.4 screen opening, average-size, graded stone.
D. Energy Dissipators: NSA No. A-I, 3-ton average weight armor stone, unless otherwise indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
I
I
3.2
I
EARTHWORK
A.
Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
IDENTIFICATION
STORM DRAINAGE
02630 - 3
3.3
3.4
I
A.
Materials and their installation are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." Arrange for installing
green warning tapes directly over piping and at outside edges of underground structures.
1. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground structures.
I
I
PIPING APPLICATIONS
I
A.
General: Include watertight, silttight, joints.
B.
Refer to Part 2 of this Section for detailed specifications for pipe and fitting products listed below. Use
pipe, fittings, and joining methods according to applications indicated.
I
c.
Gravity-Flow Piping: Use the following:
1. NPS 8 to NPS 15: Ductile-iron sewer pipe; standard-pattern, ductile-iron fittings; gaskets; and
gasketed joints in NPS 8 to NPS 12. Use ductile-iron culvert pipe; standard-pattern, ductile-iron
fittings; gaskets; and gasketedjoints in NPS 14 to NPS 16.
2. NPS 8 to NPS 15: Corrugated PE drainage tubing and fittings, silttight couplings, and coupled
joints in NPS 8 and NPS 10. Use corrugated PE pipe and fittings, silttight couplings, and coupled
joints in NPS 12 and NPS 15.
3. NPS 8 to NPS 15: PVC sewer pipe and fittings, solvent-cemented joints, or gaskets and gasketed
joints.
4. NPS 8 to NPS 15: NPS 12 and NPS 15 reinforced-concrete sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and
gasketed joints. Do not use nonreinforced pipe instead of reinforced concrete pipe in NPS 8 and
NPS 10.
5. NPS 18 to NPS 36: Corrugated PE pipe and fittings; PE sleeve, silttight couplings; and coupled
joints.
6. NPS 18 to NPS 36: Reinforced-concrete sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints.
I
I
I
I
I
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
I
A.
General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and
arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take
design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical.
I
B.
Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of
invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according
to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.
Maintain swab or drag in line, and pull past each joint as it is completed.
I
c.
Use manholes for changes in direction, unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections,
unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.
I
D.
Use proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings
are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
I
E.
Install gravity-flow piping and connect to building's storm drains, of sizes and in locations indicated.
Terminate piping as indicated.
I
1.
Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 1 percent, unless otherwise
indicated.
Install piping with l8-inch minimum cover.
I
2.
F.
Extend storm drainage piping and connect to building's storm drains, of sizes and in locations indicated.
Terminate piping as indicated.
I
STORM DRAINAGE
02630 - 4
I
I
I
3.5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.6
I
I
3.7
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.8
A.
3.9
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION
A.
General: Join and install pipe and fittings according to installations indicated.
B. Ductile-Iron Sewer Pipe with Ductile-Iron Fittings: According to A WW A C600.
C.
Install with top surfaces of components, except piping, flush with finished surface.
D. PE Pipe and Fittings: As follows:
1.
Join pipe, tubing, and fittings with couplings for soiltight joints according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
Install according to ASTM D 2321 and manufacturer's written instructions.
Install corrugated piping according to the Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association's
"Recommended Installation Practices for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings."
2.
3.
E.
Concrete Pipe and Fittings: Install according to ACP A's "Concrete Pipe Installation Manual." Use the
following seals:
1. Round Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 443, rubber gaskets.
F.
System Piping Joints: Make joints using system manufacturer's couplings, unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Join piping made of different materials or dimensions with couplings made for this application. Use
couplings that are compatible with and that fit both systems' materials and dimensions.
CATCH-BASIN INSTALLATION
A.
Construct catch basins to sizes and shapes indicated.
B.
Set frames and grates to elevations indicated.
STORM DRAINAGE INLET AND OUTLET INSTALLATION
Construct inlet head walls, aprons, and sides of reinforced concrete, as indicated.
Construct riprap of broken stone, as indicated.
Install outlets that spill onto grade, anchored with concrete, where indicated.
Install outlets that spill onto grade, with flared end sections that match pipe, where indicated.
Construct energy dissipators at outlets, as indicated.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318 and ACI 350R.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
STORM DRAINAGE
02630 - 5
I
A.
Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab
or drag in piping, and pull past eachjoint as it is completed.
I
1. In large, accessible piping, brushes and brooms may be used for cleaning.
2. Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops.
3. Flush piping between manholes and other structures to remove collected debris, if required by
authorities having jurisdiction.
I
I
B.
Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect
after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.
I
1.
2.
Submit separate reports for each system inspection.
Defects requiring correction include the following:
a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures.
b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of size
not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.
c. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.
d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping.
e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.
I
I
3.
Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within
allowances specified.
Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.
I
4.
I
END OF SECTION 02630
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
STORM DRAINAGE
02630 - 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
.
SECTION 02751 - CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes exterior cement concrete pavement for the following:
1. Concrete plazas.
2. Parking lots.
3. Curbs and gutters.
4. Walkways.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for sub grade preparation, grading, and subbase course.
Division 2 Section "Pavement Joint Sealants" for joint sealants within concrete pavement
and at isolation joints of concrete pavement with adjacent construction.
Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for general building applications of
concrete.
3.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended
hydraulic cement, expansive hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzo1ans, ground granulated
blast-furnace slag, and silica fume.
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.
B.
Design Mixes: For each concrete pavement mix. Include alternate mix designs when
characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances
warrant adjustments.
C.
Samples: 10-lb (4.5-kg) sample of exposed aggregate.
D.
Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results
for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of
current materials:
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02751 - 1
1.5
I
E.
Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following materials
complies with requirements:
I
I
I
1. Cementitious materials and aggregates.
2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.
3. Fiber reinforcement.
4. Admixtures.
5. Curing compounds.
6. Applied [mish materials.
7. Bonding agent or adhesive.
8. Joint fillers.
I
F.
Minutes of preinstallation conference.
I
I
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed pavement work similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
I
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products complying with
ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.
I
1.
Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mix Concrete
Association's Plant Certification Program.
I
C.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing
indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
I
D.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from
the same manufacturer's plant and each aggregate from one source.
I
I
E.
ACI Publications: Comply with ACI301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless
modified by the requirements of the Contract Documents.
F.
Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material
evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes.
I
G.
Mockups: Cast mockups of full-size sections of concrete pavement to demonstrate typical
joints, surface finish, texture, color, and standard of workmanship.
I
I
1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Engineer.
2. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
3. Obtain Engineer's approval ofmockups before starting construction.
4. Maintain approved mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a
standard for judging the completed pavement.
5. Demolish and remove approved mockups from the site when directed by Engineer.
I
I
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02751-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
.
-
6. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."
1. Before submitting design mixes, review concrete pavement mix design and examine
procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each
entity directly concerned with concrete pavement to attend, including the following:
a. Contractor's superintendent.
b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixes.
c. Ready-mix concrete producer.
d. Concrete subcontractor.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other
construction activities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORMS
A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type
materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces.
1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves of a radius 100 feet (30.5 m) or less.
B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,
stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of
concrete surfaces.
2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat
sheets.
B. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 497, flat sheet.
C. Epoxy-Coated Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A, plain steel.
D. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 6l5/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.
E. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M; with ASTM A 615/A 6l5M,
Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed bars.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02751 - 3
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02751 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
F. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420),
deformed bars; assembled with clips.
G. Plain Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn.
H. Epoxy-Coated Wire: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A coated, plain steel.
1. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420). Cut bars
true to length with ends square and free of burrs.
J. Epoxy-Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M,
Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain steel bars.
K. Tie Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.
L. Hook Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6), internally and
externally threaded. Design hook-bolt joint assembly to hold coupling against pavement form
and in position during concreting operations, and to permit removal without damage to concrete
or hook bolt.
M. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcement bars, welded wire fabric, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports
according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete
or fiber-reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows:
1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will
not support chair legs.
2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer coated
wire bar supports.
N. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid two-part epoxy repair coating, compatible with epoxy coating on
reinforcement.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. General: Use the same brand and type of cementitious material from the same manufacturer
throughout the Proj ect.
B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II.
1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C.
2. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.
C. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595M, Type IS, portland blast-furnace slag cement.
D. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595M, Type IF portland pozzolan cement.
E. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595M, Type I (PM) pozzolan-modified portland cement.
F. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595M, Type I (SM) slag-modified portland cement.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.5
A.
.
.
I
G.
Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, from a single source, with coarse aggregate as
follows:
1. Class: 4S.
2. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1 inch
3. Do not use fme or coarse aggregates containing substances that cause spalling.
H.
Exposed Aggregate: Selected, hard, and durable; washed; free of material that reacts with
cementitious material or causes staining; from a single source, with gap graded coarse aggregate
as follows:
1. Aggregate Sizes: 3/8 to 5/8 inch (10 to 16 mm) nominal.
1.
Water: ASTM C 94.
ADMIXTURES
General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-
soluble chloride ions by mass of cement and to be compatible with other admixtures.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F.
Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E.
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
FffiERREINFORCEMENT
Synthetic Fiber: Fibrillated or monofilament polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for
use in concrete pavement, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type ill, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches (13 to
38 mm) long. Add at manufacturer's recommended rate but not less than 1.5 lb per cu. Yd for
curb and gutter and 1.0 lb per cu. Yd for concrete walkways and plaza.
B.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
C.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Fibrillated Fibers:
a. Fibrasol F; Axim Concrete Technologies.
b. Fibermesh; Fibermesh, Div. of Synthetic Technologies.
c. Forta; Forta Corporation.
d. Grace Fibers; W. R. Grace & Co., Construction Products Div.
2. Monofilament Fibers:
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02751 - 5
2.6
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
a. Fibrasol IIP; Axim Concrete Technologies.
b. Fiberstrand 100; Euclid Chemical Co.
c. Pibermix Stealth; Fibermesh, Div. of Synthetic Industries.
d. Forta Mono; Forta Corporation.
e. Grace MicroFiber; W. R. Grace & Co., Construction Products Div.
f. Polystrand 1000; Metalcrete Industries.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CURING MATERIALS
Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) dry.
Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene
sheet.
Water: Potable.
Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application
to fresh concrete.
Clear Solvent-Borne Liquid-Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1,
Class B.
Clear Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Evaporation Retarder:
a. Cimfilm; Axim Concrete Technologies.
b. Finishing Aid Concentrate; Burke Group, LLC (The).
c. Spray-Film; ChemMasters.
d. Aquafilm; Corispec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.
e. Sure Film; Dayton Superior Corporation.
f. Eucobar; Euclid Chemical Co.
g. Vapor Aid; Kaufman Products, Inc.
h. Lambco Skin; Lambert Corporation.
1. E-Con; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
J. Confilm; Master Builders, Inc.
k. Waterhold; Metalcrete Industries.
1. Rich Film; Richmond Screw Anchor Co.
m. SikaFilm; Sika Corporation.
n. Finishing Aid; Symons Corporation.
o. Certi-Vex EnvioAssist; Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.
2. Clear Solvent-Borne Liquid-Membrane-Forming Curing Compound:
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02751-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.7
a. AH Curing Compound #2 DR; Anti-Hydro International, Inc.
b. Res-X Cure All Resin; Burke Group, LLC (The).
c. RX Cure; Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d. Day-Chem Rez Cure; Dayton Superior Corporation.
e. Kurez DR; Euclid Chemical Co.
f. Nitocure S; Fosroc.
g. #64 Resin Cure; Lambert Corporation.
h. L&M Cure DR; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
1. 3100-Clear; W. R. Meadows, Inc.
J. Seal N Kure FDR; Metalcrete Industries.
k. Rich Cure; Richmond Screw Anchor Co.
1. Resi-Chem C309; Symons Corporation.
m. Horncure 30; Tamms Industries Co., Div. of LaPorte Construction Chemicals
North America, Inc.
n. Uni Res 150; Unitex.
o. Certi-Vex RC; Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.
3. Clear Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound:
a. AH Curing Compound #2 DR WB; Anti-Hydro International, Inc.
b. Aqua Resin Cure; Burke Group, LLC (The).
c. Safe-Cure Clear; ChemMasters.
d. W.B. Resin Cure; Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.
e. Day Chern Rez Cure (J-I1-W); Dayton Superior Corporation.
f. Nitocure S; Fosroc.
g. Aqua Kure-Clear; Lambert Corporation.
h. L&M Cure R; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
1. 1100 Clear; W. R. Meadows, Inc.
J. Resin Cure E; Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation.
k. Rich Cure E; Richmond Screw Anchor Co.
1. Resi-Chem Clear Cure; Symons Corporation.
m. Horncure 100; Tamms Industries Co., Div. of LaPorte Construction Chemicals
North America, Inc.
n. Hydro Cure; Unitex.
o. Certi-Vex Enviocure; Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.
RELATED MATERIALS
A.
Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.
B.
Pavement-Marking Paint: Alkyd-resin type; ready mixed; complying with FS TT-P-115,
Type I, or AASHTO M 248, Type N.
1. Color: As required.
C.
Glass Beads: AASHTO M 247.
D.
Wheel Stops: Precast, air-entrained concrete; 2500-psi (17.2-MPa) nurumum compressive
strength; approximately 6 inches (150 mm) high, 9 inches (225 mm) wide, and 84 inches (2130
I
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02751 -7
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02751 - 8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
mill) long. Provide chamfered comers and drainage slots on underside, and provide holes for
dowel-anchoring to substrate.
1. Dowels: Galvanized steel, diameter of 3/4 inch (19 mm), minimum length 10 inches
(254 mm).
E. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type IT, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene
butadiene.
F. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing
and bonding to damp surfaces, of class and grade to suit requirements, and as follows:
1. Type II, non-load bearing, for bonding freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.
2. Types I and IT, non-load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to
hardened concrete.
3. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to
hardened concrete.
G. Chemical Surface Retarder: Water-soluble, liquid set retarder with color dye, for horizontal
concrete surface application, capable of temporarily delaying fmal hardening of concrete to a
depth of 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm).
H. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Chemical Surface Retarder:
a. True Etch Surface Retarder; Burke Group, LLC (The).
b. Exposee; ChemMasters.
c. Delay S; Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d. Concrete Surface Retarders; Euclid Chemical Co.
e. Expose; Kaufman Products, Inc:
f. Surftard; Metalcrete Industries.
g. Crete-Nox TA; Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation.
h. Lithotex; L. M. Scofield Co.
1. Rugasol-S; Sika Corporation.
J. Certi-Vex Envioset; Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.
2. Colored Dry-Shake Hardener:
a. Conshake 600 Colortone; Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.
b. Quartz Tuff; Dayton Superior Corporation.
c. Surflex; Euclid Chemical Co.
d. Colorhard; Lambert Corporation.
e. Quartz Plate; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
f. Colorcron; Master Builders, Inc.
g. Floor Quartz; Meta1crete Industries.
h. Richmond Hard Top; Richmond Screw Anchor Co.
1. Lithochrome Color Hardener; L. M. Scofield Co.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.8
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
;;Ii
-
-
-
-
-
-
J. Harcol; Sonneborn, Div. ofChemRex, Inc.
k. Hard Top; Symons Corporation.
CONCRETE MIXES
A.
Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI211.1 and ACI301, for each type and
strength of normal-weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field
expenence.
B.
Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs
for the trial batch method.
1. Do not use Owner's field quality-control testing agency as the independent testing
agency.
C.
Proportion mixes to provide concrete with the following properties:
1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3000 psi (20.7 MPa).
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50.
3. Slump Limit: 3 inches (75 mm).
D.
Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than
portland cement according to ACI 301 requirements for concrete exposed to deicing chemicals.
E.
Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than
portland cement in concrete as follows:
1. Fly Ash: 25 percent.
2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent.
3. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent.
4. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan, and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent
portland cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent.
F.
Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of
placement having an air content of2.5 to 4.5 percent.
G.
Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of
placement having an air content as follows within a tolerance of plus or minus 1.5 percent:
1. Air Content: 6.0 percent for I-inch (25-mm) maximum aggregate.
H.
Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturer's recommended rate, but
not less than 1.0 lb/cu. yd. (0.60 kg/cu. m) for sidewalks and plaza.
1.
Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturer's recommended rate, but
not less than 1.5 Ib/cu. yd. (0.9 kg/cu. m) for curb and gutter.
2.9 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements and with ASTM C 94.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02751 - 9
1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce
mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above
90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
I
I
B.
Project-Site. Mixing: Comply with requirements and measure, batch, and mix concrete
materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-
type batch machine mixer.
I
I
1.
For mixers of 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) or smaller capacity, continue mixing at least one and
one-half minutes, but not more than five minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before
any part of batch is released.
For mixers of capacity larger than 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m), increase mixing time by 15
seconds for each additionall cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m).
Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Proj ect
identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and amount of water
added.
I
I
I
2.
3.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
3.2
PREPARATION
I
A.
Proof-roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and verify need for additional
compaction. Proceed with pavement only after nonconforming conditions have been corrected
and sub grade is ready to receive pavement.
I
B.
Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.
I
I
I
EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to
required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and
so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.
B.
Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent to ensure separation from concrete
without damage.
I
3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
I
A.
General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating reinforcement and
with recommendations in CRSI's "Placing Reinforcing Bars" for placing and supporting
reinforcement.
I
I
I
--
1. Apply epoxy repaIr coating to uncoated or damaged surfaces of epoxy-coated
reinforcement.
B.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02751 - 10
.
-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C.
Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during
concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.
D.
Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one
full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps
in either direction.
E.
Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and
free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace units as required
before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2-inch (50-mm) overlap to adjacent mats.
JOINTS
A.
General: Construct construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line
with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles
to centerline, unless otherwise indicated.
1. When joining existing pavement, place transverse joints to align with previously placed
joints, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at
locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour, unless pavement
terminates at isolation joints.
1. Provide preformed galvanized steel or plastic keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms
with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into
concrete.
2. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not
continue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Provide tie bars at sides of pavement strips where indicated.
4. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or
partially hardened concrete surfaces.
5. Use epoxy bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened
or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
c.
Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs,
catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fIxed obj ects, and where indicated.
1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 50 feet (15.25 m), unless otherwise indicated.
2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint.
3. Terminate joint filler less than 1/2 inch (12 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below
finished surface if joint sealant is indicated.
4. Place top of joint filler flush with fmished concrete surface if joint sealant is not
indicated.
5. Furnish j oint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or
clip joint-filler sections together.
6. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other
temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both
sides of joint.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02751 - 11
3.5
D.
Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt-coat
one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.
I
I
I
E.
Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as
indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete
thickness, as follows:
I
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and fmishing
each edge of joint with groover tool to the following radius. Repeat grooving of
contraction joints after applying surface fmishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete
surfaces.
a. Radius: 3/8 inch (10 mm).
I
I
I
I
F.
Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with
an edging tool to the following radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface fmishes.
Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces.
1. Radius: 3/8 inch (10 mm).
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcement
steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their
work.
I
B.
Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete.
Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.
I
C.
Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed. Do
not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at the required fmish
elevation and alignment.
I
I
D.
Comply with requirements and with recommendations in ACI 304R for measuring, mixing,
transporting, and placing concrete.
I
E.
Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement.
F.
Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push
or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.
I
G. Consolidate concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading,
rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures to consolidate concrete according to
recommendations in ACI 309R.
I
I
I
I
I
1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse Jomts with an
internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side
forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand-spreading and consolidation. Consolidate
with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint devices.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02751 - 12
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
.
.
.
I
H.
Place concrete in two operations; strike off initial pour for entire width of placement and to the
required depth below fmish surface. Lay welded wire fabric or fabricated bar mats immediately
in fmal position. Place top layer of concrete, strike off, and screed.
1. Remove and replace portions of bottom layer of concrete that have been placed more than
15 minutes without being covered by top layer, or use bonding agent if approved by
Engineer.
1.
Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Commence initial floating using
bull floats or darbies to form an open textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture
or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning
fmishing operations or spreading dry-shake surface treatments.
J.
Curbs and Gutters: When automatic machine placement is used for curb and gutter placement,
submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements.
Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as
specified for formed concrete. If results are not approved, remove and replace with formed
concrete.
K.
Slip-Form Pavers: When automatic machine placement is used for pavement, submit revised
mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce pavement to
required thickness, lines, grades, fmish, and jointing as required for formed pavement.
1. Compact subbase and prepare sub grade of sufficient width to prevent displacement of
paver machine during operations.
L.
When adjoining pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment on
concrete until pavement has attained 85 percent of its 28-day compressive strength.
M.
Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from
physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low
temperatures.
1.
When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C),
uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture
temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C)
at point of placement.
Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.
Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.
2.
3.
N.
Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and as
follows when hot-weather conditions exist:
1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement
below 90 deg F (32 deg C). Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control
temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing
water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
2. Cover reinforcement steel with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed
ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02751 - 13
3.
Fog-spray forms, reinforcement steel, and sub grade just before placing concrete. Keep
sub grade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
I
I
I
3.6 CONCRETE FINISHING
3.7
3.8
I
A.
General: Wetting of concrete surfaces during screeding, initial floating, or finishing operations
is prohibited.
B.
Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and
the concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-
driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces
to true planes. Cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform
granular texture.
1. Medium Coarse-Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse finish by striating float-
finished concrete surface 1/16 to 1/8 inch (1.6 to 3 mm) deep with a stiff-bristled broom,
perpendicular to line of traffic.
I
I
I
I
SPECIAL FINISHES
A.
Slip-Resistant Aggregate Finish: Before fmal floating, apply slip-resistant aggregate finish to
pavement surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
I
1.
Uniformly spread 25 Ibll00 sq. ft. (12 kg/IO sq. m) of dampened nonslip aggregate over
the surface. Tamp aggregate flush with surface using a steel trowel, but do not force
below surface.
After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush or an abrasive stone, and water
to expose nonslip aggregate.
I
I
2.
CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
I
I
A.
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and follow
recommendations in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing.
B.
Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy
conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during
fmishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing,
screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float fmishing.
I
I
I
c.
Begin curing after finishing concrete, but not before free water has disappeared from concrete
surface.
D.
Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing
compound, or a combination of these as follows:
I
1.
Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials:
a.
Water.
I
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02751-14
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.9
3.10
3.11
.
.
b. Continuous water-fog spray.
c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining
cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped
at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately
repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.
3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall
within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair
damage during curing period.
PAVEMENT TOLERANCES
A.
Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows:
1. Elevation: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch (9 mm), minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- (3-m-) long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch
(6 mm).
4. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1 inch (25 mm).
5. Vertical Alignment of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
6. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: 1/2 inch
(13 mm).
7. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: Length
of dowel 1/4 inch per 12 inches (6 mm per 300 mm).
8. Joint Spacing: 3 inches (75 mm).
9. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus.
10. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch (3 nun), no minus.
PAVEMENT MARKING
A.
Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified
with Engineer.
B.
Allow concrete pavement to cure for 28 days and be dry before starting pavement marking.
C.
Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.
D.
Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings of dimensions indicated
with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a
minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils (0.4 mill).
WHEEL STOPS
A.
Securely attach wheel stops into pavement with not less than two galvanized steel dowels
embedded in holes cast into wheel stops. Firmly bond each dowel to wheel stop and to
I
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02751 - 15
pavement. Extend upper portion of dowel 5 inches (125 mm) into wheel stop and lower portion
a minimum of 5 inches (125 nun) into pavement.
I
I
I
3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspection agency to sample
materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement according to
requirements specified in this Article.
I
1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: Representative samples of fresh concrete shall be obtained
according to ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94.
2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each compressive-strength test,
but not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of concrete. Additional tests
will be required when concrete consistency changes.
3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each compressive-strength test,
but not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of air-entrained concrete.
4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F
(4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each set
of compressive-strength specimens.
5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; one set of four standard cylinders for
each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise indicated. Cylinders shall be molded
and stored for laboratory-cured test specimens unless field-cured test specimens are
required.
6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour of each concrete
class exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for
each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m). One specimen shall be tested at 7 days and two
specimens at 28 days; one specimen shall be retained in reserve for later testing if
required.
7. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for a
given class of concrete, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected
batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
8. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m),
Architect may waive compressive-strength testing if adequate evidence of satisfactory
strength is provided.
9. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-
cured cylinders, current operations shall be evaluated and corrective procedures shall be
provided for protecting and curing in-place concrete.
10. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three
consecutive compressive-strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive
strength and no individual compressive-strength test result falls below specified
compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MFa).
I
I
I
I
I
B.
Testing Services: Testing shall be performed according to the following requirements:
I
I
I
I
I
C.
Test results shall be reported in writing to Engineer, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor
within 24 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project
identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing agency,
concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in pavement, design compressive strength at
28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of
break for both 7- and 28-day tests.
I
I
I
I
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02751 - 16
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.13
I
I
D.
Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be
permitted by Engineer but will not be used as the sole basis for approval or rejection.
E.
Additional Tests: Testing agency shall make additional tests of the concrete when test results
indicate slump, air entrainment, concrete strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as
directed by Engineer. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by
cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed.
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A.
Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective, or does not meet
requirements in this Section.
B.
Drill test cores where directed by Engineer when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or
defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement
concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive.
C.
Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after
placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by
removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.
D.
Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material.
Sweep concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial
Completion inspections.
END OF SECTION 02751
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
-
.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02751 -17
I
I
I
SECTION02764-PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
1.1
I
I
I
I
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1. Expansion and contraction joints within portland cement concrete pavement.
2. Joints between portland cement concrete and asphalt pavement.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 2 Section "Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving" for constructing joints between concrete and asphalt
pavement.
Division 2 Section "Portland Cement Concrete Paving" for constructing joints in concrete paving.
2.
1.2 SUBMITI ALS
A.
Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
I
I
I
1.3
I
I
1.4
I
I
I
1.5
I
I
B.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants certifying that products furnished comply
with requirements and are suitable for the use indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint sealants similar
in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in joint-
sealant installations with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating
manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing
instructions for multicomponent materials.
B.
Store and handle materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their
deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following
conditions:
1.
When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant
manufacturer.
PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS
I
02764 - 1
I
2.
Whenjoint substrates are wet.
I
B.
Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less
than that allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated.
I
c.
Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable
of interfering with their adhesion are removed fromjoint substrates.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
MATERIALS, GENERAL
I
A.
Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by
joint sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
I
B.
Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range for this
characteristic.
I
COLD-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS
I
A.
Multicomponent Jet-Fuel-Resistant Sealant for Concrete: Pourable, chemically curing elastomeric
formulation complying with the following requirements for formulation and with ASTM C 920 for type,
grade, class, and uses indicated:
I
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1.
Multicomponent Jet-Fuel-Resistant Sealant for Concrete:
I
a.
b.
Vulkem 202; Mameco International.
SEALTIGHT GARDOX; W.R. Meadows, Inc.
I
JOINT -SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS
I
A.
General: Provide joint-sealant backer materials that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates,
sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by joint sealant
manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
I
B.
Round Backer Rod for Cold- and Hot-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 1, of diameter and density
required to control sealant depths and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant.
I
PRJJvfERS
I
A.
Primers: Product recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to
joint substrates indicated, as determined from pre construction joint- sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
I
P ART 3 - EXECUTION
I
PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS
02764 - 2
I
I
I
3.1
I
I
I
3.2
I
I
I
3.3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant
performance.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with
joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by joint sealant
manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to
comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confille primers to areas of joint-sealant
bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A.
General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products
and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B.
Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants
as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
c.
Install backer materials of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to
produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimmn
sealant movement capability.
1.
2.
3.
Do not leave gaps between ends of backer materials.
Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear backer materials.
Remove absorbent backer materials that have become wet before sealant application and replace
them with dry materials.
D.
Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings are
installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration.
3. Produce unifonn, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optirnmn
sealant movement capability.
E.
Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins,
tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration
indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1.
2.
Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.
Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
F.
Provide joint configuration to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions, unless
otherwise indicated.
PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS
02764 - 3
I
G.
Provide recessed j oint configuration for silicone sealants of recess depth and at locations indicated.
I
3.4
CLEANING
I
A.
Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.
I
3.5
PROTECTION
I
A.
Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from
damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or
damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs,
cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired
areas are indistinguishable from the original work.
I
I
END OF SECTION 02764
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS
02764 - 4
I
I
SECTION 02831 - CHAlN-LINK
I
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
I
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
I
1.2 SUMMARY
I
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Polyvinyl chloride (pVC)-coated steel chain link fabric.
2. Galvanized-steel framework.
I
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
I
1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete for post footings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
I
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
I
B. Product data in the form of manufacturer's technical data, specifications, and installation instructions for fence
and gate posts, fabric, gates, and accessories.
I
C. Shop drawings showing location of fence, gates, each post, and details of post installation, extension arms,
gate swing, hardware, and accessories. Submit to Engineer for approval.
I
D. Samples for verification of PVC color in form of 6-inch lengths of actual fabric wire to be used in color
selected.
1. Include similar samples of polymer coating applied on posts, rails, and accessories in color selected.
I
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has at least three years' experience and has
completed at least five chain link fence projects with same material and of similar scope to that indicated for
this Project with a successful construction record of in-service performance.
I
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain chain link fences and gates, including accessories, fittings, and
fastenings, from a single source.
I
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
I
A. Field Measurements: Verify layout information for fences and gates shown on the Drawings in relation to the
property survey and existing structures. Verify dimensions by field measurements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1 FABRIC
I
A. Selvage:
1. Top and bottom selvage knuckled.
I
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
02831-1
I
B. Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric: Fabricated in one-piece widths for fencing 12 feet and less in height to comply
with Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (CLFMI) "Product Manual" and with requirements indicated below:
I
1. Mesh and Wire Size: 2-inch mesh, 0.148-inch diameter (9 gage).
2. Coating: ASTM F 668, Class 2b, PVC with 6 gage total finish (9 gage wire).
3. PVC Coating Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturers' standard colors of green, olive green,
brown, or black complying with ASTM F 934.
I
Actual OD
1.315
1.660
1.900
2.375
2.875
3.500
4.000
6.625
8.625
NPS Size
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
2-1/2
3
3-1/2
6
8
Trade Size
1-3/8
1-5/8
2
2-1/2
3
3-1/2
4
6-5/8
8-5/8
I
I
I
I
I
2.2
FRAMING
A.
Round member sizes are given in actual outside diameter (OD) to the nearest thousandth of inches. Round
fence posts and rails are often referred to in ASTM standard specifications by nominal pipe sizes (NPS) or the
equivalent trade sizes in inches. The following indicates these equivalents all measured in inches:
B.
Type I Round Posts: Standard weight (schedule 40) galvanized-steel pipe conforming to ASTM F 1083,
according to heavy industrial requirements of ASTM F 669, Group IA, with minimum yield strength of25,000
psi, not less than 1.8 oz. of zinc per sq. ft. Type A coating inside and outside according to ASTM F 1234, as
determined by ASTM A 90, and weights per foot as follows:
I
I
Actual OD
1.315
1.660
1.900
2.375
2.875
3.500
4.000
6.625
8.625
Weight (lb/ft)
1.68
2.27
2.72
3.65
5.79
7.58
9.11
8.97
28.55
NPS Size
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
2-1/2
3
3-1/2
6
8
I
I
I
I
I
C. Type II Round Posts: Cold-formed, electric-welded steel pipe conforming to heavy industrial requirements of
ASTM F 669, Group IC, with minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi, either protective coating system below
according to ASTM F 1234, and weights per foot as follows:
1. Coatings: Type B outside with a minimum of 0.9 oz. of zinc per sq. ft. after welding, a chromate
conversion coating and a clear polymer overcoat. Type B inside with a minimum of 0.9 oz. of zinc
per sq. ft. or Type D inside with a minimum 0.3-mil-thick, 81-percent zinc-pigmented nominal
coating.
2. Coatings: Type C inside and outside with not less than 0.9 oz. of zinc-5 percent
aluminum-mischmetal alloy per sq. ft.
I
Actual OD
1.315
1.660
1.900
2.375
2.875
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
Weight (lb/ft)
1.35
1.84
2.28
3.12
4.64
NPS Size
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
2-1/2
I
I
02831-2
I
I
3.500
4.000
5.71
6.56
3
3-1/2
I
D.
Square Tubing: Cold-formed steel structural tubing conforming to ASTM A 500, Grade B with minimum yield
strength of42,000 psi and not less than 1.8 oz. of zinc per sq. ft. Type A coating inside and outside according
to ASTM F 1234, as determined by ASTM A 90.
I
E.
Supplemental Color Coating: In addition to above metallic coatings, provide posts and rails with manufacturer's
standard polymer coating according to ASTM F 1234, 10-mi1 minimum polyvinyl chloride (pVC) or 3-mil
minimum polyester plastic resin finish applied to exterior surfaces and, except for tubular shapes, to exposed
interior surfaces. Color to match chain link fabric.
I
I
F.
Top Rail: Manufacturer's longest lengths (17 to 21 feet) with swedged-end or expansion-type coupling,
approximately 6 inches long for joining. Provide rail ends or other means for attaching top rail securely to
each gate corner, pull, and end post.
I
1.
Round Steel: 1.660-inch OD Type I or II steel pipe.
G.
Steel posts for fabric heights up to 6 feet:
I
1. Round Line or Intermediate Posts: 1.90-inch OD Type I or II steel pipe.
2. Round End, Corner, and Pull Posts: 2.375-inch OD Type I or II steel pipe.
I
Hoo
Swing Gate Posts: Furnish posts to support single gate leaf, or one leaf of a double-gate installation,
according to ASTM F 900, sized as follows for steel and aluminum pipe posts:
I
1.
Steel posts for fabric height of 6 feet or less and gate leaf width:
I
a.
b.
Up to and Including 4 Feet: 2.375-inch OD pipe weighing at least 3.11lb per ft.
Over 4 to 10 Feet: 2.875-inch OD pipe weighing at least 4.64 1b per ft.
Over 10 to 18 Feet: 4.000-inch OD pipe weighing at least 8.65 1b per ft.
c.
I
2.3 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Material: Comply with ASTM F 626. Mill-finished aluminum or galvanized iron or steel to suit
manufacturer's standards.
I
1. Steel and Iron: Unless specified otherwise, hot-dip galvanize pressed steel or cast-iron fence fittings and
accessories with at least 1.2 oz. zinc per sq. ft. as determined by ASTM A 90.
2. Aluminum: Die cast conforming to ASTM B 26, aluminum-alloy 360 or sand cast conforming to ASTM
B 85, aluminum-alloy 365, ZG61A, or Tenzalloy.
3. Supplemental Color Coating: In addition to above metallic coatings, provide a lO-mil minimum
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic resin finish applied to exterior surfaces and, except inside cap shapes,
to exposed interior surfaces. Color to match chain link fabric.
I
I
I
B. Post and Line Caps: Provide weathertight closure cap for each post. Provide line post caps with loop to
receive tension wire or top rail.
I
C. Post Brace Assembly: Manufacturer's standard adjustable brace. Use material specified below for brace, and
truss to line posts with 3/8-inch-diameter rod and adjustable tightener. Provide manufacturer's standard
galvanized-steel, cast-iron or cast-aluminum cap for each end.
I
1. Round Steel: 1.660-inch OD Type I or II steel pipe.
D. Bottom Rail: Same material as top rail. Provide manufacturer's standard galvanized-steel, cast-iron or
cast-aluminum cap for each end.
I
E. Tension or Stretcher Bars: Hot-dip galvanized steel with a minimum length 2 inches less than the full height
of fabric, a minimum cross section of3/16 inch by 3/4 inch, and a minimurnof 1.2 oz. of zinc coating per sq.
ft. Provide one bar for each gate and end post, and two for each corner and pull post, except where fabric is
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 02831-3
I
I
integrally woven into the post.
F.
Tension and Brace Bands: 3/4-inch-wide minimum hot-dip galvanized steel with a minimum of 1.2 oz. of
zinc coating per sq. ft.
I
1. Tension Bands: 0.074 inch thick (14 gage) minimum.
2. Brace Bands: 0.105 inch thick (12 gage) minimum.
I
G.
Tension Wire: 0.177 -inch-diameter metallic-coated steel marcelled tension wire conforming to ASTM A 824
with fInish to match fabric.
I
1.
Coating Type II zinc in the following class as determined by ASTM A 90.
I
a. Class 2, with a minimum coating weight of 1.20 oz. per sq. ft. of uncoated wire surface.
H. Tie Wires: 0.106-inch-diameter (l2-gage) galvanized steel with a minimum of 0.80 oz. per sq. ft. of zinc
coating according to ASTM A 641, Class 3 or 0.148-inch-diameter (9-gage) aluminum wire alloy 1350-H19
or equal, to match fabric wire.
I
2.4 CONCRETE
I
A. Concrete: Provide concrete consisting of portland cement per ASTM C 150, aggregates per ASTM C 33, and
potable water. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.
Use at least four sacks of cement per cu. yd., I-inch maximum size aggregate, 3-inch maximum slump.
I
2.5 GATES
I
A.
Fabricate perimeter frames of gates from same material and finish as fence framework. Assemble gate frames
by welding. Provide horizontal and vertical members to ensure proper gate operation and attachment of
fabric, hardware, and accessories. Space frame members maximum of 8 feet apart unless otherwise indicated.
I
1. Fabric: Same as for fence unless otherwise indicated. Secure fabric at vertical edges with tension
bars and bands and to top and bottom of frame with tie wires.
2. Bracing: Install diagonal cross-bracing consisting of5/l6-inch-diameter adjustable-length truss rods
on gates to ensure frame rigidity without sag or twist.
I
B.
Swing Gates: Comply with ASTM F 900.
I
1.
Steel: Gates up to 8 feet wide:
I
a.
Up to 6 Feet High: Fabricate perimeter frames of 1.660-inch minimum OD Type I or II steel
pipe or l-l/2-inch-square galvanized-steel tubing weighing 1.84lb per sq. ft.
Over 6 Feet High: Fabricate perimeter frames of 1.90-inch minimum OD Type I or II steel
pipe or 2-inch-square galvanized-steel tubing weighing 2.52 lb per sq. ft.
I
b.
2.
Gate Hardware: Provide galvanized hardware and accessories for each gate according to the
following:
I
c.
Hinges: Size and material to suit gate size, non-tift-off type, offset to permit l80-degree gate
opening. Provide 1-1/2 pair of hinges for each leaf over 6-foot nominal height.
Latch: Forked type or plunger-bar type to permit operation from either side of gate, with
padlock eye as an integral part of latch.
Gate Stops: Provide gate stops for double gates consisting of mushroom-type flush plate
with anchors, set in concrete, and designed to engage a center drop rod or plunger bar.
Include a locking device and padlock eyes as an integral part of the latch, permitting both
gate leaves to be locked with a single padlock.
I
a.
b.
I
I
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
02831-4
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1 INSTALLATION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. General: Install fence to comply with ASTM F 567. Do not begin installation and erection before final
grading is completed, unless otherwise permitted.
B. Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate (using post-hole digger) holes for posts to diameters and spacings
indicated, in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil.
1.
If not indicated on Drawings, excavate holes for each post to minimum diameter recommended by
fence manufacturer, but not less than four times the largest cross section of post.
Unless otherwise indicated, excavate hole depths approximately 3 inches lower than post bottom,
with bottom of posts set not less than 36 inches below finish grade surface.
2.
C. Setting Posts: Center and align posts in holes 3 inches above bottom of excavation. Space a maximum of 10
feet o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Protect portion of posts above ground from concrete splatter. Place concrete around posts and
vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Check each post for vertical and top alignment, and hold in
position during placement and finishing operations.
a.
Unless otherwise indicated, extend concrete footings 2 inches above grade and trowel to a
crown to shed water.
D.
Run rail continuously through line post caps, bending to radius for curved runs and at other posts temtinating
into rail end attached to posts or post caps fabricated to receive rail. Provide expansion couplings as
recommended by fencing manufacturer.
E.
Brace Assemblies: Install braces at end and gate posts and at both sides of comer and pull posts. Locate
horizontal braces at midheight of fabric on fences with top rail and at two thirds fabric height on fences
without top rail. Install so posts are plumb when diagonal rod is under proper tension.
F.
Bottom Tension Wire: Install tension wire within 6 inches of bottom offabric before stretching fabric and tie
to each post with not less than same gage and type of wire. Pull wire taut, without sags. Fasten fabric to
tension wire with 0 .120-inch-diameter ( II-gage) hog rings of same material and finish as fabric wire, spaced a
maximum of24 inches o.c.
G.
Top Tension Wire: For mechanical electrical and detention basin areas, install tension wire through post cap
loops before stretching fabric. Pull wire taut, without sags. Fasten fabric to tension wire with
O.120-inch-diameter (II-gage) hog rings ofsarne material and finish as fabric wire, spaced a maximumof24
inches o.c.
H.
Fabric: Leave approximately 2 inches between fInish grade and bottom selvage unless otherwise indicated.
Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. Install fabric on security side offence, and anchor to
framework so that fabric remains under tension after pulling force is released.
1.
Tension or Stretcher Bars: Thread through fabric and secure to end, comer, pull, and gate posts with tension
bands spaced not over 15 inches o.c.
1.
Tie Wires: Use wire of proper length to secure fabric fIrmly to posts and rails. Bend ends of wire to minimize
hazard to persons or clothing.
1. Maximum Spacing: Tie fabric to line posts 12 inches o.c. and to rails and braces 24 inches o.c.
K.
Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and carriage bolts on the side of the fence opposite the fabric side.
Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent removal of nuts for added security.
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
02831-5
I
3.2 GATE INSTALLATION
A. 1 Install gates plumb, level, and secure for full opening without interference. Install ground-set items in
concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary. Install gates
according to manufacturer's instructions, plumb, level, and secure.
I
3.3 ADJUSTING
I
A. Gates: After repeated operation of completed installation equivalent to 3 days' use by normal traffic,
readjust gates and gate operators and controls for optimum operating condition and safety. Lubricate
operating equipment and clean exposed surfaces.
I
I
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
02831-6
I
I
I
SECTION 02900 - LANDSCAPING
I
PART 1- GENERAL
I
1.1
I
I
I
I
I
1.2
I
I
I
I
I
1.3
I
I
I
I
I
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Trees.
Shrubs.
Ground covers.
Plants.
Lawns.
Topsoil and soil amendments.
Fertilizers and mulches.
Stakes and guys.
Landscape edgings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed landscaping work similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful landscape es-
tablishment.
1. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on
the Proj ect site during times that landscaping is in progress.
B.
Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of trees and shrubs indicated, complying with applicable
requirements of ANSI 260.1 "American Standard for Nursery Stock."
c.
Measurements: Measure trees and shrubs according to ANSI 260.1 with branches and trunks or canes in
their normal position. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. Take caliper measurements 6 inches (150
mm) above ground for trees up to 4-inch (1 DO-nun) caliper size, and 12 inches (300 rom) above ground
for larger sizes. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread; do not measure branches or
roots tip-to-tip.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis, and name of
manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at site.
B.
Seed: Deliver seed in original sealed, labeled, and undamaged containers.
c.
Trees and Shrubs: Deliver fresWy dug trees and shrubs. Handle trees in a manner that will not injure tree
bark or branching. Do not prune before delivery, except as approved by Landscape Architect. Protect
bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, sweating, whipping, and other handling and ty-
ing damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy natural shape. Pro-
vide protective covering during delivery. Do not drop trees and shrubs during delivery.
D.
Handle balled and burlapped stock by the root ball.
LANDSCAPING
02900 - 1
1.4
1.5
I
E.
Deliver trees, shrubs, ground covers, and plants after preparations for planting have been completed and
install immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set planting materials in
shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist.
I
I
1.
Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or other acceptable mate-
rial.
Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting.
Water root systems of trees and shrubs stored on site with a fine-mist spray. Water as often as
necessary to maintain root systems in a moist condition.
I
I
2.
3.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
I
A.
Utilities: Determine location of above grade and underground utilities and perform work in a manner
which will avoid damage. Hand excavate, as required. Maintain grade stakes until removal is mutually
agreed upon by parties concerned.
I
B.
Excavation: When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such' as rubble fill, adverse
drainage conditions, or obstructions, notify Engineer before planting.
I
COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
I
A.
Coordinate installation of planting materials during normal planting seasons for each type of plant mate-
rial required.
I
1.6 WARRANTY
A.
General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other
rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to,
and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
I
I
B.
Special Warranty: Warrant the following living planting materials for a period of one year after date of
Substantial Completion, against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects re-
sulting from lack of adequate maintenance, neglect, or abuse by Owner, abnormal weather conditions un-
usual for warranty period, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control.
I
1. Trees.
2. Shrubs.
3. Plants.
4. Grass and Sod
I
I
C.
Remove and replace dead planting materials immediately unless required to plant in the succeeding plant-
ing season.
I
D.
Replace planting materials that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at end of war-
ranty period.
E.
A limit of one replacement of each plant material will be required, except for losses or replacements due
to failure to comply with requirements.
I
I
LANDSCAPING
02900 - 2
I
I
I
1.7
I
I
I
TREE AND SHRUB MAINTENANCE
A.
Maintain trees and shrubs by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, restoring planting sau-
cers, tightening and repairing stakes and guy supports, and resetting to proper grades or vertical position,
as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray as required to keep trees and shrubs free of in-
sects and disease. Restore or replace damaged tree wrappings. Maintain trees and shrubs for the follow-
ing period:
1. Maintenance Period: 12 months following Substantial Completion.
1.8 LAWN MAINTENANCE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Begin maintenance of lawns immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable lawn is
established, but for not less than the following periods:
1.
Seeded and Sodded Lawns: 60 days after date of Substantial Completion.
a. When full maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting season, or if lawn is
not fully established at that time, continue maintenance during next planting season.
B.
Maintain and establish lawns by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and other
operations. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth
lawn.
c.
Watering: Provide and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and lawn-watering equipment to convey water
from sources and to keep lawns uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches (100 mm).
1. Water lawn at the minimwn rate of 1 inch (25 nm1) per week.
D.
Mow lawns as soon as there is enough top growth to cut with mower set at specified height for principal
species planted. Repeat mowing as required to maintain specified height without cutting more than 40
percent of the grass height. Remove no more than 40 percent of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent
mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bend over and become matted. Do not mow when
grass is wet.
E.
Postfertilization: Apply fertilizer to lawn after first mowing and when grass is dry.
1. Use fertilizer that will provide actual nitrogen of at least lIb per 1000 sq. ft. (0.5 kg per 100 sq.
m) of lawn area.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
I
I
I
I
TREE AND SHRUB MATERIAL
A.
General: Furnish nursery-grown trees and shrubs conforming to ANSI 260.1, with healthy root systems
developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully-branched, healthy, vigorous stock
free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfig-
urement.
B.
Grade: Provide trees and shrubs of sizes and grades conforming to ANSI 260.1 for type of trees and
shrubs required. Trees and shrubs of a larger size may be used if acceptable to Engineer, with a propor-
tionate increase in size of roots or balls.
LANDSCAPING
02900 - 3
2.2
I
c.
Label each tree and shrub with securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical
and common name.
I
I
D.
Label at least 1 tree and 1 shrub of each variety and caliper with a securely attached, waterproof tag bear-
ing legible designation of botanical and common name.
I
SHADE AND FLOWERING TREES
A.
Shade Trees: Single-stem trees with straight trunk, well-balanced crown, and intact leader, of height and
caliper indicated, conforming to ANSI Z60.1 for type of trees required.
I
1.
Branching Height: 1/3 to 1/2 of tree height.
I
B.
Small Trees: Small upright or spreading type, branched or pruned naturally according to species and
type, and with relationship of caliper, height, and branching recommended by ANSI Z60.1, and stem
form as follows:
I
1.
2.
3.
Form: Single stem.
Form: Mu1tistem, clwnp, with 2 or more main stems.
Form: Multistem, shrub, with multiple stems.
I
C.
Provide balled and bur1apped trees.
I
2.3 DECIDUOUS SHRUBS
2.4
2.5
I
A.
Form and Size: Deciduous shrubs with not less than the minimum number of canes required by and
measured according to ANSI Z60.1 for type, shape, and height of shrub.
B.
Provide balled and bur1apped deciduous shrubs.
I
1.
Container-grown deciduous shrubs will be acceptable in lieu of balled and bur1apped deciduous
shrubs subject to meeting ANSI Z60.11imitations for container stock.
I
CONWEROUSEVERGREENS
I
A.
Form and Size: Normal-quality, well-balanced, coniferous evergreens, of type, height, spread, and shape
required, conforming to ANSI Z60.1.
I
B.
Provide balled and bur1apped coniferous evergreens.
1.
Container-grown coniferous evergreens will be acceptable in lieu of balled and bur1apped conifer-
ous evergreens subject to meeting ANSI Z60.1 limitations for container stock.
I
GRASS MATERIALS
I
A.
Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with the Association of Official Seed Analysts'
"Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances.
I
1. Seed Mixture: Provide seed of grass species and varieties, proportions by weight, and minimum
percentages of purity, germination, and maximum percentage of weed seed as indicated on Sched-
ules at the end of this Section.
I
LAl{DSCAPTING 02900-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
TOPSOIL
A.
Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, pH range of 5.5 to 7, 4 percent organic material minimum, free of stones 1 inch
(25 mm) or larger in any dimension, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.
1.
Topsoil Source: Reuse surface soil stockpiled on the site. Verify suitability of surface soil to pro-
duce topsoil meeting requirements and amend when necessary. Supplement with imported topsoil
when quantities are insufficient. Clean topsoil of roots, plants, sods, stones, clay lumps, and other
extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.
Topsoil Source: Amend existing surface soil to produce topsoil. Supplement with imported top-
soil when required.
2.
SOIL AMENDMENTS
A.
Lime: ASTM C 602, Class T, agricultural limestone containing a minimum 80 percent calcium carbonate
equivalent, with a minimum 99 percent passing a No.8 (2.36 mm) sieve and a minimum 75 percent pass-
ing a No. 60 (250 micrometer) sieve.
1. Provide lime in the form of dolomitic limestone.
B.
Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated.
C.
Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured sand, free of toxic materials.
D. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade.
E.
Peat Humus: Finely divided or granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, composed of partially de-
composed moss peat (other than sphagnum), peat humus, or reed-sedge peat.
F.
Water: Potable.
FERTILIZER
A.
Bonemeal: Commercial, raw, finely ground; minimum of 4 percent nitrogen and 20 percent phosphoric
acid.
B.
Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric
acid.
C.
Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and
slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea-form, phosphorous, and
potassium in the following composition:
1. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports
from a qualified soil-testing agency (University of Georgia Extension Service).
MULCHES
A.
Organic Mulch: Organic mulch, free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees
and shrubs, consisting of one of the following:
1. Type: Shredded pine bark at 3" deep minimum.
LANDSCAPING 02900 - 5
2.10
2.11
2.12
I
I
WEED-CONTROL BARRIERS
A.
Sheet Polyethylene: Black, 0.006-inch (0. 15-mm) minimum thickness.
I
STAKES AND GUYS
I
A.
Upright and Guy Stakes: Rough-sawn, sound, new hardwood, redwood, or pressure-preservative-treated
softwood, free of knots, holes, cross grain, and other defects, 2 by 2 inches (50 by 50 mm) by length indi-
cated, pointed at one end.
I
B.
Guy and Tie Wire: ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641M), Class 1, galvanized-steel wire, 2-strand, twisted,
0.106 inch (2.7 mm) in diameter.
I
C.
Hose ChafIng Guard: Reinforced rubber or plastic hose at least 1/2 inch (13 mm) in diameter, black, cut
to lengths required to protect tree trunks from damage.
I
D.
Flags: Standard surveyor's plastic flagging tape, white, 6 inches (150 mm) long.
NITSCELLANEOUS1iATERlALS
I
A.
Trunk-Wrap Tape: Two layers of crinkled paper cemented together with bituminous material, 4 inches
(102 rnm) wide minimum, with stretch factor of33 percent.
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION
I
A.
Examine areas to receive landscaping for compliance with requirements and for conditions affecting per-
formance of work of this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
I
PREPARATION
I
A.
Layout individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations, outline ar-
eas, and secure Landscape Architect's acceptance before the start of planting work. Make minor adjust-
ments as may be required.
I
PLANTING SOIL PREPARATION
I
A.
Before mixing, clean topsoil of roots, plants, sods, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials
harmful to plant growth.
I
B.
Mix soil amendments and fertilizers with topsoil at rates indicated. Delay mixing fertilizer if planting
does not follow placing of planting soil within a few days.
I
1.
A "Planting Soil Amendments Schedule" is included at the end of this Section.
c.
For tree pit or trench backiill, mix planting soil before backfilling and stockpile at site.
I
LANDSCAPING
02900 - 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.5
I
-
D.
For planting beds and lawns, mix planting soil either prior to planting or apply on surface of topsoil and
mix thoroughly before planting.
1.
Mix lime with dry soil prior to mixing fertilizer. Prevent lime from contacting roots of acid-
tolerant plants.
Apply phosphoric acid fertilizer, other than that constituting a portion of complete fertilizers, di-
rectly to sub grade before applying planting soil and tilling.
2.
LAWN PLANTING PREPARATION
A. Limit subgrade preparation to areas that will be planted in the immediate future.
B.
Loosen sub grade to a minimum depth of 4 inches (100 mm). Remove stones larger than 1-1/2 inches (38
mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous materials.
C.
Spread planting soil mixture to depth required to meet thickness, grades, and elevations shown, after light
rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or sub grade is frozen.
1.
Place approximately 1/2 the thickness of planting soil mixture required. Work into top of loos-
ened subgrade to create a transition layer and then place remainder of planting soil mixture.
Allow for sod thickness in areas to be sodded.
2.
D.
Preparation of Unchanged Grades: Where lawns are to be planted in areas unaltered or undisturbed by
excavating, grading, or surface soil stripping operations, prepare soil as follows:
1.
Remove and dispose of existing grass, vegetation, and turf. Do not turn over into soil being pre-
pared for lawns.
Till surface soil to a depth of at least 6 inches (150 mm). Apply required soil amendments and ini-
tial fertilizers and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches (l00 mm) of soil. Trim high areas and fill in
depressions. Till soil to a homogenous mixture offme texture.
Clean surface soil of roots, plants, sods, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harm-
ful to plant growth.
Remove waste material, including grass, vegetation, and turf, and legally dispose of it off the
Owner's property.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Grade lawn and grass areas to a smooth, even surface with loose, uniformly fme texture. Roll and rake,
remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit fme grading to areas that can be planted
in the immediate future. Remove trash, debris, stones larger than] -1/2 inches (38 mm) in any dimension,
and other objects that may interfere with planting or maintenance operations.
F.
Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting when soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry
before planting. Do not create muddy soil.
G.
Restore prepared areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after fine grading and before planting.
EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS
A.
Pits and Trenches: Excavate with vertical sides and with bottom of excavation slightly raised at center to
assist drainage. Loosen hard subsoil in bottom of excavation.
1. Balled and Burlapped Trees and Shrubs: Excavate approximately 1-1/2 times as wide as ball di-
ameter and equal to ball depth, plus the following setting layer depth:
a. Setting Layer: Allow 9 inches (225 mm) of planting soil.
LANDSCAPING
02900 - 7
.
I
2.
Container-Grown Trees and Shrubs: Excavate to container width and depth, plus the following
setting-layer depth:
a. Setting Layer: Allow 6 inches (150 mm) of planting soil.
I
I
B. Dispose of subsoil removed from landscape excavations. Do not mix with planting soil or use as backfill.
3.6
c.
D.
E.
A.
B.
C.
D.
I
Obstructions: Notify Landscape Architect if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or
shrubs are encountered in excavations.
Drainage: Notify Landscape Architect if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or reten-
tion in tree or shrub pits.
I
Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate out, before placing setting layer and positioning trees
and shrubs.
I
PLANTING TREES AND SHRUBS
I
Set balled and burlapped stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of ball raised above adjacent
finish grades as indicated.
I
1.
2.
Place stock on setting layer of compacted planting soil.
Remove burlap and wire baskets from tops of balls and partially from sides, but do not remove
from under balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if ball is
cracked or broken before or during planting operation.
Place backfill around ball in layers, tamping to settle backfill and eliminate voids and air pockets.
When pit is approximately 1/2 backfilled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill.
Repeat watering until no more is absorbed. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of
backfill.
I
I
3.
Set container-grown stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of ball raised above adjacent fIn-
ish grades as indicated.
I
1.
2.
3.
Carefully remove containers so as not to damage root balls.
Place stock on setting layer of compacted planting soil.
Place backfill around ball in layers, tamping to settle backfill and eliminate voids and air pockets.
When pit is approximately 1/2 backfilled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill.
Repeat watering until no more is absorbed. Water again after placing and tamping fInal layer of
backfill.
I
I
Dish and tamp top of backfill to form a 3-inch- (75-mm-) high mound around the rim of the pit. Do not
cover top of root ball with backfill.
I
Wrap trees of 2-inch (50-rom) caliper and larger with trunk-wrap tape. Tape color shall closely resemble
trunk color. Start at base of trunk and spiral cover trunk to height of3' -0". Overlap wrap, exposing half
the width, and securely attach without causing girdling. Inspect tree trunks for injury, improper pruning,
and insect infestation and take corrective measures required before wrapping.
I
I
3.7 TREE AND SHRUB PRUNING
3.8
A.
Prune, thin, and shape trees and shrubs as directed by Landscape Architect.
I
TREE AND SHRUB GUYING AND STAKING
I
LANDSCAPING
02900 - 8
I
I
I
I
I
3.9
I
I
I
A.
Guying and Staking: Guy and stake trees exceeding 12 feet (4.2 m) and more than 2.5-inch (75-mm)
caliper unless otherwise indicated. Securely attach no fewer than 3 guys to stakes 30 inches (760 mm)
long, driven to grade. Attach flags to each guy wire, 30 inches (760 mm) above finish grade.
MULCHING
A.
Weed-Control Barriers: Install the following weed-control barriers according to manufacturer's recom-
mendations, before mulching. Completely cover area to be mulched, lapping edges a minimum of 6
inches (150 nml).
1. Material and Seam Treatment: Sheet polyethylene with seams taped.
B.
Organic Mulch: Apply the following average thickness of organic mulch and fInish level with adjacent
fmish grades. Do not place mulch against trunks or stems.
1. Thickness: 3 inches (75 mm).
3.10 SEEDING NEW LAWNS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.11
I
I
I
3.12
A.
Sow seed with a spreader or a seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity ex-
ceeds 5 mph (8 km/b). Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in 2 directions at right angles to
each other.
1.
Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged in transit or storage.
B.
Sow seed at the following rates:
1. Seeding Rate: 3 to 4 lb per 1000 sq. ft. (1.5 to 2 kg per 100 sq. m).
C.
Rake seed lightly into top 118 inch (3 nml) of topsoil, roll lightly, and water with fme spray.
D.
Protect seeded areas with slopes less than 1:6 against erosion by spreading wheat straw mulch after com-
pletion of seeding operations. Spread uniformly at a minimum rate of 2 tons per acre (45 kg per 100 sq.
m) to form a continuous blanket 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) loose depth over seeded areas. Spread by hand,
blower, or other suitable equipment.
E.
Protect seeded areas against hot, dry weather or drying winds by applying peat mulch within 24 hours af-
ter completion of seeding operations. Soak and scatter uniformly to a depth of 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) thick
and roll to a smooth surface.
CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A.
During landscaping, keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition.
B.
Protect landscaping from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other contractors and trades,
and trespassers. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or re-
place damaged landscape work as directed.
DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A.
Disposal: Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and
debris, and legally dispose of it off the Owner's property.
LANDSCAPING
02900 - 9
I
I
3.13
SEED MIXTURES SCHEDULE
Proportion
Name
Min.
Pet.
Germ.
Min. Pet.
Pure Sd.
Max. Pet.
Weed Sd.
I
I
A.
Full-Sun Mixture: Provide certified grass-seed blends or mixes, proportioned by weight, as follows:
100 pet.
Hybrid Bermudagrass
(Cynodon dactylon)
80
85
0.50
I
I
I
END OF SECTION 02900
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
LANDSCAPING
02900 - 10
I
I
I
SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
I
I
1.1
PART 1- GENERAL
SUMMARY:
I
1.2
I
1.3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.4
I
A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete
materials, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes.
DEFINITIONS:
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with fly ash.
SUBMIITALS:
A.
Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.
B.
Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of
materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.
1. Indicate amounts of mix water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.
c.
Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Details of fabrication, bending, and placement, prepared
according to ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Include material,
grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement, and supports of concrete
reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures.
D.
Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional
engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork. Design and engineering of
formwork are Contractor's responsibility.
1. Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping formwork,
shoring removal, and installing and removing reshoring.
E.
Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
F.
Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results,
based on comprehensive testing of current materials:
Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items
complies with requirements:
G.
1. Cementitious materials and aggregates.
2. Form materials and form-release agents.
3. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.
4. Fiber reinforcement.
5. Admixtures.
6. Waterstops.
7. Curing materials.
8. Bonding agents.
9. Vapor retarders.
10. Joint-filler strips.
11. Repair materials.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 1
I
I
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
I
B.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice
in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services
of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for formwork and
shoring and reshoring installations that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material,
design, and extent.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete
products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.
I
c.
I
1.
Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mixed Concrete
Association's Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities.
I
D.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing
indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
I
1.
Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician,
Grade 1, according to ACI CP-l or an equivalent certification program.
I
E.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material ofthe same brand from the
same manufacturer's plant, each aggregate from one source, and each admixture from the same
manufacturer.
I
F.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to A WS D 1.4, "Structural Welding Code--
Reinforcing Steel."
I
G.
ACI Publications: Comply with the following, unless more stringent provisions are indicated:
I
1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete."
2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
I
H.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.
Before submitting design mixes, review concrete mix design and examine procedures for
ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly
concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:
I
a.
b.
Contractor's superintendent.
Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixes.
Ready-mix concrete producer.
Concrete subcontractor.
I
c.
d.
I
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A.
Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
FORM-FACING MATERIALS:
I
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.2
I
I
2.3
I
I
A.
Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and
smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.
2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and
as follows:
a. High-density overlay, Class 1, or better.
b. Medium-density overlay, Class 1, or better, mill-release agent treated and edge sealed.
c. Structural 1, B-B, or better, mill oiled and edge sealed.
d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1, or better, mill oiled and edge sealed.
B.
Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.
Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
C.
Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic,
paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding
specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic
concrete loads without detrimental defonnation.
D.
Pan-Type Forms: Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or formed steel, stiffened to resist plastic concrete
loads without detrimental defonnation.
E.
Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient
to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.
F.
Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch.
G.
Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain,
or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete
surfaces.
1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
H.
Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form
ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of
concrete on removal.
1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of the exposed
concrete surface.
2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch in diameter in
concrete surface.
3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or
waterproofing.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT:
A.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.
B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat
sheets.
REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES:
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 3
I
I
A.
Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's
"Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber-reinforced
concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows:
I
1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use
CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.
I
2.4
CONCRETE MATERIALS:
I
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1.
1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F.
I
B. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, and as follows:
1. Class: Negligible weathering region, but not less than IN.
2. Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: 1 1/2 inch.
3. Combined Aggregate Gradation: Well graded from coarsest to fmest with not more than 18
percent and not less than 8 percent retained on an individual sieve, except that less than 8
percent may be retained on coarsest sieve and on No. 50 sieve, and less than 8 percent may
be retained on sieves fmer than No. 50.
I
I
c.
Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330.
I
1. Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch.
I
D.
Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94.
A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble
chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and to be compatible with other admixtures and
cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium cWoride.
I
2.5
ADMIXTURES:
I
B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
c.
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
I
D. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F.
E.
Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E.
I
F. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
I
2.6
FIBER REINFORCEMENT
A.
Synthetic Fiber: Fibrillated polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete,
complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, 1/2 to 1-112 inches long.
I
B.
Available Products: Products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
I
1. Fibrillated Fibers:
I
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 4
I
I
I
I
2.7
I
I
I
I
2.8
I
I
I
I
a. Fibermesh; Fibermesh, Div. of Synthetic Industries.
b. Forta; Forta Corporation.
c. Grace Fibers; W. R. Grace & Co., Construction Products Div.
WATERSTOPS:
A.
Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, sodium bentonite
or other hydrophylic material for adhesive bonding to concrete.
1. Available Products: Products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a. Volclay Waterstop-RX; Colloid Environmental Technologies Co.
b. Swell seal Joint; De NeefConstruction Chemicals (U.S.) Inc.
c. Hydrotite; Greenstreak.
d. Mirastop; Mirafi Moisture Protection, Div. of Royal Ten Cate (USA), Inc.
VAPOR RETARDER/POROUS FILL (Beneath slabs on grade):
A.
Vapor Retarder: lID-mil thick, semiflexible, seven-ply sheet membrane consisting of reinforced
core and carrier sheet with fortified asphalt layers, protective weathercoating, and removable
plastic release liner. Furnish manufacturer's accessories including bonding asphalt, pointing
mastics, and self-adhering joint tape.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: 0.00 grail1sih x sq. ft. x inches Hg; ASTM E 154.
2. Tensile Strength: 140 lbf/in.; ASTM E 154.
3. Puncture Resistance: 90 lbf; ASTM E 154.
B.
Porous Fill: Clean mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448,
Size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1-II2-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No.8 sieve.
2.9 CURING MATERIALS:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Evaporation Retarder: Waterbome, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to
fresh concrete.
B.
Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz,isq. yd. dry.
C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
D.
Water: Potable.
E.
F.
Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B.
Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1,
Class A.
G.
Available Products: Products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
1. Evaporation Retarder:
a. Sure Film; Dayton Superior Corporation.
b. E-Con; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
c. Confilm; Master Builders, Inc.
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 5
I
I
d. SikaFilm; Sika Corporation.
2. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound:
I
a. Aqua Cure VOX; Euclid Chemical Co.
b. Cure & Sea1309 Emulsion; Kaufman Products Inc.
c. Dress & Seal WB; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
d. Vocomp-20; W. R. Meadows, Inc.
e. Kure-N-Seal WB; Sonnebom, Div. of ChemRex, Inc.
I
2.10
RELATED MA TERlALS:
I
A.
Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.
I
B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersib1e, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.
2.11
REP AIR MA TERlALS:
I
A.
Repair Under1ayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied
in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
I
1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as
defined in ASTM C 219.
2. Primer: Product ofunderlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and
application.
3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, lI8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by
underlayment manufacturer.
4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M.
I
I
B.
Repair Topping: Traffic-bearing, cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can
be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch.
I
1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as
defined in ASTM C 219.
2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and
application.
3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by
topping manufacturer.
4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5700 psi at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 1091C 109M.
CONCRETE MIXES:
I
I
I
2.12
A.
Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by either laboratory trial
mix or field test data bases, as follows:
I
1. Proportion normal-weight concrete according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301.
2. Proportion lightweight structural concrete according to ACI 211.2 and ACI 301.
I
B.
Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for
the laboratory trial mix basis.
I
C.
Proportion concrete mixes as shown on the drawings.
I
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.13
I
D.
Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than
portland cement in concrete as follows:
I. Fly Ash: 20 percent.
E.
Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50 for concrete required to have low water
permeability.
F.
Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45 for concrete subject to freezing and thawing
while moist.
G.
Air Content: Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete
at point of placement having an air content as follows within a tolerance of plus I or minus 1.5
percent.
I. Air Content: 5.5 percent for I-I12-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.
2. Air Content: 6 percent for I-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.
3. Air Content: 6 percent for 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.
H.
Do not air entrain concrete to trowel-fInished interior floors and suspended slabs. Do not allow
entrapped air content to exceed 3 percent.
1.
Synthetic Fiber: Unifonnly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not
less than 1.5 lb/cu. yd.
1.
Admixtures: Use admixtures in accord with accepted submittals
1. Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer) in
concrete, as required, for placement and workability.
2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low
humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs
and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-
cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.
F ABRlCA TING REINFORCEMENT:
A.
Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
2.14 CONCRETE MIXING:
I
I
I
A.
Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94 and
ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information.
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-
1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery
time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1 FORMWORK:
I
I
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 7
3.2
I
I
A.
Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,
lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete
structure can support such loads.
I
B.
Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation,
and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
I
C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows:
1.
2.
Class A, 118 inch, for concrete exposed to view.
Class B, 1/4 inch, for all other concrete.
I
D.
Construct fonns tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
I
E.
Fabricate fonns for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide
crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top fonns
for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Kerf wood inserts for forming
ke}'\Vays, reg lets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
1. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
I
F.
Set edge fonns, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations
and slopes in fInished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use
strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
I
I
G.
Provide temporary openings for c1eanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is
inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fItted to fonns and securely braced to prevent
loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in fonns at inconspicuous locations.
I
H.
Chamfer exterior comers and edges of permanently exposed concrete.
L
Form openings, chases, offsets, ke}'\Vays, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work.
Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.
I
J.
Clean fonns and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and
other debris just before placing concrete.
Retighten fonns and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and
maintain proper alignment.
I
K.
I
L.
Coat contact surfaces of fonns with form-release agent, in accord with accepted submittals, before
placing reinforcement.
EMBEDDED ITEMS:
I
A.
Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is
attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
I
1.
Install anchor bolts, accurately located, to elevations required.
I
3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS:
A.
General: Formwork, for sides of beams, walls, colurrms, and similar parts of the Work, that does
not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F
for 24 hours after placing concrete provided concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-
removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are maintained.
I
I
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.4
I
I
I
B.
Leave formwork, for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements, that supports weight
of concrete in place until concrete has achieved the following:
1.
2.
At least 70 percent of 28-day design compressive strength.
Determine compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing representative field- or
laboratory-cured test specimens according to ACI 301.
Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without
loosening or disturbing shores.
3.
c.
Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, form-
facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.
D.
When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fillS and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align
and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless
approved by Architect.
SHORES AND RESHORES:
A.
Comply with ACI 318, ACI 301, and recommendations in ACI 347R for design, installation, and
removal of shoring and reshoring.
B.
In multistory construction, extend shoring or reshoring over a sufficient number of stories to
distribute loads in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded or will induce
tensile stress in concrete members without sufficient steel reinforcement.
C.
Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide
adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.
3.5 VAPORRETARDERJPOROUS FILL:
I
I
I
3.6
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Vapor Retarder: Place, protect, and repair vapor-retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643 and
with accepted submittals.
B.
Porous Fill: Place porous fill, and compact with mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of
plus 0 inch or minus 3/4 inch.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT:
A.
General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
placing concrete.
B.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials.
c.
Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support
reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing
reinforcing bars.
D.
Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
E.
Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize
sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of
adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 9
3.7
3.8
3.9
I
I
JOINTS:
I
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B.
Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations
indicated or as approved by Architect.
I
1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across
construction joints. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of
floors and slabs.
2. Form joints from preformed galvanized steel, plastic keyway-section forms, or bulkhead
forms with keys. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete.
3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints
in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection.
4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and
girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.
5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls,
near comers, and in concealed locations where possible.
6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or
partially hardened concrete surfaces.
I
I
I
I
C.
Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning
concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-
fourth of concrete thickness, by either of the following methods:
I
1.
Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each
edge of joint to a radius of li8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying
surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.
Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive
or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch wide joints into concrete when cutting action will
not tear, abrade, surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.
I
2.
I
D.
Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab
junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and
other locations, as indicated.
1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished
concrete surface.
2. Terminate full-width joint-flller strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below
finished concrete surface where j oint sealants, specified in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants," are indicated.
3. Install joint-f11ler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is
required, lace or clip sections together.
I
I
I
WATERSTOPS:
I
A.
Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated, in
accord with accepted submittals, bonding or mechanically fastening and fmnly pressing into place.
Install in longest lengths practicable.
I
CONCRETE PLACEMENT:
I
A.
Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items
is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
I
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement, unless approved
by Architect or the Testing Lab Representative on site.
C. Before placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301.
1.
Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mix.
D.
Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed
on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot
be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid
segregation.
E.
Deposit concrete in fonus in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid
inclined construction joints. Place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic, to avoid cold
joints.
1.
Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. Use equipment and
procedures for consolidating concrete recommended by ACI 309R.
Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside fonus. Insert and withdraw vibrators
vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the
vibrator. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding
layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity.
At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and
complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix
constituents to segregate.
2.
F.
Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of
constrnctionjoints, until placement ofa panel or section is complete.
1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thorougWy worked around
reinforcement and other embedded items and into comers.
2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
4. Slope surfaces unifonnly to drains where required.
5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface
plane, free of humps or hollows, before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the
surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.
G.
Cold- Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from
physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low
temperatures.
1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, unifonnly heat
water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than
50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on
frozen sub grade or on sub grade containing frozen materials.
3. Do not use calcium cWoride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical
accelerators, approved in mix designs.
H.
Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and as
follows, when hot-weather conditions exist:
1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of
placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature,
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 11
I
I
2.
provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid
nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed
ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.
Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
sub grade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
I
I
3.
3.10 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES:
3.11
A.
Rough-Formed Finish (For all concrete not exposed to view): As-cast concrete texture imparted
by form-facing material with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched. Remove fIns and
other projections exceeding ACI 347R limits for class of surface specified.
I
B.
Smooth-Formed Finish (For all concrete exposed to view): As-cast concrete texture imparted by
form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams.
Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8
inch in height.
I
c.
Apply the following to all concrete exposed to view, after the smooth-formed finish is completed:
I
D.
1. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick paint
to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement to one and one-half parts
fme sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white portland cement in
amounts detennined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces.
Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean
burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours.
Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed
surfaces. Continue [mal surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed
surfaces.
I
I
I
FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS:
I
A.
General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.1 R for screeding, restraightening, and
finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
I
B.
Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated
or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes.
I
1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and to surfaces to receive concrete floor topping
or mortar setting beds for ceramic or quarry tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other
bonded cementitious floor finishes.
I
c.
Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or
inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat
float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
I
1.
Apply float fInish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to floor
and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or
membrane roofmg, or sand-bed terrazzo.
I
D.
Trowel Finish: After applying float fInish, apply first trowel finish and consolidate concrete by
hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of
trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would
telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
I
I
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 12
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.
Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or
to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage
membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system
Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, measured within 24 hours according to
ASTM E 1155/ for a randomly trafficked floor surface:
2.
a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and levelness, F(L) 25; with minimum
local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and levelness, F(L) 17. (within limits of Television
Studio, specified overall value of flatness, F(F) 50; and levelness, F(L) 50 with
minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 35 and levelness f(L) 35), for slabs-on-grade.
b. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and levelness, F(L) 25; with minimum
local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and levelness, F(L) 17; for suspended slabs.
E.
Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a partial trowel finish, stopping after second troweling, to
surfaces indicated and to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset
or thin-set method. Immediately after second troweling, and when concrete is still plastic, slightly
scarify surface with a fme broom.
F.
Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and
elsewhere as indicated.
1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-
bristle broom perpendicular to main traffIc route. Coordinate required fmal finish with
Architect before application.
3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS:
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.13
I
I
I
I
A.
Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, after work of other trades is in
place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide
other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete Work.
B.
Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green
and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with comers, intersections, and terminations
slightly rounded.
C.
Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations at all
equipment. Set anchor bolts for equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or
templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.
D.
Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items.
Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel-finish concrete
surfaces.
CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING:
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with recommendations in
ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces ifhot, dry, or
windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2Ib/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing
operations. Apply in accord with accepted submittals, after placing, screeding, and bull floating or
darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C.
Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs,
and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms.
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 13
I
I
D.
If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing by one or a combination of the
following methods:
Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces,
including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces, by one or a combination of
the following methods:
I
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials:
I
a. Water.
b. Continuous water-fog spray.
c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces
and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for
curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12
inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days.
Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and
waterproof tape.
I
I
I
a. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover
or a curing compound that the manufacturer recommends for use with floor coverings.
I
3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller in
accord with accepted submittals. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours
after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing
period.
I
3.14
JOINT FILLING:
I
A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler in accord withaccepted submittals.
1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least six months. Do not fill joints until
construction traffic has permanently ceased.
I
B.
Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers fromjoints; leave contact faces
of joint clean and dry.
I
c.
Install joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed joints. OverfIll
joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.
I
3.15
CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS:
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and
replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.
I
B.
Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two
and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and
placing.
I
c.
Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls,
air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and
other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
I
1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2
inch in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than 1 inch in depth. Make edges of cuts
perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and
voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has
I
I
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 14
I
I
I
I
dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding
agent.
I
2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard
portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a
test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with
patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.
I
3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural
performance as determined by Architect.
D.
Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for frnish and
verify surface tolerances specifred for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces
sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.
I
I
1. Repair frnished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,
honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.0 1 inch wide or that penetrate
to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other
objectionable conditions.
I
2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
I
3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface frnishing
operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired
areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
I
4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment.
Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer in accord with accepted submittals
to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor
elevations.
I
5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas
to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations.
Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer in accord with accepted submittals to
produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.
I
I
6. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar.
Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose
particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar
before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and frnish to match adjacent
concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
I
E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and
patching mortar.
I
F. Repair materials and installation not specifred above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.
I
3.16
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Testing Agency: The Architect will engage a qualifred independent testing and inspecting agency
to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Sampling
and testing for quality control may include those specified in this Article.
I
B. Architect may engage an independent surveyor to check elevation offormwork and fInished slabs.
Contractor shall assist the surveyor by making the site accessible for the surveyor to perform his
operations.
I
I
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
03300-15
I
I
c.
Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to
ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:
I
1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mix
exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or
fraction thereof.
I
2. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction
thereof of each concrete mix placed each day.
I
a.
When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for
each concrete mix, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected
batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
I
3. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less
than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests when
concrete consistency appears to change.
I
4. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; ASTM C 173,
volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample,
but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix.
I
5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and
below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.
I
6. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for
each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix.
I
7. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31;
a. Cast and laboratory cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each
composite sample.
I
b. Cast and field cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite
sample(For formed concrete only).
I
8. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39;
I
a. Test one laboratory-cured specimen at 7 days and two at 28 days. Hold one cylinder in
reserve for additional test, if required.
b. Test two field-cured specimens at 7 days and two at 28 days.
I
c. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two
specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.
I
D.
When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured
cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting
and curing in-place concrete.
I
E.
Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive
compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-
strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.
I
F.
Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within
48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification
I
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 16
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
End of Section
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
;;...
I
name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency,
location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix
proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-and 28-day
tests.
G.
Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be
permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.
H.
Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test
results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not
been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine
adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 or by other methods as
directed by Architect.
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 17
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
I
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following:
1. Concrete masonry units.
2. Concrete brick.
3. Face brick.
B. See Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for furnishing steel (lintels) (and) (shelt angles)
installed in unit masonry assemblies.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Datal For each masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product
indicated.
B. Material Certificates: For each type of masonry unit required.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Build sample panels for each type of exposed unit masonry assembly to
verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects.
1. Build mockups (in sizes approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) long by 48 inches
(1200 mm) high by full thickness) <Insert requirements>.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace
unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather
construction requirements in (ACI530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602).
B. Hot-Weather Requirements: When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F (38
deg C), or 90 deg F (32 deg C) with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph (13 km/h), do
not spread mortar beds more than 48 Inches (1200 mm) ahead of masonry. Set
masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below Introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
04810-1
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
04810 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBUES
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may
be incorporated into the Work Include, but are not limited to, the products
specified.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
2.2 MASONRY UNITS
A. Concrete Masonry Units: (ASTM C 90).
1. Unit Compressive Strength: (1900-psi- (13.1-MPa-)) minimum, average net-area
compressive strength.
2. Weight Classification: (Lightweight).
3. Type: (I, moisture-controlled) units.
4. Special Shapesl Provide for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers,
bonding, and other special conditions.
B. Concrete Building Brick: (ASTM C 55) (UBC Standard 21-3).
1. Unit Compressive Strength: (2500-psi- (17.3-Mpa-)) minimum, average net-area
compressive strength.
2. Weight Classification: (Lightweight).
3. Type: (I, moisture-controlled) units.
C. Brick, General!
1 . Provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished for ends of
sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished
brick surfaces.
2. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and
texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing.
D. Face Brick: (ASTM C 216), Grade (SW) (MW or SW), Type (FBS).
1. Unit Compressive Strength: (3OQO-psi- (20.7-MPa-)mlnimum, average net-area
compressive strength.
2. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 20 g/3O sq. in. (20 g/194 sq. cm) per minute
when tested per ASTM C 67.
3. Efflorescence: When tested per ASTM C 67 and brick Is rated "not effloresced."
4. Surface Coloring: Brick with surface coloring, other than flashed or sand-finished
brick, will withstand 50 cycles of freezing and thawing per ASTM C 67 with no
obseNable difference in the applied finish when viewed from 10 feet (3 m).
5. Size: Manufactured to the following actual dimensions:
a. Modular: 3-1/2 to 3-5/8 inches (89 to 92 mm) wide by 2-1/4 inches (57 mm)
high by 7-1/2 to 7-5/8 inches (190 to 194 mm) long.
E. Building (Common) Brick: (ASTM C 62), Grade (SW).
1. Unit Compressive Strength: (3OQO-psi- (20.7-MPa-) minimum, average net-area
compressive strength.
2. Size: Match size specified for face brick.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.3
2.4
-
I
-
-
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-
weather construction.
B.
Hydrated Lime: (ASTM C 207), Type S.
C.
Mortar Cement: (ASTM C 1329).
1. (Available ) Products:
a. Blue Circle Cement; Magnolia Superbond Mortar Cement.
b. Lafarge Corporation; Lafarge Mortar Cement.
D.
Masonry Cement! (ASTM C 91).
1 . Colored Masonry Cement:
a. (Available ) Products:
1) Blue Circle Cement; Magnolia Masonry Cement.
2) Essroc Materials, Inc.; Brixment-in-Color.
3) Holnam, Inc.; Rainbow Mortamix Custom Color Masonry Cement.
4) Lafarge Corporation; Centurion Colorbond.
5) Lehigh Portland Cement Co.; Lehigh Custom Color Masonry Cement.
6) National Cement Company, Inc.; Coosa Masonry Cement.
7) Riverton Corporation (The); Flamingo Color Masonry Cement.
8) South down, Inc.; Rlchcolor Masonry Cement.
E.
Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
F.
Mortar Pigments! Natural and synthetic Iron oxides and chromium oxides,
compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory
performance in masonry mortar.
1. (Available ) Products:
a. Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors.
b. Lafarge Corporation; Centurion Pigments.
c. Solomon Grind-Chem Services, Inc.; SGS Mortar Colors.
G.
Water: Potable.
REINFORCING
A.
Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/ A 615M; ASTM A 616/ A 616M. Including
Supplement 1; or ASTM A 617/ A 617M. Grade 60 (Grade 400).
B.
Masonry Joint Reinforcement: (ASTM A 951); mill galvanized, carbon-steel wire for
interior walls and hot-dip galvanized, carbon-steel wire for exterior walls.
-
-
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
04810 - 3
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
04810-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
1. Single-Wythe Masonry: Use either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods
and cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches (407 mm) O.c.
2. Multiwythe Masonry: Use (ladder type with perpendicular cross rods spaced not
more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c. and 1 side rod for each face shell of hollow
masonry units more than 4 inches (100 mm) in width, plus 1 side rod for each
wythe of masonry 4 inches (100 mm) or less in width) (tab type with single pair of
side rods spaced for embedment within each face shell of backup wythe and
rectangular box-type cross ties spaced not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c.)
(adjustable (2-piece) type with single pair of side rods and cross ties spaced not
more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c. and with separate adjustable veneer ties
engaging the cross ties).
2.5 TIES AND ANCHORS
A. Materials, General: As follows, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Galvanized Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coating for
exterior walls and Class 1 coating for Interior walls.
2. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366/A 366M cold-rolled, carbon-steel sheet hot-
dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153, at exterior walls; and
ASTM A 6531 A 653M. G60 (2180), commercial-quality, steel sheet zinc coated by
hot-dlp process on continuous lines before fabrication at Interior walls.
B. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Provide 2-piece assemblies that allow vertical or
horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to wall.
for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal studs, and that are capable of
withstanding a 1DO-Ibf (445-N) load in both tension and compression without deforming
or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch (1 .3 mm).
1. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units with triangular wire tie and rib-
stiffened, sheet metal anchor section with screw holes top and bottom and with
raised rib-stiffened strap stamped into center to provide a slot for connection of
wire tie.
a. (Available ) Products:
1) Dur-O-WaL Inc.; (O/A 213).
2) Heckman Building Products, Inc.; 315-D with 316.
3) Hohmann & Bamard, Inc.; (OW-I0).
2.6 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Concealed Flashing: For flashing partly exposed to the exterior, use metal flashing
specified above. For flashing not exposed to the exterior, use (one of) the following,
unless otherwise indicated:
1. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Manufacturer's standard composite flashing
product consisting of a pliable and highly adhesive rubberized-asphalt
compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to
produce an overall thickness of (0.040 inch (1.0 mrn)).
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.7
2.8
I
I
-
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
a. (Available )Products:
1) Dur-O-Wat Inc.; Dur-O-Barrier.
2) Grace, W. R. & Co., Construction Products Division; Perm-A-Barrier
Wall Flashing.
3) Hohmann & Bamard, Inc.; Textroflash.
4) Polytlte Manufacturing Corp.; Poly-Barrier Self-Adhering Wall Flashing.
5) Polyguard Products, Inc.; Polyguard 300. .
6) Williams Products, Inc.; Everlastic MF-40.
MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A.
Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A 1;
compressible up to 35 percent; formulated from (neoprene).
B.
Bond-Breaker Strips I Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226,
Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).
C.
Wlcking Material: Cotton or polyester rope, 1/4 to 3/8 inch (6 to 10 mm) In diameter, in
length required to produce 2-inch (50-mm) exposure on exterior and 18 Inches (450
mm) in cavity between wythes.
D.
Cavity Drainage Material: (3/4-inch- (19-mm-)) thick," free-draining mesh; made from
polyethylene strands.
1. (Available )products:
a. Advanced Building Products, Inc.; Mortar Break.
b. CavClear; CavClear Masonry Mat.
c. Mortar Net USA Ltd.; Mortar Net.
d. Polytlte Manufacturing Corp.; Mortar Stop.
MASONRY CLEANERS
A.
Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2-cup (0.14-L) dry measure tetrasodium
poly phosphate and l/2-cup (0. 14-L) dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal.
(4 L) of water.
B.
Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for
removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from
new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product
approved for Intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry
units being cleaned.
1.
(Available ) Products:
a. Cleaners for Red and Ught-Colored Brick Not Subject to Metallic Staining
with Mortar Not Subject to Bleaching!
1) Diedrich Technologies, Inc.; 202 New Masonry Detergent.
2) ProSoCo, Inc.; Sure Klean No. 600 Detergent.
-
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
04810 - 5
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
b. Cleaners for Red and Dark-Colored Brick Not Subject to Metallic Staining:
1) Diedrich Technologies, Inc.; 200 Ume Salv.
2) ProSoCo., Inc.; Sure Klean No. 101 Ume Solvent.
c. Cleaners for Brick Subject to Metallic Staining:
1) Diedrich Technologies, Inc.; 202V Vana-Stop.
2) ProSoCo, Inc.; Sure Klean Vana Trol.
2.9
MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A.
General: Do not use admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use calcium
chloride in mortar or grout.
B.
Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with (ASTM C 270) (BIA M1), Proportion Specification.
C.
Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with (ASTM C 270) (BIA Ml), Property Specification.
1. Extended-Ufe Mortar for Unit Masonry: Mortar complying with ASTM C 1142 may
be used instead of mortar specified above, at Contractor's option.
2. Umlt cementltious materials in mortar to portland cement mortar cement and
lime.
3. For masonry below grade, in contact with earth, and where indicated, use Type
(M).
4. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet
walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and
for other applications where another type is not Indicated, use Type (S).
D.
Pigmented Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce
color required. Limit pigments to the following percentages of cement content by
weight:
1. For portland cement-lime mortar, not more than 10 percent.
2. For (mortar cement) mortar, not more than 5 percent.
E.
Grout for Unit MasonrYI Comply with (ASTM C 476).
1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse)
that will comply with (Table 5 of ACI 530.1/ ASCE 6/fMS 602) for dimensions of
grout spaces anQ pour height.
2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (200 to 280 mm) as measured
according to ASTM C 143.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
04810-6
I
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry
before placing, unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and,
where possible, cut edges concealed.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.2
3.3
I
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
B.
Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors
and textures.
c.
Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if the initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30
sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb
water so they are damp but not wet at the time of laying.
D.
Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1 /ASCE 6/TMS 602 and the following:
1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and
expansion and control Joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 20
feet (6 mm in 6 m), nor 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as exposed lintels, sills, parapets, and
reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), nor
1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A.
Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform
joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns,
and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and,
where possible, at other locations.
B.
Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry In bond pattern indicated;
do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at
corners or jambs.
C.
Built-In Work: As construction progresses, build in Items specified under this and other
Sections of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
D.
Fill cores In hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing
plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.
MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A.
Lay hollow masonry units as follows:
1 . With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells.
2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers,
columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with
grout.
3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar
bed, including areas under cells.
B.
Lay solid brick-size masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends
with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed
joints or slush head Joints.
1. At cavity walls, bevel beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into
cavity .
C. Lay structural-clay tile as follows:
-
-
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
04810-7
McBEAN COMMUNfTY CENTER
04810-8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
1. Lay vertical-cell units with full head joints, unless otherwise indicated. Provide bed
joints with full mortar coverage on face shells and webs.
2. Lay horizontal-cell units with full bed Joints, unless otherwise indicated. Form head
Joints with sufficient mortar so excess will be squeezed out as units are placed In
position.
3. Where epoxy-mortar pointed joints are indicated, rake out setting mortar to a
uniform depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) and point with epoxy mortar.
D. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than
the joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
3.4 CAVITIES
A. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction.
1. Use wood strips temporarily placed in cavity to collect mortar droppings. As work
progresses, remove strips, clean off mortar droppings, and replace in cavity.
3.5 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. Provide continuous masonry Joint reinforcement as indicated. Install with a minimum
cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap
reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).
B. Provide continuity at comers and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L" and "T"
sections.
3.6 ANCHORING MASONRY
A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural
members to comply with the following:
1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch (25 mm) in width between masonry
and structural member, unless otherwise Indicated.
2. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in
masonry joints and attached to structure.
B. Anchor masonry veneers to (wall framing) masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the
following requirements:
1. Fasten each anchor section (through sheathing to wall framing) with two metal
fasteners of type Indicated.
2. Embed (connector sections and continuous wire) In masonry joints. Provide not
less than 2 Inches (50 mm) of air space between back of masonry veneer and
face of sheathing.
3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. vertically
and 24 inches (610) o.c. horizontally with not less than 1 anchor for each
2.67 sq. ft. (0.25 sq. m) of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches (305
mm) of openings and at Intervals, not exceeding 36 inches (914 mm), around
perimeter.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
04810- UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
3.7 LINTELS
A. Provide masonry lintels where shown. Provide precast lintels made from concrete
matching concrete masonry units in color, texture, and compressive strength and with
reinforcing bars indicated or required to support loads Indicated.
3.8 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, AND VENTS
A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes In masonry at shelf angles, lintels,
ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.
1. Extend flashing 4 inches (100 mm) at ends and turn flashing up not less than 2
inches (50 mm) to form a pan.
2. Install metal drip edges beneath flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flashing 1/2
inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flashing to top of metal
drip edge.
3. Install metal flashing termination beneath flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop
flashing 1/2 Inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flashing to
top of metal flashing termination.
B. Install weep holes in the head joints in exterior wythes of the first course of masonry
immediately above embedded flashing. (Install vents in vertical head Joints at the top
of each continuous cavity at spacing indicated.)
1 . Use (wicking material) to form weep holes.
2. Space weep holes 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
3. Trim wlcklng material used In weep holes flush with outside face of wall after
mortar has set.
3.9 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores! Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced
masonry elements during construction.
1 . Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have
hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that
may be placed on them during construction.
B. Placing Reinforcement] Comply with requirements In (ACI 530.1/ ASCE 6/TMS 602).
C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained
sufficient strength to resist grout pressure.
1. Comply with requirements in (ACI 530.1/ ASCE 6/TMS 602) for cleanouts and for
grout placement Including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Clean unit masonry by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling
joints, as work progresses.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
04810 -9
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
04810 - 10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBUES
B. After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned
for comparison purposes.
2. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner.
3. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly
by rinsing the surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
4. Clean brick by the bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA
Technical Notes No. 20, using jOb-mixed detergent solution.
5. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
6. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated In NCMA TEK 8-2
applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces.
3.11 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Masonry Waste Disposal: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including broken masonry
units, waste mortar, and excess or soil-contaminated sand, by crushing and mixing with
fill material as fill Is placed.
1. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished
grade.
2. Remove excess, clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described
above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 04810
I
I
I
SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRlCATIONS
I
1.1
PART 1- GENERAL
SUMMARY:
I
I
I
I
I
A.
This Section includes the following:
1. Steel ladders.
2. Steel ship's ladders.
3. Loose bearing and leveling plates.
4. Loose steel lintels.
5. Shelf angles.
6. Support angles for elevator door sills.
7. Steel framing and supports for ceiling hung toilet compartments.
8. Steel framing and supports for operable partitions.
9. Steel framing and supports for countertops.
10. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.
11. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified
in other Sections.
12. Miscellaneous metal trim.
13. Cast nosings.
14. Pipe bollards.
1.2 SUBMITTALS:
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.3
I
I
I
I
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1. Cast nosings and treads.
2. Paint products.
3. Grout.
B.
Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include
plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show
anchorage and accessory items.
1. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.
C.
Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
D.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and
addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as
sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
B.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS Dl.l, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
2. A WS D 1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."
3. A WS D 1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
4. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed A WS qualification tests for welding
processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
METAL F ABRlCA TIONS
05500 - 1
I
I
1.4
PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Field Measurements: Where metal fabrications are indicated to fit walls and other construction,
verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the
Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field
measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to
established dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting.
I
I
I
1.5
COORDINATION:
I
A.
Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates,
and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items
to Project site in time for installation.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
METALS, GENERAL:
A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide
materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting,
seam marks, roller mar1es, rolled trade names, or roughness.
I
I
2.2 FERROUS METALS:
A.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36.
I
B. Steel Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500.
C.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or
required by structural loads.
I
D.
Gray-Iron Castings: ASTM A 48, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by
structural loads.
I
E.Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion-
resistant materials capable of sustaining, without failure, the load imposed within a safety factor of
4, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing
agency.
1. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47 malleable iron or
ASTM A 27 cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized per
ASTM A 153.
I
I
F. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to A WS specifications for metal alloy welded.
I
2.3
PAINT:
A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 Section "Painting."
I
I
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.5
I
I
I
B.
Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd
primer complying with performance requirements in FS 'IT -P-664; selected for good resistance to
normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with fInish paint systems indicated, and capability to
provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.
C.
Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Organic zinc-rich primer, complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and
compatible with topcoat.
1. Available Products: Products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a. Carboline 621; Carboline Company.
b. Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97-670; PPG Industries, Inc.
c. Tnemec-Zinc 90-97; Tnemec Company, Inc.
D.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel,
complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
E.Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, except containing no
asbestos fibers, or cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
FASTENERS:
A. General: Provide Type 304 or 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated
fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, where built into exterior
walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
B.
Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts,
ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.
C.
Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.
D.
Machine Screws: ASivIE BI8.6.3.
E.Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.
F.
Wood Screws: Flat head, carbon steel, ASME B18.6.1.
G.
Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ASME BI8.22.lo
H.
Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ASME B 18.21.1.
1.
Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability
to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit
masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by
testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualifIed independent testing agency.
1. Material: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.
2. Material: Alloy Group 1 or 2 stainless-steel bolts complying with ASTM F 593 and nuts
complying with ASTM F 594.
J. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588, tumble-wing type, class and style as needed.
GROUT:
A.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for
interior and exterior applications.
METAL FABRlCATIONS
05500 - 3
I
I
2.6 CONCRETE FILL:
2.7
2.8
A.
Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-
Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day
compressive strength of 3000 psi.
I
FABRlCATION, GENERAL:
I
A.
Shop Assembly: Pre-assemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing
and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use
connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and
coordinated installation.
I
B.
Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.
I
c.
Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch. Form bent-metal corners to smallest
radius possible without causing grain separation.
I
D.
Weld comers and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap~
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adj acent
surface.
I
I
E.Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space
anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.
I
F.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and
similar items.
I
G.
Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep
holes where water may accumulate.
I
H.
Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient
and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening up of joints, overstressing of
components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on
surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
I
I
1.
Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp
edges.
I
1.
Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces.
K.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where
possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head
(countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
I
STEEL LADDERS:
I
A.
General: Fabricate ladders for locations shown, with dimensions, spacings, details, and
anchorages as indicated.
I
METAL FABRlCATIONS
05500 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.9
I
I
2.10
I
1. Comply with ANSI AI4.3.
2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with AS:M:E AI7.l.
B.
Siderails: Continuous, 3/8-by-2-1!2-jnch steel flat bars, with eased edges, spaced 18 inches apart.
c.
Bar Rungs: 3!4-inch diameter steel bars, spaced 12 inches o.c.
D.
Fit rungs in centerline of side rails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.
E.Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or bolted steel
brackets. Size brackets to support design loads specified in ANSI AI4.3.
F.Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminum-oxide granules set
in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung filled with aluminum-oxide
grout.
STEEL SHIP'S LADDERS:
A.
Provide ship's ladders where indicated. Fabricate of open-type construction with structural-steel
channel or steel plate stringers, steel pipe handrails, and steel bar grating treads. Provide brackets
and fittings for installation.
1. Comply with applicable requirements in Division 5 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for
steel pipe railings.
LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES:
A.
Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete
construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.
I
2.11 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS:
I
I
I
2.12
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Fabricate loose structural-steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings
and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.
B.
Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.
C.
Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to one-twelfth of clear
span, but not less than 8 inches.
D. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.
SHELF ANGLES:
A.
Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete framing.
Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 314-inch bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches from
ends and 24 inches o.c.
B.
F or cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry and
concrete. Align expansion joints in angles with indicated control and expansion joints in cavity-
wall exterior wythe.
c.
Galvanize shelf angles to be installed in exterior walls.
D.
Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners and/or embed plates to attach shelf
angles to cast-in-place concrete.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 5
2.13
I
I
MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS:
I
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports that are not a part of structural-steel framework as
necessary to complete the Work.
I
B.
General: Provide steel framing and supports indicated and as necessary to complete the Work.
C.
Fabricate units from structural-steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction. Fabricate to
sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by
framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items.
I
1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated.
2. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally
welded steel strap anchors 1-114 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick by 8 inches long at 24 inches
o.c.
3. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed.
I
I
D.
Fabricate supports for operable partitions as follows:
1. Beams: Continuous steel shapes of sizes indicated with attached bearing plates, anchors, and
braces as indicated. Drill bottom flanges of beams to receive partition track hanger rods;
locate holes where indicated on operable partition Shop Drawings.
I
E.Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.
I
2.14 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM:
I
A.
Fabricate units from structural-steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously
welded joints, and smooth exposed edges. Miter comers and use concealed field splices where
possible.
I
B.
Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with
other work. Provide anchors, welded to trim, for embedding in concrete or masonry construction,
spaced not more than 6 inches from each end, 6 inches from comers, and 24 inches o.c.
I
c.
Galvanize miscellaneous steel trim in the following locations:
1. Exterior.
2. Interior, where indicated.
I
2.15 CAST NOSINGS:
I
A.
Fabricate units of metal indicated below in sizes and configurations indicated and in lengths
necessary to accurately fit openings or conditions. Provide units with an integral abrasive finish
consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination of both.
1. Metal: Cast gray iron, Class 20.
I
B.
Configurations: Provide units in the following configurations.
1. Nosings: Cross-hatched units, 4 inches wide with 1!4-inch lip, for casting into concrete
steps.
I
c.
Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as standard
with manufacturer.
I
I
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.16
I
2.17
I
I
2.18
I
I
I
I
I
D.
Drill for mechanical anchors and countersink. Locate not more than 4 inches from ends and not
more than 12 inches o.c., evenly spaced between ends. Provide closer spacing ifrecommended
by manufacturer.
1. Provide two rows of holes for units more than 5 inches wide, with two holes aligned at ends
and intermediate holes staggered.
E.App1y bitwninous paint to concealed bottoms, sides, and edges of units set into concrete.
F. Provide a plain surface texture, unless fluted or cross-hatched surfaces are indicated.
G.
Available Manufacturers: Manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. American Safety Tread Co., Inc.
2. Armstrong Products, Inc.
3. Balco/Metalines, Inc.
4. Wooster Products Inc.
PIPE BOLLARDS:
A. Fabricate pipe bollards from Schedule 80 steel pipe.
FINISHES, GENERAL:
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating fmishes.
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
STEEL AND IRON FINISHES:
A.
Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed
below:
1. ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products.
2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
B.
Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum
requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and envirorunental
exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:
1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone lB): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No.3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
2. Interiors (SSPC Zone lA): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
c.
Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized
fmishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofmg, or masonry. Comply with
SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No.1," for shop painting.
1. Stripe paint comers, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL:
I
I
I
A.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for
securing metal fabrications to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and
masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other cOlmectors.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 7
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
I
I
B.
Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal
fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges
and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free ofrack; and measured from established lines and levels.
I
C.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,
masonry, or similar construction.
I
D.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not
to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not
weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication
and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
I
E.Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
I
I
I
F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of alwninum that ",ill come into contact with
grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
I
SETTING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES:
A.
Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve
bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.
I
B.
Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have
been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if
protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.
1. Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations where not
exposed to moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations.
2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.
I
I
INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
I
A.
General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported,
including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings, if
any.
I
B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure.
I
INSTALLING NOSINGS:
A.
Install with anchorage system indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
I
B. Center nosings on tread widths.
C.
For nosings embedded in concrete steps or curbs, align nosings flush with riser faces and level
with tread surfaces.
I
INSTALLING PIPE BOLLARDS:
I
METAL FABRlCATIONS
05500 - 8
I
I
I
A.
Anchor bollards in concrete in formed or core-drilled holes not less than 8 inches deep and 3/4
inch greater than OD ofbollard. After bollards have been inserted into holes, fill annular space
surrounding bollard solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with
grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 1/8 inch toward bollard.
I
I
B. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface.
3.6
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
I
A.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to
comply with SSPC-P A I for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-nul dry film thickness.
I
B.
Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
I
C.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
I
End of Section
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
--
I
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 9
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 6 - WOOD & PLASTICS
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART ONE - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install wood material, rough hardware and accessories to
complete rough carpentry work.
1. Plates, nailers, framing, bracing and backers for mounting accessories
and equipment as shown on the Drawings.
2. Shims and plates for setting windows and doors.
3. Backing for telephone installation and other similar requirements.
4. Wood cant strips.
5. Built-up trusses.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Related work described elsewhere:
1. Drywall Partitions: Section entitled Gypsum Wallboard Systems
2. Shingles: Section entitled Shingle Roofing
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation
instructions for materials listed below:
1. Plywood sheathing
B. Material Certificates: Where dimensional lumber is provided to comply with
minimum allowable unit stresses, submit listing of species and grade
selected for each use, and submit evidence of compliance with specified
requirements. Compliance may be in form of a signed copy of applicable
portion of lumber producer's grading rules showing design values for selected
species and grade. Design values shall be as approved by the Board of
Review of American Lumber Standards Committee.
C. Wood Treatment Data: Submit chemical treatment manufacturer's
instructions for handling, storing, installation and finishing of treated material.
1. Preservative Treatment: For each type specified, include certification
by treating plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure
process used, net amount of preservative retained and conformance
with applicable standards.
ii
.
2. Fire-Retardant Treatment: Include certification by treating plant that
treated material complies with specified standard and other
requirements.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
06100-1
-
.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
06100-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 6 - WOOD & PLASTICS
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING:
A. Delivery and storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against
exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber
as well as plywood and other panels; provide for air circulation within and
around stacks and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and
similar materials.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Coordination: At carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required
for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and
similar supports to allow attachment of other work.
PART TWO - PRODUCTS
2.1 lUMBER, GENERAL:
A. lumber Standards: Manufacture lumber to comply with PS 20 "American
Softwood lumber Standard" and with applicable grading rules of inspection
agencies certified by American lumber Standards Committee's (AlSe) Board
of Review.
B. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies and the abbreviations used to
reference with lumber grades and species include the following:
SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
WCLlB - West Coast lumber Inspection Bureau.
WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.
C. Grade Stamps: Factory-mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of
inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements
and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of
surfacing, and mill.
1. For exposed lumber apply grade stamps to ends or back of each
piece, or omit grade stamps entirely and issue certificate of grade
compliance from inspection agency in lieu of grade stamp.
D. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide
actual sizes as required by PS 20, for moisture content specified for each use.
1. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide seasoned lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content
at time of dressing and shipment for sizes 2" or less in nominal
thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.2
2.3
2.4
I
.
.
-
-
DIVISION 6 - WOOD & PLASTICS
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
DIMENSION LUMBER:
A. For light framing provide "Stud" or "Standard" grade lumber for stud framing
(2" to 4" thick, 2" to 6" wide, 10' and shorter) and "Standard" grade for other
light framing (2" to 4" thick, 2" to 4" wide), any of the following species:
1. Southern Pine graded under SPIB rules.
2. Spruce-Pine-Rr graded under NLGA rules.
B. For structural light framing (nominal 2" thick), provide the following grade and
species:
1. NO.2 grade.
2. Same species as indicated for structural framing grade below.
C. For structural framing (greater than 2" nominal thickness), provide the
following grade and species:
1. No.1, Kiln-dried grade. Any of the following species:
2. Southern Pine graded under SPIB rules.
BOARDS:
A. Concealed Boards: Where boards will be conceaied by other work, provide
lumber of 19 percent maximum moisture content (S-DRY) and of following
species and grade:
1. Southern Pine NO.2 Boards per SPIB rules, or any species graded
Construction Boards per WCLlB or WWPA rules.
B. Board Sizes: Provide sizes indicated on the drawings.
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER:
A. Provide wood for support or attachment of other work including rooftop
equipment curbs and support bases, cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring,
grounds, stripping and similar members. Provide lumber of sizes indicated,
worked into shapes shown, and as follows:
B. Moisture content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to
receive wood preservative treatment.
C. Grade: Standard Grade light framing size lumber of any species or board
size lumber as required. NO.3 Common or Standard grade boards per WCLlB or
WWPA rules or NO.3 boards per SPIB rules.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
06100-3
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
06100-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 6 - WOOD & PLASTICS
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
2.5 CONSTRUCTION PANELS:
A. Construction Panel Standards: Comply with PS 1 "U.S. Product Standard for
Construction and Industrial Plywood" for plywood panels and, for products not
manufactured under PS 1 provisions, with American Plywood Associates (AP A)
"Performance Standard and Policies for Structural-Use Panels", Form No. E445.
B. Trademark: Factory-mark each construction panel with APA trademark
evidencing compliance with grade requirements.
C. Concealed APA Performance-Rated Panels: Where construction panels will
be used for the following concealed types of applications, provide AP A
Performance-Rated Panels complying with requirements indicated for grade
designation, span rating, exposure durability classification, edge detail (where
applicable) and thickness.
1. Wall Sheathing: APA RATED SHEATHING.
(a) Exposure Durability Classification: EXPOSURE 1.
(b) Span Rating: 12/0, 16/0. 20/0 or Wall-16 oc for stud spacing
of 16" or less.
2. Roof Sheathing: APA RATED SHEATHING.
(a) Exposure Durability Classification: EXTERIOR.
(b) Span Rating: 48/24.
D. Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment,
provide fire-retardant treated plywood panels with grade designation, APA C-D
PLUGGED INT with exterior glue, in thickness indicated, or, if not otherwise
indicated, not less than 15/32".
E. Plywood Siding: Plywood siding shall be premium grade Southern pine, 3/8"
thickness (T-1-11 pattern) saw textured.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:
A. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide size, type, material and finish as
indicated and as recommended by applicable standards, complying with
applicable Federal Specifications for nails, staples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers
and anchoring devices. Provide metal hangers and framing anchors of the size
and type recommended by the manufacturer for each use including
recommended nails.
1. Where rough carpentry work is exposed to weather, in ground
contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners and
anchorages with a hot-dip zinc coating (ASTM A 153).
B. Building Paper: ASTM D 226, Type I; asphalt saturated felt, non-perforated, 15-
lb. type.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.7
-
.
-
DIVISION 6 - WOOD & PLASTICS
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS:
A. Preservative Treatment: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as "Trt-Wd" or
''Treated,'' or is specified herein to be treated, comply with applicable
requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood) and of AWPB
Standards listed below. Mark each treated item with the AWPB Quality Mark
Requirements.
1. Pressure-treat above-ground items with water-borne preservatives to
comply with AWPB LP-2. After treatment, kiln-dry lumber and plywood to a
maximum moisture content, respectively, of 19 percent and 15 percent. Treat
indicated items and the following:
(a) Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases,
blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing,
flashing, vapor barriers and waterproofing.
(b) Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping and similar
concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.
(c) Wood framing members less than 18" above grade.
(d) Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly in
contact with earth.
2. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where
possible. If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces with heavy brush coat
of same chemical used for treatment and to comply with A WP A M4.
Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard
damaged or defective pieces.
B. Fire-Retardant Treatment: Where fire-retardant treated wood ("FRTW") is
indicated, pressure impregnate lumber and plywood with fire-retardant
chemicals to comply with AWPA C20 and C27, respectively, for treatment
type indicated below; identify "FRTW" lumber with appropriate classification
marking of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., U.S. Testing, Timber Products
Inspection or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
1. Inspect each piece of treated lumber or plywood after drying and
discard damaged or defective pieces.
2.8
FASTENERS
All fasteners must have corrosion-resistant coating.
A. Masonry IConcrete Fasteners
1. Threaded Masonry ICon crete Fasteners
(a) Corrosion-resistant, threaded fastener with a low profile head.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
06100-5
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
06100-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 6 - WOOD & PLASTICS
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
(b) Screw fastener to be factory mutual approved.
(c) Approved Products:
(I) Confas by Construction Fasteners
(Ii) Tapcon Flat Head Phillips by Buildex
(Iii) Confixx by Fabco
2. Other Masonry IConcreteFasteners
(a) The following must also be used:
(I) Metal Hit Anchor by Hilti
(Ii) Rawl-Drives by Rawl
(Iii) Zamac Mail in by Rawl
(Iv) Gripcon by Fastenrite
B,Threaded Steel/Wood Fasteners
1. Corrosion-resistant, self-tapping, self-drilling screw with low profile head.
2. Screw type fastener to be factory mutual approved.
3. Approved Products:
(al Dekfast by Construction Fasteners
(b) Roof Grip by Buildex
(c) Insul Rxx by Fabco
C. Wood to Wood Fasteners
1. Nails
(a) Hot-dipped, galvanized steel or 304 stainless steel ring shank.
(b) Minimum embedment to be 1-1 I'Z'.
2. Screws
(a). Number 10,300 series stainless steel wood screw or #14 Phillips Pan
300 series stainless steel sheet metal screws.
(b). Minimum embedment to be 1-1/4".
PART THREE - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL:
A. Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work, and
units which are too small to use in fabricating work with minimum joints or
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 6 - WOOD & PLASTICS
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
optimum joint arrangement.
B. Set carpentry work to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true
to line and cut and fitted.
C. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as
shown and as required by recognized standards.
1. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.
D. Use common wire nails, except as otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for
finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where
opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight
connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood;
predrill as required.
3.2
WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING AND SLEEPERS:
A. Provide wherever shown and where required for screeding or attachment of
other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level
of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved.
B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts
and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry
during installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before
concrete placement.
3.3
WOOD FURRING:
A. Install plumb and leve! with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with
wood as required for tolerance of finished work.
1. Firestop furred spaces on walls at each floor level and at ceiling line of
top story, with wood blocking or noncombustible materials, accurately
fitted to close furred spaces.
-
-
B. Furring to Receive Plywood Paneling: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 1" x
4" furring at 2' a.c., horizontally and vertically. Select furring for freedom from
knots capable of producing bent-over nails and resulting damage to paneling.
C. Furring to Receive Gypsum Drywall: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 1" x
4" furring at 16" o.c., vertically.
-
3.4 WOOD FRAMING, GENERAL:
A. Provide framing members of sizes and on spacings shown, and frame
openings as shown, or if not shown, comply with recommendations of "Manual
for House Framing" of National Forest Products Association N.F.P.A). Do not
splice structural members between supports.
B. Anchor and nail as shown, and to comply with "Recommended Nailing
Schedule" of "Manual for House Framing" and "National Design Specifications for
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
06100-7
DIVISION 6 - WOOD & PLASTICS
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Wood Construction" pUblished by of N.F.P.A., and the Standard Building Code.
C. Rrestop concealed spaces of wood framed walls and partitions at each
floor level and at the ceiling line of the top story. Where firestops are not
automatically provided by the framing system used, use closely-fitted wood
blocks of nominal 2" thick lumber of the same width as framing members.
3.5
STUD FRAMING:
A. General: Provide stud framing of size and spacing indicated or, if not
otherwise indicated, of the following sizes and spacings. Arrange studs so that
wide face of stud is perpendicular to direction of wall or partition and narrow
face is parallel. Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using 2" thick
members with widths equaling that of studs. Nail or anchor plates to supporting
construction.
1. For interior partitions and walls provide 2" x 4" wood studs spaced 16"
O.c.
B. Construct corners and intersections with not less than 3 studs. Provide
miscellaneous blocking and framing as shown and as required for support of
facing materials, fixtures, specialty items and trim.
1. Provide continuous horizontal blocking row at mid-height of single-
story partitions over 8' high and at midpoint of multi-story partitions,
using Z' thick members of same width as wall or partitions.
C. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header
members of thickness equal to width of studs. Set headers on edge and support
on jamb studs.
1. For non-bearing partitions, provide double-jamb studs and headers
not less than 4" deep for openings 3' and less in width, and not less
than 6" deep for wider openings.
2. For load-bearing partitions, provide double-jamb studs for openings 6'
and less in width, and triple-jamb studs for wider openings. Provide
headers of depth shown, or if not shown, provide as recommended by
N.F.P.A. "Manual for House Framing".
3.6
RAFTER FRAMING:
A. Rafters: Provide member size and spacing shown. Notch to fit exterior wall
plates and toe nail or use special metal framing anchors. Double rafters to form
headers and trimmers at openings in roof framing (if any), and support with
metal hangers. Where rafters abut at ridge, place directly opposite each other
and nail to ridge member or use metal ridge hangers.
1. At valleys, provide valley rafter of size shown, or if not shown, provide
rafter twice as thick as regular rafters and 2" deeper. Bevel ends of
jack rafters for full bearing against valley rafter.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
06100-8
ii
-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 6 - WOOD & PLASTICS
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
B. Provide special framing as shown for eaves, overhangs, dormers and similar
conditions, if any.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS:
A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in Form No.
E 30F, "APA Design/Construction Guide - Residential & Commercia!," for types
of plywood products and applications indicated.
3.7.2 Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:
1. Sheathing: Nail to framing.
2. Plywood Backing Panels: Nail to supports.
END OF SECTION
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
06100-9
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
06105 - MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes the following:
1. Wood framing.
2. Miscellaneous lumber.
3. Interior wood trim.
4. Shelving and clothes rods.
5. Panel products.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product indicated.
1. Include data for (wood-preservative) (and) (fire-retardant) treatment from
chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that
materials comply with requirements.
B. Research/Evaluatlon Reportsl For the following:
1. Preservative-treated wood.
2. Fire-retardant-treated wood.
3. Power-driven fasteners.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the
American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive stained or natural finish, mark grade
stamp on end or back of each piece(, or omit grade stamp and provide
certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency).
3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Provide dry lumber with (15) percent maximum moisture content at time of
dressing for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actuaO thickness or less, unless otherwise
indicated.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. Provide miscellaneous lumber for support or attachment of other construction,
including the following:
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
06105 - 1
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
06105-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
06105 - MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY
1. Blocking.
2. Cants.
3. Nailers.
4. Furring.
5. Grounds.
B. For Items of dimension lumber size, provide (Standard, Stud, or No.3) grade lumber with
(19) percent maximum moisture content of any species.
C. For exposed boards, provide lumber, with (19) percent maximum moisture content, of
eastern white pine, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; (0 Select
(Quality)) grade; NELMA NLGA WCLlB, or WWPA.
D. For concealed boards, provide lumber with (19) percent maximum moisture content
and (any of) the following species and gradesl
1. Mixed southem pine, No.2 grade; SPIB.
2. Eastern softwoods, (No.2) Common grade; NELMA
2.3 INTERIOR WOOD TRIM
A. Hardwood Lumber Trim for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish): Clear, kiln-dried,
Alder finished lumber (S4S).
B. Lumber Trim for Opaque Finish (Painted): Finished lumber (S4S), either finger-Jointed or
solid lumber, of the following species and grades:
1. Grade A Finish alder, aspen, basswood, cottonwood, gum, magnolia, soft maple,
sycamore, tupelo, or yellow poplar; NHLA.
2.4 SHELVING AND CLOTHES RODS
A. Shelving: 3/4-inch (boards of same species and grade indicated above for exposed
boards).
B. Clothes Rods: 1-1 12-inch- (38-mm-) diameter, (aluminum tubes).
2.5 PANEL PRODUCTS
A. Miscellaneous Concealed Plywood: (Exterior) (Exposure 1) sheathing, span rating to
suit framing in each location, and thickness as Indicated but not less than 112 inch (13
mm).
B. Miscellaneous Exposed Plywood: DOC PS 1. A-D Interior. thickness as indicated but not
less than 112 inch (13 mm).
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PlASTICS
06105 - MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY
C. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D
Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness Indicated or, If not indicated, not less than
112 inch (12.7 mm) thick.
2.6 FASTENERS
A. General: Where carpentry Is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or In area of high
relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with
ASTM A 1531 A 153M.
B. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.
C. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer
heads and reamer wings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALlATION
A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate (furring,) nailers, blocking, (grounds,) and similar supports to comply with
requirements for attaching other construction.
B. Securely attach carpentry work as indicated and according to applicable codes and
recognized standards.
C. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler.
D. Wood Structural Panels: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA
Form No. E30K, "APA Design/Constructlon Guide: Residential & Commercia!," for types
of structural-use panels and applications Indicated.
E. Wood Trim Installation: Install with minimum number of joints practicaL using fulHength
pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Cope at returns and miter at
corners to produce tight-fitting joints. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints.
1. Match color and grain pattern across Joints.
2. Install trim after gypsum board joint-finishing operations are completed.
3. Install to tolerance of 118 Inch in 96 inches (3 mm In 2438 mm) for level and
plumb. Install adjoining finish carpentry with 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) maximum offset
for flush installation and 1 /16-inch (l.6-mm) maximum offset for reveal installation.
END OF SECTION 06105
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
06105-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
.
.
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
06150 - WOOD DECKING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes (solid-wood) (and) (glued-laminated wood) roof decking.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For glued-laminated wood decking.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Decking Standard: Comply with AITC 112, "Standard for Tongue-and-Groove Heavy
Timber Roof Decking."
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Schedule delivery of wood decking to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid
delaying the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMBER, GENERAL
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.3
A.
A. Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard," and with applicable
grading rules of inspection agencies.
B. Grade Stamps: Factory mark with grade stamp of Inspection agency on surfaces that
will not be exposed to view.
SOLID WOOD DECKING
Wood Species: (Southern pine).
Decking Gradel (Commercial Decking or Commercial Dex).
Moisture Contentl Provide wood decking with (15) percent maximum moisture content
at time of dressing.
Pattern and Dressing I Tongue and groove, edge vee one side, surfaced two sides.
FABRICATION
Fabricate decking In lengths for (combination simple and two-span continuous) lay-up.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
06150 - 1
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
06150 - WOOD DECKING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Solid Wood Deckingl Install to comply with referenced decking standard ( and with end
Joints located according to lay-up indicated). Apply joint sealant between decking
and supports and between tongues and grooves at outside wall supports.
1. Nail each course of decking at each support with one nail slant nailed above the
tongue and one straight nailed through the face.
a. Use 12d nails for 2-lnch-nominal (37-mm-actuaO decking.
2. Slant nail each course to the tongue of the adjacent course at 30 inches (750
mm) o.c. and within 12 inches (300 mm) of the end of each unit. Stagger nailing
in adjacent courses 15 Inches (380 mm).
a. Use 6d nails for 2-lnch-nominal (37-mm-actuaO decking.
B. Repair damaged surfaces and finishes after completing erection. Replace damaged
decking If repairs are not approved by Architect.
C. Provide temporary waterproof covering to protect exposed decking before applying
roofing.
END OF SECTION 06150
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
06150-2
-
'=
-
-
-
I
I
I
SECTION 06176 - METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
I
I
1.2
I
I
I
1.3
I
A.
A.
B.
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specificati.on Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes wood [roof] trusses[and truss accessories].
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for roof sheathing and subflooring and dimension lumber
for supplementary framing and permanent bracing.
DEFINITIONS
Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses: Planar structural units consisting of metal-plate-connected
members fabricated from dimension lumber and cut and assembled before delivery to Project site.
B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
I
I
1.4
I
I
I
1.5
I
I
I
I
A.
A.
1.
2.
NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority.
SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Structural Performance: Provide metal-plate-connected wood trusses capable of withstanding design
loads within limits and under conditions indicated.
1.
2.
Design Loads: As indicated on drawings
Maximum Deflection Under Design Loads:
a. Roof Trusses: Vertical deflection of [11240] of span.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For metal-plate connectors, metal framing anchors, bolts, and fasteners.
1.
Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of
preservative used, net amount of preservative retained, and chemical treatment manufacturer's
written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material.
For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated
materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
2.
METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES
06176 - 1
I
I
3. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show location, pitch, span, camber, configuration, and spacing for each type of truss
required; species, sizes, and stress grades of lumber; splice details; type, size, material, [mish, design
values, orientation, and location of metal connector plates; and bearing details.
I
1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data
signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
I
I
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.7
1.8
A.
Metal Connector-Plate Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer that is a member of TPI and that
complies with TPI quality-control procedures for manufacture of connector plates published in TPI 1.
I
1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services needed to
assume engineering responsibility.
2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer.
I
I
B.
Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that participates in a recognized quality-assurance program that involves
inspection by SPIB, Timber Products Inspection, TPI, or other independent testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.
I
C.
Source Limitations for Connector Plates: Obtain metal connector plates through one source from a single
manufacturer.
I
D.
Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of the following publications:
1.
2.
TP1 1, "National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction."
TPI DSB, "Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate Connected
Wood Trusses."
TPI HIB, "Commentary and Recommendations for Handling, Installing & Bracing Metal Plate
Connected Wood Trusses."
I
3.
I
E.
Wood Structural Design Standard: Comply with applicable requirements in AFP A's "National Design
Specifications for Wood Construction" and its "Supplement."
I
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
I
A.
Comply with TPI recommendations to avoid damage and lateral bending. Provide for air circulation
around stacks and under coverings.
I
B.
Inspect trusses showing discoloration, corrosion, or other evidence of deterioration. Discard and replace
trusses that are damaged or defective.
COORDINATION
I
A.
Time delivery and erection of trusses to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid delaying progress of
other trades whose work must follow erection of trusses.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
MET AL-PLA TE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES
06176 - 2
I
I
I
2.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.2
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.3
I
I
I
.
.
I
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Metal Connector Plates:
a. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc.
b. Mitek Industries, Inc.
c. TEE-LOK Corporation.
2. Metal Framing Anchors:
a.
b.
Alpine Engineered Products, Inc.
Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.
Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc.
Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co., Inc.
United Steel Products Company, Inc.
c.
d.
e.
DIMENSION LUMBER
A.
Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American Lumber
Standards Committee Board of Review.
1.
2.
Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
For exposed lumber indicated to receive natural or stained finish, omit grade stamp and provide
certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency.
Provide dressed lumber, S4S, manufactured to actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture
content specified.
Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing.
3.
4.
B.
Grade and Species: Provide visually graded dimension lumber for truss chord and web members, of the
following grade and species:
1.
2.
3.
Grade for Chord Members: [Select Structural] [No.1].
Grade for Web Members: [Same grade as indicated for chord members].
Species: Southern pine; SPIB.
WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER
A.
Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: A WP A C2, except that lumber that is not in contact with the
ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to A WP A C31 with
inorganic boron (SBX).
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and [one of] the following:
a.
b.
Chromated copper arsenate (CCA).
Ammoniacal copper citrate (Ce).
2.
For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that
do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.
MET AL-PLA TE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES
06176-3
2.4
I
I
B.
Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that
is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
I
c.
Mark each treated item with the treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the
American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
I
1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural frnish, omit marking and provide
certifrcates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency.
D.
Application: Treat cantilevered portion of top chord of trusses, which are exposed to weather.
I
METAL CONNECTOR PLATES
I
A.
General: Fabricate connector plates to comply with TPI 1 from metal complying with requirements
indicated below:
I
B.
Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G60 (ZI80) coating designation; Designation SS,
Grade 33, and not less than 0.036 inch thick.
I
2.5 FASTENERS
2.6
A.
General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this
Article for material and manufacture.
I
1.
Where trusses are exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity,
provide fasteners [with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M].
I
B.
Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-I05.
I
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.
D.
Wood Screws: ASME BI8.6.1.
I
E.
Lag Bolts: ASME BI8.2.1. (AS ME B18.2.3.SM).
I
F.
Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with
ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
I
A.
General: Provide framing anchors made from metal indicated, of structural capacity, type, and size
indicated, and as follows:
I
1. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by
manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be
determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by
comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.
I
I
B.
Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60
(ZI80) coating designation.
I
MET AL-PLA TE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES
06176-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.7
I
I
2.8
I
I
I
I
C.
Truss Tie-Downs (Hurricane or Seismic Ties): Bent strap tie for fastening roof trusses to wall studs
below, 2-li4 inches (57 mm) wide by 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick. Tie fits over top of truss and fastens to
both sides of truss, face of top plates, and side of stud below Simpson H-7 or equal.
D.
Roof Truss Clips: Angle clips for bracing bottom chord of roof trusses at non-load-bearing walls, 1-1/4
inches (32 mm) wide by 0.050 inch (1.3 rum) thick. Clip is fastened to truss through slotted holes to
allow for truss deflection.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035, with dry film containing a minimum of 94
percent zinc dust by weight.
FABRlCATION
A.
Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles, and sizes to produce c1ose- fitting joints.
B.
Fabricate metal connector plates to sizes, configurations, thicknesses, and anchorage details required to
withstand design loads for types of joint designs indicated.
c.
Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated; use jigs or other means to ensure uniformity
and accuracy of assembly with joints closely fitted to comply with tolerances in TPI 1. Position members
to produce design camber indicated.
1.
Fabricate wood trusses within manufacturing tolerances in TPI 1.
D.
Connect truss members by metal connector plates located and securely embedded simultaneously in both
sides of wood members by air or hydraulic press.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
I
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
I
i
-
-
-
iii
INSTALLATION
Install wood trusses only after supporting construction is in place and is braced and secured.
Before installing, splice trusses delivered to Project site in more than one piece.
Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, exercising care
not to damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane bending or other causes.
Install and brace trusses according to TPI recommendations and as indicated.
Install trusses plumb, square, and true to line and securely fasten to supporting construction.
Space trusses [as indicated]; adjust and align trusses in location before permanently fastening.
Anchor trusses securely at bearing points; use metal framing anchors. Install fasteners through each
fastener hole in metal framing anchor according to manufacturer's fastening schedules and written
instructions.
H.
Securely connect each truss ply required for forming built-up girder trusses.
METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES
06176 - 5
I
I
1.
Install and fasten permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction loads are applied.
Anchor ends of permanent bracing where terminating at walls or beams.
1.
Install wood trusses within installation tolerances in TPI 1.
I
K.
Do not cut or remove truss members.
I
L. Replace wood trusses that are damaged or do not meet requirements.
1.
Do not alter trusses in field.
I
3.2
REP AIRS AND PROTECTION
I
A.
Repair damaged galvanized coatings on exposed surfaces with galvanized repair paint according to
ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Protective Coating: Clean and prepare exposed surfaces of metal connector plates. Brush apply primer,
when part of coating system, and one coat of protective coating.
I
1. Apply materials to provide minimum dry film thickness reconunended by coating system
manufacturer.
I
I
END OF SECTION 06176
I
I
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES
06176 - 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
-
I
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes interior woodwork including for the following applications:
1. Wood cabinets.
2. Plastic-laminate countertops.
3. Shop finishing of woodwork.
B. Interior architectural woodwork Includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging
strips, unless concealed within other construction before woodwork Installation.
C. Rough carriages for stairs are Interior architectural woodwork.
1. See Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for platform framing and other rough
framing associated with stairwork.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1 . Cabinet hardware and accessories.
2. Finishing materJals and processes.
B. Shop Drawings: Include location of each item, plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
C. Samplesl
1. Lumber and panel products for transparent finish, for each species and cut,
finished on one side and one edge.
2. Lumber and panel products with shop-applied opaque finish, for each finish
system and color, with exposed surface finished.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualificationsl Fabricator of woodwork.
B. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWl's "Architectural
Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of Interior architectural woodwork,
construction, finishes, and other requirements.
1. Provide AWl certification labels or compliance certificate indicating that
woodwork complies with requirements of grades specified.
C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with WIC's "Manual of Millwork"
for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and other
requirements.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
06402 - 1
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
06402 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
1. Provide WIC-certified compliance certificate Indicating that woodwork complies
with requirements of grades specified.
2. Provide WIC-certlfied compliance certificate for installation.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Umitations: Do not deliver or Install woodwork until building Is enclosed,
wet work is complete, and HV AC system is operating and maintaining temperature and
relative humidity at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the
construction period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Wood for Transparent Finish:
1. Species and Cut: B-2 Birch, Alder.
B. Wood for Opaque Flnishl
1 . Species: Shop Grade Birch; Poplar
C. Wood Products:
1. Hardboard: AHA A 135.4.
2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade (MO) (MO-Exterlor Glue).
3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade (M-2) (M-2-Exterlor Glue).
4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay.
D. Thermoset Decorative Overlay) Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard with
surface of thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with
LMASAT-1.
E. High-Pressure Decorative Lamlnatel NEMA LD 3.
1. Available Manufacturersl Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be Incorporated Into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Formica Corporation.
b. International Paper; Decorative Products Div.
c. Laminart.
d. Pioneer Plastics Corp.
e. Westinghouse Electric Corp.; Specialty Products Dlv.
f. Wllsonart International; Dlv. of Premark International, Inc.
2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
2.3
2.4
I
-
.
~
-
-
-
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
A.
General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials for a complete
installation of architectural woodwork, except for Items specified In Division 8 Section
"Door Hardware."
B.
Hardware Standard: Comply with BHMA A 156.9 for Items indicated by referencing
BHMA numbers or Items referenced to this standard.
C.
Face Frame Hinges: BHMA A 156.9, Bo1602, Self closing.
Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): (BHMA A156.9, B01602, self-closing)
D.
E.
Wire Pulls: (Back mounted, 4 inches (100 mm) long, 5116 inches (8 mm) in diameter)
F.
Adjustable Shelf Standards and SUpportSI (BHMA A 156. 9, B04071; with shelf rests,
B04081 ) .
G.
Drawer Slides: (Side-mounted, full-extension, zinc-plated steel drawer slides with steel
ball bearings, BHMA A 156.9, B05091,) and rated for the following loads I
H.
1. Box Drawer Slides: (751bf (330 N)).
2. File Drawer Slides: (150 Ibf (670 N)).
3. Pencil Drawer Slides: 45 Ibf (200 N).
Door Locksl (BHMA A 156.11, E07121)
I.
Drawer Locks! (8HMA A 156.11, E07041)
J.
Exposed Hardware Finishes: Complying with BHMA A 156.18 for BHMA finish number
indicated.
1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel
base.
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Furring. Blocking. Shims. and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber. (fire-
retardant-treated,) klln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.
FABRICATION
A. General: Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project
site. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide allowance for scribing, trimming, and
fitting.
1.
Interior Woodwork Grade: (Custom) complying with the referenced quality
standard.
Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible. Sand edges of cutouts to
remove splinters and burrs.
Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.
Install glass to comply with applicable requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing"
and In GANA's "Glazing Manual." For glass In wood frames, secure glass with
removable stops.
2.
3.
4.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
06402 - 3
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
06402 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
5. For trim Items wider than available lumber. use veneered construction. Do not
glue for width.
6. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat
members, except for members with ends exposed In finished work.
7. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of
installation require field assembly.
B. Wood Cabinets for Transparent Flnishl
1. AWl Type of Cabinet Construction: (Flush overlay)
2. WIC Construction Style: Style (8, Face Frame).
3. WIC Construction Type: Type (II, single-length sections to fit access openings).
4. WIC Door and Drawer Front Style: (Flush overlay)
5. Reveal Dimension: (1/2 inch (13 mm))
6. Grain Matching: (Run and match grain vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and
fixed panels)
7. Matching of Veneer Leaves: (Slip) match.
8. Veneer Matching within Panel Face: (Running) match.
9. Semiexposed Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodiesl (Compatible species to that
indicated for exposed surfaces, stained to match).
a. Drawer Sides and Backs: Hardwood Plywood, same species Indicated for
exposed surfoces.
b. Drawer Bottoms: (Hardwood plywood).
C. Plastic-Laminate Countertops:
1. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: (HGP).
2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: (As selected from manufacturer's full range)
3. Edge Treatment: (Same as laminate cladding on horlzontal surfaces)
4. Core Material at Sinks: (Exterior-grade plyWood).
2.5 SHOP FINISHING
A. Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop. Defer only final touchup, cleaning,
and polishing until after Installation.
B. Backprlming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to
concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling.
C. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system,
staining, and sheen, with sheen measured on 6Q-deg ree gloss meter per ASTM D 523:
1. Gradel (Custom).
2. AWl Finish System: (TR-5, catalyzed vinyl lacquer).
3. WIC Finish System: (#ld, vinyl lacquer (catalyzed)).
4. Staining: (Match approved sample for color).
5. Wash Coat for Stained Finish: Apply a vinyl wash coat to woodwork made from
closed-grain wood before staining and finishing.
6. Open-Grain Woods: (After staining (if any), apply paste wood filler to open-grain
woods and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood).
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
I
.
-
;;;;;;;;
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
06402 -INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
7. Sheen: (Satin, 30-50) gloss units,
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas and
examine and complete work as required, Including removal of packing and
backprimlng before Installation.
B. Quality Standard I Install woodwork to comply with AWl Section 1700 for the same
grade specified in this Section for type of woodwork involved.
C. Quality Standard I Install woodwork to comply with WIC Section 26 for the same grade
specified in this Section for type of woodwork Involved.
D. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight to a tolerance of 118 inch in 96 inches
(3 mm in 2400 mm), Shim as required with concealed shims,
E. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair
damaged finish at cuts.
F. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates.
Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for
complete installation. Use fine finishing nails (or finishing screws) for exposed fastening,
countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish
is indicated.
G. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-
length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible.
Fill gaps, If any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth,
and finish same as wood base, If finished.
H. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are
accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to
provide unencumbered operation,
1. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more
than 16 inches (400 mm) o,c, with (No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch (25-
mm) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips).
I.
Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or
other supports into underside of countertop. Calk space between backsplash and wall
with sealant specified In Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
END OF SECTION 06402
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
06402 - 5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
j
I
.
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07210 - BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes the following:
1 . Roof Insulation (nailable).
2. Concealed building Insulation.
3. Exposed building insulation.
4. Vapor retarders.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product Indicated.
B. Product test reports.
C. Researchlevaluation reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-
test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing Identical products per
(ASTM E 84 tor surface-burning characteristics), by UL or another testing and Inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with
appropriate markings of applicable testing and Inspecting agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATING MATERIALS
A. General; Provide Insulating materials that comply with requirements and with
referenced standards.
B. OSB, Polylsocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class 1, with maximum
flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 75 and 450, respectively, based on tests
performed on unfaced core on thicknesses up to 4 inches (101 mm) with 7/16" APA
rated OSB nailable surface and a fiber reinforced facer on the bottom.
C. Mineral-fiber blanket insulation consisting of fibers manufactured from glass:
1. Unfaced Minerai-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum
flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively; passing
ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
2. Faced Minerai-Fiber Blanket Insulationl ASTM C 665, Type III, Class A; Category 1,
faced with foil-scrim-kraft, vapor-retarder membrane on one face.
McBEAN COMMUNI1Y CENTER
07210 - 1
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
07210 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07210 - BUILDING INSULATION
2.2 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: 2 outer layers of polyethylene film laminated
to an Inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nylon cord or polyester scrim and
weighing not less than 25 Ib/1OClO sq. ft. (12 kgl100 sq. m), with maximum permeance
rating of 0.0507 perm (2.9 nglPa x s x sq. m).
B. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install insulation to comply with insulation manufacturer's written Instructions
applicable to products and application indicated. Extend insulation In thickness
indicated to envelop entire area to be Insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions
and fill voids with Insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
B. Installation of General Building Insulation: Apply insulation units to substrates by method
indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method Is
indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to
provide permanent placement and support of units.
1. Seal joints between c1osed-cell (nonbreathlng) Insulation units by applying
adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are
shoved Into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or
sealant.
2. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction,
unless otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for
firestopping.
a. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder. and seal each continuous area
of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight Installation.
3. Install blankets In cavities formed by framing members according to the following
requirements:
a. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing
members. If more than one length Is required to flll cavity, provide lengths
that will produce a snug fit between ends.
b. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction
fit between edges of Insulation and adjoining framing members.
4. For wood-framed construction, install minerai-fiber blankets according to
ASTM C 1320 and as follows:
a. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, secure insulation by inset,
stapling flanges to sides of framing members.
b. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange
of adjacent blanket to produce airtight Installation after concealing finish
material is in place.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
.
-
-
.
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07210 - BUILDING INSULATION
5. Stuff glass-fiber, loose-fill insulation Into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces
where shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum
volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 Ib/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m).
C. Installation of Vapor Retardersl Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be
protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage
system as indicated.
1. Seal vertical Joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two
wall studs. Fasten vapor retarders to framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at
perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches (406 mm)
o.C.
2. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with adhesives or vapor-retarder tape
according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's instructions. Seal butt joints and
fastener penetrations with vapor-retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing
members or other solid substrates.
3. Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives
as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer.
4. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar Items
penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal
between penetrating objects and vapor retarder.
5. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before
concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of
vapor retarder.
END OF SECTION 07210
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
07210 - 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
.
.
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07460 - FIBER-CEMENT SIDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes the following:
1. Shingle style siding
2. Fascia and Trim
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing,
and treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance
properties of waterproofing.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit three 6 Inch x 6 inch pieces of each type of siding and trim in
texture and widths shown, and specified herein.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualificationsl A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to Install
manufacturer's products.
B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Repair any punctures or tears in the weather-resistive barrier prior to the installation of
the siding.
B. Protect siding from other trades.
1 .5 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard thirty (30) years against defects for siding and ten
(10) years for trim.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING AND FASCIA
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
07460 - 1
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
07460 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07460 - FIBER-CEMENT SIDING
A. Non-asbestos fiber-cement siding to comply with ASTM Standard Specification Cl186
Grade II, Type A.
B. Siding to meet the following building code compliance National Evaluation Report No.
NER 405 (BOCA ICBO SBCCI); City of Los Angeles, Research Report No. 24862; Metro
Dade County, Florida Acceptance No. 94-1234.04; US Department of Housing and
Urban Development Materials Release 1263a; California DSA PS-019; and City of New
York MEA 223-93-M.Non-asbestos fiber-cement siding to be non-combustible when
tested in accordance with ASTM test method E 136.
C. Type: Staggered Edge Shingle Panel.
D. Trim Typel Smooth %".
E. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. James Hardi Building Products.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion. of work.
3.2 INSTALLATION - FASCIA AND TRIM
A. Install flashing around all wall openings.
B. Fasten through trim Into structural framing or code complying sheathing. Fasteners must
penetrate minimum % Inch or full thickness of sheathing. Additional fasteners may be
required to ensure adequate security.
C. Place fasteners no closer than % inch and no further than 2 inch from side edge of trim
board and no closer than 1 inch from end. Fasten maximum 16 inch on center.
D. Maintain clearance between trim and adjacent finished grade.
E. Trim inside corner with single board.
F. Install single board of outside comer board then align second corner board to outside
edge of first comer board. Do not fasten board to trim board.
G. Allow 118 inch gap between trim and siding.
H. Seal gap with high quality, paint-able caulk.
I. Shim frieze board as required to align with corner trim.
J. Install fascia over structural subfascla.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07460 - FIBER-CEMENT SIDING
3.3 INSTALLATION - SHINGL TYPE CLADDING
A. Substrate: Install Shingle Type cladding over minimum 7/16 inch thick wall sheathing or
equivalently braced walls complying with the applicable building code.
B. Starting: Install a minimum % Inch thick lath sta~er strip at the bottom course of the wall.
C. Maintain clearance between siding and adjacent finished grade.
D. Apply starter course of 10 inch Shingleside shingles or 9 V2 Inch Hardlplank lap siding
overlapping the starter strip.
E. Apply subsequent courses horizontally with a minimum 10 inch overlap at the top and
minimum 2 inch sidelap. The bottom edge of the first two courses overlaps the starter
strip.
F. Fasten between V2 to 1 inch In from the shingle side edge and between 8 V2 to 9 inch from
the shingle bottom edge.
G. Maintain minimum 1 inch vertical clearance between roofing and bottom edge of
shingle.
H. Ensure vertical joints of overlapping shingle courses do not align.
I. Wind Resistance: Where a specified level of wind resistance is required Hardi Shlngleslde
cladding Is Installed to substrate and secured with minimum two fasteners described in
Table No. 6,7, and 81n National Evaluation Service Report No. NER-405.
END OF SECTION
I
.
.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
07460 - 3
-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
.
.
-
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07511 - BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes built-up asphalt roofing systems.
1.2 DEFINITION
A. Hot Roofing Asphalt: Roofing asphalt heated to its equivlscous temperature, the
temperature at which its viscosity Is 125 centipoise for mopping application and 75
centipoise for mechanical application, within a range of plus or minus 25 deg F,
measured at the mop cart or mechanical spreader Immediately before application.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product Indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
Work.
C. Samplesl For each product Included in roofing system.
D. Research/evaluation reports.
E. Maintenance data.
1.4 QUAUTY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to Install
manufacturer's products.
B. Source Umltationsl Obtain components for roofing system (from) (or) (approved by)
roofing system manufacturer.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with the fire-test-response
characteristics indicated as determined by testing Identical products per test method
below by UL FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class (A); ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes
indicated.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at (Project site).
1.5 WARRANTY
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
07511 - 1
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07511 - BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation, in which
manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in
materials or workmanship within (10) years from date of Substantial Completion. Failure
includes roof leaks.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated Into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Built-up Asphalt Roofing:
a. CertainTeed Corporation.
b. Firestone Building Products Company.
c. GAF Materials Corporation.
d. Johns Manville International, Inc.
e. T AMKO Roofing Products, Inc.
2.2 BASE-SHEET MATERIALS
A. Sheathing Paper: Red-rosin type, minimum 3 Ib/l 00 sq. ft. (0.16 kglsq, m).
B. Base Sheet: ASTM D 4601, Type (I), non perforated, asphalt-impregnated and -coated,
glass-fiber sheet dusted with fine mineral surfacing on both sides.
C. Base Sheet: ASTM D 4601, Type II, SBS-modlfied, asphalt-Impregnated and -coated
sheet with glass-fiber-relnforcing mat dusted with fine mineral surfacing on both sides.
D. Base Sheet: ASTM D 4897, Type II, venting, non perforated. heavyweight asphalt-
impregnated and -coated, glass-fiber base sheet with coarse granular surfacing or
embossed venting channels on bottom surface.
2.3 ROOFING MEMBRANE PLIES
A. Ply Sheet: ASTM D 2178, Type (VI), asphalt-impregnated, glass-fiber felt.
B. Cap Sheet: ASTM D 3909, asphalt-impregnated and -coated. glass-fiber cap sheet,
with white coarse minerai-granule top surfacing and fine minerai surfacing on bottom
surface,
2.4 FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Backer Sheet: ASTM D 2178, Type ((VI), asphalt-impregnated, glass-fiber felt.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
07511 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
.
-
2.5
2.6
2.7
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07511 - BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
B.
Backer Sheet: ASTM D 4601, Type (I), asphalt-impregnated and -coated, glass-fiber
sheet, dusted with fine mineral surfacing on both sides.
C.
Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 6164, Type I or II, polyester-reinforced, SBS-modifled asphalt
sheet; granular surfaced; suitable for application method specified and as followsl
1. Granule Color! (White) (Gray) (Tan).
ASPHALT MATERIALS
A.
Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41.
B.
Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D 312, Type (III).
AUXILIARY ROOFING MEMBRANE MATERIALS
A.
General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for
intended use and compatible with built-up roofing.
B.
Asphalt Roofing Cementl ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required by
roofing system manufacturer for application.
C.
Cold-Applied Adhesive: Roofing system manufacturer's standard asphalt-based, one-
or two-part, asbestos-free, cold-applied adhesive specially formulated for compatibility
and use with built-up roofing base flashings.
D.
Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting
corrosion-reslstance provisions in FM 4470; designed for fastening roofing membrane
components to substrate: tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength; and
acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
E.
Aggregate Surfacing: ASTM D 1863, NO.6 or No. 67, clean, dry, opaque, (water-worn
gravel or crushed stone, free of sharp edges).
ROOF INSULATION
A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on
both major surfaces.
B. Tapered Polyisocyanurate Insulation: Provide factory-tapered Insulation boards
fabricated to slope of (114 inch per 12 inches (1:48)), unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes
where Indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.
2.8 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting
corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to
substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
07511 -3
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
07511 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07511 - BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
B. Cold Fluid-Applied Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard cold fluid-applied adhesive
formulated to adhere roof Insulation to substrate.
C. Insulation Cant Strips: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, cellulosic-fiber insulation board.
D. Tapered Edge Strips: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, cellulosic-fiber insulation board.
E. Tapered Edge Strips: ASTM C 726, glass-fiber insulation board.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSU LA TION INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so Insulation is not exposed to
precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.
B. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written Instructions for installing roof
insulation.
C. Nailer Strips: Mechanically fasten 4-inch nominal- (89-mm actual-) width wood nailer
strips of same thickness as insulation perpendicular to sloped roof deck at the following
spacing:
1. (16 feet (4.88 m)) <Insert spacing> apart for roof slopes greater than 1 inch per 12
inches (1 : 12) but less than 3 inches per 12 Inches (3: 12).
2. (48 inches (1220 mm)) <Insert spacing> apart for roof slopes greater than 3 inches
per 12 inches (3: 12).
D. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.
E. Install one or more layers of Insulation under area of roofing to achieve required
thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is (1-112 inches (38 mm)) (2 inches (SO
mm)) or greater, install 2 or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered
from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction.
F. Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows:
1. Prime surface of concrete deck with asphalt primer at a rate of 3/4 gal./1 00 sq. ft.
(0.3 L/sq. m) and allow primer to dry.
2. Set each layer of insulation In a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt.
3. Set each layer of Insulation In a cold fluid-applied adhesive.
G. Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of Insulation and secure to deck
using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified
board-type roof insulation to deck type.
H. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end
joints staggered between rows. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof
deck.
3.2 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.3
I
-
-
iii
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07511 - BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
A.
Install built-up roofing membrane system according to roofing system manufacturer's
written Instructions and applicable recommendations of ARMAINRCA's "Quality Control
Guidelines for the Application of Built-up Roofing."
B.
Where roof slope exceeds 1 Inch per 12 inches (1: 12), install sheets of built-up roofing
membrane parallel with slope and backnail.
C.
Coordinate installing roofing system components so Insulation and roofing membrane
sheets are not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday or
when rain is forecast.
D.
Substrate-Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofing asphalt from penetrating substrate joints,
entering building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building
construction.
E.
Loosely lay one course of sheathing paper, lapping edges and ends a minimum of 2
inches (50 mm) and 6 Inches (150 mm), respectively.
F.
Install one lapped course of base sheet, extending sheet over and terminating beyond
cants. Attach base sheet as follows:
1. Mechanically fasten to substrate.
2. Spot- or strip-mop to substrate with hot roofing asphalt.
3. Adhere to substrate in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt.
G.
Install (four) ply sheets starting at low point of roofing system. Align ply sheets without
stretching. Shingle side laps of ply sheets uniformly to achieve required number of plies
throughout thickness of roofing membrane. Shingle in direction to shed water. Extend
ply sheets over and terminate beyond cants.
1. Embed each ply sheet in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt.
H.
Cap Sheet: Install lapped granulated cap sheet starting at low point of roofing system.
Offset laps from laps of preceding ply sheets and align cap sheet without stretching.
Lap In direction to shed water. Extend cap sheet over and terminate beyond cants.
1 . Embed cap sheet In a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt.
I.
Aggregate Surfacing: Promptly after installing and testing roofing membrane, base
flashing, and stripping, flood-coat roof surface with 60 Ib/lOO sq. ft. (3 kg/sq. m) of hot
roofing asphalt. While flood coat is hot and fluid. cast the following average weight of
aggregate in a uniform course:
1. Aggregate Weight: (300 1b1100 sq. ft. (15 kg/sq. m)).
FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION
A.
Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, at roof
edges, and at penetrations through roof. and secure to substrates according to roofing
system manufacturer's written Instructions.
B.
Extend base flashing up walls or parapets a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm) above
roofing membrane and 4 inches (100 mm) onto field of roofing membrane.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
07511 - 5
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
07511 - 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07511 - BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
C. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of
roofing.
D. Install stripping, according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions, where
metal flanges and edgings are set on built-up roofing.
END OF SECTION 07511
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07610 - SHEET METAL ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes the following (custom-fabricated) sheet metal roofing:
1. Standing-seam metal roofing.
B. See Division 9 Section "Painting" for field painting sheet metal roofing.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Capable of resisting a design negative uplift pressure (of 60
Ibf/sq. ft. Provide clips, fasteners, and clip spacings of type indicated and with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to (3) times the design negative uplift
pressure.
B. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Capable of producing sheet metal roofing assemblies that
comply with UL 580 for Class 90 wind-uplift resistance.
1. Maintain UL certification of portable roll-forming equipment for duration of sheet
metal roofing work.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of underlayment product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of sheet metal roofing, Including plans, elevations, and
keyed references to termination points.
1 . Include details for forming, joining, and securing sheet metal roofing, including
pattem of seams, termination points, expansion joints, roof penetrations, edge
conditions, special conditions, connections to adjoining work, and accessory
items.
C. Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating sheet metal roofing
installation with penetrations and roof-mounted items.
D. Samplesl For each exposed finish.
E. Roll-Forming Equipment Certificate: Issued by UL.
F. Product test reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualificationsl Fabricator of sheet metal roofing.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
07610 - 1
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
07610-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07610 - SHEET METAL ROOFING
B. Custom-Fabricated Sheet Metal Roofing Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs
skilled workers who custom-fabricate sheet metal roofing.
C. Roll-Formed Sheet Metal Roofing Fabricator Qualifications: An authorized
representative of roll-formed sheet metal roofing manufacturer for fabrication and
installation of units.
D. Sheet Metal Roofing Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual."
E. Copper Roofing Standard: Comply with CDA's "Copper in Architecture Handbook."
F. Pre installation Conference: Conduct conference at (Project site).
1 .5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal roofing that shows evidence of
deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Fluoropolymer Finish Warranty Period! (20) years from date of Substantial
Completion.
B. Special Installer's Warranty: Specified form in which Roofing Installer agrees to repair or
replace components of custom-fabricated sheet metal roofing that fail in materials or
workmanship within (two) years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ROOFING SHEET METALS
A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Prepalnted with Coil Coating I Steel sheet metallic coated
by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coll-coating process to comply with
ASTM A 755/A 755M.
1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 6531 A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating
designation; structural quality.
2. Surface: (Smooth, flat) finish.
3. Thickness: (0.0276 inch (0.7 mm)), unless otherwise indicated.
a. Batten Caps: 0.0276 inch (0.7 mm) thick.
4. . Exposed Flnishesl
a. High-Performance Organic Finish: (Two) -coat thermocured system with
fluoropolymer coats containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene
fluoride resin by weight; complying with physical properties and coating
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07610 - SHEET METAL ROOFING
performance requirements of AAMA (2604) (2605), except as modified
below:
1) Humidity Resistance: (2000) hours.
2) Water Resistancel (2000) hours.
3) Color: (As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range).
2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Felts! ASTM D 226, Type (II (No. 30)), asphalt-saturated organic felts.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners
designed to withstand design loads.
1. Nails for Copper Roofing: Copper or hardware bronze, 0.109 inch (2.8 mm)
minimum and not less than 718 inch (22 mm) long, barbed with large head.
2. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal roofing by means of
plastic caps or factory-applied coating.
3. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws with hex
washer head.
4. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets.
B. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing
tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic,
nonstaining tape.
C. Elastomerlc Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, of base polymer, type, grade, class, and use
classifications required to produce joints In sheet metal roofing that will remain
weathertlght.
D. Expansion-Joint Sealant: For hooked-type expansion joints, which must be free to
move, provide nonsetting, nonhardening, nonmigrating, heavy-bodied polyisobutylene
sealant.
E. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 1 &-
mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Sheet Metal Roofing Accessories: Provide components required for a complete sheet
metal roofing assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, corner units, ridge closures,
clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material
and finish of sheet metal roofing, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Clips: Minimum 0.062&-inch- (l.6-mm-) thick stainless-steel panel clips designed
to withstand negative-load requirements.
2. Cleats: Mechanically seamed cleats formed from the following material:
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
07610 - 3
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
07610 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07610 - SHEET METAL ROOFING
a. (Metallic-Coated Steel) Roofing: O.025(}inch- (O.65-mm-) thick, stainless-
steel or nylon-coated aluminum sheet.
3. Closures: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam
or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, flexible
closure strips; cut or premolded to match sheet metal roofing profile, Provide
closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertlght construction.
B, Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.0179-inch- (Q,45-mm-) thick, metallic-coated steel
sheet. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide
finished appearance, Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners,
bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers, Finish flashing and trim with same
finish system as adjacent sheet metal roofing.
C. Gutters: Formed from 0.0179-inch- (O.45-mm-) thick, metallic-coated steel sheet.
Match profile of gable trim, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special
pieces as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long sections, sized
according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Furnish gutter supports
spaced 36 inches (900 mm) o,c" fabricated from same metal as gutters, Provide
bronze, copper, or aluminum wire ball strainers at outlets. Finish gutters to match (rOOf
fascia and rake trim),
D. Downspouts: Formed from 0.0179-inch- (O.45-mm-) thick, metallic-coated steel sheet; In
1D-foot- (3-m-) long sections, complete with formed elbows and offsets, Finish
downspouts to match sheet metal roofing,
E. Roof Curbs: Fabricated from Q.0478-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick, metallic-coated steel sheet;
with welded top box and bottom skirt, and integral full-length cricket. Fabricate curb
subframlng of minimum O.0598-inch- (l.5-mm-) thick, angle-, C-, or Z-shaped steel sheet.
Fabricate curb and subframing to withstand indicated loads, of size and height
indicated. Finish roof curbs to match sheet metal roofing, ( Insulate roof curb with l-
inch- (25-mm-) thick, rigid insulation.)
2.5 EQUIPMENT
A. Portable Roil-Forming Equipmentl Manufacturer's standard UL-certifled equipment
capable of forming sheet metal roofing in profiles indicated.
1. Available Manufacturers! Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be Incorporated into the Work Include,
but are not limited to, the following:
2, Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Berridge Manufacturing Company.
b. Fabral, Inc.
c. Flexospan Steel Buildings, Inc.
d. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC.
e. Morin Corporation; a Metecno Group Company.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
-
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07610 - SHEET METAL ROOFING
2.6 FABRICATION
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal roofing to comply with details shown and
recommendations In SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the
design, dimensions (pan width and seam height), geometry, metal thickness, and other
characteristics of installation indicated. Fabricate sheet metal roofing and accessories
at the shop to greatest extent possible.
B. General: Fabricate roll-formed sheet metal roofing panels to comply with details shown
and roll-formed sheet metal roofing manufacturer's written Instructions.
C. Fabricate sheet metal roofing to allow for expansion in running work sufficient to
prevent leakage, damage, and deterioration of the Work. Form exposed sheet metal
work to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks, true to line
and levels Indicated, and with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
1 . Layout sheet metal roofing so cross seams, when required, are made in direction
of flow with higher pans overlapping lower pans. Stagger cross seams.
2. Fold and cleat eaves and transverse seams in the shop.
3. Form and fabricate sheets, seams, strips, cleats, valleys, ridges, edge treatments,
integral flashings, and other components of metal roofing to profiles, patterns,
and drainage arrangements shown and as required for leakproof construction.
D. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other, protect against
galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying
rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent
separation as recommended by manufacturers of dissimilar metals or by fabricator.
E. Sheet Metal Accessories: Custom fabricate flashings and trim to comply with
recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to
design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. Obtain field
measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Layout before installation of sheet metal roofing. Space fasteners as required to resist
design uplift, but not more than 18 inches (457 mm) o.c.
B. Install flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements specified in
Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment and building-paper slip sheet on roof
sheathing under sheet metal roofing. Use adhesive for temporary anchorage. Apply at
locations indicated on Drawings, In shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped Joints of
not less than 2 inches (50 mm).
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
07610 - 5
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
07610-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07610 - SHEET METAL ROOFING
3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. General: Install sheet metal roofing perpendicular to purlins or supports. Anchor sheet
metal roofing and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for
thermal and structural movement. Install fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective
coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for a
complete roofing system and as recommended by fabricator for sheet metal roofing.
1. Field cutting of sheet metal roofing by torch Is not permitted.
2. Rigidly fasten eave end of sheet metal roofing and allow ridge end free
movement due to thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill roofing.
3. Provide metal closures at peaks, rake edges and rake walls.
4. Flash and seal sheet metal roofing with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and at
perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws.
5. Locate roofing splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger
roofing splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.
6. Lap metal flashing over sheet metal roofing to allow moisture to run over and off
the material.
B. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will not penetrate completely through substrate.
1. Steel Roofing: Use stainless-steel fasteners.
C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive
substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with
bituminous coating, by applying rubberlzed-asphdlt underlayment to each contact
surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator of sheet
metal roofing or manufacturers of dissimilar metals.
1. Coat back side of (uncoated aluminum) sheet metal roofing with bituminous
coating where roofing will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementltious
construction.
D. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and
locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as
required for a tight installation.
3.4 CUSTOM-FABRICATED SHEET METAL ROOFING INSTALLATION
A. Fabricate and install work with lines and corners of exposed units true and accurate.
Form exposed faces flat and free of buckles, excessive waves, and avoidable tool
marks, considering temper and reflectivity of metal. Provide uniform, neat seams with
minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. Fold back sheet metal to form a hem
on concealed side of exposed edges, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Install cleats to hold sheet metal panels In position. Attach each cleat with two
fasteners to prevent rotation.
2. Nail cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) O.C. Bend tabs over nails.
B. Seal joints as shown and as required for leakproof construction. Provide low-slope
transverse seams using cleats where backup of moisture may occur.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.5
3.6
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07610 - SHEET METAL ROOFING
1. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7
Section "Joint Sealants."
C.
Provide expansion cleats in roof panels that exceed 30 feet (9.1 m) in length.
Standing-Seam Roofing: Attach standing-seam metal pans to substrate with cleats,
double-nailed at 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. Install pans reaching from eave to ridge
before moving to adjacent pans. Lock each pan to pan below with transverse seam.
Before pans are locked, apply continuous bead of sealant to top flange of lower pan.
Crimp standing seams by folding over tWice so cleat and pan edges are completely
engaged.
1. Loose-lock pans at eave edges to continuous cleats and flanges on back edges
of gutters.
2. (leave seams upright) after crimping at ridges and hips.
D.
ON-SITE. ROLL-FORMED SHEET METAL ROOFING INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install on-site, roll-formed sheet metal roofing to comply with sheet metal
roofing manufacturer's written instructions for UL wind-uplift class indicated. Provide
sheet metal roofing of full length from eave to ridge unless otherwise restricted by
shipping limitations.
B.
Standing-Seam Sheet Metal Roofingl Fasten sheet metal roofing to supports with
concealed clips at each standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners
recommended by manufacturer.
1. Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners.
2. Before panels are joined, apply continuous bead of sealant to top flange of
lower panel.
3. Snap Joint: Nest standing seams and fasten together by interlocking and
completely engaging field-applied sealant.
4. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved motorized
seamer tool so cleat, sheet metal roofing, and field-applied sealant are
completely engaged.
ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight
mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and
other components.
1. Install components required for a complete sheet metal roofing assembly
including trim, copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets,
fillers, closure strips, and similar items.
2. Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation
instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide
concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as
indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently
watertight and weather resistant.
3. Provide elbows at base of downspout to direct water away from building.
4. Tie downspouts to underground drainage system indicated.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
07610 -7
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
07610 - 8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07610 - SHEET METAL ROOFING
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as sheet metal
roofing is installed. On completion of sheet metal roofing Installation, clean finished
surfaces, Including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces
of flashing. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
END OF SECTION 07610
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
-
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes the following:
1 . Manufactured reglets.
2. Formed roof drainage system.
3. Formed low-slope roof flashing and trim.
4. Formed steep-slope roof flashing and trim.
5. Formed wall flashing and trim.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product Indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts, profiles, shapes, seams, dimensions, and details for
fastening, joining, supporting, and anchoring sheet metal flashing and trim.
C. SamplesJ For each type of sheet metal flashing and trim.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent
requirements are Indicated.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for
fabrication and installation.
1. Build mOCkup of typical roof eave(, Including built-in gutter) (faSCia) (fascia trim)
. (apron flashing), approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) long, Including supporting
construction cleats, seams, attachments(, underlayment,) and accessories.
2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at
time of Substantial Completion.
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at (Project site) <Insert location>.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below Introduce lists, the following requirements
apply to product selection:
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
07620 - 1
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
07620 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
1 . Available Manufacturersl Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be Incorporated Into the Work include,
but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the manufacturers specified.
2.2 SHEET METALS
A. Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dlp
process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with
ASTM A 755/A 755M.
1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/ A 653M, G90 (l275) coating
designation; structural quality.
2. Exposed Flnishesl Apply the following coil coating I
a. High-Performance Organic Finish: (Two)-coat thermocured system
containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight;
complying with physical properties and coating performance requirements
of AAMA 2604, except as modified for below:
1) Humidity and Salt Spray Resistance: (2000) hours.
2) Color: (Match Architect's samples).
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective
coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete
sheet metal flashing and trim installation.
B. Felt Underlayment: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt,
non perforated .
C. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets
and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads.
1. Nails for Copper Sheet: Copper or hardware bronze, 0.109 Inch (2.8 mm)
minimum and not less than 718 inch (22 mm) long, barbed with large head.
2. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal by means of plastic
caps or factory-applied coating.
3. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed,
with hex washer head.
4. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets.
D. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing
tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic,
nonstaining tape.
E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric (polyurethane) (polysulfide) (silicone)
polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in
sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component solvent-release butyl rubber sealant,
polyisobutylene plasticized, heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited
movement.
G. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound.
H. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-
mil (Q.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat.
2.4 REG LETS
A. Regletsl Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure
interlocking of separate reg let and counterflashing pieces,. and compatible with
flashing Indicated.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Fry Reglet Corporation.
b. Heckmann Building Products Inc.
c. Hickman, W. P. Company.
2. Material: (Galvanized steel, 0.0217 inch (0.55 mm) thick).
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with
recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to
design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item Indicated. Shop fabricate
items where practicable. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop
fabrication.
B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and
tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to
form hems.
C. Sealed Jointsl Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate
elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations.
D. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions In the Work
cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1
inch (25 mm) deep, filled with (elastomeric) (butyl) sealant concealed within joints.
E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed-to-view sheet
metal flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being
anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal, and in thickness not less than that of
metal being secured.
2.6 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
07620 - 3
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
07620 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
A. Roof Edge Flashing (Gravel stop) and Fascia Caps: Fabricate In minimum 96-inch-
(24GO-mm-) long, but not exceeding lD-foot- (3-m-) long, sections. Furnish with 6-inch-
. (l50-mm-) wide Joint cover plates.
a. Stainless Steel: (0.0250 inch (0.65 mm)) <Insert thickness> thick.
b. Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless Steel: (0.0250 inch (0.65 mm)) <Insert
thickness> thick.
c. Galvanized Steel: (0.0396 inch (1.0 mm)) <Insert thickness> thick.
d. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: (0.0396 inch (1.0 mm)) <Insert
thickness> thick.
e. Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel: (0.0396 inch (1.0 mm)) <Insert
thickness> thick.
B. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel: (0.0276 inch (0.7 mm)) <Insert thickness>
thick.
C. Counterflashlng( and Flashing Receivers): Fabricate from the following material:
1. Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel: (0.0217 inch (0.55 mm)) <Insert thickness>
thick.
D. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel: (0.0276 inch (0.7 mm)) <Insert thickness>
thick.
2.7 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Openings Flashing In Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, and similar flashings to
extend (4 inches (100 mm)) beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-
Inch- (50-mm-) high end dams. Fabricate from the following material:
1. Aluminum: (0.0320 inch (0.8 mm)) thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work
securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners,
solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous
items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.
1. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive
substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.2
-
.
-
-
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator
or manufacturers of dissimilar metals.
C.
Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive 011 canning, buckling,
and tool marks.
D.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels Indicated. Provide uniform,
neat seams with minimum exposure of elastomeric sealant.
E.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight
performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before
fabricating sheet metal.
1. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Anchor each cleat with
two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.
F.
Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24
inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion
provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints
of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with
(elastomeric) sealant concealed within joints.
G.
Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-114 inches
(32 mm) for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) for wood screws.
1. Galvanized or Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steell Use stainless-steel fasteners.
H.
Seal joints with (elastomerlc) sealant as required for watertight construction.
ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance
requirements and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed
fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with
laps, joints. and seams that will be permanently watertight.
B.
Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to
recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49.
1.
Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleats anchored to
substrate at (24-inch (600-mm)) (16-inch (400-mm)) centers.
C. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base
flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing.
Secure in a waterproof manner. Extend counterflashing 4 inches (100 mm) over base
flashing. Lap counterflashing Joints a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) and bed with
(elastomeric) sealant.
D. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with
installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows:
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
07620 - 5
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
07620 - 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
1. Turn lead flashing down inside vent piping, being careful not to block vent piping
with flashing.
2. Seal with (elastomeric) sealant and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof
except for lead flashing on vent piping.
3.3 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture
according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of
wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and
louvers.
B. Openings Flashing in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, and similar
flashings to extend (4 inches (100 mm)) beyond wall openings.
END OF SECTION 07620
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
-
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07650 - THROUGH-WALL FLASHING
PART ONE - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data: Indicate material type, composition, thickness and installation procedures.
B. Samples: Submit 1 '-0" by 1'-0" samples of material.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicable standards! American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), standards are
referenced herein.
PART TWO - PRODUCTS
2.1 SELF-ADHERING, FLEXIBLE MEMBRANE FLASHING
A. Acceptable Products:
1. Carlisle SynTec, Inc., CCW-705-TWF
2. W.R. Grace & Co. - Conn., Perma-A-Barrler Wall Flashing
3. TC MlraDRI, MiraDRI TWF.
B, Characteristlcsl
1. Type: Adhesive-backed rubberized asphalt compound, bonded to 8 mil, high
density, cross-laminated polyethylene film. Adhesive side coated with release
paper.
2. Membrane thickness: Minimum 40 mils.
3. Surface conditioner/primer and mastic/sealantl
Membrane manufacturer's standard components. Surface conditionerlprimer
shall be formulated to provide tenacious bond with all substrates, Including those
coated with dampproofing or asphaltic materials.
2.2 BUILDING TAPE
A. Acceptable Productsl
1. Carlisle SynTec, Inc., Window and Door Flashing.
2. W.R. Grace & Co. - Conn., Vycor Plus,
3. Protecto Wrap Co., BT20 XL.
B. Characteristics:
1. Typel Adhesive-backed rubberized asphalt compound, bonded to 8 mil, high
density, cross-laminated polyethylene film. Adhesive side coated with release
paper.
2. Membrane thickness. Minimum 20 mils,
3. Surface conditloner/prlmer and mastic sealant:
Membrane manufacturer's standard components. Surface condltioner/primer
shall be formulated to provide bond with substrates, including those coated with
damp proofing or asphaltic materials.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
07650 - 1
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
07650 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07650 - THROUGH-WALL FLASHING
PART THREE - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF SELF-ADHERING MEMBRANE FLASHING:
A. Install through wall flashing in accord with accepted submittals.
B.lnstall through-wall flashing at exterior door jambs and heads, window jambs, heads
and sills, other wall openings, masonry copings, lintels, shelf angles and at weep hole
locations, continuous, in same bed joint as weep hole.
C. Prime substrates to receive membrane flashing using specified primers, and
complying with accepted submittals. Primed substrates shall allow full bond of
adhesive side of membrane to substrates. Should full bond at top edge not be
evident mechanically attach a 1" wide, continuous, hot-dlpped galvanized steel
termination bar at top edge of flashing, against backup substrate, fastened at 2'-0"
o.c. maximum.
D. Membrane flashing for concrete backup:
1. At concrete walls, start self-adherlng membrane flashing V2" in from outside
face of exterior wythe, extend through cavity, rising not less than 1 O. "
Terminate against substrate, In accord with accepted submittals. Seal top
edge with continuous bead of mastic.
2. Overlap flashing 2" and roll all overlaps with a steel hand roller. Apply a bead
of mastlclsealant along top edge, seams and cuts of flashing In accord with
accepted submittals.
3. Top flashing with full bed of fresh mortar as masonry is continued.
E. At stud walls with masonry veneer: Start flashing Y2" from outside face of exterior wythe,
extend through cavity, rising not less than 8", and terminate against sheathing. and
terminate against sheathing.
1. Set in continuous 1-1/2" wide bed of adhesive, and mechanically fastened to
each framing stud.
2. Coordinate flashing installation with application of building felt to ensure felt
overlaps upper edge of flashing in shingle fashion.
3. Overlap flashing 2" and roll all overlaps with a steel hand roller. Apply a bead
of masticlsealant along top edge, seams and cuts of flashing In accord with
accepted submittals.
4. Top flashing with full bed of fresh mortar as masonry is continued.
F. Extend flashing minimum 8" beyond openings, each side. Turn ends up minimum 8"
beyond openings, each side. Turn ends up minimum 2" to form enddams and ensure
drainage through weeps and not into cavity.
G. Install in maximum lengths to avoid joints. Fold corners without cutting. Apply a detail
coat of liquid mastic over the folds.
H.Adhere flashing to shelf angle. Provide adhesive cant to force water to exterior.
I. Ensure that through-wall flashing is provided with operable weeps spaced and located
as specified In Brick Masonry section. Weeps shall be above finished grade. For
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07650 - THROUGH-WALL FLASHING
flashing at roofing or back of parapet wall conditions, place lowest flashing joints and
weeps in joint just above reglets or termination of top edge of roof base flashing.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING TAPE:
A. Install building tape at heads, jambs and sills of openings in accord with accepted
submittals. Tum flashing out 8" onto face of sheathing and extend to Inside face of rough
opening.
1. Install sill flashing first. Turn sill flashing up at interior and at ends to direct water
to outside edge of flashing.
2. Install jamb flashing so that flashing laps over sill flashing.
3. Install head flashing so that head flashing laps over jamb flashing.
END OF SECTION
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
07650 - 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTUREPROTECTlON
07841 - THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for the following types of fire-
resistance-rated assemblies:
1. Walls and partitions.
2. Smoke barriers.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. F-Ratlngs: Provide flrestop systems with F-ratings equaling or exceeding fire-resistance
rating of constructions penetrated as determined per ASTM E 814.
B. T-Ratings: Provide firestop systems with T-ratings required, as well as F-ratings,
determined per ASTM E 814, where systems protect penetrating Items with potential to
contact adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas Including, but not limited, to the
followingl
1 . Penetrations located outside wall cavities.
2. Penetrations located outside fire-resistive shaft enclosures.
3. Penetrations located in construction containing fire-protection-rated openings.
C. For firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide
products that after curing do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both
during and after construction.
1 . For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide firestop systems not requiring
removal of Insulation.
D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-
spread indices of less than 25 and smoke-developed indices of less than 450, when
tested per ASTM E 84.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product Indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include details of installation and design designation of testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidences
compliance with requirements for each condition indicated.
C. Product certificates and test reports.
1.4 QUAUTY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide rated systems identical to those tested per
ASTM E 814 and with products bearing the classification marking of a qualified testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
07841 - 1
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
07841 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTUREPROTECTION
07841 - THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to
accommodate firestop systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products! Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those indicated in the
Through Penetration Flrestop System Schedule at the end of Part 3.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
indicated for each application in the Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule at
the end of Part 3.
C. Basis-of-Design Product! The design for through-penetration firestop systems is based on
products named in the Through-Penetration Flrestop Schedule at the end of Part 3 by
design designation of a qualified testing and inspecting agency. Subject to
compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product
by one of the followingl
1 . DAP Inc.
2. Firestop Systems Inc.
3. Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc.
4. Isolatek International.
5. 3M Fire Protection Products.
6. Tremco.
7. United States Gypsum Company.
2.2 FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
A. Compatibility: Provide firestop systems that are compatible with the substrates forming
openings, and with the items, If any, penetrating firestop systems, under conditions of
service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field
experience.
B. Accessories: Provide accessories required to install fill materials that comply with
requirements of tested assemblies, are approved by qualified testing and inspecting
agency that performed testing, and are specified by manufacturer of tested
assemblies. Accessories Include, but are not limited to, the followingl
1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials.
a. Slag-/rock-wool-fiber insulation.
b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing
materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.
c. Fire-rated form board.
d. Fillers for sealants.
2. Temporary forming materials.
3. Substrate primers.
4. Collars.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTUREPROTECTION
07841 - THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
5. Steel sleeves.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with "Performance
Requirements" Article and firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions
and published drawings for products and applications Indicated.
B. Clean openings immediately before Installing flrestop systems.
1. Remove foreign materials that could Interfere with adhesion of flrestop systems.
2. Remove laltance and form-release agents from concrete. ,
3. Produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with
firestop systems. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.
C. Priming: Prime substrates when recommended in writing by firestop system
manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods.
Confine primers to areas of bond; do not spill primers or allow them to migrate onto
adjoining surfaces.
D. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of flrestopping
with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by
such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove firestopplng smears. Remove
tape immediately after Installation without disturbing firestopping seal.
E. Accessories: Install accessories of types required to support fill materials during their
application and in the position necessary to produce cross-sectional shapes and
depths required to achieve fire ratings Indicated.
1 . After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other
accessories that are not permanent components of flrestop systems.
F. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques.
1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and
penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings Indicated.
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings
and penetrating items.
3. For fill materlals that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce
smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
G. Identification] Identify firestop systems with pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive, preprinted
vinyl labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces of penetrated construction on both
sides of each firestop system installation where labels will be visible. Include the
following information on labels:
1. The words: "Warning--Through-Penetratlon Firestop System-Do Not Disturb. Notify
Building Management of Any Damage."
2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
07841 - 3
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
07841 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTUREPROTECTION
07841 - THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
3. Through-penetration flrestop system designation of applicable testing and
inspecting agency.
4. Date of installation.
5. Firestop system manufacturer's name.
6. Installer's name.
H. Clean excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Installation progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials that are approved In writing by manufacturers and that do
not damage materials in which openings occur.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified Independent testing and Inspecting
agency to perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.
1 . Notify Owner's inspecting agency at least seven days In advance of firestop
system Installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of
installations.
S. Do not cover up flrestop system Installations that will become concealed behind other
construction until inspecting agency and building Inspector, if required by authorities
having jurisdiction, have examined each installation.
C. Inspecting agency will state In each report whether Inspected firestop systems comply
with or deviate from requirements.
D. Enclosing firestop systems with other construction only after inspection reports are
issued.
E. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace flrestop systems to comply with
requirements.
3.3 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM SCHEDULE
A. Where UL-classifled systems are indicated, they refer to the alpha-alpha-numeric
designations listed in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ.
S. Firestop Systems with No Penetrating Items. Comply with the following:
1. UL-C1asslfied Systems: CAJ 0011, CAJ 0026, CAJ 0040, CAJ 0051.
C. Firestop Systems for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing: Comply with the following:
1 . U L -Classified Systemsl CAJ 1302, CAJ 1205, CAJ 1170, CAJ 1171, CAJ 1036, CAJ
1187, CAJ 1189, CAJ 1231, CAJ 1234, CAJ 1064, WL 1158, WL 1097, WL 1091, FC
1050, FC 1054, FA 1009, FA 1010, FC 1024.
D. Firestop System for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing. Comply with the following:
1. UL-C1assified Systemsl CAJ 2088, CAJ 2123, CAJ 2184, CAJ 2085, CAJ 2233, CAJ
2116, WJ 2017, FA 2042, CAJ 2160, FA 2024, CAJ 2069, WL 2176, WL 2159, WL 2061,
WL 2062, Wl2063, WL 2082, WL 2125.
E. Firestop Systems for Electrical Cables: Comply with the following:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
.
-
!!!!
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTUREPROTECTION
07841 - THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
1. UL-C1assified Systems: CAJ 3141, CAJ 3144, CAJ 3083, WL 3131, WL 3043, FC 3037,
FC 3023, WL 3064.
F. Firestop Systems for Cable Traysl Comply with the following:
1. UL-Classified Systems: WJ 4012, WL 4012, CAJ 4037, FA 4002, WL 4010.
G. Firestop Systems for Insulated Pipesl Comply with the following:
1. UL-Classified Systems: CAJ 5099, FA 5011, CAJ 5121, CAJ 5111, CAJ 5120, CAJ
5089, CAJ 5067, CBJ 5005, CBJ 5009, WL 5082, WL 5081, WL 5083, FC 5055, WL
5050.
H. Firestop Systems for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrations FS: Comply with the
followingl
1. UL-C1assified Systems: CAJ 7044, WL 7011, WL 7039, WJ 7003, WL 7007.
I. Firestop Systems for Mixed Penetrating Items of Penetrations: Comply with the followingl
1. UL-C1assified Systems: CAJ 8057, CAJ 8059, FA 8002, FC 8005, WL 8008.
END OF SECTION 07841
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
07841 - 5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07920 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.3
A.
A. This Section Includes sealants for the following:
1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and non-traffic horizontal surfaces.
2. Interior Joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces.
3. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.
See Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each joint sealant product indicated.
Samplesl For each joint sealant product indicated.
Sealant compatibility and adhesion test reports.
Pre-construction fleld-adhesion test reports.
Product (certificates).
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Testing! Use sealant manufacturer's standard test
methods to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques
are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.
B. Pre-construction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test
their adhesion to joint substrates using test method Indicated in Part 3 "Field Quality
Control" Article.
C. Mockups: Before Installing joint sealants, apply elastomerlc sealants to verify selections
made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of
materials and execution.
1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at
time of Substantial Completion.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Written warranty in which Installer agrees to repair or
replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not meet requirements specified in this
Section or fail in adhesion within specified warranty period (two) years from date of
Substantial Completion.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
07920 - 1
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07920 - JOINT SEALANTS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not
comply with requirements specified in this Section within (20) years from date of
Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below Introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may
be Incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products
specified.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide Joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field
experience.
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: (Match samples).
2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A. Elastomeric Sealants, General: ASTM C 920.
1. Continuous-Immersion Sealants: For Immersion in water, products tested
according to ASTM C 1247, Including Initial six-week Immersion period and (two)
additional Immersion four-week Immersion period(s), without failing in adhesion or
cohesion when tested with substrates indicated.
2. Sealants for Contact with Food: Comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.
B. Low-Modulus Nonacid-Curing Silicone Sealant:
1. (Available ) Products:
a. Dow Corning; 790.
b. Pecora Corporation; (890).
c. Sonneborn Building Products Dlv., ChemRex Inc.; Omnlseal.
d. Tremco; Spectrem 1.
2.
3.
Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
Class: 25.
I
I
I
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
07920 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07920 - JOINT SEALANTS
4. Additional Movement Capability: Capable of (50) (100) percent movement in
extension and 50 percent movement In compression when tested for adhesion
and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719.
5. Exposure: Use NT (nontraffic).
6. Substrates: Uses M, G, A and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
7. Nonstaining to porous substrates when testing per ASTM C 1248 for substrates
indicated.
C. Medium-Modulus Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant:
1. (Available ) Products:
a. Dow Corning; (795).
b. NUCO Industries, Inc.; HIFlex 393.
c. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI-631.
d. Tremco; (Spectrem 2).
2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
3. Class: 25.
4. Exposure: Use NT (nontraffic).
5. Substrates: Uses M, G, A and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
6. Nonstaining to porous substrates when testing per ASTM C 1248 for substrates
indicated. .
D. Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant:
1. (Available ) Products:
a. Dow Corning; 786 Mildew Resistant.
b. GE Silicones; Sanitary 1700.
c. NUCO Industries, Inc.; NuFlex 302.
d. 'Pecora Corporation; 898 Silicone Sanitary Sealant.
e. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI-611.
f. Tremco; Tremsil 600 White.
2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
3. Class: 25.
4. Exposure: Use NT (nontraffic).
5. Substrates: Uses G, A and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
2.4 SOLVENT-RELEASE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Butyl-Rubber-Based Solvent-Release Joint Sealant: ASTM C 1085.
1. (Available ) Products:
a. Pecora Corporation; BC-158.
b. Sonneborn Building Products Dlv., ChemRex, Inc.; Sonneborn Multi-Purpose
Sealant.
c. Tremco; Tremco Butyl Sealant.
2.5 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
07920 - 3
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
07920 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07920 - JOINT SEALANTS
A. Latex Sealant: ASTM C 834.
1. (Available ) Products:
a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20.
b. Sonneborn Building Products Dlv" ChemRex, Inc.; Sonolac.
c. Tremco; Tremflex 834.
2.6 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining
latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound
transmission through perimeter joints and openings In building construction as
demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1. (Available )Products:
a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.
b. USG Corp., United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Jolntsl Nondrying, nonhardenlng, nonsklnning,
nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior
concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission.
1. (Available )products:
a. Ohio Sealants, Inc.; Pro-Series SC-170 Rubber Base Sound Sealant.
b. Pecora Corporation; BA-98.
c. Tremco; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.
2. 7 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are
compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are
approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field
experience and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of size and density to control sealant depth
and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:
1. Type: (C (closed-cell material with a surface skin)).
C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM. or silicone tubing
complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of
remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F (minus 32 deg C). Provide
products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal.
to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance.
D. Bond-Breaker Tapel Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, Inflexible joint-filler materials
or Joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure.
Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07920 - JOINT SEALANTS
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer! Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for
adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction
joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of
sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances
capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any
way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and
surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants.
1. Remove foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion
of joint sealant.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning,
mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean,
sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants.
Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by
vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.
3. Remove laltance and form-release agents from concrete.
4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not
stain, harm substrates, or leave residues could interfere with adhesion of joint
sealants.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint sl:Jbstrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant
manufacturer, based on preconstructlon joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior
experience. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or
migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with
adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such
contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape
immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
D. Sealant Installation: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
E. Acoustical Sealant Installation: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for use of
joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and
conditions Indicated.
F. Install sealant backings to support sealants during application and at position required
to produce optimum sealant movement capability.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
07920 - 5
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
07920 - 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07920 - JOINT SEALANTS
1 . Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant
application and replace them with dry materials.
G. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used
between sealants and back of joints.
H. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
1. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration.
2. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths that allow optimum sealant
movement capability.
I. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning
or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads, to eliminate air pockets,
and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Joint Configurationl Concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193,
unless otherwise indicated.
J. Clean excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as installation progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint
sealants and of products In which joints occur.
END OF SECTION 07920
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes steel (doors) (and) (frames).
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated. Include door designation, type, level and
model, material description, label compliance, fire-resistance ratings, and finishes.
B. Door Schedule. Use same reference designations Indicated on Drawings.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with ANSI A 250.8, unless more stringent
requirements are Indicated.
B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and
labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to
NFPA 252.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated Into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Amweld Building Products, Inc.
2. Ceco Door Products; a United Dominion Company.
3. Curries Company.
4. Kewanee Corporation (The).
5. Republic Builders Products.
6. Steelcraft; a division of Ingersoll-Rand.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheetsl ASTM A 569/A 569M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of
scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
08110-1
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
08110-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheetsl ASTM A 3661 A 366M, Commercial Steel (CS), or
ASTM A 6201 A 620M, Drawing Steel (DS), Type B; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheets: ASTM A 6531 A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with
an A40 (ZFl20) zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating; stretcher-leveled standard of
flatness.
D. Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591 IA 591 M, Commercial Steel (CS),
Class B coating; mill phosphatized; suitable for unexposed applications; stretcher-
leveled standard of flatness where used for face sheets.
2.3 DOORS
A. Exterior Doors: Complying with ANSI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for
physical-endurance level indicated.
1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B, Model (1 (Full Flush)).
2. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A, Model (1 (Full Flush)).
2.4 FRAMES
A. General: ANSI A250.8; conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Frame Steel Sheet Thickness:
1. 0.042-inch- (l.D-mm-) for (level 1 steel doors) (wood doors).
2. O.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) for (openings wider than 48 inches (1220 mm)) (level 1 steel
doors) (level 2 steel doors) and (wood doors) (, unless otherwise indicated)
(where indicated) .
3. 0.067-inch- (1.7-mm-) for (level 3 steel doors).
C. Door Sllencersl Three silencers on single-door frames and two silencers on double-door
frames.
D. Plaster Guards: O.Ol6-inch- (0.4-mm-) thick. steel sheet plaster guards or mortar boxes
to close off interior of openings.
E. Supports and Anchors: Not less than 0.042-inch- (l.D-mm-) thick zinc-coated steel
sheet.
1. Masonry Wall Anchors: O.l77-inch- (4.5-mm-) diameter. steel wire complying with
ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 51OM) may be used in place of steel sheet.
F. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Zinc-coat items that are to
be built into exterior walls according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or D as applicable.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate steel door and frame units to comply with ANSI A250.8 free from
defects including warp and buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in
manufacturer's plant.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
B. Exterior Doors: Fabricate doors, panels, and frames from metallic-coated steel sheet.
Close top and bottom edges of doors flush as an Integral part of door construction or
by addition of O.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick metallic-coated steel channels with channel
webs placed even with top and bottom edges.
C. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard core construction that produces a door
complying with SDI standards.
D. Clearances for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Not more than 118 Inch (3.2 mm) at jambs and
heads, except not more than 114 inch (6.4 mm) between pairs of doors. Not more than
3/4 inch (19 mm) at bottom.
E. Clearances for Fire-Rated Doors: As required by NFPA 80.
F. Door-Edge Profile: (Beveled edge).
G. Tolerances: Comply with SD1117.
H. Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to
final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply
with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSI A 115 Series specifications for
door and frame preparation for hardware.
I. Frame Construction:
1 . Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners and
seamless face joints. Provide temporary spreader bars.
2. Provide terminated stops( where Indicated).
J. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping
for surface-applled hardware may be done at Project site.
K. Locate hardware as indicated or, if not indicated, according to ANSI A250.8.
L. Glazing Stops: Manufacturer's standard, formed from O.032-inch- (O.8-mm-) thick steel
sheet.
1 . Provide nonremovable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of
interior doors for glass, louvers, and other panels in doors.
2. Provide screw-applied, glazing stops on Inside of glass, louvers, and other panels
in doors.
M. Astragals: As required by NFPA 80 to provide fire ratings Indicated.
2.6 FINISHES
A. Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied coat of rust-Inhibiting primer
complying with ANSI A250.1 0 for acceptance criteria.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
08110-3
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
08110-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions in SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set
frames accurately In position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and
spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
1. Wall Anchors: Provide at least three anchors per jamb. For openings 90 inches
(2286 mm) or more in height, install an additional anchor at hinge and strike
jambs.
2. Gypsum Board Partitions: For in-place partitions, install knock-down, drywall slip-
on frames.
3. Fire-Rated Frames: Install according to NFPA 80.
B. Door Installation: Comply with ANSI A250.8. Shim as necessary to comply with SDI 122
and ANSIIDHI Al15.1G.
1. Fire-Rated Doors: Install within clearances specified in NFPA 80.
2. Smoke Control Doors: Install to comply with NFPA 105.
C. After installation, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames and touch up
prime coat with compatible air-drying primer.
END OF SECTION 08110
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
.
=
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes (solid-) core doors as follows:
1. Doors with wood-veneer faces(and factory finishing).
B. See Division 6 Section "(Finish Carpentry) (Interior Architectural Woodwork)" for wood
door frames.
C. See Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door. ( Include factory-finishing specifications.)
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind
of door; construction details; location and extent of hardware blocking; (fire ratings;)
and other pertinent data.
C. Samplesl For each face material and finish.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality Standard: Comply with (NWWDA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors.'')
B. Fire-Rated Wood Doorsl Doors that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated.
1. Test Pressurel (Test at atmospheric pressure).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated Into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Algoma Hardwoods Inc.
2. Buell Door Company.
3. Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division.
4. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
08211 - 1
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5. VT Industries Inc.
6. Weyerhaeuser Company.
2.2
DOOR CONSTRUCTION
A.
Doors for Transparent Finish:
1. Gradel (Premium, with Grade A faces).
2. Species and Cut: (White birch, rotary cut).
3. Match between Veneer Leaves: (Book) match.
4. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: (Running) match.
5. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in some opening or separated only
by mullions.
B.
Interior Veneer-Faced Solid-Core Doors:
1 . Corel (Particleboard) (Glued block) (structural composite lumber) (Either glued
block or structural composite lumber) (Either glued or non glued block or
structural composite lumber).
2. Construction! (Five or seven) plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire
unit abrasive planed before veneering.
3. Construction! Seven plies, either bonded or nonbonded construction.
C.
Fire-Rated Doors:
1 . Constructionl Construction and core specified above for type of face indicated
or manufacturer's standard mineral-core construction as needed to provide fire
rating indicated.
2. Edge Constructionl Manufacturer's standard laminated-edge construction with
improved screw-holding capability and split resistance.
3. Edge Constructlonl Intumescent seals concealed by outer stile matching face
veneer, and laminated backing for improved screw-holding capability and split
resistance.
4. Pairs: Provide fire-rated pairs with fire-retardant stiles matching face veneer that
are labeled and listed for kinds of applications indicated without formed-steel
edges and astragals.
2.3
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate doors In sizes indicated for Project-site fitting.
B.
Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance
requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply with requirements in
NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
C.
Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.
1. Metal Astragals: Premachine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for
pairs of fire-rated doors.
D.
Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable
requirements of referenced standards for klnd(s) of door(s) required.
I
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
08211 - 2
-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS .
1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
2. Louvers: Factory Install louvers In prepared openings.
FACTORY FINISHING
General: Finish doors at factory.
Gradel (Premium).
Finish: NWWDA I.S.1-A System (TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane).
Finish: AWl System (TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane).
Staining: (As selected from manufacturer's full range).
Sheen: (Satin).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written Instructions, referenced quality
standard, and as indicated.
1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
B. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels; do
not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated
doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.
1. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required
at Project site.
END OF SECTION 08211
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
08211 - 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08550 - WOOD WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following (aluminum-clad) wood-framed window product
typesl
1. Awning.
2. Fixed windows.
B. See Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing requirements for wood windows, Including
those specified to be factory glazed.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide wood windows capable of complying with performance
requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are
representative of those specified and that are of minimum test size required by
AAMA/NWWDA 101 II.S.2.
B. AAMA/NWWDA Performance Requirementsl Provide wood windows of the
performance class and grade Indicated that comply with AAMA/NWWDA 101 II.S.2.
1. Performance Class: (R) (LC) (C) (HC).
2. Performance Grade: <Insert number.>
3. Exception to AAMA/NWWDA 101/1.5.2: In addition to requirements for
performance class and performance grade, design glass framing system to limit
lateral deflections of glass edges to less than 1/175 of glass-edge length( or 3/4
inch (19 mm), whichever is less,) at design pressure based on testing performed
according fo AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2, Uniform Load Deflection Test or structural
computations.
C. Thermal Transmittance: Provide wood windows with a whole-window U-value
maximum of <Insert value> at 15-mph (24-km/h) exterior wind velocity and winter
condition temperatures when tested according to (AAMA 1503) (ASTM E 1423)
(NFRC 100).
D. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient: Provide wood windows with a whole-window SHGC
maximum of <Insert value>, determined according to NFRC 200 procedures.
E. Specific Product Performance Requirementsl Comply with Section 2.2 of
AAMA/NWWDA 101 II.S.2 as applicable to types of wood windows indicated.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of wood window indicated.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
08550 - 1
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
08550 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08550 - WOOD WINDOWS
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to
other Work, and operational clearances.
1. Include structural analysis data indicating deflection limitations of glass framing
systems, signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for
their preparation.
C. Samplesl For each exposed finish.
D. Product test reports.
E. Maintenance data.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to Install manufacturer's
products.
B. Fenestration Standard: Comply with AAMAINWWDA 101 II.S.2, "Voluntary Specifications
for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors," for minimum standards
of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more
stringent requirements are Indicated.
C. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers
and GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form In which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace wood windows that fail in materials and workmanship within (two)
years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Warranty Period for Metal Finishes: (Ten) years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Warranty Period for Glass: (20) years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated Into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Eagle Window & Door, Inc.; an American Architectural Products Corporation
Company.
2. Marvin Windows and Doors.
3. Vetter; a division of SNE Enterprises, Inc.; a Nortek Company.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
I
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08550 - WOOD WINDOWS
4. Weather Shield Mfg., Inc.
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Aluminum Extrusions and Rolled Aluminum for Cladding, Baked-Enamel Finish:
Manufacturer's standard baked enamel complying with AAMA 2603.
1. Color: (Color as selected from manufacturer's standard color range).
2. Color( and Gloss): (Match sample) (As selected from manufacturer's full range)
<Insert color (and gloss)>.
GLAZING
A.
Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass units and
glazing requirements applicable to glazed wood window units.
B.
Glass: (Clear, Insulating-glass with low-e coating.) (Clear, insulating-glass with low-e
coating or film, argon-gas filled) units complying with Division 8 Section "Glazing."
C.
Glazing System I (Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces
weathertight sea!.).
INSECT SCREENS
A.
Aluminum Insect Screen Frames: Manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy complying
with SMA 1004. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped joints, concealed fasteners,
and removable PVC splinelanchor concealing edge of frame.
1. Aluminum Tubular Framing Sections and Cross Braces: Roll formed from aluminum
sheet with minimum wall thickness as required for class indicated.
2. Finish: (Baked-on organic coating) in manufacturer's standard color.
B.
Glass-Fiber Mesh Fabric: (18-by-14 (1.1-by-1.4-mm) or 18-by-16 (l.O-by-l.l-mm)) (20-
by-20 (O.85-by-O.85-mm) or 2Q-by-30 (O.85-by-O.42-mm)) mesh of PVC-coated, glass-
fiber threads; woven and fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to corrosion, shrinkage,
stretch, impact damage, and weather deterioration In the following color. Comply
with ASTM D 3656.
1. Mesh Color: (Charcoal gray) (Silver gray).
C.
Aluminum Wire Fabric: 18-by-16 (1.1-by-1.3-mm) mesh of O.Oll-inch- (O.28-mm-)
diameter, coated aluminum wire.
1. Wire-Fabric Finish: (Natural bright) (Charcoal gray) (Black).
FABRICATION
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
08550 - 3
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
08550 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08550 - WOOD WINDOWS
A. General: Fabricate wood windows, In sizes Indicated, that comply with
AAMA/NWWDA 101 11.S.2 for performance class and performance grade indicated.
Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows.
B. Fabricate wood windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator
framing.
C. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and
ventilator, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Factory machine windows for openings and hardware that Is not surface applied.
E. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units,
complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow
for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal
expansion and building deflections, as indicated. Provide mullions and cover plates
capable of withstanding design loads of window units.
F. Glazing Stops: Provide nailed or snap-on glazing stops coordinated with Division 8
Section "Glazing" and glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match sash
and ventilator frames.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal
movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to
wall flashing and other adjacent construction.
B. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as Indicated, for weathertight
construction.
C. Metal Protection: Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of
corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials by complying
with requirements specified in "Dissimilar Materials" Paragraph in Appendix B in
AAMA/NWWDA 101 11.S.2.
D. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight
fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight
closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts.
E. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from
construction operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below
exterior concrete and masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum,
alkaline deposits, stains, or other contaminants.. If contaminating substances do
contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to
manufacturer's written recommendations.
F. Clean exposed surfaces Immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging
protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and
other substances.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08550 - WOOD WINDOWS
G. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after Installing windows. Comply with
manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove
nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
H. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or
damaged during construction period.
END OF SECTION 08550
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
08550 - 5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
-
~
.
.
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08710 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes the following:
1. Commercial door hardware.
2. Cylinders for doors specified In other Sections.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product Indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include details of electrified door hardware and wiring diagrams.
C. Samplesl For each exposed finish.
D. Door Hardware Schedule: Organized into door hardware sets indicating type, style,
function, size, label, hand, manufacturer, fasteners, location, and finish of each door
hardware Item. Include description of each electrified door hardware function,
including sequence of operation.
E. Keying Schedulel Detail Owner's final keying instructions for locks.
F. Product certificates.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Supplier Qualiflcationsl Person who is or employs a qualified DHI Architectural
Hardware Consultant.
B. Keys: Deliver keys to (Owner by registered mail).
C. Templates: Obtain and distribute templates for doors, frames, and other work specified
to be factory prepared for Installing door hardware.
D. Certified Products: Provide door hardware that is listed In BHMA directory of certified
products.
1 .4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form In which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship
within warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Manual Closers: (10) years from date of Substantial
Completion.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
08710 - 1
McBEAN COMMUNllY CENTER
08710 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08710 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product named for
each door hardware item indicated in Door Hardware Sets.
B. Basis-of-Design Product! Product named for each door hardware item indicated in
Door Hardware Sets establishes the basis of design. Provide either the named product
or a comparable product by one of the manufacturers specified for each type of
hardware Item.
2.2 DOOR HARDWARE
A. Scheduled Door Hardware: Provide door hardware according to (door hardware sets
Indicated in door and frame schedule). Manufacturers' names are abbreviated.
2.3 PIVOTS AND HINGES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Hinges:
a. Bommer Industries, Inc. (BI).
b. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. (CRP).
c. McKinney Products Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (MCK).
d. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH).
e. <Insert manufacturer.>
B. General: Except for hinges and pivots to be Installed entirely (both leaves) into wood
doors and frames, provide only template-produced units.
C. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that prevents removal of pin
while door is closed; for (outswlnging exterior doors).
D. Screws: Phillips flat-head screws; screw heads finished to match surface of hinges.
1. Metal Doors and Frames: Machine screws (drilled and tapped holes).
2. Wood Doors and Frames: Wood screws.
3. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Threaded-to-the-head wood screws.
2.4 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Corbin Russwln Architectural Hardware; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (CR).
2. NT Falcon Lock Co.; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (NTF).
3. Yale Security Inc.; Div. of Williams Holdings ('{ AL).
B. Bored Lockset Design: (As scheduled).
C. Lock Throw: Comply with labeled fire door requirements.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.5
2.6
2.7
-
-
.
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08710 - DOOR HARDWARE
D.
Exit Locks: Surface-mounted deadbolts or latch bolts; with battery-powered alarm that
sounds when unauthorized use of door occurs. Provide red and white pressure-sensitive
lettering reading "PUSH TO OPEN--ALARM WILL SOUND."
EXIT DEVICES
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Corbin Russwln Architectural Hardware; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (CR).
2. NT Monarch Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (NTM).
3. Securltron Magnalock Corp. (SMC).
4. Von Duprin; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (VD).
5. Yale Security Inc.; Div. of Williams Holdings (Y AL).
6. <Insert manufacturer.>
B.
Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled for panic protection, based on testing
according to UL 305.
C.
Fire Exit Devices: Complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled for fire and panic
protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252.
1. Through Bolts: For exit devices and trim on (metal doors), (non-fire-rated wood
doors) and (fire-rated wood doors).
OPERATING TRIM
A.
Push-Pull Design:
1 . Manufacturers:
a. Ives, H. B. (IVS).
b. NT Quality Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (NTQ).
c. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM).
d. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH).
e. <Insert manufacturer.>
ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS
A.
Removable Mullions: BHMA A 156.3.
1. Manufacturers:
a. NT Monarch Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (NTM).
b. Von Duprin; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (VD).
c. Yale Security Inc.; Div. of Williams Holdings (Y AL).
2. Fire-Exit Removable Mullions: Complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled
for fire and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and
NFPA 252. Mullions shall be used only with exit devices for which they have been
tested.
2.8 CLOSERS
A. Surface-Mounted Closers:
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
08710 - 3
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
08710-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08710 - DOOR HARDWARE
1. Manufacturers:
a. Corbin Russwln Architectural Hardware; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (CR).
b. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LCN).
c. Yale Security Inc.; Div. of Williams Holdings (j AL).
B. Size of Units: Factory-sized, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for
opening force.
2.9 STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Stops and Holders) Provide floor stops for doors, unless wall or other type stops are
scheduled or indicated. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic.
Where floor or wall stops are not appropriate, provide overhead holders.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Hager Companies (HAG).
b. Ives, H. B. (IVS).
c. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM).
B. Silencers for Door Frames: Neoprene or rubber; fabricated for drilled-in application to
frame.
2.10 DOOR GASKETING AND THRESHOLDS
A. Door Gasketing: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketlng on exterior doors and
provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or
scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as
indicated.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Gasketlngl
1) Hager Companies (HAG).
2) National Guard Products, Inc. (NGP).
3) Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. (PEM).
4) Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE).
5) Zero International. Inc. (ZRO).
b. Door Bottoms:
1) Hager Companies (HAG).
2) National Guard Products, Inc. (NGP).
3) Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. (PEM).
4) Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE).
5) Zero International. Inc. (ZRO).
2. Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot (0.000774 cu. m/s per m) of crack
length for gasketing other than for smoke control. as tested according to
ASTM E 283.
3. Fire-Labeled Gasketlng: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and
labeled, based on testing according to UL lOB or NFPA 252.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.11
A.
.
.
-
2.12
.
.
=
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08710 - DOOR HARDWARE
4, Gasketing Materials: Comply with ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 7011702,
B.
Thresholdsl Of type scheduled or indicated,
1 . Manufacturers:
a. Hager Companies (HAG).
b. National Guard Products, Inc. (NGP),
c. Pemko Manufacturing Co" Inc. (PEM),
d. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE).
e. Zero International, Inc. (ZRO) ,
CYLINDERS, KEYING, AND STRIKES
Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver,
1. Manufacturers:
a. Same manufacturer as for locks and latches.
b. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for Installation.
B.
Keying System: Factory-registered keying system; (master) key system.
1. Keys: Provide nickel-sliver keys permanently inscribed with a visual key control
number and "DO NOT DUPLICATE" notation. In addition to one extra blank key for
each lock provide three change keys and five (master) keys.
C.
Key Control System: Include key-holding hooks, labels, key tags with self-locking key
holders, envelopes, and markers. Contain system in (multiple-drawer) (wall-mounted)
(portable) type metal cabinet with baked-enamel finish. Include cross-index system set
up by key control manufacturer, with (card index) (computer software).
1, Manufacturers:
a, Key Control Systems, Inc, (KCS),
b, Major Metalfab Co. (MM),
c. Sunroc Corporation (SUN).
D.
Strikes: Manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with
curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set.
FABRICATION
A.
Base Metals: Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door
hardware units and BHMA A 156.18 for finishes. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard
materials if different from specified standard.
B.
Fasteners: Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door
hardware, unless otherwise Indicated. Provide steel machine or wood screws or steel
through bolts for fire-rated applications.
C. Spacers or Sex Boltsl For through bolting of hollow metal doors.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
08710 - 5
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
08710 - 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08710 - DOOR HARDWARE
D. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements of DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended
Fasteners for Wood Doors."
E. Finishes: Comply with BHMA A 156.18.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Examine doors and frames for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances,
labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other
conditions affecting performance. Examine roughing-In for electrical power systems to
verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware
installation.
B. Steel Door and Frame Preparation: Comply with DHI A 115 series. Drill and tap doors
and frames for surface-applied hardware according to SDI 107.
C. Wood Door Preparation: Comply with DHI A 115-W series.
D. Mounting Heights: Comply with the following requirements, unless otherwise indicated:
1, Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHl's "Recommended Locations for
Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames,"
2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: DHl's "Recommended Locations for Builders'
Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames."
3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware
for Wood Flush Doors."
E. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper Installation and
operation. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage
fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
1. Thresholds! Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of sealant complying with
requirements speCified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
F. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and
ventilating equipment and to comply with accessibility requirements.
1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period so that from an open position of 70 deg rees,
the door will take at least three seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm)
from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspections! Owner will engage a qualified independent Architectural Hardware
Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare Inspection reports.
3,3 DOOR HARDWARE SETS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08710 - DOOR HARDWARE
Door Hardware Set NO.1:
Pro Drs. NO.1 00, 101, 110, 11OA. Each pair to Receive:
6 Each Butts #BB 1279-4.5 x 4.5 USP x NRP
2 Each Exit Device # 18-R-P x US32D
1 Each Mullion #4023 x 7'
2 Each Rim Cylinder #951 x US26D
2 Each Closer #3501 x SB x TB
2 Each Klckplate 8 x 34 US32D
2 Each Door Stop #462 x zinc
1 Each Threshold #171A 72"
2 Each Set Weatherstripping #303A V 3684
2 Each Sweep #315CN 36"
Door Hardware Set NO.2:
Hager
Mon
Mon
Falcon
Yale
Rkwood
Rkwood
Pemko
Pemko
Pemko
Pro Drs. NO.1 OOA 101 A. Each pair to receive:
6 Each Butts #BB 1279-4.5 x 4.5 US26D
1 Each Deadbolt #D841 x 626 x 2 % B.S.
2 Each Flush Bolt #555 x 12" x US26D
2 Each Closer #3501 BF x SB x TB
2 Each Push Plate #70 - 4 x 16 US32D
2 Each Klckplate 8 x 34 US32D
2 Each Pull Plate #BF123 x 70 (4 x 16) US32D
2 Each Door Stop #409 I 441 as required with US26D
2 Each Silencer #608
Door Hardware Set NO.3:
Hager
Falcon
Rkwood
Yale
Rkwood
Rkwood
Rkwood
Rkwood
Rkwood
Pro Drs. No. 102, 103, 105, 106, 107, 108, 109, 113, 114, 115, 116, 117
Each pair to receive I
3 Each Butts #1279 - 4.5 x 4.5 US26D
1 Each Lockset #B511 D x 626 x 2 %" B.S. x ASA Stk.
1 Each Door Stop #409 I 441 as required US26D
3 Each Silencer #608
Door Hardware Set NO.4:
Hager
Falcon
Rkwood
Rkwood
Pro Drs. No. 104. Each pair to receive:
6 Each Butts #BB1279 - 4.5 x 4.5 US26SD
1 Each Lockset #B511 D x 626 x 2 %" B.S. x ASA Stk.
2 Each Flush Bolt #555 x 12" x US26D
2 Each Closer #3501 x SB x TB
2 Each Door Stop #409 I 441 as required US26D
2 Each Silencer #608
Door Hardware Set NO.5:
Hager
Falcon
Rkwood
Yale
Rkwood
Rkwood
Sgl. Drs. 112, 199. Each door to receive:
3 Each Butts #BB 1279 - 4.5 x 4.5 US26D
1 Each Closer #3501 BF x SB x TB
1 Each Push Plate #70 - 4 x 16 US32D
1 Each Kickplate 8 x 34 US32D
1 Each Pull Plate #BF123 x 70 (4 x 16) US32D
1 Each Door Stop #409 I 441 as required US26D
3 Each Silencer #608
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
Hager
Yale
Rkwood
Rkwood
Rkwood
Rkwood
Rkwood
08710-7
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
08710 - 8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08710 - DOOR HARDWARE
Door Hardware Set No.6:
Sgl. Drs. No. 118. Each door to receive:
3 Each Butts #BB1279 - 4.5 x 4.5 US26D
1 Each Lockset #B581 D x 626 x 2 %"B.S. x ASA Stk.
1 Each Closer #3501 x SB x TB
1 Each Kickplate 8 x 34 US32D
1 Each Door Stop #409 I 441 as required US26D
3 Each Silencer #608
Hager
Falcon
Yale
Rkwood
Rkwood
Rkwood
Equivalent Manufacturersl
Locks:
Hager Stanley Bommer
1279 F179 5000
BB1279 FBB179 BB5000
Falcon Yale Corbln-Russwln
B Series AU5300L CL3900
Yale LCN Corbin-Russwin
3501 1461 DC221 0
Monarch Yale Von Duprin
18 Series 7000 Series 99 Series
Hinges:
Closers:
Exit Device:
END OF SECTION 08710
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08800 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes glazing for the following products and applications:
1 . Windows.
2. Doors.
3. Interior borrowed lites.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.4
A.
A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement
and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, Including loss or glass
breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and
installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration
of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material Indicated.
Samples: 12-lnch- (30(}.mm-) square, for each type of glass product indicated, other
than monolithic clear float glass.
Glazing Schedule: Use same designations Indicated on Drawings.
Sealant compatibility and adhesion test reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Use sealant manufacturer's standard test
methods to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques
are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.
B. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Where glazing products are used in fire-rated assemblies,
comply with requirements of speCific assembly specified in other sections of these
Specifications.
1. Door Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire
ratings Indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.
2. Window Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
testing and Inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for
fire ratings Indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257.
C. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201
and ANSI Z97.1 .
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
08800 - 1
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
08800 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08800 - GLAZING
1 .5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by
manufacturer, In which manufacturer agrees to furnish replacements for units that
deteriorate from normal use by developing defects attributable to the manufacturing
process, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within warranty period.
1. Coated Glass!
a. Defects: Peeling, cracking, and other indications of deg radation of
metallic coating.
b. Warranty Period: (10) years from date of Substantial Completion.
2. Laminated Glass:
a. Deterioration: Edge separation, delamination that materially obstructs
vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced
laminated-glass standard.
b. Warranty Period: (Five) years from date of Substantial Completion.
3. Insulating Glass:
a. Deterioration: Failure of hermetic seal resulting in obstruction of vision by
dust, moisture, or film on Interior surfaces of glass.
b. Warranty Period: (10) years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other articles including schedules where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the
following requirements apply for product selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may
be incorporated into the Work Include, but are not limited to, the products
specified.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
3. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
specified.
4. Available Manufacturers! Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be Incorporated Into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified.
5. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
the manufacturers specified.
2.2 GLASS MATERIALS
A. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing
select); class as indicated In schedules at the end of Part 3.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.3
.
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08800 - GLAZING
B.
Polished Wired Glassl ASTM C 1036, Type II (patterned and wired glass, flat), Class 1
(clear), Quality q8 (glazing); Form 1 (wired, polished both sldes)(Mesh m2 (square)), 6.4
mm thick.
C.
Laminated Glass: Comply with ASTM C 1172 for kinds of laminated glass indicated and
other requirements specified, Including those in the Laminated-Glass Schedule at the
end of Part 3.
1. Interlayer: (Polyvinyl butyral sheet), clear or In colors, and of thickness Indicated
with a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and
mechanical properties after laminating glass lites and installation.
GLAZING SEALANTS
A.
General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following
requirements:
1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and
with other materials they will contact, Including glass products, seals of insulatlng-
glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and
field experience.
2. Colors of Exposed Sealants: (As selected).
B.
Elastomeric Glazing Sealantsl ASTM C 920, Type S (single component), Grade NS
(nonsag). Class 25, Use NT (nontraffic), M, G, A, and, as applicable to glazing substrates
. indicated, O.
1 . Glazing Sealant for Fire~Resistive Glazing Products! Sealant used In test assembly
to obtain fire-protection rating.
2. Low-Modulus Nonacid-Curing Silicone: With additional movement capability of
(50) percent movement In extension and 50 percent movement in compression
when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per
ASTM C 719.
a. Products:
1) Dow Corning; 790.
2) GE Silicones; (Silpruf).
3) Pecora Corporation; 864.
4) Sonneborn, Div of ChemRex, Inc.; Omniseal.
5) Tremco; Spectrem 1.
3. Medium-Modulus Neutral-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant:
a. (Available) Products:
1) Dow Corning: (795).
2) NUCO Industries, Inc.; HiFlex 393.
3) Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI-631.
4) Tremco; (Spectrem 2).
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
08800 - 3
-
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
08800 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08800 - GLAZING
4. Medium-Modulus Neutral-Curing Silicone: With additional movement capability
of 50 percent movement in extension and 50 percent movement in compression
when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per
ASTM C 719.
a. (Available) Products:
1) Dow Corning; 756 H.P.
2) GE Silicones; Silglaze II.
3) Pecora Corporation; 895.
C. Cylindrical Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type 0 (open-cell material), of size and density to
control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant
performance.
D. Glazing Sealant for Fire-Resistive Glazing Products: Identical to product used in test
assembly to obtain fire-protection rating.
2.4 GLAZING TAPES
A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapel Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a
solids content of 100 percent with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by
tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated and complying with
ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products Indicated below:
1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where Indicated.
2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous
pressure.
3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications In which tape is not subject to
continuous pressure.
B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape: Closed-cell, PVC foam tape; factory coated with
adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive;
and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:
1. Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.
2. Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full
bead of liquid sealant.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced
glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for
application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces
contacted in installation.
B.
Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers:
manufacturer.
Types recommended by sealant or gasket
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or
minus 5.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08800 - GLAZING
D. Spacers! Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer
hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation
indicated.
E. Edge Blocksl Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement
(side walking).
F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type 0 (open-cell material), of size
and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing
sealant performance.
G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Identical to product used in test assembly
to obtain fire-resistance rating.
2.6 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS
A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated
for Project with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite
complying with written Instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing
standard, to comply with system performance requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets,
and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are Indicated, Including
those in referenced glazing publications.
1. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately
before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
2. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and Installation. Remove glass
with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken
glass and impair performance and appearance from Project site and legally
dispose of off Project site.
3. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as
determined by sealant compatibility and adhesion testing.
4. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for Installing
glass lites.
5. Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches
(1270 mm) unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated
ability to maintain required face clearances.
B. Protection:
1. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching
crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass
surface.
2. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from
construction operations, including weld splatter.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
08800 - 5
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
08800 - 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08800 - GLAZING
C. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged,
including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
END OF SECTION 08800
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
I
-
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior gypsum wallboard.
2. Non-load-bearing steel framing.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product Indicated.
B. Samplesl For each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristlcsl For gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance
ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested In assembly
indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and Inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings,
provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated
according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified
independent testing agency.
1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at
time of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may
be incorporated into the Work Include, but are not limited to, the products
specified.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
specified.
2.
3.
2.2 PANEL PRODUCTS
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09260 - 1
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09260 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. Panel Size, General: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize
joints in each area and correspond with support system Indicated.
B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36.
1. Regular Type: In thickness indicated and with long edges (tapered).
2. Type XI In thickness indicated and with long edges (tapered).
C. Tile Backing Panelsl
1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630/C 630M, with core type and
in thickness Indicated.
2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES
. A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Comerbead: Use at outside corners(. unless otherwise indicated).
2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
3. L-Bead: (Use where indicated).
4. Expansion (Control) Joint: (Use where indicated).
2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475.
B. Joint Tapel
1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that Is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Prefllllng: At open jolnts(, rounded or beveled panel edges,) and damaged
surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, flanges
of trim accessories, and fasteners, use (setting-type taping compound).
a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim
accessories.
3. Fill Coati For second coat use (setting-type, sandable topping compound).
4. Finish Coat: For third coat use (setting-type, sandable topping compound).
5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level5 finish, use (drying-type, all-purpose
compound).
D. Joint Compound for Water-Resistant Panels:
1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping and settlng-
type, sandable topping compounds.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards
and manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members
from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.
2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size
recommended by panel manufacturer.
C. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls:
1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt),
non perforated .
2. Foam Gasket! Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam 'strips that allow fastener
penetration without foam displacement 118 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit
steel stud size.
D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from
glass, slag wool, or rock wool.
1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of
assembly.
2.6 PANEL PRODUCT INSTALLATION
A. Gypsum Board: Comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216.
1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches (304.8 mm) O.C. for vertical applications.
2. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches (203.2
mm) O.C.
3. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before walllpartition board application to the
greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise
indicated.
4. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels (horizontally (perpendicular to
framing)), unless otherwise Indicated or required by flre-resistance-rated
assembly, and minimize end joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate
courses of board.
b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-reslstance-rated assembly.
5. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill
screws.
6. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers (and face layers separately to
supports with screws).
2.7 FINISHING
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09260 - 3
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09260 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. Installing Trim Accessories: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to
framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Finishing Gypsum Board Panels: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim,
control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required
to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration.
1. Preflll open jolnts(, rounded or beveled edges,) and damaged surface areas.
2. Apply Joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges
not intended for tape.
3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written
instructions for use as exposed soffit board.
4. Glass-Mat Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
C. Cementitious Backer Unitsl Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to
ASTM C 840, for locations indicated:
1 . Levell: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and
where indicated.
2. Level 2: Embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape,
fasteners, and trim flanges where (panels are substrate for tile and where
indicated) (panels are substrate for acoustical tile) Ondicated) <Insert locations>.
3. Level 3: Embed tape and apply separate first and fill coats of joint compound to
tape, fasteners, and trim flanges (where Indicated).
END OF SECTION 09260
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
iii
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09310 - CERAMIC TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes the following:
1. Quarry tile. .
2. Stone thresholds installed as part of tile installations.
3. Crack-suppression membrane for thin-set tile installations.
4. Metal edge strips Installed as part of tile installations.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product Indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths,
details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints.
C. Samples!
1. Each type, composition, color, and finish of tile.
2. Assembled samples with grouted joints for each type, composition, color, and
finish of tile.
3. Stone thresholds In 6-inch (lSD-mm) lengths.
1.3 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products Installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and Identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Tile and Trim Unitsl (Fumish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount
Installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size Indicated.)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply for product selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may
be incorporated into the Work Include, but are not limited to, the products
specified.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09310 - 1
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09310 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09310- CERAMIC TILE
3. Available Manufacturersl Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be Incorporated Into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified.
4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the manufacturers specified.
5. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each tile type is based on the product
named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named
product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.
2.2 TILE PRODUCTS
A. (Available ) Manufacturers:
1. American Olean; Div. of Dal-Tile International Corp.
2. Daltlle; Div. of Dal-Tlle International Inc.
3. Summitvllle Tiles, Inc.
B. Unglazed Quarry Tile (CT-1)1 Square-edged flat tile as follows:
1. Wearing Surface: (Nonabrasive, smooth).
2. Facial Dimensions: (6 by 6 inches (152 by 152 mm)).
3. Thickness: (1/2 inch (12.7 mm)).
C. Quarry Tile Trim Units: Matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile and coordinated
with sizes and coursing where applicable.
1. Base: Coved( with surface bullnose top edge), facial dimensions 6 by 6 inches.
2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Thresholds: Fabricate to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. Bevel
edges at 1:2 slope, limit height of bevel to 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) or less, and finish bevel to
match face of threshold.
1. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503 with a minimum abrasion resistance of (10) per
ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241 and with honed finish.
a. Description: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained white stone with gray
veining.
2.4 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS
A. (Available ) Manufacturers:
1. BonsaI, W. R., Company.
2. DAP, Inc.
3. LATICRETE International Inc.
4. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.
5. Summitvllle Tiles, Inc.
B. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A 118.1.
1. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09310 - CERAMIC TILE
C. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A 118.4,
1. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix containing dry additive to which only water must be
added.
2. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix combined with liquid-latex additive.
3. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar.
D. Chemical-Resistant, Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy: ANSI A 118,3.
E, Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A 118,3.
F. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A 136.1, Type I.
G. Standard Sanded Cement Grout: ANSI A 118.6, color as Indicated.
H. Standard Unsanded Cement Grout: ANSI A 118.6, color as indicated,
I. Polymer-Modlfied,Tile Grout: ANSI A 118.7, color as indicated.
1. Polymer Typel Dry, redisperslble form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients.
2. Polymer Type! Uquid-Iatex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Elastomeric Sealants: Elastomerlc sealants of base polymer and characteristics
indicated that comply with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
1. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25;
Uses NT. G, A and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, 0;
formulated with fungicide, Intended for In-service exposures of high humidity and
extreme temperatures.
a. (Available ) Products:
1) Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786.
2) GE Silicones; Sanitary 1 700.
3) Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant,
4) Tremco, Inc.; Tremsil 600 White.
B. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland
cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting
. materials.
C. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard ( silicone) product for sealing grout joints that
does not change color or appearance of grout.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09310 - 3
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
093 10 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09310 - CERAMIC TILE
A. Remove coatings, Including curing compounds and other substances that contain
soap, wax, 011, or silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials.
B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound
according to tile-setting material manufacturer's written Instructions.
C. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.
D. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at
Project site before Installing.
E. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or
needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat
them with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat
unexposed tile surfaces.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A 108 Series "Specifications for
Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to
methods Indicated In ceramic tile installation schedules.
B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with
TCA installation methods Indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form
complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise Indicated. Terminate work
neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cuffing and drilling of tile without
marring visible surfaces. Grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items. Fit
tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetratlons so plates, collars,
or covers overlap tile.
E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when
adjoining tiles on floor. base, walls, and trim are same size. Layout tile work and center
tile fields In both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile
cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise Indicated.
F. Layout tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions Indicated.
G. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints during
installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after
installing tiles.
1. Locate Joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7
Section "Joint Sealants."
H. Grout tile to comply with requirements of ANSI A 108.10, unless otherwise indicated.
1. For chemical-resistant epoxy grouts, comply with ANSI A 108.6.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09310 - CERAMIC TILE
I. Install tile on floors with-the following joint widths:
1. Quarry Tile: (1/4 inch (6.35 mm)) (3/8 inch (9.5 mm)).
J. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of
setting bed as abutting field tile, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Set thresholds In latex-portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed
would otherwise be exposed above adjacent nontile floor finish.
K. Apply grout sealer to( cementitlous) grout Joints in tile floors according to grout-sealer
manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints,
remove excess sealer and sealer that has gotten on tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.
L. Interior floor installation on concrete; thin-set mortar; TCA Fl13.
1. Thin-Set Mortar: (Latex-) portland cement mortar.
2. Grout: (Standard sanded cement) grout.
END OF SECTION 09310
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09310 - 5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09512 - ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes acoustical tiles and concealed suspension systems for ceilings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product Indicated.
B. Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and celllng-
mounted items. Show the followlngl
1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.
2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
3. Size and location of Initial access modules for acoustical tile.
4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,
sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
C. Product test reports.
D. Research/evaluation reports.
E. Maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An Independent testing laboratory or an
NVLAP-accredlted laboratory.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide acoustical tile ceilings Identical
to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by U L or another
testing and Inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having Jurisdiction.
Ratings are indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory"
or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency.
a. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and
Inspecting agency.
2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Acoustical tiles complying with ASTM E 1264 for
Class (A) (B) (C) materials, when tested per ASTM E 84.
a. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09512 - 1
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09512 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09512 - ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products Installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and Identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size units equal to (5.0) percent of quantity installed,
but not fewer than <Insert quantity>.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply for product selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may
be incorporated into the Work Include, but are not limited to, the products
specified.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
2.2 GENERAL
A. Acoustical Tile Standard! Comply with ASTM E 1264.
B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635.
C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire; ASTM A 641 I A 641 M
Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.
1. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load
(ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung) will be less than yield stress of wire, but
provide not less than O.l06-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire.
D. Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not Indicated,
manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical tile
edge details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same
material and finish as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners.
2.3 ACOUSTICAL TILES
A. Products:
1. Armstrong; Cortega Lay-In Ceilings.
B. Classification: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form (2, water felted).
1. Pattern: CD
C. Color: (White).
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09512 - ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
D. LR: Not less than 0.80.
E. NRC: Not less than 0,55,Type E-400 mounting per ASTM E 795.
F. CAC: Not less than 35.
G. Edge Detail: Square.
H. Thickness: (5/8 inch (15 mm)) ,
I. Size: 24 by 24 inches,
2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. (Available } Products:
1. Armstrong; Prelude 15/16" Exposed Tee
B. (Dlrect)-Hung Suspension System: (Intennediate) structural classification.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install acoustical tile ceilings to comply with (ASTM C 636) and seismic
requirements Indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling
Systems Handbook."
B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border
widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at
borders.
C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members, plumb and free from
contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers only
where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing,
countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Where width of ducts and other
construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with
location of hangers, use trapezes or equivalent devices.
D. Install edge moldings and trim at perimeter of acoustical tile ceiling area and where
necessary to conceal edges of acoustical units. Screw attach moldings to substrate
with concealed fasteners at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o,c, and not
more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a
tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.66 m). Miter corners accurately and
connect securely.
E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely Interlocked with one
another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
F. Install acoustical tiles In coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings and
trim. Place splines or suspension system flanges into kerfed edges so tile-to-tlle joints are
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09512 - 3
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09512 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09512 - ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
closed by double lap of material. Fit adjoining-tile to form flush, tight joints, Scribe and
cut tile for accurate fit at borders and around penetrations through tile, Hold tile field in
compression by inserting leaf-type, spring-steel spacers between tile and moldings,
spaced 12 inches (305 mm) o.c.
END OF SECTION 09512
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
.
DIVISION 9 FINISHES
09651 - RESILIENT FLOOR TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes the following:
1. Vinyl composition tile (VCT).
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product Indicated.
B. Samplesl Full-size units of each color and pattern of resilient floor tile required.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
(70 deg F (21 deg C)) or more than (95 deg F (35 deg C)) in spaces to receive floor tile
during the following time periods:
1. During installation.
B. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by
manufacturer, but not less than (55 deg F (13 deg C)) or more than (95 deg F (35
deg C)).
C. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation.
D. install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products Installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and Identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Floor Tile: Furnish 1 box for every (50) boxes or fraction thereof, of each type,
color, and pattern of floor tile installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE
A. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT)1 ASTM F 1066.
1 . Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09651 - 1
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09651 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 FINISHES
09651 - RESILIENT FLOOR TILE
2, Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.;
b. Azrock Commercial Flooring, DOMCO;
c. Mannington Mills, Inc.;
d. Tarkett Inc,;
B. Color and Pattern: (As selected from manufacturer's full range).
C. Class: (2 (through-pattern tile)).
D. Wearing Surface: (Smooth).
E. Thickness: (0.125 inch (3.2 mm)) ,
F. Size: 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm).
G, Fire-Test -Response Characteristics:
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W Isq. em per
ASTM E 648.
2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement
based or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by
resilient product manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient
products and substrate conditions indicated.
C, Metal Edge Stripsl Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required
to protect exposed edges of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize
running joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure
adhesion of resilient products.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710,
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and
hardeners.
2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer.
Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
3. Moisture Testing:
a. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with Installation
only after substrates pass testing.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 FINISHES
09651 - RESILIENT FLOOR TILE
C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives
and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended
by manufacturer. Do not use solvents,
D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in
substrates.
E. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be
installed at least 48 hours in advance of Installation.
1 . Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as space where
they are to be installed.
F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately
before Installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts,
carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Layout tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor
offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to
avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
1. Lay tiles (square with room axis).
B. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence
as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped,
or deformed tiles.
1. Lay tiles (with grain direction alternating in adjacent tiles (basket-weave pattern)).
C. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent
fixtures including built-in fumlture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames,
thresholds, and no sings.
D. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future
cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other
nonpermanent nonstaining marking device.
F. Install tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar Items In finished floor
areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of tile Installed on
covers. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover
perimeters.
G, Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to
produce a completed Installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at
joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface Imperfections.
H. Perform the following operations Immediately after completing resilient product
installatiOn!
McBEAN COMMUNIlY CENTER
09651 - 3
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09651 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 FINISHES
09651 - RESILIENT FLOOR TILE
1 . Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
a, Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by
manufacturer.
I. Protect resilient products from mars. marks, indentations, and other damage from
construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of
construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 09651
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09653 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes the following:
1. Wall base.
2. Molding accessories.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Samples; For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples
but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long, of each resilient product color, texture, and
pattern required.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
(70 deg F (21 deg C)) or more than (95 deg F (35 deg C)). in spaces to receive floor tile
during the following time periods:
1. During installation.
B. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by
manufacturer, but not less than (55 deg F (13 deg C)) or more than (95 deg F (35
deg C)) .
C. install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Fumish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and Identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Furnish not less than (10 linear feet (3 "near m)) for every (500 "near feet (150
linear m)) or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient
product installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09653 - 1
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09653 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. Available Products! Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2
articles,
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed
in other Part 2 articles,
2,2 COLORS AND PATTERNS
A Colors and Patterns: (As selected from manufacturer's full range).
2.3 RESILIENT WALL BASE
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
2,4
A.
A. Wall Basel ASTM F 1861.
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; <Insert product>.
2. Johnsonite; <Insert product>.
3. Roppe Corporation; <Insert product>.
Type (Material Requirement): (TS (rubber, vulcanized thennoset) or TP (rubber,
thermoplastic)) .
Group (Manufacturing Method)l (I (solid, homogeneous) or" (layered)),
Stylel (Cove (with top-set toe)).
Minimum Thickness: (0.125 inch (3.2 mm)) (0.080 inch (2.0 mm)).
Height: (4 inches (102 mm)) ,
Lengths: (Coils in manufacturer's standard length).
Outside Comers: (Job fonned or premolded).
Inside Corners: (Job formed or premolded).
Surface: Smooth.
RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY <Insert drawing designation, e.g., RM-1.>
Description: (Carpet edge for glue-down applications) (Nosing for resilient floor
covering) (Reducer strip tor resilient floor covering) (Joiner tor tile and carpet).
1. Johnsonite; <Insert product>.
2. Roppe Corporation; <Insert prOduct>.
B. Material: (Rubber).
C, Profile and Dimensions: (As indicated).
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09653 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09653 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
2.5 INSTALlATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement
based or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by
resilient product manufacturers for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient
products and substrate conditions indicated.
C. Stair-Tread-Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient tread
manufacturer to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure
adhesion of resilient products.
B. Concrete Substrates for Stair Accessorlesl Prepare according to ASTM F 710,
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and
hardeners.
2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer.
Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
3. Moisture Testing:
a. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with Installation
only after substrates pass testing.
C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives
and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended
by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in
substrates.
E. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be
installed at least 48 hours in advance of Installation.
1. Do not Install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space
where they are to be installed.
F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately
before Installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts,
carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
3.2 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALlATION
A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and
other permanent fixtures In rooms and areas where base is required.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09653 - 3
McBEAN COMMUNIlY CENTER
09653 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09653 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops
of adjacent pieces aligned,
C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in
continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
D. Do not stretch wall base during installation.
E. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of wall
base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
F. Premolded Corners: Install premolded corners before installing straight pieces.
G. Job-Formed Corners:
1, Outside Comers! Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without
producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. Shave back of base at points
where bends occur and remove strips perpendicular to length of base that are
only deep enough to produce a snug fit without removing more than half the
wall base thickness.
2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form by cutting
an inverted V-shaped notch In toe of wall base at the point where corner Is
formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate.
3.3 RESIUENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. Resilient Stair Accessories:
1. Use stair-tread-nose filler to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread
contours.
2. Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece.
3. For treads installed as separate, equal-length units, install to produce a flush joint
between units.
B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjaCent materials and tightly adhere to
substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor
coverings that would otherwise be exposed.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Perform the following operations Immediately after completing resilient product
installationl
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
a. Do not wash surfaces until after time perlod recommended by
manufacturer.
B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from
construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
1
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09653 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
construction period.
manufacturer.
Use protection methods recommended in writing by
END OF SECTION 09653
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09653 - 5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09680 - CARPET
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes (woven) (tufted) (woven and tufted) carpet(and carpet cushion).
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product Indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1. Existing floor materials to be removed.
2. Existing floor materials to remain.
3. Seam locations.
4. Pattem type, repeat, location, direction, and starting point.
5. Pile direction.
6. Insets and borders.
7. Transition, and other accessory strips.
8. Transition details to other flooring materials.
C. Samplesl For each for each carpet(, cushion,) and exposed accessory and for each
color and pattem required.
D. Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations Indicated on Drawings
and in schedules.
E. Maintenance data.
1.3 QUAUTY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who is certified by the Floor Covering
Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with Its certification program
requirements.
1.4 DEUVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with CRll04, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions; Temperature and
Humidity."
B. Environmental Umitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete
and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the
levels indicated for Project when occupied for Its intended use.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09680 - 1
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09680 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09680 - CARPET
C. Do not Install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry
to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by
manufacturer.
D. Where demountable partitions or other Items are indicated for installation on top of
carpet. install carpet tile before installing these items.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Carpet Warranty I Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
replace carpet that does not comply with requirements or that falls within (10) years
from date of Substantial Completion. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure
of carpet from unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include,
but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags,
runs, and delamination.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products Installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Carpet: Full-width rolls equal to (5) percent of amount installed for each type
Indicated, but not less than (10 sq. yd. (8.3 sq. m)),
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CARPET
A. Available Productsl Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work Include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1 . J & J Commercial
a. Color and Pattern: Assertion III.
C, Fiber Content: 100% Nylon.
D. Surface Pile Weight: <26 oz./sq. yd. (g/sq. m) excluding weight of backings.>
E. Gauge: 118.
F. Primary Backing: (Manuiacrurers standard).
G, Secondary Backingl Woven Synthetic
H. Stitches per inch: 8,0
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09680 - CARPET
i. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class (i, not iess than 0.45 w Isq. em).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with CRI i04, Section (8, '1>irect Glue-Down.'1.
B. Maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams
under door in closed position. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet
manufacturer.
c. Install pattern parallei to wails and borders.
END OF SECTION 09680
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09680 - 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09770 - SPECIAL WALL SURFACES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.3
A.
A. This Section Includes the following:
1 . Special wall surfaces.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each product Indicated.
Shop Drawings: Include locations and extent of wall surfaces and details of installation.
Samplesl For each for each unit and for each color and texture required.
Maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide components with flame-spread and smoke-
developed Indices of not more than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested per
ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturersl Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
C. Basis-of-Deslgn Productl The design for each Impact-resistant wall protection unit is
based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the
named product or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. American Company
2. Masonite Corporation
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Material pattern and color shall be as scheduled on the drawings.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
wno - 1
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09770 - SPECIAL WALL SURFACES
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Wall panels shall be fiberglass reinforced panels, .09" thick x 48" wide, length suited to
application without horizontal joints; have a flame spread of less than 25 and a smoke
developed of less than 200, giving a class "A" finish. Embossed finish on one side,
C. Moldings and Trim: All exposed panel edges shall be finished with one-piece non-
staining vinyl extrusions; color to match panels.
D. Adhesive and Sealants: All wall panels and moldings shall be attached with a solvent-
base waterproof adhesive, compatible with the panels and moldings. Sealants shall be
as manufactured by the wall panel manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
B.
C.
D.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
A. Condition of Surfacel
1. Plaster shall be sound and free from surface chalk, and shall have 5 percent or
less moisture content as verified with a moisture meter.
2. Gypsum drywall shall have all nails and screws recessed. Tape and float joints,
nail, and screw depression. Sand, dust and prime with one coat of primer-sealer,
Examine all substrate surfaces and correct defects before beginning work.
Complete all other trade work that penetrates the substrate before beginning wall
panei Installation.
Starting work shall indicate acceptance of a suitable substrate surface.
INSTALLATION
Wall panels shall be attached to the gypsum substrate by using cohesive method. Apply
adhesive with ridge trowel; 3/16" high x 5/16u apart,
As each panel is installed, leave leading edge free.
After trimming Division Molding to proper size, apply a bead of sealant to one side of
molding and install on leading edge of installed panel.
Push Division Molding all the way in and then withdraw 1/8" to create expansion space,
Check plumb and tack Division Molding into place with coated lathe nails. Molding
maybe held In place with adhesive only where necessary. Be sure to remove excess
sealant Immediately.
E, Apply bead of sealant to open side of Division Molding and install adjoining panel. Be
sure to once again leave a 1/8" expansion space.
F. Continue the same process until all panels are Installed.
G. To complete sealing, caulk corner seams, ceiling and base juncture points. Be sure that
there is a 1/8 u expansion space when installing all other moldings for finished
appearance.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09770 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09770 - SPECIAL WALL SURFACES
3.3 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of the work, remove all excess materials and debris from the site.
B. Following Installation, remove ail excess adhesives from panels and adjacent areas with
cleaning agent as recommended by the manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 09770
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09770 - 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
.
I
.
-
-
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09773 - SPORT RUBBER FLOORING
PART ONE - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
1 .1 .1 Installation of sport rubber flooring and accessories as shown on the drawings. Two colors
shall be selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
1.2 RELATED WORK
1.2.1 Related work described elsewhere:
(a) Concrete Slab: Section entitled Cast-in-Place Concrete.
(b) Carpet! Section entitled Carpet.
(c) Rubber Base: Section entitled Resilient Flooring.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.3.1 Manufacturer: Provide rubber flooring and accessories as prOduced by a single
manufacturer. Provide primers, adhesives, sealants, and leveling compounds which are
approved by the rubber flooring manufacturer as compatible with rubber flooring
provided.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1.4.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each type of rubber flooring
and accessory.
1,4.2 Shop Drawings: Provide a layout drawing for the weight room rubber flooring.
1.4.3 Samples for Verification Purposes! Submit the following samplesl
(a) Full-size samples of rubber flooring In each color specified.
(b) 6U long sample of each type of reducer strip.
1,4.4 Maintenance Instructions: Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's recommended
maintenance practices for each type of rubber flooring and accessory required.
1 .5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.5.1 Maintain minimum temperature of 65 degrees F (18 degrees C) In spaces to receive
rubber flooring for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less
than 48 hours after installation. Store rubber flooring materials In spaces where they will
be Installed for at least 48 hours before beginning Installation. Subsequently, maintain
minimum temperature of 55 degrees F (13 degrees C) In areas where work is completed.
1 .5.2 Install rubber flooring and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting,
have been completed. Do not install rubber flooring over concrete slabs until the latter
have been cured and are sufficiently dry.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09773 - 1
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
00773 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09773 - SPORT RUBBER FLOORING
P ART TWO - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS!
2.1.1 Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the listed product of
one of the following!
Connor AGA.......,.............
Dodge-Regupol.. . ... .... . . .. .
Mondo,.,......,................ .
Tuflex..,......... ......... ... ... ...
ElastiMat
Everlast Rubber Tile
Sport Impact
Tuflex
2.2 MATERIALS
2.2.1 Weight room rubber flooring shall be 3/8" thick rubber, in 27" x 27" or 36" x 36" mats, or in
roll form, per the standard practice of the manufacturer for the product provided.
2.2.2 Color shall be as selected by the architect from the manufacturer's full range of colors.
2.3 ACCESSORIES:
2.3.1 Provide reducer strips at all transitions from rubber flooring to other floor finishes.
PART THREE - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
3.1.1 Require Installer to Inspect subfloor surfaces to determine that they are satisfactory. A
satisfactory subfloor surface Is defined as one that is smooth and free from cracks, holes,
ridges, and other defects impairing performance or appearance,
3.1.2 Do not allow rubber flooring work to proceed until subfloor surfaces are satisfactory.
3.2 PREPARATiON
3.2.1 Prepare subfloor surfaces as follows!
(a) Use leveling and patching compounds as recommended by rubber flooring
manufacturer for filling small cracks, holes and depressions in subfloors.
(b) Broom clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered, and Inspect subfloor.
3.3 INSTALLATION
3.3.1 Install rubber flooring using method indicated in strict compliance with manufacturer's
printed instructions. Extend rubber flooring Into toe spaces, door reveals, and into similar
openings.
3.3.2 Scribe, cut, and fit rubber flooring to permanent fixtures, built-In fumiture and cabinets,
pipes, outlets and permanent columns, walls and partitions.
3.3.3 Lay tile (mats) from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor
offsets, so that tile at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09773 - SPORT RUBBER FLOORING
avoid use of cut widths iess than Y2 tile at room perimeters. Lay tile square to room axis,
unless otherwise shown.
3.3.4 Match tiles for color and pattern by using tile from cartons in same sequence as
manufactured and packaged if so numbered. Cut tile neatly around all fixtures. Broken,
cracked, chipped or deformed tile are not acceptable.
3.3.5 Lay rubber flooring in full bed of adhesive applied at rate recommended by rubber
flooring manufacturer. Roll rubber flooring with a suitable weight roller,
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
3.4.1 Perform following operations Immediately upon completion of rubber flooringl
(a) Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly.
(b) Remove any surface blemishes, using appropriate cleaner recommended by rubber
flooring manufacturer.
3.4.2 Protect flooring against damage during construction period to comply with rubber
flooring manufacturer's directions.
3.4.3 Protect flooring against damage from roiling loads for initial period following Installation
by covering with plywood or hardboard. Use doilies to move stationary equipment or
furnishings across floors.
3.4.4 Cover flooring with undyed, untreated building paper until Inspection for substantial
completion.
3.5 EXTRA STOCK
3.5.1 Deliver stock of maintenance materials to Owner. Furnish maintenance materials from
same manufactured lot as materials installed and enclosed in protective packaging with
appropriate identifying labels.
3.5.2 Furnish not less than 2% each Type, color, pattern and size Installed.
END OF SECTION
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09773 - 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
.
.....
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09912 - PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed (exterior) (and)
(interior) items and surfaces.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product Indicated.
B. Samplesl For each type of finish-coat material indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample for each
type of coating and substrate required. Comply with procedures specified In PDCA P5.
1. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least (1 sq. ft.).
2. Small Areas and Items: Architect will designate Items or areas required,
3. Final approval of colors will be from benchmark samples.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a
minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain storage containers in a
clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
B. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and
surrounding air are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C).
C. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and
surrounding air are between 45 and 95 deg F (7 and 35 deg C).
D. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85
percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to
damp or wet surfaces,
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and
in the quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and.
identify with labeis describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
1. Quantity: (7) percent. but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) or 1 case, as appropriate, of
each material and color applied.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09912 - 1
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09912 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09912 - PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2
articles.
B, Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed
in other Part 2 articles.
C. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following
manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles I
1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore).
2. ICI Dulux Paint Centers (ICI Dulux Paints).
3. PPG Industries, Inc. (Pittsburgh Paints).
4. Sherwin-Williams Co. (Sherwin-Williams).
2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finlsh-coat materials that are
compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of
service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field
experience.
B. Material Qualityl Provide manufacturer's best-quallty paint material of the various
coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by
manufacturer for application indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying
manufacturer's product Identification will not be acceptable.
C. Colors: (As selected from manufacturer's full range).
2.3 PREPARATORY COATS
A. Exterior Prlmerl Exterior alkyd or latex-based primer of finish coat manufacturer and
recommended in writing by manufacturer for use with finish coat and on substrate
indicated.
1. Ferrous-Metal and Aluminum Substrates: Rust-inhibitive metal primer.
2. Zinc-Coated Metal Substratesl Galvanized metal primer.
3. Where manufacturer does not recommend a separate primer formulation on
substrate indicated, use paint specified for finish coat.
B. Interior Primer! Interior latex-based or alkyd primer of finish coat manufacturer and
recommended in writing by manufacturer for use with finish coat and on substrate
indicated. .
1. Ferrous-Metal Substrates: Quick drying, rust-inhibitive metal primer.
2. Zinc-Coated Metal Substrates! Galvanized metal primer,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
2.4
~
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09912 - PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)
3. Where manufacturer does not recommend a separate primer formulation on
substrate Indicated, use paint specified for finish coat.
EXTERIOR FINISH COATS
A.
Exterior Flat Acrylic Paint:
1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Flat Latex House Paint No. 171.
2. ICI Dulux Paints; 22oo-XXXX Dulux Professional Exterior 100 Percent Acrylic Flat
Finish.
3. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-600 Series SpeedHide Exterior House Paint Flat Latex.
4. Sherwin-Williams; A-lOa Exterior Latex Flat House & Trim Paint A6 Series.
B.
Exterior Low-Luster Acrylic Paint:
1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Low Lustre Latex House Paint No. 185,
2. ICI Dulux Paints; 2402-XXXX Dulux Professional Exterior 100 Percent Acrylic Satin
Finish.
3. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-2000 Series SpeedHlde Exterior House & Trim Satin--Acrylic
Latex.
4. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-400 Series Pitt-Tech One Pack High Performance Waterborne
Satin DTM Industrial Enamels.
5. Sherwin-Willlams; A-lOa Exterior Latex Satin House & Trim Paint A82 Series.
C.
Exterior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel:
1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex House & Trim Paint No. 170.
2. ICI Dulux Paints; 2406-XXXX Dulux Professional Exterior 100 Percent Acrylic Semi-
Gloss Finish.
3. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-900 Series SpeedHide Exterior House & Trim Semi-Gloss Acrylic
Latex Paint.
4. Sherwin-Williams; A-lOa Latex Gloss A8 Series.
D.
Exterior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel for Concrete, Masonry, and Wood:
E.
1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMe Acrylic Gloss Enamel M28,
2. ICI Dulux Paints; 3028-XXXX Dulux Interior IExterior Acrylic Gloss Finish.
3. Pittsburgh Paints; 90 Line Pitt-Tech One Pack Interlor/Exterlor High Performance
Waterborne High Gloss DTM Industrial Enamels.
4. Sherwin-Williams; DTM Acrylic Coating Gloss (Waterborne) B66W1 00 Series.
5. Sherwln-Willlams; SuperPalnt Exterior High Gloss Lat~x Enamel A85 Series.
Exterior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel for Ferrous and Other Metalsl
1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Gloss Enamel M28.
2. ICI Dulux Paints; 3028-XXXX Dulux InteriorlExterlor AcryliC Gloss Finish.
3. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-300 Series Pitt-Tech One Pack Interlor/Exterlor High
Performance Waterborne High Gloss DTM Industrial Enamels.
4. Sherwin-Williams; DTM Acrylic Coating Gloss (Waterborne) B66WlOO Series.
F.
Exterior Full-Gloss Alkyd Enamell
1.
Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Urethane Alkyd Enamel M22.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09912 - 3
McBEAN COMMUNI1Y CENTER
09912 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09912 - PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)
2, ICI Dulux Paints; 4308-XXXX Devguard Alkyd Industrial Gloss Enamel.
3. Pittsburgh Paints; 7-814 Pittsburgh Paints Industrial Gloss-Oil Interior IExterior Enamel.
4, Sherwin-Williams; Industrial Enamel B-54 Series.
2,5 INTERIOR FINISH COATS
A Interior Flat Acrylic Paint:
1. Benjamin Moore; Moorecraft Super Spec Latex Flat No. 275.
2, ICI Dulux Paints; 1200-XXXX Dulux Professional Velvet Matte Interior Flat Latex Wall
& Trim Finish.
3. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-70 Une SpeedHide Interior Wall Flat-Latex Paint.
4. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Flat Wall Paint B30W200 Series.
B. Interior Flat Latex-Emulsion Size:
1. Benjamin Moore; Moorecraft Super Spec Latex Flat No. 275.
2. ICI Dulux Paints; 1200-XXXX Dulux Professional Velvet Matte Interior Flat Latex Wall
& Trim Finish.
3. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-70 Une SpeedHide Interior Wall Flat-Latex Paint.
4. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Flat Wall Paint B30W200 Series.
C. Interior Low-Luster Acrylic Enamel:
1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Eggshell Enamel No. 274.
2. ICI Dulux Paints; 1402-XXXX Dulux Professional Acrylic Eggshell Interior Wall & Trim
Enamel.
3. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-400 Series SpeedHide Eggshell Acrylic Latex Enamel.
4, Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Egg-Shell Enamel B20W200 Series.
D. Interior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel:
1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel No. 276.
2. ICI Dulux Paints; 1406-XXXX Dulux Professional AcryliC Semi-Gloss Interior Wall &
Trim Enamel.
3. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-500 Series SpeedHide Interior Semi-Gloss Latex.
4. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel B31 W200 Series.
E, Interior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel:
1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Gloss Enamel No. M28.
2. ICI Dulux Paints; 3028-XXXX Dulux Interior IExterior Acrylic Gloss Finish,
3. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-8534 SpeedHide Interior Latex 100 Percent Acrylic Gloss
Enamels.
4. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-374 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterlor High Performance
Waterborne High Gloss DTM Industrial Enamel.
5, Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Gloss Enamel B21W20l.
F. Interior Semigloss Alkyd Enamelj
1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel No. 271.
2. ICI Dulux Paints; 1516-XXXX Ultra-Hide Alkyd Semi-Gloss Interior Wall & Trim Enamel.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
.
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09912 - PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)
3, Pittsburgh Paints; 6-1110 Series SpeedHlde Interior Enamel Wall & Trim Semi-Gloss
011.
4. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel B34W200 Series.
2.6 INTERIOR WOOD STAINS AND VARNISHES
A. Open-Grain Wood Filler!
1. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Paste Wood Filler No. 238,
2. ICI Dulux Paints; none required,
3. Pittsburgh Paints; none required,
4. Sherwin-Williams; Sher-Wood Fast-Dry Filler.
5. Sherwin-Williams; none recommended.
B. Interior Wood Stainl Alkyd based,
1. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Penetrating Stain No. 234.
2. ICI Dulux Paints; 1700-XXX WoodPride Interior Solventborne Wood Finishing Stain.
3. Pittsburgh Paints; 77-560 Rez Interior Semi-Transparent Oil Stain.
4. Sherwin-Williams; Wood Classics Interior 011 Stain A-48 Series.
C. Clear Sanding Sealer: Fast-drylng alkyd based,
1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Quick-Dry Sanding Sealer No. 413.
2. ICI Dulux Paints; 1902-0000 Wood Pride Interior Satin Polyurethane Varnish.
3. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-10 SpeedHide Quick-Drying Interior Sanding Wood Sealer and
Finish.
4. Sherwin-Williams; Wood Classics Fast Dry Sanding Sealer B26V43.
D. Interior Waterborne Clear Satin Varnish: Acrylic-based polyurethane,
1. Benjamin Moore; Stays Clear Acrylic Polyurethane No. 423, Satin.
2. ICI Dulux Paints; 1802-0000 Wood Pride Interior Waterborne Aquacrylic Satin
Varnish.
3. Pittsburgh Paints; 77-49 Rez Satin Acrylic Clear Polyurethane.
4. Sherwin-Williams; Wood Classics Waterborne Polyurethane Satin, A68 Series.
E. Paste Wax: As recommended by manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPUCATION
A. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4 for Inspection and acceptance of
surfaces to be painted.
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure
compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish Information
on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09912-5
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09912 - 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09912 - PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)
C. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting
fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal Is
impractical or Impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied
protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall Items
removed using workers skilled in the trades Involved.
D. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to
manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as
specified.
1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprlme,
2. Cementitious Materials: Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and
release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers
have been used to Improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface
preparation.
3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers,
minerai spirits, and sandpaper. as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view
smooth and dust off.
a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of
white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer.
After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or
plastic wood filler, Sand smooth when dried.
b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime
edges, ends, faces, undersides, and back sides of wood, including
cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling.
c. If transparent finish is required, backprlme with spar varnish.
d. Backprlme paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster. or other
wet wall construction occurs on back side.
e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprlmed wood doors with a heavy coat
of varnish or sealer Immediately on delivery.
4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been
shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign
substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with
SSPC's recommendations.
a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer
and according to (SSPC-SP 6/NACE No.3).
b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment
wash coat before priming,
c. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been
damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint
manufacturer. and touch up with same primer as the shop coat,
5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with non petroleum-based
solvents so surface Is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment
from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.
E. Material Preparation:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09912 - PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free
of foreign materials and residue.
2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as
required during application. Do not stir surface film Into material. If necessary,
remove surface film and strain material before using.
F. Exposed Surfaces: Include areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles,
convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in
place. Extend coatings In these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and
provide desired protection.
1. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar
exposed surfaces. Before final Installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind
permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only,
2. Paint Interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible
through registers or grilles.
3. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match
exposed surfaces.
4. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces.
5. Finish Interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to
match exterior.
G. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
H. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated,
or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before
subsequent surface deterioration.
1. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup
painted.
2. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply
additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance,
I. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other
applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions.
J. Minimum Coating Thickness! Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as
recommended by manufacturer.
K. Mechanical and Electrical Workl Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited
to Items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces.
L. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by
manufacturer, to material that Is required to be painted or finished and that has not
been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of
suction spots or unsealed areas In first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no
burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.
M, Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a
smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage.
Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface
imperfections will not be acceptable.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09912-7
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09912-8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09912 - PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)
N, Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film
of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity. brush
marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections,
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded
paint materials from Project site.
B. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from
painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as
approved by Architect.
C. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting
operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their
work.
1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA Pl.
3.3 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Concrete, Stucco, and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry):
1. Acrylic Finish: (Two finish coats) over a primer.
a. Primer! Exterior concrete and masonry primer.
b. Finish Coats: Exterior (low-luster acrylic paint).
B, Concrete Unit Masonry:
1. Acrylic Finish: (Two finish coats) over a block filler.
a. Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler.
b. Finish Coats: Exterior (flat acrylic paint) (low-luster acrylic paint) (semigloss
acrylic enamel) (full-gloss acrylic enamel for concrete, masonry, and
wood) ,
C, Mineral-Fiber-Relnforced Cement Panels:
1, Acrylic Finish: (One finish coat) (Two finish coats) (<Insert number> finish coats)
over a primer,
a. Primer! Exterior concrete and masonry primer.
b. Finish Coats: Exterior flat acrylic paint.
D. Smooth Woodl
1, Acrylic Finish: (Two finish coats) over a primer,
a. Primer! Exterior wood primer for acrylic enamels,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09912 - PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)
b. Finish Coats: Exterior (flat acrylic paint),
2. Alkyd-Enamel Rnlsh: (Two finish coats) over a primer,
a. Primer! Exterior wood primer for alkyd enamels.
b. Finish Coats: Exterior full-gloss alkyd enamel.
E. Wood Trlml
1. Acrylic-Enamel Finish) (Two finish coats) over a primer.
a. Primer! Exterior wood primer for acrylic enamels.
b. Finish Coats: Exterior (semigloss acrylic enamel).
2. Alkyd-Enamel Finish: (Two finish coats) over a primer.
a. Primer! Exterior wood trim primer for full-gloss alkyd enamels.
b. Finish Coats: Exterior full-gloss alkyd enamel.
F. Plywood:
1, Acrylic Finish: (Two finish coats) over a primer.
a. Primer! Exterior wood primer for acrylic enamels.
b. Finish Coats: Exterior (low-luster) acrylic paint.
G, Ferrous Metah
1. Acrylic Finish: (Two finish coats) over a rust-inhibitive primer.
a. Primer! Exterior ferrous-metal primer (not required on shop-primed Items).
b. Finish Coats: Exterior (semigloss acrylic enamel).
2. Alkyd-Enamel Finish: (Two finish coats) over a rust-inhibitive primer.
a. PrImer! Exterior ferrous-metal primer (not required on shop-primed Items).
b. Finish Coats: Exterior ful/-gloss alkyd enamel.
H. Zinc-Coated Metal:
1. Acrylic Finish: (Two finish coats) over a galvanized metal primer.
a. Primer! Exterior galvanized metal primer.
b. Finish Coats: Exterior (semigloss acrylic enamel).
2. Alkyd-Enamel Finish: (Two finish coats) over a galvanized metal primer.
a. Primer! Exterior galvanized metal primer.
b. Finish Coats: Exterior full-gloss alkyd enamel.
3.4 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09912-9
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09912 - 10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09912 - PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)
A. Gypsum Board:
1. Acrylic Finish: (Two finish coats) over a primer.
a. Primer! Interior gypsum board primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior (low-luster acrylic enamel),
B. Wood and Hardboard:
1. Acrylic-Enamel Finishl (Two finish coats) over a primer.
a. Primer! Interior wood primer for acrylic-enamel and semigloss alkyd-enamel
finishes.
b. Finish Coats: Interior (semigloss) acrylic enamel.
C. Ferrous Metali
1. Acrylic Finish: (Two finish coats) over a primer.
a. Primer! Interior ferrous-metal primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior (semigloss acrylic enamel).
D. Zinc-Coated Metal:
1. Acrylic Finish: (Two finish coats) over a primer.
a. Primer! Interior zinc-coated metal primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior (semigloss acrylic enamel).
E, AII-SeNice Jacket over Insulation:
1, Acrylic Finish: (Two) finish coats. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew
proof.
a. Finish Coats: Interior flat latex-emulslon size.
3.5 INTERIOR STAIN AND NATURAL-FINISH WOODWORK SCHEDULE
A. Stain-Varnish Finish: (Two) finish coats of varnish over a sealer coat and interior wood
stain.( Wipe wood filler before applying stain.)
1, Filler Coati Open-grain wood filler.
2, Stain Coati Interior wood stain.
3. Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer,
4. Finish Coats: Interior (waterborne clear satin) varnish.
B. Natural-Varnish Finish: (Two) finish coats of varnish over a sealer coat( and a filler coat).
1. Filler Coati Open-grain wood filler.
2. Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer.
3, Finish Coats: Interior (waterborne clear satin) varnish.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09912 - PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)
END OF SECTION 09912
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09912 - 11
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
SECTION 09920 - DECORATIVE LAMINATE EPOXY FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
1. Furnish and Install the decorative epoxy flooring system as specified and Indicated.
Prior to installation, provide decontamination and cleaning as specified. The term
"decorative epoxy flooring system" as used in this section will Include the primers, resin
systems and aggregate materials, topcoats. cove building materials, and any related
materials for the project.
2. Complete the decorative epoxy flooring system installation In strict accordance with
these specifications, the coating system manufacturer's most current requirements for
surface preparation, application and Inspection, and the instructions for safety. In the
event of a conflict between these specifications and the manufacturer's instructions,
the more stringent requirements will apply.
3. The Contractor shali be responsible for providing ventilation, initial cieanlng,
inspection, supervision. dust control and equipment protection as specified herein
and related sections for the work associated with this Section. The Contractor Is
responsible for all other work associated with this Section Including protection of
existing equipment and structures in the work area. surface preparation, flooring
application, curing. coating repair, rework, Inspection and supervision.
1 .02 RELATED SECTIONS
Division 1
General Requirements
1.03 REFERENCES:
1. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) Specifications and Standards:
1.
SSPC-PA-3:
" A Guide to Safety In Paint Application".
2.
SSPC-SP-131
"Surface Preparation of Concrete".
2. NACE (National Association of Corrosion Engineers)
1. NACE Publication 6D-173, "A Manual for Painter Safety".
2. NACE Publication 6G-164, "Surface Preparation Abrasives for Industrial
Maintenance Painting".
3. ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials)
1. ASTM D4541 - L.R. "Standard Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings using
Portable Adhesion Testers".
2. ASTM E337 - L.R. "Standard Practice Test Method for Measuring Humidity with a
Psychrometer" .
3. ASTM D4263-83 (1999), "Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in
Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method".
4. ASTM F1869-98, "Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09920 - 1
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09920 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
SECTION 09920 - DECORATIVE LAMINATE EPOXY FLOORING
Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride",
5. ASTM D4414-95, "Standard Practice for Measurement of Wet Film Thickness by
Notched Gages".
6. ICRI Guide No. 03732, "Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface
Preparation for Sealers, Coatings and Polymer Overlays." International
Concrete Repair Institute, Sterling, VA.
7. ASTM 4262, "Standard Test Method for Measuring Surface pH of Acid Etched
Concrete".
8. ASTM D4259, "Standard Practice for Abrading Concrete".
1.04 DEFINITIONS
1. Terms used in this Section are defined as follows:
1. Decorative Epoxy Flooring Work - The aspects Involved with proper application
of the specified high solids flooring system. Including but not limited to
cleaning, surface preparation. mixing, application, curing, and quality control.
2. Approved Materials - The coating system, blast media, and other specified
materials for this coating work.
3. Wet Film Thickness - The primer or coating films' actual thickness
Immediately following application. Wet film thickness is measured in mils or
thousandths of an inch (0.001") and is abbreviated WFT.
4. Dry Film Thickness - The primer or coating films' actual thickness following
curing and drying. Dry film thickness Is measured in mils or thousandths of
an inch (0.001 ") and is abbreviated DFT.
5. Coating System Manufacturer - Refers to the approved coating
Manufacturer abbreviated as CSM In this Section,
6. Manufacturer's Technlcal- Refers to the technical representative(s) of the
Representative(s) approved CSM.
7. AlE - Architectural or Engineering Firm.
1 .05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1 . The Contractor shall meet the following requirements:
1. The Contractor is ultimately responsible for the workmanship and quality of the
decorative epoxy flooring system installation. Inspections by the Owner, the
Engineer, or others do not limit the Contractor's responsibility.
2. Do not use or retain contaminated, outdated, or diluted materials for flooring.
Do not use materials from previously opened containers.
3. Use only products of the approved CSM. Provide the same products for
repairs as for the original coating,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
SECTION 09920 - DECORATIVE LAMINATE EPOXY FLOORING
4. If any requirements of this specification are contradicted by a referenced
standard or vice-versa, the matter shall be resolved In writing by the AlE or its
representative,
5. Make available at all times all locations and phases of the work for access
and inspection by the Engineer, the Owner, or other personnel designated by
the Owner. The Contractor shall provide ventilation, egress, and whatever
other means are required for the Owner, Engineer, or designated personnel to
access and exit the work areas safely.
6. Conduct work so that the decorative epoxy flooring system Is installed as
specified herein. Inspect work continually to ensure that the coating system is
Installed as specified herein. The AlE shall inspect the work to determine
conformance with the contract documents.
7. The Contractor's Supervisor shall be on site at all times and will be thoroughly
familiar with the work In progress. This SupeNisor shall have authority to receive
and execute all direction provided by the AlE or the Owner.
8. The methods of construction shall be in accordance with all requirements of
this specification and the best trade practices. Any changes in the
decorative epoxy flooring system Installation requirements shall be allowed
only with the written approval of the AlE.
9. Installation shall be performed by an applicator having satisfactory
experience in the application of these or similar materials or with on-site
consultation by a qualified field service representative of the CSM,
1.06 SUBMITTALS
1. Submit the following prior to commencing with any phase of the work covered by this
Section:
1. Manufacturer's current printed recommendations and product data sheets
for all decorative epoxy flooring system products including performance
criteria, surface preparation and applications, volatile organic compound
(V.a.c.) data, and safety requirements.
2. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for any materials brought on-site including
all coating system materials, solvents, and abrasive blast media.
3. Contractor's written verification that the personnel who will perform this work
have the required experience as specified In 1.05 1.9. This document must list
the names of all of the Contractor's supervisors and tradespeople who will
work on the project covered by this Section.
4, List of cleaning and thinner solutions allowed by the CSM.
5. Storage requirements including temperature, humidity, and ventilation for
Coating System Materials.
2, Owner, contractor, and manufacturer's representative shall review and mutually
agree upon color, grade, and final texture of coating system before starting
installation. The acceptance of a sample will constitute the job standard by which
installation will proceed.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09920 - 3
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09920 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
SECTION 09920 - DECORATIVE LAMINATE EPOXY FLOORING
1,07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1 . Material shall be delivered to project site In manufacturer's original unopened
containers,
2. Materials shall be stored indoors, protected from damage, moisture, direct sunlight
and temperatures below 40 degrees F or above 90 degrees F,
3, Store all materials only in area or areas designated by the Owner solely for this
purpose. Confine mixing, thinning, clean-up and associated operations, and storage
of coating materials related debris before authorized disposal, to these areas. All
materials are to be stored on pallets or similar storagelhandling skids off the ground,
4. Mix all coating materials In a designated enclosed mixing area. This enclosed area
must protect the mixing operation and materials from direct sunlight, inclement
weather, freezing, or other means of damage or contamination. Protect all other
concrete and metallic surfaces and finishes from any spillage of material(s) within the
mixing area.
5. Do .not use drain piping for disposal of coating materials.
6. The Contractor shall take all precautions and implement all measures necessary to
avert potential hazards associated with the decorative epoxy flooring system
materials as described on the pertinent Material Safety Data Sheets or container
labels.
7. Deliver all materials to the job site in new, unopened containers. Each container shall
bear the CSM's name and label.
1. Labels on all material containers must show the following information:
1. Name or title of product.
2. Manufacturer's batch number.
3, Manufacturer's name.
4, Generic type of material.
5. Application and mixing instructions.
6. Hazardous material Identification label.
7. Shelf life date.
2. All containers shall be clearly marked indicating any personnel safety hazards
associated with the use of or exposure to the materials,
3. All materials shall be handled and stored to prevent damage or loss of label.
4. Do not use or retain contaminated, outdated, prematurely opened, diluted
materials. or materIals which have exceeded their shelf life,
1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
1 . Surfaces and surrounding air temperatures must exceed 55 degrees F, but must be less
than 90 degrees F, with materials at not less than 70 degrees F during application.
2. Do not apply coating materials when dust is being generated.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
SECTION 09920 - DECORATIVE LAMINATE EPOXY FLOORING
3, If existing facility lighting is not adequate for flooring system application, the
Contractor shall provide all temporary lighting during the work equivalent to one 200
watt explosion proof incandescent lamp per 100 square feet of work area.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
Laminate Resinous Fiooringl Series 222 Deco-Tread consisting of a two-component
modified polyamine cured epoxy liquid and a colored quartz broadcast
aggregate applied by double broadcast or as a slurry broadcast to provide a
minimum 1/8" thickness.
The Series 222 Deco-Tread Is self-priming when Installed as a double broadcast or
prime with Series 201 when Series 222 Is installed as a slurry broadcast. Apply Series 201
in this case at 6 to 8 dry mils.
2. Top CoatI Series 284 Deco-Clear two-component, modified polyamine cured
epoxy glaze. Thickness and number of coats will vary depending on desired finish.
3. Coving: Series 222 Deco-Tread, a two-component. modified polyamine cured
epoxy liquid, blended as a mortar with decorative aggregate applied to form a
cant or rolled radius cove.
2.02 MANUFACTURER
1. Tnemec Company, Incorporated.
2. Dek-O-Tex
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
1 . Protection
Mask, cover, or otherwise protect all surfaces, equipment. and finishes not to receive
the decorative epoxy flooring system specified in this Section.
2. Strictly follow the approved CSM's written Instructions and the requirements of this
specification regarding all aspects of decorative epoxy flooring work including:
mixing, application, recoat times and curing.
3.02 PREPARATION
1. Allow new concrete to cure for 28 days. Verify dryness by testing for moisture with a
nplastlc film tape-down test". (Reference ASTM D4263)
2. Shot-blast or mechanically abrade to remove laitance, curing compounds, sealers
and other contaminants and to provide surface profile. (Reference ASTM D4259, ICRI
CSP 4-6).
3. Vacuum clean concrete to remove all dirt, dust. and other loose materials.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09920 - 5
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09920 - 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
SECTION 09920 - DECORATIVE LAMINATE EPOXY FLOORING
4. After mechanically abrading, verify that all surfaces are clean, dry and free of any
contaminants, which could adversely affect the adhesion of the flooring system.
5. If between final surface preparation work and decorative epoxy flooring system
application, contamination of the prepared and cleaned substrates occurs,
recleaning shall be required until the requirements of this Section are met.
3.03 INSTALLATION
1. For Slurry Broadcast Application: The primer shall be mechanically mixed, applied and
cured in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Apply uniformly at
a film thickness of 6 to 8 dry mils.
2. Cant Cove or rolled radius cove bases shall be installed in accordance with the CSM's
written instructions and as indicated on the Standard Flooring Details,
3. Decorative Laminate Epoxy Resinous Flooring: The material shall be mixed, applied
and cured In strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. Apply by
double broadcast (self-priming) or slurry broadcast to a minimum of 1/8" thickness.
Note to Specifier: Floor and wall transitions can be formed to have a cant cove or
rolled radius cove. This will provide a seamless wall to floor transition.
4. Top Coat: The high-solids, epoxy glaze coat shall be mechanically mixed, applied and
cured in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed Instructions. Apply at a film
thickness of 6 to 12 dry mils. Skid resistance properties can be adjusted by the film
thickness and number of topcoats and should be determined at the time the mock-
up is completed.
5. Finish Coat (Optional): The high-solids, orange-peel, epoxy finish coat shall be
mechanically mixed, applied and cured in strict accordance with manufacturer's
printed instructions. Apply at a film thickness of 4 to 6 dry mils. .
6, Cracks and control Joints, construction joints, expansion joints, and all decorative
epoxy flooring system terminations shall be installed as indicated on the Standard
Flooring Details,
3.04 CLEANUP
1 . Remove waste materials, rubbish, and debris and dispose of them at the owner's
direction. Leave work areas in a clean and tidy condition.
3.05 PROTECTION
1 . Protect the completed work from water, airborne particles or other surface
contaminants until cured for a minimum of 24 hours after application.
2. Protect from traffic, physical abuse, Immersion and chemical exposure until the
complete system has thoroughly cured for 24 hours at 75 degrees F. For different
temperatures, consult the manufacturer's representative about curing times.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL INSPECTION AND TESTING
1. Inspection by the Engineer, Owner or others does not limit the Contractor's
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
SECTION 09920 - DECORATIVE LAMINATE EPOXY FLOORING
responsibilities for quality as specified herein or as required by the CSM's Instructions,
2.
The Contractor shall perform the Q.C. procedures listed below In conjunction with the
requirements of this Section. The Engineer will Inspect the work to determine
conformance to the contract documents.
1. Degree of Cleanliness.
Visually Inspect the degree of cleanliness of substrates to meet the
requirements of this Section. The pH of the concrete substrates will be
measured using pH indicating papers. pH testing Is to be performed once
every 100 sq. ft. of surface area to be coated.
Acceptable pH values shall be between 8.0 and 11.0 as measured by a full-
range (1-12) color indicating pH paper with readable color calibrations and a
scale at whole numbers (minimum). Use Hydrion Insta-Chek Jumbo 0-13 or 1-
12 or equal. The paper shall be touched to the surface once using moderate
finger pressure. The surface shall not be wiped or moved laterally to disturb
the surface during pH testing. Following the one touch, 11ft the paper vertically
to not ~wipe" the surface. Compare the color Indicated with the scale
provided and record the pH.
Note: If the surface of the concrete is dry, It Is not possible to take a pH
measurement. However, pH values are still Important on dry surfaces. When a
dry concrete substrate is encountered for a pH test, the surface where the pH
test is to be performed shall be sprayed lightly with distilled, deionized water
from a commercially available spray bottle that has been properly rinsed to
preclude any dissolved solids. The spray shall just wet the surface to a n shiny"
appearance. Wait 60 seconds to allow chemical equilibria to be established
and then test the pH of the water on the surface. Perform this test in
accordance with ASTM D4262.
2. Concrete Surface Profile
Using the replicate rubber specimens Inspect the concrete surface profile in
accordance with ICRI Guide No. 03732. This should be performed once for
every 100 square feet of surface area to be coated.
3. Measure and record ambient air temperature once every two hours of each
shift using a thermometer and measure and record substrate temperature
once every two hours using a surface thermometer.
4. Measure and record relative humidity every two hours of each shift using a
sling psychrometer In accordance with ASTM E337.
5. Inspect correct mixing of coating materials in accordance with the CSM's
Instructions.
6. Inspect and record that the ~pot life" of coating materials used are not
exceeded during Installation.
.
7.
Measure and record the thickness of the coating system using a notched
gauge In accordance with ASTM D4414 for Wet Film Thickness at least once
every 10 sq. ft. of coating area.
I
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09920 - 7
-
1. Once for every 500 square feet of surface area to be coated, perform
. the plastic sheet test in accordance with ASTM D4263. If moisture Is
indicated, proceed to step 2 below.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
U
o
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
SECTION 09920 - DECORATIVE LAMINATE EPOXY FLOORING
8. Perform moisture tests on concrete as follows:
2. Perform calcium chloride moisture tests in accordance with ASTM
D 1869 once for every 1000 square feet of surface area to be coated,
The maximum limit for moisture vapor emissions rate should be 3.0 Ibs.
per 24 hours per 1000 sq. ft. If tests indicate rates higher than 3.0,
consult with Tnemec's Technical Service Department for further
evaluation,
9. Inspect to verify proper curing of the decorative epoxy flooring system as
recommended by the CSM.
End of Section 09920
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09920 - 8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
~
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09931 - EXTERIOR STAINS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of (wood stains) to
exterior surfaces.
1.2 SUBMmALS
A. Product Data: For each type of stain indicated.
B. Samplesl For each color and stain material to be applied, with texture to simulate
actual conditions, on representative Samples of actual substrates.
1. Stained Wood: Provide (6-inch- (150-mm-) square) (8-inch- (200-mm-) square)
(8- by lO-lnch (200- by 250-mm)) <Insert size> Samples.
1.3 QUAUTY ASSURANCE
A. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample for each
type of stain and substrate required. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5,
Duplicate finish of approved sample Submittals.
1. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least (1 sq. ft.).
2. Small Areas and Items: Architect will designate Items or areas required,
3. Final approval of colors will be from benchmark samples.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a
minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain storage containers in a
clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue,
B. Apply stains only when temperatures of surfaces to be stained and the surrounding air
are between 45 deg F (7 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C) for oil-based stain, or
between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C) for latex-based stain,
C. Do not apply stain in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85
percent; when temperatures are less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to
damp or wet surfaces,
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra stain materials from the same production run as the materials applied and
in quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and
identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09931 - 1
McBEAN COMMUNI1Y CENTER
09931 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09931 - EXTERIOR STAINS
1. Quantity: (7) percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) or 1 case, as appropriate, of
each material and color applied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Productsl Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those listed in other Part 2
articles.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
named in other Part 2 articles.
C. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following
manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles I
1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore).
2. ICI Dulux Paint Centers (ICI Dulux Paints).
3. PPG Industries, Inc. (Pittsburgh Paints).
4. Samuel Cabot Inc. (Samuel Cabot).
5. Sherwin-Williams Co. (Sherwin-Williams).
2.2 EXTERIOR WOOD STAIN MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Provide primers and finlsh-coat materials that are compatible
with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Stain-Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality stain material of the various
stain types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer
for application indicated. Stain-material containers not displaying manufacturer's
product identification will not be acceptable.
C. Colors: (As selected from manufacturer's full range).
D. Solid-Color Oli or Oil/Alkyd Stain:
1. Benjamin Moore: Moorwood Solid Color Exterior Stain No. 080.
2, ICI Dulux Paints: 2700-XXXX Woodprlde Exterior Solid 0111 Alkyd Stain,
3, Pittsburgh Paints: 77-600 Series Pittsburgh Paints Exterior Solid Color AlkydlOIl
Stains.
4, Samuel Cabotl O.V.T. Solid Color Oil Stain 0500/6500 Series.
5. Sherwin-Williamsl Exterior Alkyd Solid Color Stain A 14 Series.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPUCA TION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
3.2
.
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09931 - EXTERIOR STAINS
A.
Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4 for Inspection and acceptance of
surfaces to be stained,
B.
Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting
fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be stained. If removal Is
impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applled
protection before surface preparation and staining.
1. After completing staining operations, reinstall items removed using workers skilled
in trades involved.
C.
Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be stained according to
manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as
specified. Allow unseasoned or shiny new wood to weather three months before
staining.
1. Countersink steel nalls, if used, and fill with putty tinted to final color to eliminate
rust leach stains.
2. Previously Stained Work: Renall loose or warped shingles or siding using
galvanized or aluminum nails.
D.
Mixingl Stir stain thoroughly before applying and frequently during application to
maintain color consistency. Maintain containers used In mixing and application In a
clean condition, free of foreign materiais and residue.
E.
Minimum Spreading Rate: Apply stain at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate
to ensure proper penetration. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate
and type of stain material being applied.
F.
Siding: Apply stain evenly with brush, roller, or spray. Thoroughly stain edges and ends
of boards. Brush out excess stain that collects In butts of shingles or boards. Avoid
staining in direct sunlight.
G.
Shingles and Shakesl Dip in and out of stain, immersing them two-thirds of their length.
After dipping, allow each to drain and dry with nothing touching surface to be
exposed. Do not stack wet units directly on top of one another. When sufficiently dry,
brush off excess material.
H.
Protect work of other trades, whether being stained or not against damage from
staining. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and restainlng as
approved by Architect.
I.
Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly stained finishes. After completing staining
operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their
work.
1 . After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced stained surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA Pl,
EXTERIOR WOOD STAIN SCHEDULE
A.
Exterior Siding: Provide the following on exterior siding, and trim including fasciae and
soffits:
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09931 - 3
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
09931 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09931 - EXTERIOR STAINS
1. Solid-Color Oil or OillAlkyd Stain: (Two coats).
a. Primer Coat: Apply before staining as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Wood Decksl Provide the following:
1 , Wood Deck Stain: (Two coats).
2, Semitransparent Oil/Alkyd Stain: (Two) coats,
END OF SECTION 09931
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10155 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes (toilet compartments) (and) (screens) as followsl
1. Type: (Solid-plastic, phenolic core).
2. Compartment Style: (Overhead braced and floor anchored).
3. Screen Style: (Floor anchored).
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product Indicated.
B, Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details of Installation, and
attachments to other Work.
C. SampiesJ For each exposed finish and for each color and pattern required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturersl Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment Inc.
2. Capitol Partitions, Inc.
3. General Partitions Mfg. Corp.
4. Knickerbocker Partition Corporation.
5. Metpar Corp.
6. Partition Systems, Inc.; Columbia Partitions.
7. Santana Products, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Panel, Pilaster, and Door Materlall
1. Solid-Plastic, Phenolic Core: Solid phenolic core with melamine facing on both
sides, fused to substrate without visible glue line or seam, Provide units with eased
edges and with minimum 3/4-inch- (19-mm- thick doors and pilasters and
minimum 1/2-lnch- (13-mm-) thick panels and screens,
a. Color: (As selected from manufacturer's full range).
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
10155 -1
B,
C.
D.
2.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10155 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): (Stainless steel, polymer resin), not less than 3 inches
(75 mm) high.
Stirrup Brackets: (Stainless steel),
Continuous Brackets: (Stainless steel).
FABRICATION
Toilet Compartments) (Overhead braced and floor anchored).
Urinal Screens: (Floor anchored).
Solid-Plastic, Polymer-Resin Units: Provide aluminum heat-sink strips at exposed bottom
edges of panels and doors.
Doors: Unless otherwise Indicated, 24-inch- (61D-mm-) wide in-swinging doors for
standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide out-swinging doors with a
minimum 32-inch- (813-mm-) wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be
accessible to people with disabilities.
E. Door Hardware: (Stainless steel), Provide units that comply with accessibility
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at compartments Indicated to be
accessible to people with disabilities,
1. Hinges: Self-closing type, adjustable to hold door open at any angle up to 90
deg rees.
2, Latches and Keepers: (Surface-mounted) unit designed for emergency access
and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper,
3. Coat Hook: Combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent door
from hitting compartment-mounted accessories.
4. Door Bumper: Rubber-tipped bumpers at out-swinging doors or entrance screen
doors.
5. Door Pull! Provide at out-swinging doors. Provide units on both sides of doors at
compartments indicated to be accessible to peopie with disabilities.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb, with not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm)
between pilasters and panels and not more than 1 inch (25 mm) between panels and
walls, Provide brackets. pilaster shoes, bracing, and other components required for a
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
10155-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
ii
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10155 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS
complete installation. Use theft-resistant exposed fasteners finished to match
hardware. Use sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications,
1. Stirrup Brackets: Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.
2. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold open approximately 30 deg rees from
closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors and swing
doors in entrance screens to return to fully closed position.
END OF SECTION 10155
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
10155-3
I
I
SECTION 10200 - LOUVERS AND VENTS
I
PART 1- GENERAL
I
1.1
I
I
1.2
I
I
I
I
1.3
I
I
I
1.4
I
I
I
I
I
1.5
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1.
Fixed, extruded-aluminum louvers.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants installed in perimeter joints between louver frames
and adjoining construction.
2. Division 15 Sections for louvers that are a part of mechanical equipment.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this
Section, unless otherwise defIned in this Section or in referenced standards.
B.
Standard Free Area: Free area of a louver 48 inches wide by 48 inches high, identical to that provided.
c.
Maximum Standard Airflow: Airflow at point of beginning water penetration through a louver 48 inches
wide by 48 inches high, identical to that provided.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Structural Performance: Provide exterior metal louvers capable of withstanding the effects of loads and
stresses from wind and normal thermal movement without evidencing permanent deformation of louver
components including blades, frames, and supports; noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle
or flutter; or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors.
1.
Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) ono lbfi'sq. ft., acting inward or outward.
B.
Air-Performance, Water-Penetration, and Air-Leakage Ratings: Provide louvers complying with
performance requirements indicated, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units 48 inches
wide by 48 inches high. Test units according to AMCA 500.
1.
2.
Perform testing on unpainted, cleaned, degreased units.
Perform water-penetration testing on louvers without screens.
SUBMITI ALS
I
LOUVERS AND VENTS
10200-1
I
A.
Product Data: For each type of product specified,
I
B.
Shop Drawings: For louver units and accessories, Include plans; elevations; sections; and details
showing profiles, angles, and spacing of louver blades. Show unit dimensions related to wall openings
and construction; free area for each size indicated; profIles of frames at jambs, heads, and sills; and
anchorage details and locations.
I
I
c.
Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for
units with factory-applied color finishes.
I
D.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of louvers certifying that the products furnished comply
with requirements and are licensed to bear the AMCA seal based on tests made according to AMCA 500
and complying with AMCA's Certified Ratings Program.
I
E.
Product Test Reports: Indicate compliance of products with requirements based on comprehensive
testing of current products.
I
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.7
I
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain louvers and vents through one source from a single manufacturer where alike
in one or more respects regarding type, design, or factory-applied color fInish.
B.
SMACNA Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" reconunendations
for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.
I
c.
UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide motors and related components for motor-operated adjustable
louvers that are listed and labeled by UL and comply with applicable NEMA standards.
I
PROJECT CONDITIONS
I
A.
Field Measurements: Verify louver openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid
delaying the Work.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
I
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Airline Products Co.
2. Airolite Co.
3. All-Lite Louver Co,
4. Arrow United Industries.
5. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
6. Hart & Cooley, Inc.; Reliable Metal Products Division.
7. Industrial Louvers, Inc.
8. NCA Manufacturing, Inc.
9. Riesner Vent Brick Corp.
10. Ruskin Manufacturing; Tomkins Industries, Inc.
I
I
I
I
LOUVERS AND VENTS
10200 - 2
I
I
I
I
2.2
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.4
I
I
B.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated for each
designation in the Louver Schedule on the drawings.
MATERIALS
A.
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5 or T-52.
B.
Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise
recommended by metal producer for required finish.
C.
Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, alloy 319.
D.
Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 series stainless steel, unless otherwise
indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials.
1.
2.
Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.
Use Phillips flat-head screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Anchors and Inserts: Of type, size, and material required for loading and installation indicated. Use
nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as
needed for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors.
FABRlCATION, GENERAL
A.
Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for
shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B.
Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head and sill, to
produce uniform appearance.
C. Maintain equal louver blade spacing to produce uniform appearance.
D.
Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for
fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining materials' tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.
1.
Frame Type: Channel type, unless otherwise indicated,
E. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.
F.
Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than recommended by
manufacturer, or 72 inches o.c., whichever is less. At horizontal joints between louver units, provide
horizontal mullions, unless continuous vertical assemblies are indicated.
G.
Join frame members to one another and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view,
unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members
necessary.
FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS
A.
Louver Construction: Provide fixed-blade louvers with extruded-aluminum frames and blades.
B.
Horizontal Louvers: Either drainable- or nondrainable-b1ade type complying with the following:
I
LOUVERS AND VENTS
10200 - 3
2.5
I
l.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Louver Depth: 4 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
Louver Depth: As indicated.
Frame Thickness: 0.125 inch,
Blade Thickness: 0.125 inch.
AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.
I
I
FINISHES, GENERAL
I
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating fInishes.
I
B.
Finish louvers after assembly.
I
2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES
I
A.
Finish designations prefIxed by AA comply with system established by the Aluminum Association for
designating aluminum finishes.
B.
Baked-Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42Rlx (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical
Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specifIed below).
Apply baked enamel complying with paint manufacturer's specifIcations for cleaning, conversion coating,
and painting.
I
I
1.
Organic Coating: Thermosetting, modifIed-acrylic enamel primer/topcoat system complying with
AAMA 603.8, except with a minimum dry fIlm thickness of 1.5 mils, medium gloss.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
I
2.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
PREPARATION
I
A.
Coordinate Setting Drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of
anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such
items to Project site.
I
INSTALLATION
I
Locate and place louver units level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.
Use concealed anchorages where possible, Provide brass or lead washers fItted to screws where required
to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.
I
Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.
I
Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and j oint fillers, as indicated,
Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no evidence
remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refInished in the fIeld to the factory, make
required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units.
I
I
LOUVERS AND VENTS
10200 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
3.3
I
I
I
I
I
I
F.
Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation, as louver installation progresses, where
weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants
applied during louver installation.
ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTING
A.
Test operation of adjustable louvers and adjust as needed to produce fully functioning units that comply
with requirements.
B.
Periodically clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected by temporary covering to
remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accwnulate until final cleaning.
C.
Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to
finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.
D.
Protect louvers and vents from damage during construction. Use temporary protective coverings where
needed and approved by louver manufacturer. Remove protective covering at the time of Substantial
Completion.
E.
Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of
corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged
units and replace with new units.
1.
Clean and touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss
of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.
END OF SECTION 10200
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
-
-
-
iiii
LOUVERS AND VENTS
10200 - 5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
11II
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10520 - FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes the following:
1. Portable fire extinguishers.
2. Fire-protection cabinets.
3. Mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.
B. See Division 9 painting Sections for field painting fire-protection cabinets.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product Indicated.
1. Fire Extinguishersl Include rating and classification.
2. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Include door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, panel
style, and details of installation.
B. Maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10,
"Portable Fire Extinguishers."
B. Fire Extinguishersl Usted and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an
independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cablnetsl Usted and labeled to comply with requirements of
ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are Installed.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Speciai Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form In which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace components of portable fire extinguishers that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following I
a.
b.
Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.
Faulty operation of valves or release levers.
2. Warranty Period: (Six) years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
10520 - 1
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
DIVISION 10- SPECIALTIES
10520 - FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply to product selection:
1. Available Manufacturersl Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be Incorporated into the Work Include,
but are not limited to, manufacturers specified,
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the manufacturers specified.
3. Basis-of-Design Productl The design for each product is based on the product
named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named
product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.
MATERIALS
A.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 10081 A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
B.
Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer
for type of use and finish indicated, and as follows:
C.
1 . Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M).
Tempered Break Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 1.5 mm
thick.
PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A.
(Available ) Manufacturers:
1 . JL Industries, Inc.
2. Kidde Fymetics.
3. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
4. <Insert manufacturer's name.>
B.
General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each (fire-protection
cabinet and mounting bracket) indicated.
1. Instruction LabelsJ Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA la,
Appendix B (and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location,
Inspections. maintenance. and recharging).
C.
Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container <Insert drawing designation>: UL-
rated (4-A:60-B:C, 10-1b (4.5-kg)) nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-
based dry chemical in enameled-steel container,
FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET
A,
Basis-of-Design Productl A comparable product by one of the following:
10520 - 2
.
=
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
-
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10520 - FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
B.
(Available )Manufacturers:
1. JL Industries. Inc.
2. Kidde Fyrnetics.
3. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
C.
Cabinet Typel Suitable for fire (extinguisher).
D.
Cabinet Construction: (Nonrated).
E.
Cabinet Material: (Enameled-steel) sheet.
F.
Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed In walls of shallow depth to suit
style of trim Indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame
overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer
edge (backbend).
1. Square-Edge Trim: 1-1/4- to 1-1/2-inch (32- to 38-mm) backbend depth.
G.
Cabinet Trim Material) (Steel sheet).
H.
Door Material: (Steel sheet).
I.
Door Style: (Vertical duo panel with frame).
J,
Door Glazing: (Tempered break glass).
K.
Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for
cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.
1. Provide (manufacturer's standard).
2. Provide (manufacturer's standard hinge) permitting door to open 180 degrees.
L.
Accessories:
1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel. designed to secure fire
extinguisher to fire-protection cabinet with plated or baked-enamel finish.
2. Break-Glass Strike: Manufacturer's standard metal strike, complete with chain
and mounting clip, secured to cabinet.
3. Door Lock! (Cylinder lock, keyed alike to other cabinets).
4. Identification I Lettering complying with authorities having Jurisdiction for letter
style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
a. Identify fire extinguisher in flre-protection cabinet with the words "(FIRE
EXTINGUISHER) <Insert Identification>."
1) Location: Applied to (cabinet door)
2) Application Process: (Silk-screened)
3) Lettering Colon (Red).
4) Orientation: (Vertical).
M.
Finishes:
1 .
Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the following]
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
10520 - 3
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
10520 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10520 - FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
a. Exterior of cabinet (door, and trim), except for those surfaces indicated to
receive another finish.
b, Interior of cabinet( and door).
2. Steel: (Baked enamel, with minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm)) ,
a. Color and Texture: (As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range).
2.5 MOUNTING BRACKETS
A. (Available ) Manufacturers:
1. JL Industries, Inc.
2. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
3. Potter Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc.
B. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher
to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers
indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.
1 . Color: (Red).
C. Identification I Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size.
spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in
red letter decals applied to mounting surface.
a. Orientation: (Vertical).
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame,
door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style Indicated. Weld
joints and grind smooth.
1. Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.0428-inch- (1 ,1-
mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-lnch- (l6-mm-) thick,
fire-barrier material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.
B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials
indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.
1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design,
minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick,
2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.
C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with comers mitered, welded, and
ground smooth,
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
iiiii
-
.
.
-
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10520 - FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Examine wails and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where
(semi recessed) cabinets will be installed.
B. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. Remove and replace
damaged, defective, or undercharged units,
C. Prepare recesses for (semlrecessed) fire-protection cabinets as required by type and
size of cabinet and trim style.
D. Install fire-protection specialties in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not
indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
E. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten fire-protection cabinets to structure, square and
plumb.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire-protection cabinets. If wall
thickness Is not adequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed flre-
protection cabinets.
2. Provide Inside latch and lock for break-glass panels.
3. Fasten mounting brackets to Inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square
and plumb.
F. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at
locations indicated.
G. Identification I Apply (vinyl lettering) at locations indicated.
H. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that
Integral iocking devices operate properly.
I. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated
beyond successful repair.
END OF SECTION 10520
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
10520 - 5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10651 - OP~RABLE PANEL PARTITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes acoustically rated, flat-panel partitions supported from an
overhead track.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of operable panel partition Indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, details of installation.
accessories, attachments to other Work, weights, and required installation, storage, and
operating clearances.
1 . Calculations: Calculate requirements for supporting operable panel partitions
and verify capacity of carriers and track components to support loads; indicate
deflection limits for partition and adjacent construction.
2. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication
and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
C. Setting Drawings: For embedded Items and cutouts required in other work, including
support beam punching template.
D. Sampiesl For each exposed finish and for each color, pattern and texture required.
1. Fabric: 6" X 6" piece of fabric from dye lot to be used for the Work, with specified
treatments applied, Show complete pattern repeat,
2. Panel Face Material: Manufacturer's standard-size unit, not less than 3 inches (75
mm) square,
3. Panel Edge Material: Not less than full width by 3 inches (75 mm) long.
E. Product test reports,
F. Maintenance data.
1.3 QUAUTY ASSURANCE
A. Acoustical Performance Characteristics: Provide operable panel partitions identical to
those tested by a qualified testing agency per test methods Indicated.
1. Sound Transmission Class: Test assembly in a full-scale opening, 14 by 9 feet (4267
by 2743 mm). per ASTM E 90 and classified per ASTM E 413,
2. Noise Reduction Coefficient: Test assembly per ASTM C 423.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products tested per test method indicated
by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction!
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
10651 -1
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10651 - OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1 . Surface Burningl Flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 25 and 450,
respectively, per ASTM E 84.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2,1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated Into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
B, Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Hufcor Inc.
2. Modernfold, Inc.
3. Panelfold, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
2,3
A.
A. Steel Frame: Steel sheet, not less than (O.0747-inch (l.9-mm)) nominal specified
thickness for uncoated steel.
B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for
type of use, corrosion resistance, and finish indicated; ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M) for
extrusions; manufacturer's standard strengths and thicknesses for type of use.
1. Frame Reinforcing: Manufacturer's standard steel or aluminum,
Wood Framel Clear, vertical grain, straight, kiln-dried, (fire-retardant-treated) wood
members of manufacturer's standard species.
Steel Face/Uner Sheetsl Tension-leveled steel sheet.
Gypsum Board: ASTM C 36.
Plywood: DOC PS 1.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1.
Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2.
OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS, GENERAL
Panel Construction: Fabricate panels with top reinforcement as required to support
panel from suspension components and with reinforcement for hardware attachment.
Fabricate panels with tight hairline joints and concealed fasteners. Fabricate panels so
finished in-place partition is rigid; level; plumb; aligned, with tight joints and uniform
appearance; and free of bow, warp, twist, deformation, and surface and finIsh
irregularities.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
10651 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10651 - OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS
1 . Fabricate operable panel partitions, from manufacturer's standard sizes, to form
assembled systems Indicated.
B. Trim: Manufacturer's standard aluminum trim, (clear anodized).
C. Hardwarel Manufacturer's standard as required to operate operable panel partition
and accessories; with decorative, protective finish.
D. Acoustical Seals:
1 . Vertical Seals: Deep-nestlng, interlocking astragals mounted on each edge of
panel, with continuous PVC acoustical seal.
2. Horizontal Top Seals: Mechanical, retractable, constant-foree-contact) seal
exerting uniform constant pressure on track when extended.
3. Horizontal Bottom Seals: PVC-faced, mechanical, retractable, constant-force-
contact seal exerting uniform constant pressure on floor when extended, ensuring
horizontal and vertical sealing and resisting panel movement.
a. Mechanically Operated: Extension and retraction of bottom seal by
operating handle or built-in operating mechanism, with operating range
not less than the (l-1/2-inch (38-mm)) operating clearance between
retracted seal and floor finish.
E. Finish Facing: Factory applied to operable panel partitions with appropriate backing,
using mildew-resistant nonstaining adhesive as recommended by facing
manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Vinyl-Coated Fabric Wall Covering: Manufacturer's standard mildew-resistant,
washable, vinyl-coated fabric wail covering; complying with CFFA-W-l0l-B for
Type indicated; Class A; treated with antimicrobial additives capable of
inhibiting growth of microbes including, but not limited to, Staphylococcus
aureus, Escherichia coli, and Aspergillus niger.
F. Suspension Systems:
1. Tracks: Steel or aluminum with adjustable steel hanger rods for overhead support;
designed for type of operation, size, and weight of operable panel partition
indicated; in continuous system of track sections and accessories to
accommodate partition operation and storage configuration indicated.
a. Size track to support partition operation and storage without damage to
suspension system, operable panel partitions, or adjacent construction,
b. Limit track deflection to no more than 0.10 Inch (2.5 mm) between bracket
supports.
2. Panel Guide: Aluminum; finished with factory-applled, decorative, protective
finish.
3. Track Head Closure Trim: As required for acoustical performance; (with factory-
applied, decorative, protective finish),
4. (Multidirectional) Carriers: Trolley system as required for configuration type, size,
and weight of partition and for easy operation; with bali-bearing wheels.
5. Track intersections, Switches, and Accessories: As required for type of operation,
storage, track configuration, and layout Indicated for operable panel partition,
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
10651 - 3
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
10651 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10651 - OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS
and compatible with partition assembly specified. Fabricate track Intersections
and switches from steel or aluminum.
6. Aluminum Finishl Mill finish or manufacturer's standard. factory-applied,
decorative finish, unless otherwise Indicated.
7. Steel Finish: Factory-applied, corrosion-resistant. protective coating, unless
otherwise indicated.
2,4 OPERABLE PANEL PARTITION
A, Partition Operation and Configuration: (Manually operated. individual panels).
B. Panel Construction: (Manufacturer's standard panel construction complying with
requirements Indicated).
C. Panel Weight: (8 Ib/sq. ft. (40 kg/sq. m)) maximum.
D. Panel Thickness: Not less than (3 inches (75 mm)) ,
E. Edges: (Manufacturer's standard),
F, Initial Closurel (Fixed jamb).
G. Final Closure: (Constant-force, lever-operated. mechanical closure expanding from
panel edge to create a constant-pressure acoustical seal).
H. Finish Facingl
1. Vinyl-coated fabric wall covering complying with CFFA-W-lOl-B, Type (I) (II).
a. Total Weight: 12%
b. Color/Pattern: (As selected from manufacturer's full range).
I. STCi Sound transmission class of not less than (52).
J. NRC: Noise reduction coefficient of not less than (60).
K. NIC: Noise isolation class of not less than (40).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Examine flooring. structural support, and opening. with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of operable panel partitions. Proceed with installation only after
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Comply with ASTM E 557 and operable panel partition manufacturer's written
installation instructions.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIViSION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10651 - OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS
C. Adjust operable panel partitions to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free from
binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption,
or malfunction, throughout entire operational range.
3.2 FIELD QUAUTY CONTROL
A. Testing] (Engage) a qualified Independent testing and inspecting agency to perform
field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports,
B. Testing Methodology: Testing agency will test Installed operable panel partitions for
noise Isolation according to ASTM E 336, and classify according to ASTM E 413. Adjust
and fit partitions so assemblies comply with NIC test method requirements.
C. Testing Extentl Within each area Indicated, testing agency will randomly select an
operable panel partition Installation for testing.
D. Repair or replace operable panel partitions within areas where test results indicate
partitions do not comply with requirements, and retest partitions.
E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to
determine compliance of repaired, replaced, or addltlonai work with specified
requirements.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnei to adjust, operate, and maintain operable panel partitions,
END OF SECTION 10651
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
10651 - 5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10801 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes the following:
T. Toilet and bath accessories,
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product Indicated.
B, Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and Installation locations by room
of each accessory required. Use room (and product) designations indicated on
Drawings,
1.3 WARRANTY
A. Special Mirror Warrantyl Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees
to repair or replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects within (15) years
from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated Into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
C. Basis-of-Design Products: The design for toilet and bath accessories described in Part 2
are based on products indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
the named product or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. Toilet and Bath Accessories:
a. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc.
b. American Specialties, Inc.
c. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
d. Bradley Corporation.
e. <Insert manufacturer.>
2. Warm-Air Dryers:
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
10801 -1
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G,
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10801 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a, A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc.
b. American Dryer, Inc.
c. American Specialties, Inc,
'd. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
e. Bradley Corporation.
f. World Dryer.
g. <Insert manufacturer.>
3. Infant-Care Products:
a. American Infant Care Products Inc.
b. American Specialties, Inc.
c. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO).
d. Koala Corporation.
MATERIALS
Stainiess Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, No.4 finish (satin), 0.0312-inch (0.8-mm) minimum
nominal thickness. unless otherwise indicated.
Brass: ASTM B 19, ASTM B 16 (ASTM B 16M), or ASTM B 30 castings,
Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366/A 366M, O.0359-inch (0.9-mm) minimum nominal thickness,
Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 6531 A 653M, G60 (Z180).
Chromium Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).
Baked-Enamel Flnishl Factory-applied, gloss-white, baked-acrylic-enamel coating.
Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, nominal 6,0 mm thick, with
silvering, electroplated copper coating, and protective organic coating complying
with FS DD-M-411 ,
H. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devicesl ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication.
I. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, tamper
and theft resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed,
J. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and
resupplying. Provide minimum of (six) keys to Owner's representative.
2.3 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
A. Paper Towel Dispenser - T A-1 :
1. Basis-of-Design Productl Bobrick, B-264.
2. Mountingl (Surface).
3, Towel Type and Capacity: ~C" fold.
4. Material: Stainless steel.
5. Lockset: Tumbler type.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
10801 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 10 - SPECiALTIES
10801 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
6. Refill Indicators: Pierced slots at sides or front.
B. Toilet Tissue Dispenser - TA-2:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick, B-264.
2. Type: (Single-roll dispenser),
3. Mounting: (Surface mounted).
4. Material: (Chrome-plated steel).
5. Operation: (Noncontrol delivery with standard spindle),
6. Capacity: (Designed for 4-112- or 5-inch- (114- or 127-mm-) diameter-core tissue
rolls) .
C. Grab Bar - TA-5 and TA-61
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-7806-36 & 48,
2. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick,
3. Mounting: (Concealed),
4. Gripping Surfaces: (Smooth, satin finish).
5. Outside Diameter: (1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for medium-duty applications).
D. Sanitary Napkin Disposal Unit - TA-7 & TA-7A:
1. Basis-of-Design Productl Bobrick B-354 & B-353.
2. Mounting! (Partition mounted, dual access).
3. Material: Stainless steel.
E. Mirror Unit - TA-41
1: Basis-of-Design Productl Bobrick B-293.
2. Frame: (Stainless steel, fixed tilt).
F. Mop and Broom Holder TA- 8:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick, B-223 x 36
2. Material: Stainless steel.
3. Length: (36 Inches (914 mm)).
4. Mop/Broom Holders: (Four), spring-loaded, rubber hat, com type,
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and
recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in
locations and at heights indicated.
1 .
Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 Ibf (1112 N), when
tested according to method in ASTM F 446,
I
I
-
iiii
-
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
10801 - 3
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
10801 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10801 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
B. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms
function properly, Replace damaged or defective items. Remove temporary labels
and protective coatings.
END OF SECTION 10801
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
11400.- FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes food service equipment.
B. See Division 15 Sections for supply and exhaust fans; exhaust ductwork; service
roughing-ins; drain traps; atmospheric vents; valves, pipes, and fittings; fire-extinguishing
systems; and other materials required to complete food service equipment installation.
C. See Division 16 Sections for connections to fire alarm systems, wiring, disconnects, and
other electrical materials required to complete food service equipment installation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of food service equipment indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, wiring diagrams roughing-in
dimensions, fabrication details, service requirements, and attachments to other Work.
1. Piping Diagrams! Detail piping systems and differentiate between manufacturer-
installed and field-Installed piping.
C. Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating locations of food service
equipment and service utilities. Key equipment with item numbers and descriptions
indicated in Contract Documents. include plans and elevations of equipment access-
and maintenance-clearance requirements, details of concrete or masonry bases and
floor depressions, and service-utility characteristics.
D. Samplesl For each exposed finish and for each color and texture required.
E. Refrigeration System Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers or their authorized
agents certifying that systems fumished will maintain operating temperatures indicated
in the areas or equipment that they will serve.
F. Maintenance Datal Include a product schedule.
1. Product Schedule: For each food service equipment item, Include Item number
and description Indicated in Contract Documents, mal)ufacturer's name and
model number, and authorized service agencies' addresses and telephone
numbers.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NFPA Codes: Comply with the following:
1. NFPA 17, "Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems."
2. NFPA 17 A "Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems."
3. NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas Code."
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
11400 - 1
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
11400 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
11400 - FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
4. NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code."
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories! Usted and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
C. AGA Certification: Provide gas-burning appliances certified by AGA.
D, ASME Compliancel Fabricate and label steam-generating and closed steam-heating
equipment to comply with ASME Boller and Pressure Vessel Code.
E. ASH RAE Compliance: Provide mechanical refrigeration systems complying with
ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration."
F. NSF Standards: Comply with applicable NSF standards and criteria and provide NSF
Certification Mark on each equipment item, unless otherwise indicated.
G. ANSI Standards: Comply with applicable ANSi standards for electric-powered and gas-
burning appliances; for piping to compressed-gas cylinders; and for plumbing fittings,
including vacuum breakers and air gaps, to prevent siphonage in water piping,
H, Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference (at Project site).
1,4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of food service equipment installation areas by
field measurements and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings and Coordination
Drawings.
B. Coordinate equipment layout and installation with other work, including light fixtures,
HV AC equipment, fire-suppression system components, seNice-utility connections,
concrete bases, positive slopes to drains, floor depressions, insulated floors, equipment
supports, and roof curbs and penetrattons.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. All equipment is to be guaranteed free from defects In workmanship andlor material for
a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance of same by the Architect and
Owner unless noted In the Itemized Specifications.
1.6 SERVICE DATE AND GUARANTEES
A. After installation, equipment manufacturer's authorized service representative(s) shall be
required to visit the job and check all equipment Installations and connections, test and
verify that the equipment Is ready for operation. this Inspection shall be done in addition
to and at least two (2) weeks prior to the manufacturer's representative or trained
instructor providing training on the care, use and operation of each piece of
equipment. This testing of equipment Is required to avoid delays and conflicts at start-up
time.
B. Food Service Equipment Contractor shall provide one (1) year warranty from start-up
date, on all equipment including labor and mileage without any cost to Owner. Food
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
11400 - FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
SeNice Equipment Contractor shall provide additional four (4) year warranty on
refrigeration compressors (not to include parts, labor or mileage).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
A. Where subparagraph titles below introduce lists in this Article, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Available Products: subject to compliance with requirements, products that may
be incorporated into the Work Include, but are not limited to, the products
specified.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
B. Item NO.1 - Range 36" Restaurant, Electric (1 ea required). Vulcan Hart Model E36L.
Range, 36" Restaurant Electric, (6) 2kw French Hot Plates 9 V2" round French
w Ilnfinite controls, standard oven w 1(1) rack sls front, sides, single deck high shelf &
6" legs, 17.0kw - 120/208 - 3 Phase.
C. Item NO.2 - Exhaust Hood
1 . See Mechanical Section
D. Item No.3 - Work Table (3 required).
Duke model 3145-3072, 30" x 72" x 34" high. Legs shall be 1-5/8" o.d. 14 gauge
stainiess steel with stainless steel adjustable feet. Fumish with one each #177 stainless
steel drawer.
E. Item No.4 - Three Compartment Pot Sink W IHeater (1 required).
Low Temp custom three compartment 14 gauge stainless steel sink with coved
corners, stainless steei legs and feet. Each compartment to be 30" x 30" x 14" deep.
Each compartment to have #14535, 1-1/2" lever waste without overflow. Furnish two
sets T&S Brass B-231EE faucets. Sink to have 2 each 36" integral welded drainboard,
one right and one left with 18 gauge stainless steel undershelf, legs and feet. Provide
sink with stainless steei overshelf, 15" deep. Provide sink with one each Hatco model
3-CS-9 sink heater. Fumish sink heater with all stainless steel body and base, rinse
temperature Indicating gauge and rinse temperature light. Mount heater in left
compartment.
F. Item No.5 - Two Compartment Vegetable Sink (1 required).
Low Temp custom two compartment sink 14 gauge stainless steel sink with coved
corners, stainless steel legs and feet. Each compartment to be 24" x 30" x 14" deep.
Each compartment to have # 14535, 1-1/2" lever waste without overflow. Fumish one
set T&S Brass B-231 faucet. Sink to have one each 30" Integral welded drainboards,
18 gauge stainless steel undershelf, legs and feet.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
11400 - 3
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
11400 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
11400 - FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
3.1 .1 INSTALLATION
A. Preparation I Examine roughing-in for piping, mechanical, and electrical systems to verify
locations of connections before installatlon.
B. GeneralJ Install food service equipment level, plumb and with access and maintenance
clearances according to manufacturer's written Instructions, referenced standards, and
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Service Une CutoutSI Locate where required to run service lines through equipment to
make final connections, form neatly.
D. Fixed Equipment: Securely anchor and attach items and accessories to walls, floors, or
bases with stainless-steel fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Base-Mounted Equipment: Install cabinets and similar equipment on concrete or
masonry bases in a bed of sealant.
F. Trim: Install trim strips and similar items requiring fasteners in a bed of sealant, Fasten with
stainless-steel fasteners at 48 inches (1200 mm) o,c. maximum.
G. Sealant Joints: Install sealant in Joints between equipment and abutting surfaces with
continuous joint backing, unless otherwise indicated. Provide airtight watertight. vermin-
proof. sanitary joints.
3.1.2 DEMONSTRATION
A. Startup Services:
1. Coordinate food service equipment startup with service-utility
testing, balancing, and adjustments.
2. Remove protective coverings and clean and sanitize equipment
both inside and out and relamp equipment with integral lighting.
3. Test refrigeration equipment's ability to maintain specified
operating temperature under heavy-use conditions. Repair or
replace equipment that does not maintain specified operating
temperature,
4. Test water, drain, gas, steam, 011, refrigerant and liquid-carrying
components for leaks. Repair or replace ieaking components.
B. Demonstration: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's
maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain each Item of food service
equipment.
END OF SECTION 11400
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12491 - HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .1 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes the following blinds with aluminum louver slats:
1 . Minlbllnds.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product Indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, details of installation,
operational clearances, and relationship to adjoining Work.
1. Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
C. Samplesl For each exposed finish and for each color and texture required,
D. Window Treatment Schedule: Use same room designations indicated on Drawings.
E. Maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Horizontal Louver Blinds Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products (passing
flame-resistance testing according to NFPA 701).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
A. Available Productsl Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Hunter Douglas Window Fashions; <Insert product>.
2. Levolor Contract; <Insert product>.
C. Finish: Baked polyester.
1. Slats: (One color as Indicated).
2. (HeadrallsNalances)I (Match) louver slats as indicated.
3. Component Coion Rails, cords, ladders, and exposed-to-view metal and plastic
(matching or coordinating with slat color).
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
12491 - 1
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
12491 -2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12491 - HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
4. Colors, Textures, Patterns, and Glosses: (As selected from manufacturer's full
range) .
D. Louver Slats: Aluminum, alloy and temper recommended by producer for type of use
and finish indicated; with crowned profile(and radlused corners).
1 , Minibllnds:
a, Nominal Slat Width: 1 inch (25 mm).
b. Slat Spacing: (Manufacturer's standard),
2. Nominal Slat Thickness: Not less than (0.006 inch (0.15 mm)).
E. Headrail: Formed steel or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled; fully
enClosing operating mechanisms on three sides and ends.
F. HeadrailNalance: Decorative, integrated headraillvalance not requiring a separate
valance or end brackets for finished appearance; formed steel or extruded aluminum;
long edges returned or rolled; fully enclosing operating mechanisms on three sides and
ends,
G. Bottom Rail: Formed-steel or extruded-aluminum tube, sealed with plastic or metal
capped ends; with enclosed and protected ladders and tapes to prevent their contact
with sill.
1. Top contoured to match crowned shape of louver slat.
2. Bottom contoured for minimizing light gaps,
H. Tilt Control: Enclosed worm gear mechanism(, slip clutch or detachable wand
preventing overrotation,) and linkage rod.
1, Tilt Operation: Manual with (clear plastic wand).
2. Length of Tilt Control: (Full length of blind).
3. Tilt: Full.
I. Uft Operation: Manual, cord lock; locks pull cord to stop blind at any position in
ascending or descending travel.
J. Ladders! Evenly spaced to prevent long-term louver sag.
1 . Material: (Braided string),
a. Tape Color, Texture, and Patternl (As Indicated by manufacturer's
designations) .
K. Valance: (Manufacturer's standard).
L. Mountingl (Ceiling), permitting easy removal and replacement without damaging
blind or adjacent surfaces and finishes; with spacers and shims required for blind
placement and alignment indicated.
1 . Provide Intermediate support brackets if end support spacing exceeds spacing
recommended by manufacturer for weight and size of blind,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12491 - HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Product Standard and Description: Comply with AWCMA Document 1029, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Concealed Componentsl Noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials.
1. Uftlng and Tilting Mechanisms: With permanently lubricated moving parts.
C. Unit Sizes: Fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at
74 deg F (23 deg C):
1. Blind Units Installed between (Inside) Jambs:
a. Width: Equal to 1/4 inch (6 mm) per side or 1/2 inch (12 mm) total, plus or
minus 1/8 inch (3 mm). less than jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in
which each blind is installed,
b. Length: Equal to 1/4 inch (6 mm), plus or minus 1/8 Inch (3 mm), less than
head-to-sill dimension of opening in which each blind is installed.
2. Blind Units Installed Outside Jambs: Width and length as Indicated, with
terminations between blinds of end-to-end Installations at centerlines of mullion or
other defined vertical separations between openings.
D. Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of blind, for
supporting headraiL (valance.) and operating hardware, and for hardware position
and blind mounting method indicated.
E. Installation Fasteners: Not fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal
noncorrosive to blind hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing
to supporting substrate; and supporting blinds and accessories under conditions of
normal use.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install blinds level and plumb and aligned with adjacent units according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Install Intermediate support as required to prevent
deflection in headrall. Allow clearances between adjacent blinds and for operating
glazed opening's operation hardware, if any.
1. Location: Exterior louver edges in any position are not closer than (1 inch (25
mm)) to interior face of glass.
B. Flush Mounted: Install blinds with louver edges flush with finish face of opening If slats
are tilted open.
C. Jamb Mounted: Install headrail flush with face of opening jamb and head.
D. Head Mounted: Install headrall on face of opening head.
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
12491 - 3
McBEAN COMMUNITY CENTER
12491 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12491 - HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
E. Recessed: Install headrall concealed within blind pocket.
F. Adjusting: Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free
from binding or malfunction throughout entire operatlonai"range.
G. C1eaningl Clean blind surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
END OF SECTION 12491
I
I
SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
I
PART 1- GENERAL
I
1.1
I
I
1.2
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.3
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.4
I
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following basic mechanical materials and methods to complement other Divi-
sion 15 Sections.
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2. Concrete base construction requirements.
3. Escutcheons.
4. Dielectric fittings.
5. Flexible connectors.
6. Mechanical sleeve seals.
7. Equipment nameplate data requirements.
8. Nonshrink grout for equipment installations.
9. Field-fabricated metal equipment supports.
10. Installation requirements common to equipment specification sections.
11. Cutting and patching.
12. Touchup painting and finishing.
B.
Pipe and pipe fitting materials are specified in Division 15 piping system Sections.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and
duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawl
spaces, and tunnels.
B.
Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces
and mechanical equipment rooms.
C.
Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors, or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures
and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations,
D.
Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building
occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts,
E.
Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and
physical contact by building occupants, but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include
installations within unheated shelters.
SUBMITI ALS
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15050 - 1
1.5
1.6
C.
D.
1.7
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
I
A,
Product Data: For dielectric fittings, flexible connectors, mechanical sleeve seals, and identification ma-
terials and devices.
I
B,
Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation for metal supports and anchorage for mechanical ma-
terials and equipment.
I
c.
Samples: Of color, lettering style, and other graphic representation required for each identification mate-
rial and device.
I
QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
A.
Comply with ASME A13.! for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identifi-
cation devices.
I
B.
Equipment Selection: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics, physical dimensions, capacities, and
ratings may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting me-
chanical and electrical services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases, and equipment spaces are in-
creased. Additional costs shall be approved in advance by appropriate Contract Modification for these
increases. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies of equipment are specified, equipment must meet
design and commissioning requirements.
I
I
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
I
A,
Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and
handling to prevent pipe end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
I
B.
Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural ca-
pacity of floor, if stored inside.
I
Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt.
Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
I
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
I
Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other building components,
Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction
to allow for mechanical installations.
I
Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and
other structural components, as they are constructed.
I
Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow
of the Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning before closing in building,
I
Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and ser-
vices, Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling
agencIes,
I
F.
Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors if mechanical items requiring access are concealed
behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors."
I
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15050 - 2
I
I
I
G,
Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting, if devices are ap-
plied to surfaces. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
I
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Dielectric Unions:
I
I
I
2.
I
I
3.
I
I
4.
I
5.
I
I
6.
I
I
a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.
b. Central Plastics Co.
c. Eclipse, Inc.; Rockford-Eclipse Div.
d. Epco Sales Inc.
e. Hart Industries International, .Inc.
f Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
g. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.
Dielectric Flanges:
a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.
b. Central Plastics Co.
c. Epco Sales Inc.
d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:
a.
b.
Calpico, Inc.
Central Plastics Co.
Dielectric Couplings:
a. Calpico, Inc.
b. Lochinvar Corp.
Dielectric Nipples:
a.
b.
c.
Grinnell Corp.; Grinnell Supply Sales Co.
Perfection Corp.
Victaulic Co. of America.
Rubber, Flexible Connectors:
a.
b.
General Rubber Corp.
Mercer Rubber Co.
Metraflex Co.
Proco Products, Inc.
Red Valve Co., Inc.
Uniflex, Inc.
c.
d,
e.
f
7. Mechanical Sleeve Seals:
I
I
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15050 - 3
2.2
A.
B.
2.3
A.
B.
2.4
I
a.
b,
Calpico, Inc.
Metraflex Co.
ThunderlineILink -Seal.
I
c.
I
PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
I
Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe and fitting materials and joining methods.
Pipe Threads: ASME B 1.20, 1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
I
JOINING MATERIALS
I
Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.
I
1.
ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, l/8-inch maximum thickness, unless thickness or
specific material is indicated.
I
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges,
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
I
2.
A WW A Cll 0, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring
type, unless otherwise indicated.
I
C.
Flange Bolts and Nuts: AS ME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated,
D.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32.
I
1. Alloy Sn95 or Alloy Sn94: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent silver, with 0.10 percent
lead content.
I
E.
Brazing Filler Metals: A WS A5,8.
1.
2,
BCuP Series: Copper-phosphorus alloys.
BAgl: Silver alloy.
I
F.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS Dl0.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness
and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
I
G,
Flanged, Ductile-Iron Pipe Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: A WW A ClIO, rubber gasket, carbon-steel bolts and
nuts.
I
H.
Couplings: Iron-body sleeve assembly, fabricated to match OD of plain-end, pressure pipes.
1.
2.
3,
4,
5,
Sleeve: ASTM A 126, Class B, gray iron.
Followers: ASTM A 47 malleable iron or ASTM A 536 ductile iron,
Gaskets: Rubber.
Bolts and Nuts: A WW A Cll1.
Finish: Enamel paint.
I
I
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
I
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15050 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.5
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.6
I
A.
General: Assembly or fitting with insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals, to prevent gal-
vanic action and stop corrosion.
B.
Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain, and weld-neck end types
and matching piping system materials.
C.
Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
D.
Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180
degF.
E.
Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig nurumum
working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
F.
Dielectric-Flange Insulation Kits: Field-assembled, companion-flange assembly, full-face or ring type.
Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic wash-
ers, and steel backing washers.
1. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 150- or 300-psig minimum work-
ing pressure as required to suit system pressures.
G.
Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
H.
Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain,
threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A.
General: Fabricated from materials suitable for system fluid and that will provide flexible pipe connec-
tions. Include 125-psig minimum working-pressure rating, unless higher working pressure is indicated,
and ends according to the following:
1. 2-Inch NPS and Smaller: Threaded.
2. 2-l/2-Inch NPS and Larger: Flanged.
3. Option for 2-l/2-Inch NPS and Larger: Grooved for use with keyed couplings.
B.
Rubber, Flexible Connectors: CR or EPDM elastomer rubber construction, with multiple plies ofNP fab-
ric, molded and cured in hydraulic presses. Reinforcement shall be DuPont Kevlar. Solid steel rings
shall be used within the raised face rubber ends to prevent pullout. Include 125-psig minimum working-
pressure rating at 220 deg F. Safety factors to burst and flange pullout shall be a minimum of 3 to 1 and
all connectors shall have permanent markings verifying a 5 minute factory test at twice the rated pressure.
Units may be straight or elbow type, unless otherwise indicated. All connectors used on potable water
piping shall labeled in compliance with NSF 61.
MEC~CALSLEEVESEALS
A.
Description: Modular design, with interlocking rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space be-
tween pipe and sleeve. Include connecting bolts and pressure plates.
2.7 PIPING SPECIALTIES
I
I
BASIC MEC~CAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15050 - 5
2.8
I
A.
Sleeves: The following materials are for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations:
I
1.
Steel Sheet Metal: 0.0239-inch minimwn thickness, galvanized, round tube closed with welded
longitudinal joint.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends
and integral waters top, unless otherwise indicated.
Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
I
2,
3.
I
4.
a. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
I
B.
Escutcheons: Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; deep-pattern type if required to conceal pro-
truding fittings and sleeves.
I
1.
2.
3.
ill: Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping.
aD: Completely cover opening.
Cast Brass: One piece, with set screw.
I
a.
b.
Finish: Rough brass.
Finish: Polished chrome-plate.
I
4,
5.
6.
Stamped Steel: One piece, with set screw and chrome-plated fmish.
Stamped Steel: Split plate, with concealed hinge, set screw, and chrome-plated finish.
Cast-Iron Floor Plate: One-piece casting.
I
IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS
I
A.
General: Manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as refer-
enced in other Division 15 Sections, If more than one type is specified for application, selection is In-
staller's option, but provide one selection for each product category.
I
B.
Equipment Nameplates: Metal nameplate with operational data engraved or stamped; permanently fas-
tened to equipment.
I
1.
Data: Manufacturer, product name, model nwnber, serial number, capacity, operating and power
characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and similar essential data.
Location: Accessible and visible location.
I
2.
c.
Pressure-Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, permanent adhesive, color-coded,
pressure-sensitive vinyl, complying with ASME A 13 .1.
I
D.
Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-res in-laminate
engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine subcore, unless
otherwise indicated.
I
1.
2.
Fabricate in sizes required for message.
Engraved with engraver's standard letter style, of sizes and with wording to match equipment iden-
tification.
Punch for mechanical fastening.
Thickness: 1/16 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless-steel screws or contact-type permanent adhesive.
I
3.
4.
5.
I
E.
Plastic Equipment Markers: Color-coded, laminated plastic, Comply with the following color code:
I
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15050 - 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Green: Cooling equipment and components,
Yellow: Heating equipment and components.
Yellow/Green: Combination cooling and heating equipment and components.
Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components.
Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet any criteria above.
For hazardous equipment, use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1.
Nomenclature: Include the following, matching terminology on schedules as closely as possible:
a.
b.
Name and plan number.
Equipment service.
Design capacity.
Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions, and rpm.
c.
d.
8.
Size: Approximate 2-1/2 by 4 inches for control devices, dampers, and valves; and 4-1/2 by 6
inches for equipment.
F.
Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in mechanical
identification, with corresponding designations indicated. Use numbers, lettering, and wording indicated
for proper identification and operation/maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment.
1.
Multiple Systems: If multiple systems of same generic name are indicated, provide identification
that indicates individual system number and service such as "Boiler No.3," "Air Supply No. lH,"
or "Standpipe FI2."
2.9 GROUT
A.
Nonshrink, Norunetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B.
I
I
I
1.
Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout, nonstaining, non-
corrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
Design Mix: 5000-psig, 28-day compressive strength.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
2.
3.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Install piping as described below, unless piping Sections specify otherwise. Individual Divi-
sion 15 piping Sections specify unique piping installation requirements.
B.
General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location
and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and cal-
culate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated,
unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C.
Install piping at indicated slope.
D.
Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
E.
Install piping in concealed interior and exterior locations, except in equipment rooms and service areas.
F.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15050 - 7
I
G.
Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls, Diagonal runs are
prohibited, unless otherwise indicated.
I
H.
Install piping tight to slabs, bearns, joists, columns, walls, and other building elements. Allow sufficient
space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal.
I
I.
Install piping to allow application of insulation plus I-inch clearance around insulation,
I
J.
Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.
I
K.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
L.
Install couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions.
I
M.
Install pipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls, wall board partitions, and
suspended ceilings according to the following:
I
1. Chrome-Plated Piping: Cast brass, one piece, with set screw, and polished chrome-plated fmish.
Use split-casting escutcheons ifrequired, for existing piping.
2. Uninsulated Piping Wall Escutcheons: Cast brass or stamped steel, with set screw.
3, Uninsulated Piping Floor Plates in Utility Areas: Cast-iron floor plates.
4. Insulated Piping: Cast brass or stamped steel; with concealed hinge, spring clips, and chrome-
plated finish.
5. Piping in Utility Areas: Cast brass or stamped steel, with set-screw or spring clips.
I
I
N. Sleeves are not required for core drilled holes.
O.
Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by PE removable sleeves.
I
P.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, and concrete floor and roof slabs.
I
1, Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a.
Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet
areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab
as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
I
2.
3.
Build sleeves into new walls and slabs as work progresses.
Install sleeves large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or
pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a, Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than 6-inch NPS.
b, Steel, Sheet-Metal Sleeves: For pipes 6-inch NPS and larger, penetrating gypsum-board
partitions.
c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Secure
flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to
2 inches above fmished floor level. Refer to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and
Trim" for flashing.
I
I
I
1)
Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.
I
4.
Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe in-
sulation, using elastomeric joint sealants. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materi-
als.
Use Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use 0, neutral-curing silicone sealant, unless otherwise indi-
cated.
I
I
5.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15050 - 8
I
I
I
Q.
I
I
I
R.
I
I
S.
I
T.
Aboveground, Exterior-Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve
seals. Size sleeve for I-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve
seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches in diameter and larger.
3. Assemble and install mechanical sleeve seals according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Tighten bolts that cause rubber sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
Underground, Exterior-Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe
penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for I-inch annular clear space between pipe and
sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1.
Assemble and install mechanical sleeve seals according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Tighten bolts that cause rubber sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fIre rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe
penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with frrestopping materials. Refer to Division 7 Section "Firestop-
ping" for materials.
Verify fmal equipment locations for roughing-in.
I
v.
U. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in individual pip-
ing specification Sections:
1.
2.
3.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to A WS's "Soldering Manual," Chapter "The Solder-
ing of Pipe and Tube"; or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to A WS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and
Tube."
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B 1.20.1. Cut threads
full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ill. Join
pipe fIttings and valves as follows:
4.
5.
a.
Note internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat or
wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads, unless dry seal thread-
ing is specified.
Align threads at point of assembly.
Tighten joint with wrench. Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe is being threaded.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or dam-
aged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
b.
c.
d.
e.
6.
Welded Joints: Construct joints according to A WS D10.12, "Recommended Practices and Proce-
dures for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe," using qualified processes and welding operators ac-
cording to "Quality Assurance" Article.
Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and
thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Assemble joints by se-
quencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possi-
ble. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly using torque
wrench.
7.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15050 - 9
3.2
I
W.
Piping Connections: Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
I
1.
Install unions, in piping 2-inch NPS and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to
each piece of equipment with 2-inch NPS or smaller threaded pipe connection.
Install flanges, in piping 2-1/2-inch NPS and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at [mal connec-
tion to each piece of equipment with flanged pipe connection.
Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar
metals.
Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals,
I
2.
3.
I
4.
I
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
I
A.
Install equipment to provide maximwn possible headroom, ifmounting heights are not indicated.
B.
Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are shown only in dia-
grammatic form. Refer conflicts to Architect.
I
C.
Install equipment level and plwnb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components
in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
I
D.
Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components,
Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimwn interference to other installations. Extend
grease fittings to accessible locations,
I
E.
Install equipment giving right of way to piping installed at required slope.
I
F.
Install flexible connectors on equipment side of shutoff valves, horizontally and parallel to equipment
shafts ifpossible,
I
3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A.
Piping Systems: Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of flow.
I
1.
Plastic markers, with application systems. Install on insulation segment if required for hot, unin-
sulated piping.
Locate pipe markers as follows if piping is exposed in finished spaces, machine rooms, and acces-
sible maintenance spaces, such as shafts, tunnels, plenums, and exterior nonconcealed locations:
I
2.
a. Near each valve and control device.
b. Near each branch, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Mark each pipe
at branch, if flow pattern is not obvious.
c. Near locations if pipes pass through walls, floors, ceilings, or enter nonaccessible enclo-
sures.
d. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.
e, Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
f. Spaced at maximwn of 50-foot intervals along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in
congested areas of piping and equipment.
g. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced markers.
I
I
I
I
B.
Equipment: Install engraved plastic-laminate sign or equipment marker on or near each major item of
mechanical equipment.
I
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15050 - 10
I
I
I
I
I
1.
Lettering Size: Minimum l/4-inch- high lettering for name of unit if viewing distance is less than
24 inches, 1/2-inch- high lettering for distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger letter-
ing for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths of size of princi-
pal lettering.
Text of Signs: Provide name of identified unit. Include text to distinguish between multiple units,
inform user of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of
hazards and improper operations.
2.
I
C. Adjusting: Relocate identifying devices as necessary for unobstructed view in fInished construction.
3.4 PAINTING AND FINISHING
I
A.
Refer to Division 9 Section "Painting" for paint materials, surface preparation, and application of paint.
I
B. Apply paint to exposed piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Interior, Ferrous Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel fInish. Include fInish coat over enamel
undercoat and primer.
Interior, Galvanized-Steel Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel fmish. Include two fInish coats
over galvanized metal primer.
Interior, Ferrous Supports: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel fmish. Include finish coat over enamel
undercoat and primer.
Exterior, Ferrous Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel fInish. Include two finish coats over
rust-inhibitive metal primer.
Exterior, Galvanized-Steel Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include two fInish coats
over galvanized metal primer.
Exterior, Ferrous Supports: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include two fInish coats over
rust-inhibitive metal primer.
I
I
I
I
I
c.
D.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Do not paint piping specialties with factory-applied finish.
Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted fInishes with materials and proce-
dures to match original factory fmish.
I
3.5 CONCRETE BASES
I
I
3.6
I
I
3.7
I
I
A.
A.
B.
Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than
supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's setting templates for anchor bolt and tie
locations. Use 3000-psig, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Divi-
sion 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to sup-
port and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
Field Welding: Comply with A WS Dl.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
CUTTING AND PATCHING
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15050 - 11
3.8
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H,
I
A.
Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary for mechani-
cal installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
I
B.
Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces,
I
GROUTING
I
Install nonmetallic, nonshrink, grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other
equipment base plates, and anchors. Mix grout according to manufacturer's written instructions.
I
Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
I
Avoid air entrapment during placing of grout.
I
Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
Place grout on concrete bases to provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
I
Place grout around anchors.
Cure placed grout according to manufacturer's written instructions.
I
END OF SECTION 15050
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15050 - 12
I
I
I
SECTION 15055 - MOTORS
I
PART 1- GENERAL
I
1.1
I
I
1.2
I
I
I
A.
A.
B.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes basic requirements for factory-installed motors.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls" for mounting motors and
vibration isolation and seismic-control devices.
Division 15 Sections for application of motors and reference to specific motor requirements for
motor-driven equipment.
.2.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
I
I
1.4
I
I
I
I
1.5
I
I
I
.
.
MOTORS
A.
A.
B.
c.
A.
Factory-Installed Motor: A motor installed by motorized-equipment manufacturer as a component of
equipment.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Source Limitations: Obtain field-installed motors of a single type through one source from a single
manufacturer.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
Comply with NFPA 70.
COORDINATION
Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices. Provide motors that are:
1.
Compatible with the following:
a. Magnetic controllers.
2.
Designed and labeled for use with variable frequency controllers, and suitable for use throughout
speed range without overheating.
Matched to torque and horsepower requirements of the load,
Matched to ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
3.
4.
15055 - 1
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2,1
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.3
MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
I
A.
Motor requirements apply to factory-installed motors except as follows:
I
1. Different ratings, performance, or characteristics for a motor are specified in another Section.
2. Manufacturer for a factory-installed motor requires ratings, performance, or characteristics, other
than those specified in this Section, to meet performance specified.
I
MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
I
Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: Three phase.
Motors Smaller Than 1/2 HP: Single phase.
I
Frequency Rating: 60 Hz.
I
Voltage Rating: NEMA standard voltage selected to operate on nominal circuit voltage to which motor is
connected.
Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 105 deg F.
I
Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at
designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without
exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
I
POL YFHASE MOTORS
I
A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
I
B.
Efficiency: Standard efficiency according to NEMA MG 1, Para. 12.59 and Table 12-10.
c.
Stator: Copper windings, unless otherwise indicated.
I
1, Multispeed motors shall have separate winding for each speed.
D.
Rotor: Squirrel cage, unless otherwise indicated,
I
E, Bearings: Double-shielded, prelubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
F.
Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating, unless otherwise indicated.
I
G.
Insulation: Class F, unless otherwise indicated.
I
H.
Code Letter Designation:
1.
2,
Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or G.
Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
I
1. Enclosure: Cast iron for motors 7.5 hp and larger; rolled steel for motors smaller than 7.5 hp.
I
MOTORS 15055 - 2
I
I
I
I
2.4
I
I
I
I
I
2.5
I
I
I
I
I
1.
Finish: Gray enamel.
POL YFHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated
with and approved by controller manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Designed with critical vibration frequencies outside operating range of controller output.
Temperature Rise: Matched to rating for Class B insulation.
Insulation: Class H.
Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors.
B.
Source Quality Control: Perform the following tests on each motor according to NEMA MG 1:
1.
2.
3,
4.
Measure winding resistance.
Read no-load current and speed at rated voltage and frequency.
Measure locked rotor current at rated frequency.
Perform high-potential test.
SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A.
Type: One of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:
1.
2,
3.
Permanent-split capacitor.
Split-phase start, capacitor run.
Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B. Shaded-Pole Motors: For motors 1/20 hp and smaller only.
c.
Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when
winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-
protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.
D.
Bearings: Ball type for belt-connected motors and other motors with high radial forces on motor shaft;
sealed, prelubricated-sleeve type for other single-phase motors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
I
I
I
I
I
MOTORS
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1.
Run each motor with its controller. Demonstrate correct rotation, alignment, and speed at motor
design load.
Test interlocks and control features for proper operation.
Verify that current in each phase is within nameplate rating.
2.
3.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform the
following:
15055 - 3
I
1.
Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical connections
for compliance with requirements.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
Verify bearing lubrication.
Verify proper motor rotation.
Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
I
2.
I
3.
4.
5,
I
a.
b.
Test procedures used.
Test results that comply with requirements.
Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve
compliance.
I
c.
3.2
ADJUSTING
I
A.
Align motors, bases, shafts, pulleys and belts. Tension belts according to manufacturer's written
instructions,
I
END OF SECTION 15055
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
MOTORS
15055-4
I
I
I
SECTION 15060 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
I
PART 1- GENERAL
I
1.1
I
I
1.2
I
I
I
1.3
I
I
1.4
I
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and equipment. .
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
Division 13 Sections on fue-suppression piping for fue-suppression pipe hangers.
Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints" for vibration isola-
tion and seismic restraint devices.
DEFINITIONS
A.
MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry.
B.
Terminology: As defmed in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports."
SUB MITT ALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger and thermal-hanger shield insert indicated.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
Pipe Hangers:
a. AAA Technology and Specialties Co., Inc.
b. B-Line Systems, Inc.
c. Carpenter & Patterson, Inc.
d. Empire Tool & Manufacturing Co., Inc.
e. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc.
f. Grinnell Corp.
g. GS Metals Corp.
h. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc,
1. National Pipe Hanger Corp,
J. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15060 - 1
2,2
A.
B.
I
I
k. PHS Industries, Inc.
1. Piping Technology & Products, Inc,
I
2.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Carpenter & Patterson, Inc.
Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.
PHS Industries, Inc.
Pipe Shields, Inc.
Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc.
Value Engineered Products, Inc.
I
e.
f.
I
MANUFACTURED UNITS
I
Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: MSS SP-58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to
"Hanger and Support Applications" Article in Part 3 for where to use specific hanger and support types.
I
1.
2.
Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have field-applied fmish.
Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct
contact with copper tubing.
I
Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 100-psi minimum compressive-strength insulation, encased in sheet
metal shield.
I
1.
Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water-repellent-treated,
ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with vapor barrier.
Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water-repellent-treated,
ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate.
For Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire circumference of pipe.
For Clevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air
temperature.
I
2.
I
3.
4,
5,
I
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
B.
c.
D.
Powder-Actuated Drive-Pin Fasteners: Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin attachments with pull-out and
shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
I
Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
I
Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.
I
Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry, hydrau-
lic-cement grout.
I
1.
Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both interior and exte-
rior applications.
Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
I
2.
3.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15060 - 2
I
I
I
3.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
.
-
HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A.
Specific hanger requirements are specified in Sections specifying equipment and systems.
B.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping sys-
tem Specification Sections.
C.
Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1.
Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated sta-
tionary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes, NPS 4 to
NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.
Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes,
NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.
Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe
base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe.
Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes, NPS 2-
1/2 to NPS 36, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-
iron floor flange.
Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 20, from
single rod ifhorizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if longitudinal
movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not neces-
sary.
Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 30, if
vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion and
contraction.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
D.
Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specifica-
tion Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20.
Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to
NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
E.
Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specifica-
tion Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building at-
tachments.
Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
4.
F.
Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification
Sections, install the following types:
1. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction
to attach to top flange of structural shape.
2. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, chan-
nels, or angles,
3. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15060 - 3
3.2
G,
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
I
4.
Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are consid-
erable and rod sizes are large.
C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange
edge.
Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for
heavy loads.
Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for
heavy loads, with link extensions.
Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel.
Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by using
clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
I
5.
6.
I
7.
8.
I
9.
I
10.
11.
I
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.
b. Mediwn (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.
c, Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.
I
12. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
13. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
I
Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification
Sections, install the following types:
I
1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that
matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing
insulation.
3. Thennal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe, 360-degree insert of high-density,
100-psi minimwn compressive-strength, water-repellent-treated ca1ciwn silicate or cellular-glass
pipe insulation, same thickness as adjoining insulation with vapor barrier and encased in 360-
degree sheet metal shield.
I
I
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
I
Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89, Install hangers, sup-
ports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.
I
Space building attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install addi-
tional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and expansion joints,
and at changes in direction of piping.
I
Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use
operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-
actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
I
Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fas-
teners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
I
All uninsulated piping connected to building structure shall be isolated for sound/vibration with elas-
tomeric pads installed between the pipe and the hanger or support. Any uninsulated pipe coming in con-
tact with building structure shall also be isolated with an elastomeric sleeve.
I
I
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15060 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.3
I
I
F.
Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other acces-
sories.
G.
Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to
permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expan-
sion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
H.
Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from
movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
1.
Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflec-
tions allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," is not exceeded.
J.
Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a.
b.
Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.
Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with
clamp sized to match OD of insert. .
Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B3l.9.
c.
2.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated.
Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate
for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
3.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall
span arc of 180 degrees.
a.
Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate
for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
4.
Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a.
b.
c.
NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
5.
6.
7.
Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts.
Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or to support equipment
above floor.
B.
Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
3.4 METAL FABRICATION
I
-
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15060 - 5
-
3.5
3.6
I
A.
Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes and equipment supports,
I
B.
Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints, Field-weld connections that cannot be shop-
welded because of shipping size limitations.
I
C.
Field Welding: Comply with A WS D 1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and
quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:
I
1.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance
of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
Finish welds at exposed connections so no rouglmess shows after finishing and contours of welded
surfaces match adjacent contours.
I
I
2.
3.
4.
ADJUSTING
I
A.
Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated
slope of pipe.
I
PAINTING
I
A.
Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after
erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-P A 1
requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
I
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2,0 mils.
B.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair
paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
I
END OF SECTION 15060
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15060 - 6
I
I
I
SECTION 15071 - MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROLS
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
I
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
I
1.2
SUMMARY
I
A.
Ibis Section includes the following:
I
1. Elastomeric isolation pads and mounts.
2. Freestanding spring isolators.
3. Elastomeric hangers.
4. Spring hangers.
5. Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops.
6. Thrust limits.
7. Pipe riser resilient supports.
8. Resilient pipe guides.
I
I
1.3
SUBMITIALS
I
A.
Product Data: Include load deflection curves for each vibration isolation device.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include the following:
I
1.
Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion and
contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on building structure, spring deflection
changes. Include certification that riser system has been examined for excessive stress and that
none will exist.
Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to
structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, base weights,
equipment static loads, power transmission, component misalignment, and cantilever loads.
I
2.
I
1.4
COORDINATION
I
A.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into base. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
.
-
B.
Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROLS
15071 - 1
2.2
I
A,
In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply
for product selection:
I
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers
specified.
I
I
VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A.
Manufacturers:
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7,
8.
Ace Mounting Co., Inc.
B-Line Systems, Inc.
Isolation Technology, Inc.
Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.
Mason Industries, Inc.
Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
Vibration Isolation Co., Inc.
Vibration Mountings & ControlslKorfund.
I
I
B.
Elastomeric Isolator Pads: Oil- and water-resistant elastomer or natural rubber, arranged in single or
multiple layers, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized steel baseplates of sufficient stiffness for
uniform loading over pad area, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.
I
I
1, Material: Standard neoprene.
2. Durometer Rating: 40.
3. Number of Layers: 1.
I
c.
Elastomeric Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene isolator
elements with factory-drilled, encapsulated top plate for bolting to equipment and with baseplate for
bolting to structure. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.
I
1. Durometer Rating: 50.
D.
Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.
I
1.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated
load.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or
failure.
Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch-thick, rubber isolator
pad attached to baseplate underside, Baseplates shall limit floor load to 100 psig.
Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten
and level equipment.
I
I
2.
3,
4.
I
5.
6.
E.
Elastomeric Hangers: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene isolator
elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color-code or otherwise
identify to indicate capacity range.
I
F.
Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and double-deflection elastomeric-insert hangers with spring
and inserts in compression.
I
I
MECHANlCAL VIBRATION CONTROLS
15071 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.3
I
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of30
degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated
load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or
failure.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced cup to
support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.
G.
Spring Hangers with Vertical-Limit Stop: Combination coil-spring and double-deflection elastomeric-
insert hangers with spring and inserts in compression and with a vertical-limit stop.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30
degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated
load.
3. Minllnum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4, Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or
failure.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower threaded rod.
H.
Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in compression and
with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to equipment.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of 30
degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated
load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or
failure.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximwn of 1/4-inch movement at start and
stop.
1.
Pipe Riser Resilient Support: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2 steel tubes separated
by a minimum of 1I2-inch-thick, 60-durometer neoprene. Include steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops
arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. Design support for a maximum load on the isolation
material of 500 psig and for equal resistance in all directions.
J.
Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes separated by a minimum of 1I2-inch-
thick, 60-durometer neoprene. Factory set guide height with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to
pipe expansion and contraction. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of
pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements.
FACTORY FINISHES
A.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment before
shipping.
MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROLS
15071 - 3
I
1.
2.
3,
4.
Powder coating on springs and housings.
All hardware shall be electro galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for exterior use.
Baked enamel for metal components on isolators for interior use.
Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation devices to indicate capacity range,
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
3.2
A.
B.
c.
A.
B.
EXAMINATION
I
Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation devices for compliance with requirements,
installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting perfonnance.
I
Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before
installation.
I
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected,
INSTALLATION
I
Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on either side of equipment.
I
Install steel angles or channel, sized to prevent buckling, clamped with ductile-iron clamps to hanger rods
for trapeze and individual pipe hangers. At trapeze anchor locations, shackle piping to trapeze.
Requirements apply equally to hanging equipment. Do not weld angles to rods.
I
C. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts.
3.3
3.4
A.
EQUIPMENT BASES
I
Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to supported equipment manufacturer's
written instructions,
I
1.
Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install
dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.
Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base and
anchor into structural concrete floor.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and
directions furnished with items to be embedded.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified in Division 3.
I
2.
I
3.
I
4.
5.
6.
ADJUSTING
I
A. Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at operating weight.
B.
Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After
equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.
I
I
MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROLS
15071 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
3.5
I
I
3.6
I
I
I
I
c.
Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch movement during start
and stop.
D.
Adjust active height of spring isolators.
CLEANING
A.
After completing equipment installation, inspect vibration isolation devices. Remove paint splatters and
other spots, dirt, and debris.
VIERA TION ISOLATOR SCHEDULE
A.
Supported Equipment: Cabinet Exhaust Fans and Air Handling Units.
1.
2.
3.
Equipment Location: Attic spaces, E-wing.
Isolator Type: Spring Isolators
Minimum Deflection: 0.75 in.
B.
Suspended Ductwork: HV AC Supply and Return, Exhaust, and Fresh Air.
1.
Duct Locations: All ducts within 50 feet of connected air handling equipment, and all ducts
having an air velocity of 1,000 tpm or more.
Isolator Type: Spring Hangers.
Minimum Deflection: 0.75 in.
2.
3.
I
END OF SECTION 15071
I
I
I
-
-
-
-
.
II
MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROLS
15071 - 5
I
I
SECTION 15081 - DUCT INSULATION
I
PART 1- GENERAL
I
1.1
I
I
1.2
I
I
I
I
1.3
I
I
I
I
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes semi-rigid and flexible duct, plenum insulation; insulating cements; field-applied
jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 7 Section "Fires topping" for firestopping materials and -requirements for penetrations
through fire and smoke barriers.
Division 15 Section "Pipe Insulation" for insulation for piping systems.
Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liner.
2.
3.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if
any), for each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:
1.
2.
3.
Removable insulation sections at access panels.
Application of field-applied jackets.
Applications at linkages for control devices.
C.
Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indi-
cating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments,
cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include dates oftests.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
I
I
I
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those specified in this
Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having ju-
risdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and sealer and cement material containers with
appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1.
Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed rating of 50
or less.
Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-developed rating of
150 or less.
2.
-
DUCT INSULATION
15081 - 1
-
1.5
1.6
I
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
I
A.
Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM
specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
I
COORDINATION
I
A.
Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for insulation application.
I
1.7 SCHEDULING
A.
Schedule insulation application after testing duct systems. Insulation application may begin on segments
of ducts that have satisfactory test results.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
2.2
2.3
MANUFACTURERS
I
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
I
1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation:
a.
b.
CertainTeed Manson.
Knauf FiberGlass GmbH.
Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
Schuller International, Inc.
3-M Co.
I
c.
d.
I
e.
INSULATION MATERIALS
I
A.
Mineral-Fiber Board Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with
ASTM C 612, Type IB, without facing and with all-service jacket manufactured from kraft paper, rein-
forcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film
I
B.
Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosettiD.g resin. Comply with
ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing and with all-service jacket manufactured from kraft paper, rein-
forcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.
I
ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS
I
A.
Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type IT for tape. Woven
glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, pre sized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd..
I
1. Tape Width: 4 inches.
B.
Bands: 3/4 inch wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:
I
1.
2.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.020 inch thick.
Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch thick.
I
DUCT INSULATION
15081 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.4
I
3. Aluminum: 0.007 inch thick.
4. Brass: 0.010 inch thick.
5. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.005 inch thick.
c.
Wire: 0.080-inch, nickel-copper alloy; 0.062-inch, soft-annealed, stainless steel; or 0.062-inch, soft-
annealed, galvanized steel.
D.
Adhesive-Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer manufac-
tured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness in-
dicated.
1. Adhesive: Recommended by the anchor pin manufacturer as appropriate for surface temperatures
of ducts, plenums, and breechings; and to achieve a holding capacity of 100 lb for direct pull per-
pendicular to the adhered surface.
VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible with insulation
materials, jackets, and substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1 EXAMINATION
I
I
I
3.2
I
A.
Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions
affecting performance of insulation application.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely
affect insulation application.
3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written instructions;
with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.
B.
Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses required for
each duct system.
C.
Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use accessories that do
not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
D.
Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor retarder.
E.
Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
DUCT INSULATION
15081 - 3
3.4
I
F.
Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive rec-
ommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
I
G.
Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
I
H.
Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless
otherwise indicated.
I
I.
Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at hangers, sup-
ports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic. Apply insulation continuously through
hangers and around anchor attachments.
I
J.
Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, seal ends with a
compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
I
K.
Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:
I
1. Pull jacket tight and smooth.
2. Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor retarder as recommended by insulation material
manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.
3. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams and joints
and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.
I
L.
Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent compressing insulation to less
than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
I
M.
Install vapor-retarder mastic on ducts and plenums scheduled to receive vapor retarders.
I
1. Ducts with Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and seal with vapor-retarder mas-
tic and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation. Repair punctures, tears, and
penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-retarder seal.
2. Ducts without Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and secure with outward
clinching staples and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation.
I
N.
Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and partitions, ex-
cept fire-rated walls and partitions.
I
O.
Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire/smoke damper sleeves for fire-
rated wall and partition penetrations.
I
P.
Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation at underside of floor assembly and at floor support at top of
floor.
I
1.
For insulation indicated to have vapor retarders, taper termination and seal insulation ends with
vapor-retarder mastic.
I
MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION
I
A.
Blanket Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure blanket insulation with adhesive and anchor pins
and speed washers.
I
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per square foot, for 100
percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.
I
DUCT INSULATION
15081 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.
Install anchor pins and speed washers on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical
ducts as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, along longitudinal centerline of duct.
Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches. Space 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3
inches maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional pins and clips to hold insulation
tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
4.
5.
Impale insulation over anchors and attach speed washers.
Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation sur-
face. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.
Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches
from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation segment with .
1!2-inch staples, 1 inch o.c., and cover with pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insula-
tion.
Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. .secure
with steel band at end joints and spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.
Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation segment for each
surface. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut
to fit the elbow.
Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation surface with 6-
inch- wide strips of the same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiff-
ener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation indicated to re-
ceive vapor retarder.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Board Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure board insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and
speed washers.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per square foot, for 100
percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.
3. Space anchor pins as follows:
a.
On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, along longitudinal centerline of duct.
Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.
On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches. Space l6 inches a.c. each way, and 3
inches maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional pins and clips to hold insulation
tightly against surface at cross bracing.
Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.
Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
b.
c.
d.
4.
Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation sur-
face. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.
Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches
from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation segment with
l/2-inch staples, I inch o.c., and cover with pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insula-
tion.
Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation segment for each
surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of el-
bows. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to
fit the elbow.
5.
6.
DUCT INSULATION
1508l-5
3.5
A.
I
7.
Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation surface with 6-
inch- wide strips of the same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiff-
ener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation indicated to re-
ceive vapor retarder.
I
8.
I
DUCT SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
I
Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.
I
B. Insulate the following plenums and duct systems:
C.
1.
2.
Indoor concealed and exposed supply-, return-, and outside-air ductwork.
Outdoor exposed supply and return ductwork.
I
Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following systems, mate-
rials, and equipment:
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Metal ducts with duct liner.
Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
Factory-insulated plenums, casings, terminal boxes, and filter boxes and sections.
Flexible connectors.
Vibration-control devices.
Testing agency labels and stamps.
Nameplates and data plates.
Access panels and doors in air-distribution systems.
I
I
I
3.6 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A.
B.
I
Service: Rectangular and round, supply-air, return-air, and outside-air ducts, concealed.
1. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket
2. Thickness: 1 Yz inches
3. Jacket: Foil and paper
4. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes
I
Service: Rectangular and round, supply-air, return-air, and outside-air ducts, exposed.
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
Material: Mineral-fiber board
Thickness: 1 Yz inches
Jacket: Foil
Vapor Retarder Required: Yes
I
I
END OF SECTION 15081
I
I
I
DUCT INSULATION
15081 - 6
I
I
I
SECTION 15083 - PIPE INSULATION
I
PART 1- GENERAL
I
1.1
I
I
1.2
I
I
I
A.
A.
B.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes preformed, rigid and flexible pipe insulation; insulating cements; field-applied
jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.
Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for frrestopping materials and requirements for penetrations
through fire and smoke barriers.
2. Division 15 Section "Duct Insulation" for insulation for ducts and plenums.
3. Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe insulation shields and protection saddles.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
B.
c.
D.
Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if
<\ny), for each type of product indicated.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:
1.
Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at pipe hangers for each type of insulation
and hanger.
Attachment and covering of heat trace inside insulation.
Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insula-
tion.
Removable insulation at piping specialties and equipment connections.
Application of field-applied jackets.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket. Identify each Sample, describing product and intended
use. Submit Samples in the following sizes:
1.
2.
3.
Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 12 inches long by NPS 2.
Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 12 inches square.
Jacket Materials: 12 inches long by NPS 2.
Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indi-
cating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments,
cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests.
I
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
PIPE INSULATION
15083 - 1
I
A.
Fire- Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those specified in this
Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having ju-
risdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and sealer and cement material containers with
appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
I
I
1.
Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed rating of 50
or less.
Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-developed rating of
150orless.
I
2.
I
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM
specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
I
1.6
COORDINATION
I
A.
Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 15 Section
"Hangers and Supports."
I
B.
Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for insulation application.
I
1.7 SCHEDULING
A.
Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems and, where required, after installing and test-
ing heat-trace tape. Insulation application may begin on segments of piping that have satisfactory test re-
sults.
I
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
I
1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation:
a.
b.
CertainTeed Manson.
Knauf FiberGlass GmbH.
Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
Schuller International, Inc.
I
c.
d.
I
2. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation:
a.
b.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
Rubatex Corp.
I
3.
Polyolefrn Insulation:
I
a.
b.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
IMCOA.
I
PIPE INSULATION
15083 - 2
I
I
I
2.2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.3
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.4
I
INSULA TION MATERIALS
A.
Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin complying with the following:
1.
Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type 1, with factory-applied, all-purpose,
vapor-retarder jacket.
Blanket Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 553, Type IT, without facing.
Fire-Resistant Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C in the following classes and grades:
2.
3.
a. Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to unfaced glass-fiber insulation, for
sealing edges of glass-fiber insulation, and for bonding lagging cloth to unfaced glass-fiber
insulation.
b. Class 2, Grade A for bonding glass-fiber insulation to metal surfaces.
4.
Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Fire- and water-resistant, vapor-retarder mastic for indoor applications.
Comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 195.
Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with
ASTM C 449/C 449M.
5.
6.
B.
Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply
with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type IT for sheet materials.
1.
2.
Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
Ultraviolet-Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
C.
Polyolefm Insulation: Unicellular polyethylene thermal plastic, preformed pipe insulation. Comply with
ASTM C 534, Type I, except for density.
1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
D.
Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 for dimensions used in pre-
forming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges.
ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS
A.
Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape. Woven
glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of8 oz.lsq. yd..
1. Tape Width: 4 inches.
B.
Bands: 3/4 inch wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.020 inch thick.
Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch thick.
Aluminum: 0.007 inch thick.
Brass: 0.010 inch thick.
Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.005 inch thick.
c.
Wire: 0.080-inch, nickel-copper alloy; 0.062-inch, soft-annealed, stainless steel; or 0.062-inch, soft-
annealed, galvanized steel.
VAPOR RETARDERS
PIPE INSULATION
15083 - 3
I
A.
Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible with insulation
materials, jackets, and substrates.
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2
A.
Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions
affecting performance of insulation application.
I
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
I
PREPARATION
I
A.
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces. Remove materials that will adversely affect
insulation application.
I
3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written instructions;
with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping, including fittings,
valves, and specialties.
I
B.
Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses required for
each piping system
I
C.
Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use accessories that do
not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
I
D.
Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe runs.
I
E. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F.
Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
I
G.
Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor retarder.
I
H.
Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
I.
Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive rec-
ommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
I
J.
Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
I
K.
Apply insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integ-
rity, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to special instructions for applying insulation over fittings, valves,
and specialties.
I
L.
Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at hangers, sup-
ports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic.
I
PIPE INSULATION
15083 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
M.
I
N.
1.
2.
Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs at
least 12 inches from point of attachment to pipe and taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with
a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
Install insert materials and apply insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation
inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket,
arranged to protect the jacket from tear or puncture by the hanger, support, and shield.
3.
4.
Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, taper insulation
ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to main-
tain vapor retarder.
O. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:
Apply adhesives and mastics at the manufacturer's recommended coverage rate.
I
I
I
I
I
1.
2.
Pull jacket tight and smooth.
Circumferential Joints: Cover with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Se-
cure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip and spaced
4 inches o.c.
Longitudinal Seams: Overlap jacket seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Apply insulation with longitudi-
nal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with
outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.
3.
a. Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation having a vapor retarder.
4.
Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams and joints
and at ends adjacent to flanges, unions, valves, and fittings.
At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal voids with vapor-
retarder mastic.
5.
P. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof flashing.
I
I
I
Q.
R.
I
I
S.
I
1.
2.
3.
Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic.
Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends.
Extend metal jacket of exterior insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof
flashing.
Seal metal jacket to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.
4.
Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and floors.
Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through penetrations of fIre-
rated walls and partitions.
1.
Firestopping and fIre-resistive joint sealers are specified in Division 7 Section "Firestopping."
Floor Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through floor assembly.
1. For insulation with vapor retarders, seal insulation with vapor-retarder mastic where floor supports
penetrate vapor retarder.
3.4 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION
I
I
PIPE INSULATION
15083 - 5
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.5
A.
B.
I
Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:
I
1.
Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands without deforming
insulation materials.
Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with vapor-retarder
mastic. Apply vapor retarder to ends of insulation at intervals of 15 to 20 feet to form a vapor re-
tarder between pipe insulation segments.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches
o.c.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple longitudinal tabs but
secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the insulation material manufacturer and
seal with vapor-retarder mastic.
I
2.
3.
I
4.
I
Apply insulation to flanges as follows:
I
1.
2.
Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of the pipe insulation.
Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent
straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.
Apply canvas jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlapping seams at
least I inch, and seal joints with vapor-retarder mastic.
I
I
3.
4.
Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:
I
1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe insulation
when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When premolded insulation elbows and fittings are not available, apply mitered sections of pipe
insulation, or glass-fiber blanket insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Se-
cure insulation materials with wire, tape, or bands.
I
I
Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:
1.
Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe insulation
when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
When premolded insulation sections are not available, apply glass-fiber blanket insulation to valve
body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without dis-
turbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for access to stainer basket without dis-
turbing insulation.
Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
I
2.
I
3.
FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC THERMAL INSULATION APPLICATION
I
Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:
I
1.
2.
Follow manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation.
Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Cement to
avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.
I
Apply insulation to flanges as follows:
I
1. Apply pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of the pipe insulation.
I
PIPE INSULATION
15083 - 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.
Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent
straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of the same thickness as pipe insula-
tion.
Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Cement
to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.
4.
c.
Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:
1.
2.
Apply mitered sections of pipe insulation.
Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Cement
to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.
D.
Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:
1. Apply preformed valve covers manufactured of the same material as pipe insulation and attached
according to the manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Apply cut segments of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit ac-
cess to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, fab-
ricate removable sections of insulation arranged to allow access to stainer basket.
3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended ad-
hesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.
POL YOLEFIN INSULATION APPLICATION
A.
Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:
l. Follow manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation.
2. For split tubes, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
3. For self-adhesive insulation, staple longitudinal seams after sealing. Cement to avoid openings in
insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.
B.
Apply insulation to flanges as follows:
1. Apply pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of the pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent
straight pipe segments with cut sections of polyolefm sheet insulation of the same thickness as
pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Cement
to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.
c.
Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:
1.
2.
Apply mitered sections ofpolyolefm pipe insulation.
Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Cement
to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.
D.
Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:
1. Apply preformed valve covers manufactured of the same material as pipe insulation and attached
according to the manufacturer's written instructions.
PlJ>E INSULATION
l5083 - 7
I
2.
Apply cut segments of polyolefm pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to
permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check
valves, fabricate removable sections of insulation arranged to allow access to stainer basket.
Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended ad-
hesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.
I
3.
4.
I
I
3.7 FINISHES
3.8
3.9
3.10
I
A.
Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of the insula-
tion manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
I
PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
A.
Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.
I
B.
Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following systems, mate-
rials, and equipment:
I
1. Flexible connectors.
2. Vibration-control devices.
3. Fire-suppression piping.
4. Below-grade piping.
5. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings, unless potential for personnel injury.
6. Air chambers, unions, strainers; check valves, plug valves, and flow regulators.
I
I
INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
I
A.
Refer to insulation application schedules for required insulation materials, vapor retarders, and field-
applied jackets.
I
B.
Application schedules identify piping system and indicate pipe size ranges and material, thickness, and
jacket requirements.
INTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
I
A.
Service: Domestic hot and recirculated hot water.
I
1.
2.
3.
Operating Temperature: 60 to 140 deg F.
Insulation Material: Mineral fiber.
Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:
I
a.
b.
Copper Pipe, ~ to 1-1/4 NPS: ~ inch thick.
Copper Pipe, 1-1/2 to 4 NPS: 1 inch thick.
I
4.
5.
6.
Field-Applied Jacket: None.
Vapor Retarder Required: No.
Finish: None.
I
B. Service: Domestic cold water.
I
PIPE INSULATION
15083 - 8
I
I
I
I
I
I
c.
I
I
I
1.
2.
3.
Operating Temperature: 35 to 60 deg F.
Insulation Material: Mineral fiber.
Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:
a. Copper Pipe, Yz to 4 NPS: Yz inch thick.
4.
5.
6.
Field-Applied Jacket: None
Vapor Retarder Required: No.
Finish: None.
Service: Rainwater conductors and roof drain bodies.
1.
2.
3.
Operating Temperature: 32 to 100 deg F.
Insulation Material: Polyoleflll.
Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:
a.
Cast Iron Pipe, 4 to 8 NPS: Yz inch thick.
4.
5.
6.
Field-Applied Jacket: None.
Vapor Retarder Required: No.
Finish: None.
I
D. Service: Condensate drain piping.
I
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Operating Temperature: 35 to 75 deg F.
Insulation Material: Polyoleflll.
Insulation Thickness: Yz inch.
Field-Applied Jacket: None.
Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
Finish: None.
I
A.
3.11 EXTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
B.
I
I
I
c.
I
-
This application schedule is for aboveground insulation outside the building.
Service: Refrigerant suction.
1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 50 deg F.
2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric.
3. Insulation Thickness: Yz inch.
4. Field-Applied Jacket: None.
5. Vapor Retarder Required: No.
6. Finish: Painted.
END OF SECTION 15083
I
I
I
PIPE INSULATION
15083 - 9
I
I
SECTION 15100 - VAL YES
I
P ART 1 - GENERAL
I
1.1
I
I
1.2
I
I
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes general duty valves common to several mechanical piping systems.
B.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.
Special purpose valves are specified in Division 15 piping system Sections.
I
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
I
I
I
B.
Product Data for each valve type. Include body material, valve design, pressure and temperature classifi-
cation, end connection details, seating materials, trim material and arrangement, dimensions and required
clearances, and installation instructions. Include list indicating valve and its application.
c.
Maintenance data for valves to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1.
Include detailed manufacturer's instructions on adjusting, servicing, disassembling, and repairing.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Single-Source Responsibility: Comply with the requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Materials
and Equipment," under "Source Limitations" Paragraph.
I
I
I
B.
AS ME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services piping and ASME B3l.1 for power
piping.
C.
MSS Compliance: Comply with the various MSS Standard Practice documents referenced.
I
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
I
I
I
VAL YES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.
Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
Set globe and gate valves closed to prevent rattling.
Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.
15100 - 1
6.
I
Block check valves in either closed or open position.
I
B.
Use the following precautions during storage:
I
1.
2.
Maintain valve end protection.
Store indoors and maintain valve temperature higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If out-
door storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.
I
c.
Use a sling to handle large valves. Rig to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels and
stems as lifting or rigging points.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
I
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
VALVES
Gate Valves:
I
a. Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division.
b. Hammond Valve Corporation.
c. Kitz Corp. of America.
d. Lunkenheirner/Cincinnati Valve Co.
e. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc.
f. NIBCO Inc.
g. Powell: Wm. Powell Company (The).
h. Red-White Valve Corp.
1. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.
I
I
I
Ball Valves:
a.
b.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Division.
Hammond Valve Corporation.
Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc.
NIBCO Inc.
Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.
Tyler Pipe.
Victaulic Company of America.
I
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
I
I
Plug Valves:
a. Grinnell Corp.
b. Huber: J.M. Huber Corp.; Flow Control Division (Resun Valves).
c. NIBCO Inc.
d. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.
e. Victaulic Company of America.
I
I
Globe Valves:
a.
b.
Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division.
Hammond Valve Corporation.
Kitz Corp. of America.
Lunkenheimer/Cincinnati Valve Co.
I
c.
d.
I
15100 - 2
I
I
I e. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc.
f. NlBCO Inc.
I g. Powell: Wm. Powell Company (The).
h. Red-White Valve Corp.
1. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.
I 5. Butterfly Valves:
a. Center Line, Mark Controls Corporation.
I b. Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division.
c. General Signal; DeZurik Unit.
d. Grinnell Corp.
I e. Hammond Valve Corporation.
f. Keystone Valve USA, Inc.
g. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc.
h. NlBCO Inc.
I 1. Red-White Valve Corp.
J. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.
k. Tyler Pipe.
I 1. Ultraflo Corporation.
m. Victaulic Company of America.
6. Swing Check Valves:
I a. CIa-Val Co.
b. Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division.
I c. Hammond Valve Corporation.
d. Kitz Corp. of America.
e. Lunkenheirner/Cincinnati Valve Co.
f. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc.
I g. NlBCO Inc.
h. Powell: Wm. Powell Company (The).
1. Red-White Valve Corp.
I J. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.
k. Victaulic Company of America.
7. Wafer Check Valves:
I a. Cla-Val Co.
b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Division.
I c. Hammond Valve Corporation.
d. Keystone Valve USA, Inc.
e. Kitz Corp. of America.
f. Metraflex Company.
I g. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc.
h. NlBCO Inc.
1. Red-White Valve Corp.
I J. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.
k. Tyler Pipe.
1. Val-Matic Valve & Mfg. Corp.
m. Victaulic Company of America.
I 8. Lift Check Valves:
I a. Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division.
b. Kitz Corp. of America.
I VAL YES 15100 - 3
I
e.
f.
g.
Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc.
NIBCO Inc.
Powell: Wm. Powell Company (The).
Red-White Valve Corp.
Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.
I
c.
d.
I
I
2.2
BASIC, COMMON FEATURES
A.
Design: Rising stem or rising outside screw and yoke stems, except as specified below.
I
1. Nonrising stem valves may be used only where headroom prevents full extension of rising stems.
B.
Pressure and Temperature Ratings: As indicated in the "Application Schedule" of Part 3 of this Section
and as required to suit system pressures and temperatures.
I
c.
Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
I
D.
Operators: Use specified operators and handwheels, except provide the following special operator fea-
tures:
I
1. Handwheels: For valves other than quarter turn.
2. Lever Handles: For quarter-turn valves 6 inches and smaller, except for plug valves, which shall
have square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every.lO plug valves.
3. Chain-Wheel Operators: For valves 4 inches and larger, installed 96 inches or higher above fm-
ished floor elevation.
I
E.
Extended Stems: Where insulation is iIidicated or specified, provide extended stems arranged to receive
insulation.
I
F.
Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45 bypass and drain connections.
I
G. Threads: ASME B 1.20.1.
H.
Flanges: ASME B 16.1 for cast iron, ASME B 16.5 for steel, and ASME B 16.24 for bronze valves.
I
I.
Solder Joint: ASME Bl6.18.
I. Caution: Where soldered end connections are used, use solder having a melting point below 840
deg F for gate, globe, and check valves; below 421 deg F for ball valves.
I
I
2.3 GATE VALVES
A. Gate Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200-psi cold working pressure (CWP), or
Class 150, 300-psi CWP; ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and bonnet, solid-bronze wedge, copper-silicon
alloy rising stem, teflon-impregnated packing with bronze packing nut, threaded or soldered end connec-
tions; and with aluminum or malleable-iron handwheel.
I
I
B. Gate Valves, 3 Inches and Larger: MSS SP-70, Class 125, 200-psi CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body
and bonnet, solid cast-iron wedge, brass-alloy stem, outside screw and yoke, teflon-impregnated packing
with 2-piece packing gland assembly, flanged end connections; and with cast-iron handwheel.
I
2.4 BALL VALVES
I
VAL YES 15100 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.5
I
I
I
2.6
I
I
I
A.
Ball Valves, 4 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-I10, Class 150, 600-psi CWP, ASTM B 584 bronze body
and bonnet, 2-piece construction; chrome-plated brass ball, standard port for 1/2-inch valves and smaller
and conventional port for 3/4-inch valves and larger; blowout proof; bronze or brass stem; teflon seats
and seals; threaded or soldered end connections:
1.
2.
3.
Operator: Vinyl-covered steel lever handle.
Stem Extension: For valves installed in insulated piping.
Memory Stop: For operator handles.
PLUG VALVES
A.
Plug Valves: MSS SP-78, 175-psi CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bonnet, cast-iron plug,
Buna N, Viton, or teflon packing, flanged or grooved end connections:
1.
2.
Operator: Lever.
Operator: Worm and gear with handwheel, sizes 6 inches and larger.
GLOBE VALVES
A.
Globe Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200-psi CWP, or Class 150, 300-psi
CWP; ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and screwed bonnet, rubber, bronze, or teflon disc, silicon bronze-
alloy stem, teflon-impregnated packing with bronze nut, threaded or soldered end connections; and with
aluminum or malleable-iron handwheel.
B.
Globe Valves, 3 Inches and Larger: MSS SP-85, Class 125, 200-psi CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body
and bolted bonnet with bronze fittings, renewable bronze seat and disc, brass-alloy stern, outside screw
and yoke, teflon-impregnated packing with cast-iron follower, flanged end connections; and with cast-
iron handwheel.
2.7 BUTTERFLY VALVES
I
I
I
A.
Butterfly Valves: MSS SP-67, 200-psi CWP, l50-psi maximum pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast-
iron body and bonnet, extended neck, stainless-steel stem, field-replaceable EPDM or Buna N sleeve and
stem seals, wafer, lug, or grooved style:
1.
2.
3.
Disc Type: Nickel-plated ductile iron.
Operator for Sizes 2 Inches to 6 Inches: Lever handle with latch lock.
Operator for Sizes 8 Inches and Larger, 96 Inches or Higher above Floor: Chain-wheel operator.
I
2.8- CHECK VALVES
A.
Swing Check Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200-psi CWP, or Class 150,
300-psi CWP; horizontal swing, Y-pattern, ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and cap, rotating bronze disc
with rubber seat or composition seat, threaded or soldered end connections:
I
I
I
.
.
VALVES
B.
Swing Check Valves, 3 Inches and Larger: MSS SP-71, Class 125, 200-psi CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron
body and bolted cap, horizontal-swing bronze disc, flanged or grooved end connections.
C.
Wafer Check Valves: Class 125, 200-psi CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body, bronze disc/plates, stain-
less-steel pins and springs, Buna N seals, installed between flanges.
15100 - 5
I
D.
Lift Check Valves: Class 125, ASTM B 62 bronze body and cap (main components), horizontal or verti-
cal pattern, lift-type, bronze disc or Buna N rubber disc with stainless-steel holder threaded or soldered
end connections.
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
F.
3.2
A.
B.
e.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
EXAMINATION
I
A.
Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of valves. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
I
B.
Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special
packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.
I
e.
Operate valves from fully open to fully closed positions. Examine guides and seats made accessible by
such operation.
I
D.
Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
E.
Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size,
length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size, material composition suitable for service, and
freedom from defects and damage.
I
Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
I
INST ALLA TION
I
Install valves as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate the gen-
eral arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
I
Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow servicing, maintenance,
and equipment removal without system shutdown.
I
Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
I
Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe.
Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.
I
For chain-wheel operators, extend chains to 60 inches above finished floor elevation.
Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows:
I
1.
2.
3.
Swing Check Valves: Horizontal position with hinge pin level.
Wafer Check Valves: Horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.
Lift Check Valve: With stem upright and plumb.
I
3.3 SOLDERED CONNECTIONS
I
VALVES 15100 - 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.4
I
I
I
I
3.5
I
I
I
3.6
I
I
I
.
-
VALVES
A.
Cut tube square and to exact lengths.
B.
Clean end of tube to depth of valve socket with steel wool, sand cloth, or a steel wire brush to a bright
fInish. Clean valve socket.
e.
Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and outside of tube.
D.
Open gate and globe valves to fully open position.
E.
Remove the cap and disc holder of swing check valves having composition discs.
F.
Insert tube into valve socket, making sure the end rests against the shoulder inside valve. Rotate tube or
valve slightly to ensure even distribution of the flux.
G.
Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder melts on contact. Feed solder until it com-
pletely fills the joint around tube. Avoid hot spots or overheating valve. Once the solder starts cooling,
remove excess amounts around the joint with a cloth or brush.
THREADED CONNECTIONS
A.
Note the internal length of threads in valve ends and proximity of valve internal seat or wall to determine
how far pipe should be threaded into valve.
B.
Align threads at point of assembly.
e.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads, except where dry seal threading
is specified.
D.
Assemble joint, wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the pipe is being
threaded.
FLANGED CONNECTIONS
A.
Align flange surfaces parallel.
B.
Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and
parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly with a
torque wrench.
C.
For dead-end service, butterfly valves require flanges both upstream and downstream for proper shutoff
and retention.
VALVE END SELECTION
A.
Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections:
1.
Copper Tube Size, 2-1/2 Inches and Smaller: Solder ends, except provide threaded ends for heat-
ing hot water and low-pressure steam service.
Steel Pipe Sizes, 2-1/2 Inches and Smaller: Threaded or grooved end.
Steel Pipe Sizes, 3 Inches and Larger: Grooved end or flanged.
2.
3.
15100 - 7
3.7
A.
B.
e.
I
APPLICATION SCHEDULE
I
General Application: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves for shutoff duty; globe, ball, and butterfly for
throttling duty. Refer to piping system Specification Sections for specific valve applications and ar-
rangements.
I
Domestic Water Systems: Use the following valve types:
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
Gate Valves: Class 125, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system.
Ball Valves: Class 150, 600-psi CWP, with stem extension.
Bronze Swing Check: Class 125, with rubber seat.
Check Valves: Class 125, swing or wafer type as indicated.
I
Heating Water Systems: Use the following valve types:
I
l.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Gate Valves: Class 150, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system.
Ball Valves: Class 150, 600-psi CWP, with stem extension and memory stop.
Plug Valves: Viton or teflon packing.
Globe Valves: Class 150, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system, and bronze disc.
Butterfly Valves: Nickel-plated ductile iron, aluminum bronze, or epoxy-coated ductile iron disc;
EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals.
Bronze Swing Check: Class 150, with composition seat.
Check Valves: Iron swing, wafer, or lift type, as indicated. Swing check shall be Class 150 with
bronze seat ring.
I
I
I
6.
7.
D. Chilled- and Condenser-Water Systems: Use the following valve types:
3.8
A.
l.
2.
3.
Gate Valves: Class 150, bronze body; or Class 125, cast-iron body.
Ball Valves: Class 150, 600-psi CWP, with stem extension and memory stop.
Butterfly Valves: Nickel-plated ductile iron, aluminum bronze, or elastomer-coated ductile iron
disc; EPDM sleeve and stem seals.
Check Valves: Class 125, bronze body swing check with rubber seat; Class 125, cast-iron body
swing check; Class 125, cast-iron body wafer check; or Class 125, cast-iron body lift check.
I
4.
I
I
ADJUSTING
Adjust or replace packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before [mal ad-
justing and balancing. Replace valves if leak persists.
I
END OF SECTION 15100
I
VALVES
I
I
I
I
15100 - 8
I
I
I
SECTION 15411 - WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
I
PART 1- GENERAL
I
1.1
I
I
1.2
I
I
I
1.3
I
I
I
1.4
I
I
I
1.5
I
1.6
-
-
-
I
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes water distribution piping from locations indicated to fIxtures and equipment inside
building.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
Division l5 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for water distribution piping specialties.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Water Service Piping: Water piping outside building that conveys water to building.
B.
Service Entrance Piping: Water piping at entry into building between water service piping and water dis-
tribution piping.
C.
Water Distribution Piping: Water piping inside building that conveys water to fIxtures and equipment
throughout the building.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the following minimum
working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Service Entrance Piping: 160 psig.
2. Water Distribution Piping: 125 psig.
SUB MITT ALS
A.
Water Samples, Test Results, and Reports: Specified in "Field Quality Control" and "Cleaning" articles.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on piping made to specified standards.
B.
Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation.
-
WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
15411 -1
I
C.
Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," Sections I through 9 for
potable-water piping and components.
I
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
e.
'2.2
A.
2.3
2.4
I
PIPES AND TUBES
General: Applications of the following pipe and tube materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applica-
tions" Article.
I
Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K, water tube, annealed temper.
I
Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L, water tube, drawn temper.
PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS
I
General: Applications of the following pipe and tube fitting materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping Ap-
plications" Article.
I
B.
Copper, Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18 cast-copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought cop-
per.
I
C.
Copper Unions: ASME B 16.18, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket joint,
metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint, threaded, or solder-joint and threaded ends. Include
threads conforming to ASME B 1.20.1 on threaded ends.
I
JOINING MATERIALS
I
A.
General: Applications of the following piping joining materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applica-
tions" Article.
I
B.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for commonly used joining ma-
terials.
I
e.
Solder: ASTM B 32, Alloy Sn95, Sn94, or E; lead free.
VAL YES
I
A.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves.
I
B.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for special-duty valves.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
EXCAVATION
I
A.
Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
I
WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
15411 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
PIPING APPLICATIONS
A.
Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be used in
applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Fitting Option: Mechanically formed tee-branch outlets and brazed joints may be used on aboveground
copper tubing.
D.
Underground, Service Entrance Piping: Do not use flanges or valves underground. Use the following:
1.
2-Inch NPS and Smaller: Soft copper tube, Type K; wrought-copper, solder-joint pressure fit-
tings; and soldered joints.
E. Aboveground, Water Distribution Piping: Use the following:
1.
2-Inch NPS and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper, solder-joint fittings; and soldered
joints.
F.
Underground, Water Distribution Piping: Do not use flanges or valves underground. Use the following:
1.
2-Inch NPS and Smaller: Soft copper tube, Type K; wrought-copper, solder-joint pressure fit-
tings; and soldered joints.
VALVE APPLICATIONS
A.
Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following re-
quiren:ents apply:
1. Shutoff Duty: Use gate, ball, or butterfly valves.
2. Throttling Duty: Use globe, ball, or butterfly valves.
PIPING INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping installation.
SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Extend service entrance piping to exterior water service piping in sizes and locations indicated for service
entrances into building.
B.
Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside building
at each service entrance pipe.
C.
Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service entrance pipe penetra-
tion through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation
watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for sleeves and me-
chanical sleeve seals.
WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING INSTALLATION
WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
15411 - 3
3.7
3.8
3.9
I
A.
Install piping level without pitch.
I
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
I
A.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construc-
tion.
I
VAL VB INSTALLATION
I
A.
Sectional Valves: Install sectional valves close to main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fix-
tures or equipment, and where indicated. Use gate or ball valves for piping 2-inch NPS and smaller.
I
B.
Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valve on each water supply to equipment, on each supply to plumbing fIx-
tures without supply stops, and where indicated. Use gate or ball valves for piping 2-inch NPS and
smaller.
I
e.
Drain Valves: Install drain valves for equipment, at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal
piping, and where required to drain water piping.
I
1. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches.
2. Install stop-and-waste drain valves where indicated.
I
D.
Balancing Valves: Install in each hot-water circulation return branch, discharge side of each pump and
circulator, and where indicated. Use ball valve for piping 2-inch NPS and smaller and butterfly valve for
piping 2-1/2-inch NPS and larger. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for balancing
valves.
I
E.
Calibrated Balancing Valves: Install in each hot-water circulation return branch, discharge side of each
pump and circulator, and where indicated. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for cali-
brated balancing valves.
I
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
I
A.
Refer to Division 15 Sections "Hangers and Supports" and "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls"
for pipe hanger and support devices. Install the following:
I
1.
2.
Riser clamps, MSS Type 8 or Type 42, for vertical runs.
Adjustable steel clevis hangers, MSS Type 1, for individual, straight, horizontal runs 100 feet and
less.
Adjustable roller hangers, MSS Type 43, for individual, straight, horizontal runs longer than 100
feet.
Spring hangers, if indicated, for horizontal runs.
Spring hangers, MSS Type 52, for supporting base of vertical runs.
I
I
3.
4.
5.
B.
Install supports according to Division l5 Section "Hangers and Supports."
I
c.
All uninsulated piping connected to building structure shall be isolated for sound/vibration with elas-
tomeric pads installed between the pipe and the hanger or support. Any uninsulated pipe coming in con-
tact with building structure shall also be isolated with an elastomeric sleeve.
I
D.
Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
I
WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
15411 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.l0
I
I
I
I
3.11
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E.
Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.
F.
Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod diameters:
1.
3/4-Inch NPS and Smaller: Maximum horizontal spacing, 60 inches with 3/8-inch minimum rod
diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 10 feet.
I-Inch NPS: Maximum horizontal spacing, 72 inches with 3/8-inch minimum rod diameter;
maximum vertical spacing, 10 feet.
1-1/4-Inch NPS: Maximum horizontal spacing, 72 inches with 3/8-inch minimum rod diameter;
maximum vertical spacing, 10 feet.
1-1/2 and 2-Inch NPS: Maximum horizontal spacing, 96 inches with 3/8-inch minimum rod di-
ameter; maximum vertical spacing, 10 feet.
2.
3.
4.
G.
Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instruc-
tions.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Connect service entrance piping to exterior water service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar
piping materials.
B.
Connect water distribution piping to service entrance piping at shutoff valve, and extend to and connect to
the following:
1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect hot- and cold-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller
than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures."
2. Equipment: Connect hot- and cold-water supply piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve and
union for each connection.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect water distribution piping as follows:
B.
Inspect service entrance piping and water distribution piping as follows:
1.
Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities
having jurisdiction.
During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must
be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
2.
a.
Roughing-In Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in
after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
Final Inspection: Arrange for fmal inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe
tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
b.
3.
Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction fmd that piping will not pass test or inspection,
make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
4.
C.
Test service entrance piping and water distribution piping as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, ex-
tended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, com-
plete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
15411 - 5
I
2.
Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced water piping until it has
been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before it has been
tested and approved.
Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without ex-
ceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for 4
hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory
results are obtained.
Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
I
3.
I
4.
I
5.
I
A.
3.12 CLEANING
B.
e.
Clean and disinfect potable-water distribution piping as follows:
I
1.
Purge new piping and parts of existing water piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired
before using.
Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method
is not prescribed, procedure described in either A WW A C651 or A WW A C652 or as described be-
low:
I
2.
I
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.
b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
I
1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlo-
rine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.
2) Fill system or part thereof with waterlchlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of
chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours.
I
c.
Flush system with clean, potable water until chlorine is no longer in water coming from
system after the standing time.
Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure
if biological examination shows contamination.
I
d.
Prepare and submit reports for purging and disinfecting activities.
I
Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
I
3.13 COMMISSIONING
A.
B.
Fill water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of
water.
I
Perform the following steps before putting into operation:
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.
Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
Open throttling valves to proper setting.
Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of piping during
installation.
Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for application
where used and that cartridges are clean and ready for use.
I
I
5.
6.
I
WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
15411 - 6
I
I
I
C.
Check plumbing equipment and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. Do not operate water
heaters before filling with water.
I
D.
Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.
I
E.
Energize pumps and verify proper operation.
END OF SECTION 15411
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
15411 - 7
I
I
SECTION 15420 - DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
1.1
I
I
1.2
I
I
I
1.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
I
I
I
I
I
1.4
I
I
I
1.5
I
I
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
,
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes sanitary drainage and vent piping, and storm drainage piping inside building and to
locations indicated.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for drainage and vent piping system specialties.
DEFINITIONS
Sewerage Piping: Building sewer piping outside building that conveys sanitary sewage from building.
Drainage Piping: Building sewer piping outside building that conveys storm drainage from building.
Service Entrance Piping: Drainage piping at entry into building between outside building sewer piping
and inside drainage piping.
Drainage and Vent Piping: Piping inside building that conveys waste water and vapors from fixtures and
equipment throughout the building.
The following are industry abbreviations for plastic and other piping materials:
1.
PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the following minimum
working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
Soil, Waste, and Vent Systems: 10-foot head of water.
Storm Drainage Systems: 1 O-foot head of water.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Test Results and Reports: Specified in "Field Quality Control" Article.
DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING
15420 - 1
1.6
I
I
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on piping made to specified standards.
I
B. Comply with ASME B3l.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation.
C.
Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping compo-
nents. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping; "NSF-drain" for plastic
drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous waste piping; and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer pip-
mg.
I
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
2.2
A.
B.
C.
2.3
A.
B.
PIPES AND TUBES
I
A.
General: Applications of the following pipe and tube materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applica-
tions" Article.
B.
PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 2665, Schedule 40.
I
PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS
I
General: Applications of the following pipe and tube fitting materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping Ap-
plications" Article.
I
Threaded-Fitting, End Connections: ASME B1.20.1.
PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311 drain, waste, and vent pipe patterns.
I
JOINING MATERIALS
I
General: Applications of the following piping joining materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applica-
tions" Article.
I
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for commonly used joining ma-
terials.
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
I
EXCAVATION
A.
Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
I
PIPING APPLICATIONS
I
A.
Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be used in
applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
I
DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING
15420 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.3
I
B.
Aboveground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use the following:
1.
1-1/4- to 6-Inch NPS, PVC plastic pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
C. Underground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use the following:
1.
2-Inch to 6-Inch NPS: PVC plastic pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
D.
Aboveground and Underground, Storm Drainage Piping: Use the following:
1. 2- to 6-Inch NPS: PVC plastic pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
PIPING INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping installation.
3.4 SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING INSTALLATION
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.5
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Refer to Division 2 Section "Sewerage and Drainage" for sanitary and storm sewer piping.
B.
Extend building sanitary drain piping and connect to sanitary sewer piping in sizes and locations indi-
cated for service entrances into building. Install c1eanout and extension to grade at connections of build-
ing sanitary drains with building sanitary sewers.
C.
Extend building storm drain piping and connect to storm sewer piping in sizes and locations indicated for
service entrances into building. Install c1eanout and extension to grade at connections of building storm
drains and building storm sewers.
D.
Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service entrance pipe penetra- .
tion through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation
watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for sleeves and me-
chanical sleeve seals.
DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING INST ALLA nON
A.
Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-
sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direc-
tion of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and lI8-bend fittings if 2 fIx-
tures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and
crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not make change in direction of flow greater than 90 degrees. Use
proper size of standard increasers and reducers if different sizes of piping are connected. Reducing size
of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
B.
Lay buried building drain piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and align-
ment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required
gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installa-
tion requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.
C.
Install drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Sanitary Building Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping 3-inch NPS and
smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping 4-inch NPS and larger.
DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING
15420 - 3
3.6
3.7
3.8
I
2.
3.
4.
5.
Horizontal, Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
Storm Building Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow.
Horizontal, Storm Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fIxture vent or toward vent stack.
I
I
D.
Install PVC plastic drainage piping according to ASTM D 2665.
I
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
I
A.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construc-
tion.
B.
PVC Piping Joints: Join drainage piping according to ASTM D 2665.
I
e.
Handling of Solvent Cements, Primers, and Cleaners: Comply with procedures in ASTM F 402 for safe
handling during joining of plastic pipe and fittings.
I
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
I
A.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices. Install the fol-
lowing:
I
l. Riser clamps, MSS Type 8 or Type 42, for vertical runs.
2. Adjustable steel clevis hangers, MSS Type 1, for individual, straight, horizontal runs.
3. Spring hangers, MSS Type 52, for supporting base of vertical runs.
I
B. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
e.
All uninsulated piping connected to building structure shall be isolated for sound/vibration with elas-
tomeric pads installed between the pipe and the hanger or support. Any uninsulated pipe coming in con-
tact with building structure shall also be isolated with an e1astomeric sleeve.
I
D.
Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
I
E.
Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.
I
F.
Install hangers for PVC plastic piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod diameters:
1.
1-1/2- and 2-Inch NPS: Maximum horizontal spacing, 48 inches with 3/8-inch minimum rod di-
ameter; maximum vertical spacing, 48 inches.
4- and 5-Inch NPS: Maximum horizontal spacing, 48 inches with 5/8-inch minimum rod diame-
ter; maximum vertical spacing, 48 inches.
6-Inch NPS: Maximum horizontal spacing, 48 inches with 3/4-inch minimum rod diameter;
maximum vertical spacing, 48 inches.
I
2.
3.
I
G.
Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instruc-
tions.
I
CONNECTIONS
I
A.
Connect service entrance piping to exterior sewerage and drainage piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
I
DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING
15420 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.9
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.10
I
I
B.
Connect drainage piping to service entrance piping, and extend to and connect to the following:
1.
Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by
plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures."
Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than
required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties."
Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated, and union
for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections 2-1/2-inch NPS and larger.
2.
3.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspect drainage and vent piping as follows:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities
having jurisdiction.
2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must
be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
a.
Roughing-In Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in
after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
Final Inspection: Arrange for fmal inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe
tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
b.
3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction fmd that piping will not pass test or inspection,
make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Test drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of
published procedure, as follows:
1.
Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, ex-
tended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, com-
plete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping
until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before it
has been tested and approved.
Roughing-In Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside leaders, on
completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of over-
flow, but not less than 10 feet of head. Water level must not drop from 15 minutes before inspec-
tion starts through completion of inspection. Inspect joints for leaks.
Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with
water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on
roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pres-
sure of I-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pres-
sure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of
inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.
Repair leaks and defects using new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory
results are obtained.
Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A.
Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING
15420 - 5
I
B.
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to pre-
vent damage from traffic and construction work.
I
c.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
I
END OF SECTION 15420
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING
15420 - 6
I
I
I
SECTION 15430 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
I
PART 1- GENERAL
I
1.1
I
A.
I
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
I
A. This Section includes the following plumbing specialties:
I
I
I
I
B.
I
1.3
I
A.
I
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
lO.
11.
12.
Back:f1ow preventers.
Balancing valves.
Water filters.
Strainers.
Outlet boxes.
Key-operation hydrants.
Trap seal primer valves.
Drain valves.
Miscellaneous piping specialties.
Cleanouts.
Floor drains.
Roof drains.
Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for water meters, thermometers, and pressure gages.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with following rrurumum
working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Domestic Water Piping: 125 psig.
Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.
Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water.
Force-Main Piping: 100 psig.
I
A.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
I
I
Product Data: Include rated capacities and shipping, installed, and operating weights. Indicate materials,
fInishes, dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components; and piping and
wiring connections for the following:
1. Back:f1ow preventers and water regulators.
2. Balancing valves, water filters, and strainers.
3. Water hammer arresters, air vents, and trap seal primer valves and systems.
I
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
15430 - 1
I
4.
5.
6.
Drain valves, hose bibbs, and hydrants.
Cleanouts, floor drains, open receptors, and roof drains.
Sleeve penetration systems.
I
I
B. Field test reports.
1.5
e.
A.
B.
e.
D.
E.
Maintenance Data: For plumbing specialties to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:
I
L
2.
3.
4.
Backflow preventers and water regulators.
Water filters.
Trap seal primer valves and systems.
Hydrants.
I
I
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of plumbing specialties
and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
I
Plumbing specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
I
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defIned in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
I
ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for piping materials and
installation.
I
NSF Compliance:
1.
Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects, Sections 1 through
9," for potable domestic water plumbing specialties.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
2.2
A.
MANUFACTURERS
I
In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply
for product selection:
I
L
2.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers
specified.
I
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
I
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Ames Co., Inc.
CIa-Val Co.
CMB Industries, Inc.; Febco Backflow Preventers.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
I
I
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
15430 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
FLOMATIC Corp.
Mueller Co.; Hersey Meters Div.
Sparco, Inc.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.
B.
General: ASSE standard, backflow preventers.
1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
e.
Double-Check Backflow Prevention Assembly for Domestic Water: ASSE 1015, suitable for continuous
pressure application. Include shutoff valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet; test cocks; and two
positive-seating check valves.
1. Pressure Loss: 5 psig maxirmlIn, through middle 1/3 of flow range.
D.
Double-Check Detector Assembly Backflow Preventer for Fire Protection: ASSE 1048, FM approved or
UL listed, and suitable for continuous pressure application. Include outside screw and yoke gate valves
on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet. Include test cocks; two positive-seating check valves; and
bypass with displacement-type water meter, valves, and double-check backflow preventer.
1. Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.
BALANCING VALVES.
A.
Calibrated Balancing Valves: Adjustable, with two readout ports and memory setting indicator. Include
manufacturer's standard hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case.
1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Amtrol, Inc.
Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
Flow Design, Inc.
ITT Industries; Bell & Gossett Div.
ROMAC Industries, Inc.; Hays Fluid Control Div.
Taco, Inc.
Tour & Andersson, Inc.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
2.
NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body with brass ball, adjustment knob, calibrated nameplate, and
threaded or solder-joint ends.
B.
Memory-Stop Balancing Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: MSS SP-llO, ball valve, rated for 400-psig
minimum CWP. Include two-piece, copper-alloy body with standard or full-port, chrome-plated brass
ball, replaceable seats and seals, threaded or solder-joint ends, and vinyl-covered steel handle with
memory-stop device.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
Grinnell Corporation.
e.
I
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
15430 - 3
2.4
A.
B.
e.
I
I
f.
g.
h.
Hammond Valve.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
NIBCO INe.
Red-White Valve Corp.
I
1.
WATER FILTERS
I
Manufacturers:
I
1. Eagle Spring Filtration, Inc.
2. Filpro Corporation.
3. Filterspun.
4. Filtrine Manufacturing Company; Drinking Water Division.
5. Met-Pro Corporation; Keystone Filter Division.
6. Pall Corporation.
7. PURA, Inc.
8. U.S. Filter; Filterite Div.
9. Waterlink, Inc.
10. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
I
I
I
General: Cartridge-type assemblies suitable for potable water. Include housing, fittings, filter cartridges,
and cartridge end caps.
I
Wall-Mounting Type: Housing head section with threaded inlet and outlet, mounting bracket, and
removable lower section for lO-inch-long filter cartridge.
L
2.
Housing Material: Plastic, 125-psig minimum operating pressure.
Cartridge: Wound- or molded-fiber filter media, 10 inches, 10-micron-particulate removable
rating.
I
I
A.
2.5 STRAINERS
2.6
Strainers: Y-pattern, unless otherwise indicated, and full size of connecting plpmg. Include
ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel screens with 3/64-inch round perforations, unless otherwise
indicated.
I
I
L
2.
3.
Pressure Rating: 125-psig minimum steam working pressure, unless otherwise indicated.
NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body, with female threaded ends.
NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Cast-iron body, with interior A WW A C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy
coating and flanged ends.
Y-Pattern Strainers: Screwed screen retainer with centered blowdown.
I
4.
a.
Drain: Pipe plug.
I
A. Manufacturers:
OUTLET BOXES
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
Acorn Engineering Company.
Gray, Guy Manufacturing Co., Inc.
IPS Corporation.
LSP Products Group.
I
I
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
15430 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.7
A. Manufacturers:
KEY-OPERATION HYDRANTS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.8
I
I
I
I
B.
e.
B.
C.
A.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Oatey.
Plastic Oddities, Inc.
Symmons Industries, Inc.
Zurn Industries, Inc.; Jonespec Div.
General: Recessed-mounting outlet boxes with supply fittings complying with ASME A112.18.1M.
Include box with faceplate, services indicated for equipment connections, and wood-blocking
reinforcement.
Icemaker Outlet Boxes: With hose connection and the following:
1.
2.
3.
Box and Faceplate: Enameled or epoxy-painted steel.
Shutoff Fitting: Hose bibb.
Supply Fitting: NPS l/2 gate, globe, or ball valve and NPS 1/2 copper, water tubing.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Josam Co.
Murdock, Inc.
Simmons Manufacturing Co.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Drainage Products Div.
Woodford Manufacturing Co.
Zurn Industries, Inc.; Jonespec Div.
Zurn Industries, Inc.; Specification Drainage Operation.
General: ASME Al12.21.3M, key-operation hydrant with pressure rating of 125 psig.
1.
2.
3.
Inlet: NPS 3/4 or NPS 1 threaded or solder joint.
Outlet: ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads.
Operating Keys: One with each key-operation hydrant.
Nonfreeze Exposed-Outlet Wall Hydrants: ASSE 1019, self-drainable with integral nonremovable hose-
connection vacuum breaker, casing and operating rod to match wall thickness, projecting outlet, and wall
clamp.
1.
Classification: Type A, for automatic draining with hose removed, for automatic draining with
hose removed or with hose attached and nozzle closed.
Nozzle and Wall Plate Finish: Polished nickel bronze.
2.
TRAP SEAL PRIMER VALVES
Supply-Type Trap Seal Primer Valves: ASSE IOl8, water-supply-fed type, with the following
characteristics:
1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.
E & S Valves.
Josam Co.
MIF AB Manufacturing, Inc.
c.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
15430 - 5
B.
2.9
A.
2.10
A.
B.
I
I
d.
Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Drainage Products Div.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
Zurn Industries, Inc.; Jonespec Div.
Zurn Industries, Inc.; Specification Drainage Operation.
I
e.
f.
g.
h.
I
1.
J.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
l25-psig minimum working pressure.
Bronze body with atmospheric-vented drain chamber.
Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solder joint.
Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint.
Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not chrome
fInished.
I
I
Trap Seal Primer System: Factory-fabricated, automatic-operation assembly for wall mounting with the
following:
I
1. Manufacturers:
a.
Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
I
2.
Piping: NPS 3/4, ASTM B 88, Type L; copper, water tubing inlet and manifold with number of
NPS 1/2 outlets as indicated.
Cabinet: Steel box with stainless-steel cover.
Electric Controls: 24-hour timer, solenoid valve, and manual switch for 120-V ac power.
Water Hammer Arrester: ASSE 1010.
Vacuum Breaker: ASSE 1001.
I
I
3.
4.
5.
6.
DRAIN VALVES
I
Hose-End Drain Valve: MSS SP-80, gate valve, Class 125, ASTM B 62 bronze body, with NPS 3/4
threaded or solder-joint inlet and ASME B 1.20.7, garden-hose threads on outlet and cap. Hose bibbs are
prohibited for this application.
I
MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES
I
Water Hammer Arresters: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201, metal-bellows type with pressurized metal
cushioning chamber. Sizes indicated are based on ASSE 1010 or PDI - WH 201, Sizes A through F.
I
1. Manufacturers:
a. Josam Co.
b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
c. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
d. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Specification Drainage Operation.
I
I
Hose Bibbs: Bronze body with replaceable seat disc complying with ASME A112.18.1M for
compression-type faucets. Include NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 threaded or solder-joint inlet, of design suitable
for pressure of at least 125 psig; integral or field-installed, nonremovable, drainable hose-connection
vacuum breaker; and garden-hose threads complying with ASME B 1.20.7 on outlet.
I
1.
Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated.
I
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
15430 - 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.11
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Finish for Service Areas: Rough bronze.
Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated.
Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key.
Operation for Service Areas: Wheel handle.
Operation for Finished Rooms: Operating key.
Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb.
Include wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb.
CLEANOUTS
A. Refer to Cleanout Schedule on Drawings.
I
2.12 FLOOR DRAINS
I
A. Refer to Floor Drain Schedule on Drawings.
I
2.l3 ROOF DRAINS
I
A. Refer to Floor Drain Schedule on Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
I
A.
I
B.
I
I
I
e.
D.
I
E.
I
I
INSTALLATION
Refer to Division l5 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for piping joining materials,
joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other
equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.
2.
Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system
Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap fitting,
fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in drain
piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or under backflow preventer.
Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application.
Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.
3.
Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure regulator, and solenoid valve.
Install trap seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent
and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.
Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger
cleanout is indicated.
2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
.
.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
15430 - 7
I
3.
Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger
plpmg.
Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
I
4.
I
F. Install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor, for floor cleanouts for piping below floors.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
Install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with fInished wall, for
cleanouts located in concealed piping.
I
Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout passing through floors with
waterproof membrane.
I
Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with fmished
floor, unless otherwise indicated.
I
1.
2.
Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.
Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set with
grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:
I
a.
Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than l/4-inch total
depression.
Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to I percent slope.
Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than I-inch total
depression.
I
I
b.
c.
3.
Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining
flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise
indicated.
I
4.
Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's written
installation instructions.
I
1.
Install roof-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining
roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.
I
2.
Fasten wall-hanging plumbing specialties securely to supports attached to building substrate if supports
are specified and to building wall construction if no support is indicated.
I
M. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting and recessed-type plumbing specialties.
Fasten recessed-type plumbing specialties to reinforcement built into walls.
I
N.
o.
P.
Q.
Install individual shutoff valve in each water supply to plumbing specialties. Use ball, gate, or globe
valve if specific valve is not indicated. Install shutoff valves in accessible locations. Refer to Division 15
Section "Valves" for general-duty ball, butterfly, check, gate, and globe valves.
I
Install air vents at piping high points. Include ball, gate, or globe valve in inlet.
I
Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated.
I
Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed fmished locations and within
cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.
I
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
15430-8
I
I
I
3.2
A.
B.
e.
D.
E.
F.
3.3
A.
B.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CONNECTIONS
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
Connect plumbing specialties to piping specified in other Division 15 Sections.
Ground equipment.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening
values. Ifmanufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
Connect plumbing specialties and devices that require power according to Division 16 Sections.
PROTECTION
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to
prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
END OF SECTION 15430
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
15430 - 9
I
I
SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
1.1
I
I
1.2
I
I
I
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes plumbing fixtures and trim, faucets, other fittings, and related components.
B.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.
2.
3.
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters.
Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves used as supply stops.
Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for backflow preventers and other specialties not
specified in this Section.
1.3 DEFfNITIONS
I
I
I
1.4
I
I
.
.
-
-
1.5
A.
Accessible: Plumbing fixture, building, facility, or portion thereof that can be approached, entered, and
used by physically handicapped, disabled, and elderly people.
B.
Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of plumbing fixture. Fittings specified in this Sec-
tion include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and tub spouts, drains and tailpieces,
traps and waste pipes. Pipe fittings, tube fittings, and general-duty valves are included where indicated.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B.
Product Data for each plumbing fixture category and type specified. Include selected fixture, trim, fit-
tings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials and finishes,
dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates.
C.
Wiring diagrams from manufacturer for electrically operated units.
D.
Maintenance data for plumbing fixtures and components to include in the operation and maintenance
manuals specified in Division 1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category from one
source and by a single manufacturer.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
15440 - 1
1.6
1.7
I
1. Exception: Where fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single manufac-
turer, obtainsirnilar products from other manufacturers specified for this category.
I
I
B.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of CABO Al17.1, "Accessible and Usable Build-
ings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101-336, "Ameri-
cans with Disabilities Act"; regarding plumbing fixtures for physically handicapped people.
I
e.
Energy Policy Act Requirements: Comply with requirements of Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy
Act," regarding water flow rate and water consumption of plumbing fixtures.
I
D.
Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures and components specified in this Section that
are listed and labeled.
1.
The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
I
E.
Select combinations of fIxtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible.
I
F.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profIles, dimensional requirements, and characteristics of
plumbing fixtures and are based on specific types and models indicated. Other manufacturers' fixtures
with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."
I
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
I
A.
Deliver plumbing fixtures in manufacturer's protective packing, crating, and covering.
B.
Store plumbing fixtures on elevated platforms in dry location.
I
PROJECT CONDITIONS
I
A.
Field Measurements: Coordinate roughing-in and final fIxture locations and verify that plumbing fIxtures
can be installed to comply with original design and referenced standards.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
I
PLUMBING FIXTURE STANDARDS
A.
Comply with applicable standards below and other requirements specified.
I
1. Electric Water Coolers: ARI 1010 and UL 399.
2. Enameled, Cast-Iron Fixtures: ASME A112.19.1M.
3. National Sanitation Foundation Construction: NSF 2.
4. Plastic Mop-Service Basins: ANSI ZI24.6.
5. Porcelain-Enameled Fixtures: ASME Al12.19.4M.
6. Semivitreous Ceramic Fixtures: ASME A112.19.9M.
7. Stainless-Steel Fixtures Other than Service Sinks: ASME A112.l9.3M.
8. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME Al12.19.2M.
I
I
9. Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME Al12.19.5.
10. Water-Closet, Flushometer Tank Trim: ASSE 1037.
I
I
PLUMBING FIXTURES
l5440 - 2
I
I
I
2.2
I
I
I
I
I
2.3
I
I
I
I
2.4
I
I
I
I
-
LAVATORY/SINKFAUCET STANDARDS
A.
Comply with ASME A1l2.18.lM and other requirements specified for lavatory, sink, and sirnilar-type-
fixture faucet fittings. Include hot- and cold-water indicators; 2.5-gpm- maximum flow rate; and pol-
ished, chrome-plated fInish; except where otherwise indicated. Coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and
fixture holes and outlet with spout and fIxture receptor.
1. Diverter Valves for Faucets with Hose Spray: ASSE 1025.
2. Faucet Hose: ASTM D 3901.
3. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011.
4. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
5. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
6. Pipe Threads: ASME B 1.20.1.
7. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.
8. Sink Spray Hoses: ASTM D 3573.
MISCELLANEOUS FITTING STANDARDS
A.
Comply with ASMEA1l2.18.lM and other requirements specified for fittings, other than faucets. In-
clude polished, chrome-plated finish, except where otherwise indicated. Coordinate fittings with other
components and connectors.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
Automatic Flow Restrictors: ASSE 1028.
Brass and Copper, Supplies and Tubular Brass: ASME Al12.18.1M.
Fixed Flow Restrictors: ASSE 1034.
Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037.
Plastic Tubular Fittings: ASTM F 409.
MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENT STANDARDS
A.
Comply with applicable standards below and other requirements specified for components for plumbing
fixtures, equipment, and appliances.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Disposers: ASSE 1008 and UL 430.
Floor Drains: ASME Al12.21.1M.
Grab Bars: ASTM F 446.
Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B 1.20.7.
Pipe Threads: ASME B 1.20.1.
Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI 2124.5.
Supply and Drain Insulation Kits: CABO A117.1.
Supports: ASME A1l2.6.1M.
I
2.5 FITTINGS
A.
Fittings for Plumbing Fixtures: Refer to plumbing fixture schedules at the end of this Section for materi-
als for supplies, supply stops, supply risers, traps, and other fittings.
-
==
.
B.
Fittings for Equipment Specified in Other Sections: Fittings include the following:
1. Supply Inlets: Brass pipe or copper tube, size required for final connection.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
15440 - 3
I
I
2.
Supply Stops: Chrome-plated brass, angle or straight; compression, loose-key type; same size as
supply inlet and with outlet matching supply riser.
Supply Risers: 3/8-inch NPS flexible copper tube with knob end. Use chrome-plated tube for ex-
posed applications.
Traps: Tubular brass with 0.045-inch wall thickness, slip-joint inlet, cleanout, wall flange, es-
cutcheons, and size to match equipment. Use chrome-plated tube for exposed applications.
Continuous Waste: Tubular brass, 0.045-inch wall thickness, with slip-joint inlet, and size to
match equipment.
Indirect Waste: Tubular brass, 0.045-inch wall thickness, and size to match equipment.
I
3.
I
4.
5.
I
6.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.
Examine roughing-in for potable, hot- and cold-water supply piping systems; soil, waste, and vent piping
systems; and supports. Verify that locations and sizes of piping and locations and types of supports
match those indicated, before installing and connecting fixtures. Use manufacturer's roughing-in data
when roughing-in data are not indicated.
I
I
B. Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fIxtures are to be installed.
e.
3.2
Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
I
APPLICATIONS
I
A. Include supports for plumbing fixtures according to the following:
B.
3.3
A.
1.
2.
Carriers: For wall-hanging water closets and fixtures supported from wall construction.
Chair Carriers: For wall-hanging urinals, lavatories, sinks, drinking fountains, and electric water
coolers.
Heavy-Duty Chair Carriers: For accessible urinals, lavatories, and other fixtures where indicated.
Reinforcement: For floor-mounted lavatories and sinks that require securing to wall and recessed,
box-mounted, electric water coolers.
Fabricate reinforcement from 2-by-4-inch or 2-by-6-inch fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking be-
tween studs or 1/4-by-6-inch steel plates attached to studs, in wall construction, to secure fIxtures
to wall. Include length that will extend beyond ends of fIxture mounting bracket and attach to at
least 2 studs.
I
3.
4.
I
5.
I
Include fitting insulation kits for accessible fixtures according to the following:
I
1.
2.
3.
Lavatories: Cover hot- and cold-water supplies, stops and handles, drain, trap, and waste to wall.
Sinks: Cover hot- and cold-water supplies, stops and handles, drain, trap, and waste to wall.
Fixtures with Offset Drain: Cover hot- and cold-water supplies, offset drain, trap, and waste to
wall.
Other Fixtures: Cover exposed fittings below fixture.
I
I
4.
PLUMBING FIXTURE INSTALLATION
I
Assemble plumbing fIxtures and trim, fittings, faucets, and other components according to manufacturers'
written instructions.
I
PLUMBING FIXTURES
15440 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.4
I
I
I
B.
Install fixtures level and plumb according to manufacturers' written instructions, roughing-in drawings,
and referenced standards.
C.
Install floor-mo~ted, floor-outlet water closets with closet flanges and gasket seals.
D.
Install toilet seats on water closets.
E.
Install wall-hanging, back-outlet urinals with gasket seals.
F.
Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wide side of
compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for handicapped people to reach.
G.
Fasten wall-hanging plumbing fixtures securely to supports attached to building substrate when supports
are specified, and to building wall construction where no support is indicated.
H.
Fasten floor-mounted fixtures to substrate. Fasten fixtures having holes for securing fixture to wall con-
struction, to reinforcement built into walls.
I. Fasten recessed, wall-mounted fittings to reinforcement built into walls.
J.
Fasten wall-mounted fittings to reinforcement built into walls.
K.
Fasten counter-mounting plumbing fixtures to casework.
L.
Secure supplies to supports or substrate within pipe space behind fixture.
M.
Install individual stop valve in each water supply to fixture. Use gate or globe valve where specific stop
valve is not specified.
1.
Exception: Omit stop valves on supplies to emergency equipment, except when permitted by au-
thorities having jurisdiction. When permitted, install valve chained and locked in OPEN position.
N. Install water-supply stop valves in accessible locations.
o.
Install traps on fixture outlets. Omit traps on fixtures having integral traps. Omit traps on indirect
wastes, except where otherwise indicated.
P.
Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabi-
nets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.
Q.
Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters using sanitary-type, I-part, mildew-resistant,
silicone sealant according to sealing requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." Match
sealant color to fixture color.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements:
1.
Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping systems and plumbing equipment
specified in other Division 15 Sections.
B.
Supply and Waste Connections to Plumbing Fixtures: Refer to plumbing fixture schedules at the end of
this Section for fitting sizes and connection requirements for each plumbing fixture.
~
PLUMBING FIXTURES
15440 - 5
I
I
C.
Supply and Waste Connections to Equipment Specified in Other Sections: Connect equipment with sup-
ply inlets, supply stops, supply risers, and traps specified in this Section. Use fitting sizes required to
match connected equipment. Connect fittings to plumbing piping.
I
D. Ground equipment.
I
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
I
E.
Arrange for electric-power connections to fixtures and devices that require power. Electric power is
specified in Division 16 Sections.
I
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.6
3.7
Verify that installed fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed.
I
A.
B. Check that fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components.
I
e.
Inspect installed fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
D.
Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized and demonstrate proper operation. Replace
malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly.
I
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
I
A.
Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and con-
trols.
I
B.
Adjust water pressure at drinking fountains, electric water coolers, faucets, shower valves, and flushome-
ter valves having controls, to produce proper flow and stream.
I
e.
Replace washers and seals ofleaking and dripping faucets and stops.
D.
Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and mate-
rials. Include the following:
I
1.
Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers and
spouts.
Remove sediment and debris from drains.
I
2.
PROTECTION
I
A.
Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.
I
B.
Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities, except when approved in writing by Owner.
END OF SECTION 15440
I
I
PLUMBING FIXTURES
15440 - 6
I
I
I
SECTION 15530 - REFRIGERANT PIPING
I
PART 1- GENERAL
I
1.1
I
I
1.2
I
I
I
1.3
I
I
I
I
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications, including pipes, tubing,
fittings, and specialties; special-duty valves; and refrigerants.
B.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and methods for sealing pipe penetrations
through basement walls and fIre/smoke barriers.
2. Division l5 Section "Mechanical Insulation" for pipe insulation.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B.
Product Data for each refrigerant piping specialty specified.
e.
Shop Drawings showing layout of refrigerant piping and fittings, wall and floor penetrations. Show inter-
face and spatial relationship between piping and equipment.
1.
Refrigerant piping indicated is schematic only. Size and design the layout and installation of the
piping, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and tube sizes, to ensure proper op-
eration and conformance with warranties of connected equipment.
I
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
ASME Compliance: Qualify brazing and welding processes and operators according to ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
I
I
B.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following codes:
1.
2.
ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping."
ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration."
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
PIPES AND TUBES
.
.
REFRIGERANT PIPING
15530 - 1
2.2
2.3
2.4
I
I
A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR, drawn temper.
PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS
I
A.
Copper Fittings: ASME B 16.22, wrought-copper streamlined pattern.
I
JOINING MATERIALS
I
A.
Brazing Filler Metals: A WS A5.8, Classification BAg-1 (Silver).
REFRIGERANT
I
A.
ASHRAE 34, R-22: Monochlorodifluoromethane.
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.
Examine roughing-in for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of refrigerant piping. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory condi-
tions have been corrected.
I
I
3.2 APPLICATIONS
3.3
A.
B.
e.
D.
E.
I
A.
Aboveground, within Building: Type ACR drawn-copper tubing.
INSTALLATION
I
Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.
I
Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials
and Methods."
Install piping in short and direct arrangement, with minimum number of joints, elbows, and fittings.
I
Arrange piping to allow normal inspection and service of compressor and other equipment
I
Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers, or between pipes for
insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit installation of full-
thickness insulation.
I
F.
Insulate suction lines and liquid lines, but insulate them together if adjacent.
1.
Do not install insulation until system testing has been completed and all leaks have been elimi-
nated.
I
G.
Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing will be exposed to me-
chanical injury.
I
REFRIGERANT PIPING
15530 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.4
A.
B.
e.
D.
E.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.5
I
H.
Slope refrigerant piping as follows:
1.
Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope of 0.4 percent downward away
from compressor.
Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope of 0.4 percent downward to compressor.
Install traps and double risers where indicated and where required to entrain oil in vertical runs.
Liquid lines may be installed level.
2.
3.
4.
I.
Use fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J.
Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted, un-
less expressly indicated.
K.
Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fittings installed with level side down.
L.
When brazing, remove solenoid-valve coils; remove sight glasses; and remove stems, seats, and packing
of valves, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near bulb of expan-
sion valve.
M.
Charge and purge systems, after testing, and dispose of refrigerant following ASHRAE 15 procedures.
N.
Charge system as follows:
1.
2.
Install filter-dryer core after leak test, but before evacuation.
Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump, until temperature of 35 deg F is indicated on vac-
uum dehydration indicator.
Maintain vacuum for a minimum of 5 hours.
Break vacuum with refrigerant gas and charge to 2 psig.
3.
4.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
General: Hangers, supports, and anchors are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
Provide according to ASME B3l.5 and MSS SP-69.
Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet in length.
Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer.
Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes. Tube
sizes are nominal or standard tube sizes as expressed in ASTM B 88.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1/2 Inch: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
5/8 Inch: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
1 Inch: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
1-l/4 Inches: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
1-1/2 Inches: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
2 Inches: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
F.
Support vertical runs at each floor.
PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
REFRIGERANT PIPING
15530 - 3
I
I
A.
Basic pipe and tube joint construction is specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials
and Methods."
B.
Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide) during brazing to prevent formation of
scale.
I
I
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspect and test refrigerant piping according to ASME B31. 5, Chapter VI.
I
1.
Pressure test with nitrogen to 200 psig. Perform final tests at 27-psig vacuum and 200 psig using
halide torch or electronic leak detector. Test to no leakage.
I
B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
C.
Repair leaks using new materials; retest.
I
3.7
COMMISSIONING
I
A. Charge system using the following procedures:
5.
6.
Install core in filter dryer after leak test, but before evacuation.
Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump until temperature of 35 deg F is indicated on vac-
uum dehydration indicator.
During evacuation, apply heat to pockets, elbows, and low spots in piping.
Maintain vacuum on system for minimum of 5 hours after closing valve between vacuum pump
and system.
Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig.
Complete charging of system, using new filter-dryer core in charging line. Provide full-operating
charge.
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
I
I
END OF SECTION 15530
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
REFRlGERANT PIPING
15530 - 4
I
I
I
SECTION 15738 - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
I
PART 1- GENERAL
I
1.1
I
I
1.2
I
I
I
I
1.3
I
I
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes split-system air-conditioning and heat pump units COnsIStIng of separate
evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components. Units are designed for exposed or concealed
mounting, and may be connected to ducts.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints" for isolation pads,
spring isolators, and seismic restraints.
2. Division 15 Section "Control Systems Equipment" for control devices not packaged with units.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Evaporator-Fan Unit: The part of the split-system air-conditioning unit that contains a coil for cooling
(heat rejection for heating operation in heat pump units) and a fan to circulate air to conditioned space.
B.
Compressor-Condenser Unit: The part of the split-system air-conditioning unit that contains a refrigerant
compressor and a coil for condensing refrigerant (evaporator for heating operation in heat pump units).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
I
I
I
I
1.5
I
I
I
A.
Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties;
and accessories for each type of product indicated. Include performance data in terms of capacities,
outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical
characteristics.
B.
Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between manufacturer-
installed and field-installed wiring.
e.
Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of split-system units
and are based on the specific system indicated. Other manufacturers' systems with equal performance
characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
15738 - 1
1.6
1.7
I
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defmed in NFP A 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
I
I
COORDINATION
I
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for units.
WARRANTY
I
A.
General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights
Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run
concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
I
B.
Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace components
of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
I
C.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of substantial completion.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
2.2
2.3
MANUFACTURERS
I
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Carrier Air Conditioning; Div. of Carrier Corp.
Lennox Industries Inc.
Trane Co. (The); Unitary Products Group.
York International Corp.
I
I
ABOVE-CEILING-MOUNTED, EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS
I
A.
Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends, and discharge drain pans with drain
connection.
I
B.
Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI 210/240,
and with thermal-expansion valve.
e.
Electric Coil: Helical, nickel-chrome, resistance-wire heating elements with refractory ceramic support
bushings; automatic-reset thermal cutout; built-in magnetic contactors; manual-reset thermal cutout;
airflow proving device; and one-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection.
I
D.
Fan and Motor: Centrifugal fan, directly driven by multispeed, electric motor with integral overload
protection; resiliently mounted.
I
E.
Filters: Permanent, cleanable.
I
AIR-COOLED, COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER COMPONENTS
I
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
15738 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
2.4
A.
B.
C.
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Casing: Steel, fInished with baked enamel, with removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for
water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on
exterior of casing.
B.
Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation. Compressor
motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.
1. Compressor Type: Reciprocating.
Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fIns, complying with ARI 210/240,
and with liquid subcooler.
Heat Pump Components: Reversing valve and low-temperature air cut-off thermostat.
Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.
Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.
Fin Guard: To protect aluminum fins from vandalism.
Mounting Base: Concrete, 4-inch thick.
ACCESSORIES
Thermostat: Low voltage with subbase to control compressor and evaporator fan.
Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.
Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried, pressurized,
and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
I
I
I
I
3.2
I
I
INSTALLATION
A.
Install units level and plumb.
B.
Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely fastened to
building structure.
C.
Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on 4-inch- thick, reinforced concrete base; 4
inches larger on each side than unit.
D.
Connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing to allow
access to unit.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division l5 Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNlTS
15738 - 3
3.3
B.
e.
3.4
A.
B.
C.
I
I
B.
Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Unless otherwise indicated, connect piping with unions and shutoff valves to allow units to be
disconnected without draining piping. Refer to piping system Sections for specific valve and specialty
arrangements.
I
D.
Ground equipment.
I
1.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
I
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
I
A.
Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks
exist.
I
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor
rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new components, and retest.
I
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
COMMISSIONING
I
Verify that units are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.
I
Lubricate bearings, adjust belt tension, and change filters.
Perform startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and do the following:
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
Fill out manufacturer's checklists.
Check for unobstructed airflow over coils.
Check operation of condenser capacity-control device.
Verify that vibration isolation devices and flexible connectors dampen vibration transmission to
structure.
I
I
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
I
A.
Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units.
1.
Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping,
troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining units.
Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout."
Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice.
I
I
2.
3.
END OF SECTION 15738
I
I
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
15738 - 4
I
I
I
SECTION 15815 - METAL DUCTS
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
1.1
I
I
1.2
I
A.
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification SectionS, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes rectangular, round, and flat-oval metal ducts and plenums for heating, ventilating,
and air-conditioning systems in pressure classes from minus 1- to plus 2-inch wg.
B. Related Sections include the following:
I
I
I
I
I
1.3
I
I
I
1.4
I
I
A.
A.
1.
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for fire-resistant sealants for use around duct penetrations and
fire-damper installations in [lIe-rated floors, partitions, and walls.
Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for intake and relief louvers and vents connected to
ducts and installed in exterior walls.
Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
Division 15 Section "Mechanical Insulation" for duct insulation.
Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-mounted access
doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."
Division 15 Section "Control Systems Equipment" for automatic volume-control dampers and op-
erators.
Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for air balancing and final adjusting of
manual-volume dampers.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
DEFINlTIONS
Thermal Conductivity and Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): As defined in ASTM C 168. In
this Section, these values are the result of the formula Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg For Wlm x K at the tem-
perature differences specified. Values are expressed as Btu or W.
1.
Example: Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 or 0.037.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select and size air-moving and -distribution equipment
and other components of air system. Changes to layout or configuration of duct system must be specifi-
cally approved in writing by Architect. Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations
showing that proposed layout will provide original design results without increasing system total pres-
sure.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
I
I
METAL DUCTS
15815 - 1
1.6
1.7
I
I
A. Product Data: For duct liner and sealing materials.
B.
Record Drawings: Indicate actual routing, fitting details, reinforcement, support, and installed accesso-
ries and devices.
I
QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
A.
Welding Standards: Qualify welding procedures and welding personnel to perform welding processes for
this Project according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," for hangers and supports;
A WS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminwn," for aluminum supporting members; and A WS D9.1,
"Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct j oint and seam welding.
I
I
B.
Comply with NFP A 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," unless othenvise
indicated.
e.
Comply with NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations,"
Chapter 3, "Duct System," for range hood ducts, unless otherwise indicated.
I
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
I
A.
Deliver sealant and fires topping materials to site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels
indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing
time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
I
B.
Store and handle sealant and frrestopping materials according to manufacturer's written recommenda-
tions.
I
e.
Deliver and store stainless-steel sheets with mill-applied adhesive protective paper maintained through
fabrication and installation.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
2.2
SHEET METAL MATERIALS
I
A.
Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; mill-
phosphatized fInish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.
I
B.
Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold-rolled sheets; commercial quality; with oiled, exposed
matte fInish.
C.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480lA 480M, Type 316, sheet form with No.4 fInish for surfaces of ducts ex-
posed to view; and Type 304, sheet form with No. 1 finish for concealed ducts.
I
D.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized, sheet
metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
I
E.
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for 36-inch length or less; 3/8-inch minimum
diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
I
DUCT LINER
I
METAL DUCTS
15815 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.3
2.4
A.
General: Comply with NFP A 90A or NFP A 90B and NAIMA's "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."
B.
Materials: ASTM C 1071 with coated surface exposed to airstream to prevent erosion of glass fibers.
1.
2.
3.
Thickness: 1/2 inch.
Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F mean temperature.
Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread rating of 25 and smoke-developed rating of
50, when tested according to ASTM C 411.
Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFP A 90A or NFP A 90B and ASTM C 916.
Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical attachment,
or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufac-
turer and without causing leakage ill duct.
4.
5.
a.
Tensile Strength: IndefInitely sustain a 50-lb- tensile, dead-load test perpendicular to duct
wall.
Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and without projecting more
than 1/8 inch into airstream.
Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with rue-hazard classification of
duct liner system.
b.
c.
SEALANT MATERIALS
A.
Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive or mastic na-
ture but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and mastics.
1. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with a gypsum mineral compound and a
modified acryliclsilicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form a hard, durable, air-
tight seal.
2. Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl sealant,
formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.
3. Flanged Joint Mastics: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealants, complying with
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Building Attachments: Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 15 Sections "Hang-
ers and Supports" and "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls."
B.
Hanger Materials: Galvanized, sheet steel or round, threaded steel rod.
1. Hangers Installed in Pool/Spa Area: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rod or galvanized rods with
threads painted after installation.
2. Straps and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and
Flexible" for sheet steel width and thickness and for steel rod diameters.
3. Install VIbration isolating spring hangers where indicated in Section 15071.
e.
Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct
materials.
D.
Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel shapes and plates.
METAL DUCTS
15815-3
2.5
2.6
A.
B.
e.
D.
E.
F.
I
I
RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction with
galvanized, sheet steel, according to SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexi-
ble." Comply with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod applications,
and joint types and intervals.
I
I
1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class re-
quired for pressure classification.
2. Materials: Free from visual imperfections such as pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, and
discolorations.
I
B.
Fabricate range hood exhaust ducts with 0.0598-inch-thick, carbon-steel sheet for concealed ducts and
0.0500-inch-thick stainless steel for exposed ducts. Weld and flange seams and joints. Comply with
NFP A 96.
I
e.
Static-Pressure Classifications: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts to the following:
I
1.
2.
3.
Supply Ducts: 2-inch wg.
Return Ducts: I-inch wg, negative pressure.
Exhaust Ducts: I-inch wg, negative pressure.
I
D.
Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and larger and 0.0359
inch thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. ofunbraced panel area, unless ducts are lined.
I
SHOP APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS
I
Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with 90 percent coverage of adhesive at liner
contact surface area. Multiple layers of insulation to achieve indicated thickness are prohibited.
I
Apply adhesive to liner facing in direction of airflow not receiving metal nosing.
Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.
I
Fold and compress liner in corners ofrectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge overlapping.
Do not apply liners in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts, unless duct
size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.
I
Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12 inches
transversely around perimeter; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding l8 inches
longitudinally.
I
G.
Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal no sings that have either channel
or "Z" profile or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the following locations:
I
1.
2.
Fan discharge.
Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
I
H.
Terminate liner with duct buildouts installed in ducts to attach dampers, turning vane assemblies, and
other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used,
secure buildouts to duct wall with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds. Terminate liner at fire dampers at con-
nection to fire-damper sleeve.
I
I
METAL DUCTS
15815-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
.
2.7
2.8
ROUND DUCT FABRICATION
A.
Round Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of galvanized steel according to SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Con-
struction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
ROUND SUPPLY AND EXHAUST FITTING FABRICATION
A.
90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HV AC Duct
Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," with metal thicknesses specified for longitudinal seam
straight duct.
B.
Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with a reduced entrance to branch taps with no excess material pro-
jecting from body onto branch tap entrance.
C.
Elbows: Fabricate in die-formed, "gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Fabricate bend radius of die-
formed, gored, and pleated elbows one and one-half times elbow diameter. Unless elbow construction
type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows:
1.
Mitered-Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying with SMACNA's
"HV AC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated.
Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for pressure
classes from minus 2- to plus 2-inch wg:
2.
a. Ducts 3 to 26 Inches in Diameter: 0.028 inch.
b. Ducts 27 to 36 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch.
c. Ducts 37 to 50 Inches in Diameter: 0.040 inch.
d. Ducts 52 to 60 Inches in Diameter: 0.052 inch.
e. Ducts 62 to 84 Inches in Diameter: 0.064 inch.
3.
Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for pressure
classes from 2- to lO-inch wg:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Ducts 3 to 14 Inches in Diameter: 0.028 inch.
Ducts 15 to 26 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch.
Ducts 27 to 50 Inches in Diameter: 0.040 inch.
Ducts 52 to 60 Inches in Diameter: 0.052 inch.
Ducts 62 to 84 Inches in Diameter: 0.064 inch.
e.
4.
90-Degree, Two-Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems, or exhaust systems for ma-
terial-handling classes A and B; and only where space restrictions do not permit using 1.5 bend
radius elbows. Fabricate with single-thickness turning vanes.
Round Elbows, 8 Inches and Smaller: Fabricate die-formed elbows for 45- and 90-degree elbows
and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle con-
figuration or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction.
Round Elbows, 9 through 14 Inches: Fabricate gored or pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 de-
grees, unless space restrictions require a mitered elbow. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle con-
figuration or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction.
Round Elbows, Larger Than 14 Inches, and All Flat-Oval Elbows: Fabricate gored elbows, unless
space restrictions require a mitered elbow.
Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes through 8 Inches and All Pressures: 0.040 inch thick with two-
piece welded construction.
Round Gored-Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non-elbow fittings specified above.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
METAL DUCTS
15815 - 5
2.9
I
I
DOUBLE- WALL DUCT AND FITTING FABRICATION
A.
(Manufacturers:
I
1.
2.
3.
Lindab Inc.
McGill AirFlow Corporation.
SEMCO Incorporated.
I
B.
Ducts: Fabricate double-wall (insulated) ducts with an outer shell and an inner duct. Dimensions indi-
cated are for inner ducts.
I
1.
Outer Shell: Base metal thickness on outer-shell dimensions. Fabricate outer-shell lengths 2
inches longer than inner duct and insulation and in metal thickness specified for single-wall duct.
Insulation: 1-inch- thick fibrous glass, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate insulation where
double-wall duct connects to single-wall duct or uninsulated components, and reduce outer shell
diameter to inner duct diameter.
I
2.
I
a. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F mean temperature.
3.
Solid Inner Ducts: Use the following sheet metal thicknesses and seam construction:
I
a.
b.
Ducts 3 to 8 Inches in Diameter: 0.019 inch with standard spiral-seam construction.
Ducts 9 to 42 Inches in Diameter: 0.019 inch with single-rib spiral-seam construction.
Ducts 44 to 60 Inches in Diameter: 0.022 inch with single-rib spiral-seam construction.
I
c.
4.
Perforated Inner Ducts: Fabricate with O.028-inch- thick sheet metal having 3/32-inch- diameter
perforations, with overall open area of 23 percent.
Maintain concentricity of inner duct to outer shell by mechanical means. Prevent dislocation of
insulation by mechanical means.
I
5.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
A.
B.
e.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
DUCT INSTALLATION, GENERAL
I
Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general ar-
rangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories.
I
Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification indicated.
I
Install round ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet, unless interrupted by fittings.
Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
I
Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and connections.
Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct.
I
Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and perpendicular to build-
ing lines; avoid diagonal runs.
I
Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure
elements of building.
I
METAL DUCTS
15815 - 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
J.
Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, unless spe-
cifically indicated.
K.
Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting layouts, and similar
finished work.
L.
Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ductwork to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical
equipment spaces and enclosures.
M.
Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls,
and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with
sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as duct. Overlap opening on four sides by at least 1-1/2
inches.
N.
Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, install
appropriately rated fire damper, sleeve, and frrestopping sealant. Fire and smoke dampers are specified in
Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials and installation methods are specified in
Division 7 Section "Firestopping."
I
3.2 RANGE HOOD EXHAUST DUCT INSTALLATIONS
A.
Install ducts to allow for thermal expansion of ductwork through 2000 deg F temperature range.
I
I
I
3.3
A.
B.
C.
3.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
I
I
I
I
I
-
I
B.
Install ducts without dips or traps that may collect residues, unless traps have continuous or automatic
residue removal.
C.
Install access openings at each change in direction and at 50-foot intervals; locate on sides of duct a
minimum of 1-112 inches from bottom; and fit with grease-tight covers of same material as duct.
D.
Do not penetrate frre-rated assemblies.
SEAM AND JOINT SEALING
General: Seal duct seams and joints according to the duct pressure class indicated and as described in
SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
Pressure Classification Less Than 2-Inch wg: Class C, transverse joints only.
Seal externally insulated ducts before insulation installation.
HANGINGAND SUPPORTING
Install rigid round, rectangular, and flat-oval metal duct with support systems indicated in SMACNA's
"HV AC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.
Support vertical ducts at a maximum interval of 16 feet and at each floor.
Install vibration isolating spring hangers where indicated in Section 15071.
METAL DUCTS
15815-7
I
I
3.5
CONNECTIONS
A.
Connect equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."
I
B.
For branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections, comply with SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Con-
struction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
I
3.6
ADJUSTING
A.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for detailed procedures.
I
3.7
CLEANING
I
A.
After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect the system. Vacuum
ducts before final acceptance to remove dust and debris.
I
END OF SECTION 15815
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
METAL DUCTS
15815 - 8
I
I
I
SECTION 15820 - DUCT ACCESSORIES
I
PART 1- GENERAL
I
1.1
I
I
1.2
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Manual-volume dampers.
3. Fire and smoke dampers.
4. Turning vanes.
5. Duct-mounted access doors and panels.
6. Flexible ducts.
7. Flexible connectors.
8. Duct accessory hardware.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1. Division lO Section "Louvers and Vents" for intake and relief louvers and vents connected to
ducts and installed in exterior walls.
2. Division 15 Section "Air Terminals" for variable-air-volume control boxes, and reheat boxes.
3. Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."
4. Division 15 Section "Control Systems Equipment" for electric damper actuators.
5. Division 16 Section "Fire Alarm Systems" for duct-mounted fire and smoke detectors.
SUB MITT ALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Manual-volume dampers.
3. Fire and smoke dampers.
4. Duct-mounted access doors and panels.
5. Flexible ducts.
B.
Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loadings, required clear-
ances, method of field assembly, components, location, and size of each field connection. Detail the fol-
lowing:
1. Special fittings and manual- and automatic-volume-damper installations.
2. Fire and smoke damper installations, including sleeves and duct-mounted access doors and panels.
C.
Product Certificates: Submit certified test data on dynamic insertion loss; self-noise power levels; and
airflow performance data, static-pressure loss, dimensions, and weights.
DUCT ACCESSORIES
15820 - 1
1.4
I
I
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
NFP A Compliance: Comply with the following NFP.A standards:
I
1. NFP A 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
A.
B.
e.
D.
E.
F.
2.3
A.
SHEET METAL MATERIALS
I
A.
Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; mill-
phosphatized fInish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.
I
B.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized, sheet
metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
I
C.
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for 36-inch length or less; 3/8-inch minimum
diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
I
BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
I
Description: Suitable for horizontal or vertical installations.
Frame: 0.052-inch- thick, galvanized, sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting flange.
I
Blade Seals: Felt.
Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
I
Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steeL
I
Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
MANUAL- VOLUME DAMPERS
I
General: Factory fabricated with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades for stability.
Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration. Close duct
penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent with pressure class.
I
1.
Pressure Classifications of 3-Inch wg or Higher: End bearings or other seals for ducts with axles
full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
I
B.
Standard Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design as indicated,
standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applica-
tions.
I
1.
Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized, sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064 inch thick, with
mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls; and flan-
geless frames where indicated for installing in ducts.
Roll-Formed Steel Blades: O.064-inch- thick, galvanized, sheet steel.
Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
I
I
2.
3.
DUCT ACCESSORIES
15820 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
2.4
I
I
I
I
I
E.
F.
G.
H.
2.5
A.
B.
e.
D.
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.6
I
I
I
I
4.
Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
c.
Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- thick zinc-plated
steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size. Include
elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
FIRE DAMPERS
A.
General: Labeled to UL 555.
B. Fire Rating: One and one-half hours.
C.
Frame: SMACNA Type B with blades out of airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch- thick
galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
D.
Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed galvanized, sheet steel.
1.
2.
Minimum Thickness: 0.052 inch or 0.138 inch thick as indicated, and length to suit application.
Exceptions: Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct attachment of perimeter
mounting angles on each side of wall or floor, and thickness of damper frame complies with
sleeve requirements.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.
Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized, sheet steel. In place of interlocking
blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized steel blade connectors.
Horizontal Dampers: Include a blade lock and stainless-steel negator closure spring.
Fusible Link: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated.
CEILING FIRE DAMPERS
General: Labeled to UL 555C; comply with construction details for tested floor- and roof-ceiling assem-
blies as indicated in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory."
Frame: 0.040-inch- thick, galvanized, sheet steel; round or rectangular; style to suit ceiling construction.
Blades: 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized, sheet steel with nonasbestos refractory insulation.
Fusible Link: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated.
SMOKE DAMPERS
A.
General: Labeled to UL 555S. Combination fue and smoke dampers shall be labeled for one-and-one-
half-hour rating to UL 555.
B.
Fusible Link: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated.
C.
Frame and Blades: 0.064-inch- thick, galvanized, sheet steel.
DUCT ACCESSORIES
15820 - 3
2.7
I
D.
Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 0.052-inch- thick, galvanized, sheet steel; length to suit wall or floor
application.
I
E.
Damper Motors: Provide for modulating or two-position action.
I
1.
2.
Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and sealed gear trains.
Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where indicated. Enclose
entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or adjustments. Size for
running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 150 in. x lbf.
Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outside-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets designed to make
motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to permit normal operation at minus 40
degF.
Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft., size motor for running torque rating
of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 300 in. x lbf.
Two-Position Motor: 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz.
I
I
3.
I
4.
5.
TURNING VANES
I
A.
Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
I
B.
Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate of l-1/2-inch- wide, curved blades set 3/4 inch O.c.; support
with bars perpendicular to blades set 2 inches o.c.; and set into side strips suitable for mounting in ducts.
I
C.
Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate of airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fi-
brous-glass fill.
I
2.8 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
2.9
A.
General: Fabricate doors and panels airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
I
B. Frame: Galvanized, sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
I
e.
Door: Double-wall, galvanized, sheet metal constniction with. insulation fill and thickness, and number
of hinges and locks as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision panel where indicated. Include 1-
by-I-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.
I
D.
Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with. neoprene or foam rubber.
E.
Insulation: l-inch- thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.
I
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
I
A.
General: Flame-retarded or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying with UL 181,
Class 1.
I
B.
Standard Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 3-1/2 inches wide attached to
two strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized, sheet steel or 0.032-inch aluminum sheets.
Select metal compatible with connected ducts.
I
C.
Transverse Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 3-1/2 inches wide attached
to two strips of 4-3/8-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized, sheet steel or 0.032-inch aluminum
sheets. Select metal compatible with connected ducts.
I
DUCT ACCESSORIES
15820 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
2.10
I
I
I
I
D.
Conventional, Indoor System Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with polychloro-
prene.
1.
2.
Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd..
Tensile Strength: 480 lbflinch in the warp, and 360 lbflinch in the filling.
FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A.
General: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.
B.
Flexible Ducts, Insulated: Factory-fabricated, insulated, round duct, with an outer jacket enclosing 1-1/2-
inch- thick, glass-fiber insulation around a continuous inner liner.
1. Reinforcement: Steel-wire helix encapsulated in inner liner.
2. Outer Jacket: Glass-reinforced, silver Mylar with a continuous hanging tab, integral fibrous-glass
tape, and nylon hanging cord.
3. Inner Liner: Polyethylene film.
C.
Pressure Rating: 2-inch wg positive, 1/2-inch wg negative.
2.11 ACCESSORY HARDWARE
I
I
I
I
A.
Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket.
Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments, and length to suit duct insulation thick-
ness.
B.
Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-
gear action, in sizes 3 to 18 inches to suit duct size.
C.
Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and
grease.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
INSTALLATION
A.
Install duct accessories according to applicable details shown in SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction
Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and NAIMA's "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Stan-
dards" for fibrous-glass ducts.
B.
Install volume dampers in lined duct; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.
e. Provide test holes at fan inlet and outlet and elsewhere as indicated.
D.
Install fire and smoke dampers according to manufacturer's UL-approved written instructions.
1. Install fusible links in fire dampers.
E.
Install duct access panels for access to both sides of duct coils. Install duct access panels downstream
from volume dampers, fire dampers, turning vanes, and equipment.
DUCT ACCESSORIES
l5820 - 5
I
1.
Install duct access panels to allow access to interior of ducts for cleaning, inspecting, adjusting,
and maintaining accessories and terminal units.
Install access panels on side of duct where adequate clearance is available.
I
2.
I
F. Label access doors.
I
3.2
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.
I
B. Adjust fire and smoke dampers for proper action.
C.
Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing. "
I
END OF SECTION 15820
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DUCT ACCESSORIES
15820-6
I
I
I
SECTION 15838 - POWER VENTILATORS
I
PART 1- GENERAL
I
1.1
I
I
1.2
I
I
1.3
I
A.
A.
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1. Centrifugal wall ventilators.
2. Ceiling-mounting ventilators.
3. In-line centrifugal fans.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
Project Altitude: Base air ratings on actual site elevations.
I
1.4 SUBMITTALS
I
I
I
'1
I
I
A.
B.
Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product
indicated and include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
Certified fan sound-power ratings.
Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.
Material gages and fInishes, including color charts.
Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
1.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-
installed and field-installed wiring.
Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic
restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.
Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to
structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, and base weights.
2.
3.
C. Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
I
1.5
I
I
QUALITY ASSURANCE
POWER VENTILATORS
15838 - 1
B.
e.
D.
1.6
A.
B.
e.
I
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
I
I
AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be licensed to use
the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
I
NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.
UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705.
I
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
I
Deliver fans as factory-assembled unit, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with protective
crating and covering.
I
Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to fmallocation, according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
I
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
Centrifugal Wall Ventilators:
I
a.
b.
c.
d.
Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp.
Aerovent; a Twin City Fan Company.
Ammerman Company, Inc./General Resource Corp.
Breidert Air Products, Inc.
Broan Mfg. Co., Inc.
Carnes Company HV AC.
Chelsea Fans & Blowers, Inc.
Cook, Loren Company.
Dayton Electric Manufacturing Co.
Greenheck Fan Corp.
Hartzell Fan, Inc.
ILG Industries, Inc./American Coolair Corp.
JennFan; Div. of Breidert Air Products, Inc.
NuTone Inc.
Penn Ventilation Companies, Inc.
I
I
I
e.
f.
g.
h.
I
1.
J.
k.
1.
I
m.
n.
o.
2.
Ceiling-Mounting Ventilators:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Ammerman Company, Inc.!General Resource Corp.
Breidert Air Products, Inc.
Broan Mfg. Co., Inc.
Carnes Company HV AC.
Chelsea Fans & Blowers, Inc.
I
I
e.
POWER VENTILATORS
15838 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.
f
g.
h.
Cook, Loren Company.
Dayton Electric Manufacturing Co.
FloAire, Inc.
Greenheck Fan Corp.
ILG Industries, Inc./American Coolair Corp.
JennFan; Div. of Breidert Air Products, Inc.
NuT one Inc.
Penn Ventilation Companies, Inc.
1.
J.
k.
1.
m.
In-Line Centrifugal Fans:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp.
Ammerman Company, Inc.lGeneral Resource Corp.
Barry Blower Div./Penn Ventilation Companies, Inc.
Bayley Fans, Lau Commercial Industrial FanslLau Industries.
Breidert Air Products, Inc.
Carnes Company HV AC.
Cook, Loren Company.
FloAire, Inc.
Greenheck Fan Corp.
Hartzell Fan, Inc.
ILG Industries, Inc./ American Coolair Corp.
JennFan; Div. of Breidert Air Products, Inc.
Madison Manufacturing/Peerless-Winsmith, Inc.
Penn Ventilation Companies, Inc.
Quietaire Corp.
e.
f
g.
h.
1.
J.
k.
1.
m.
n.
o.
A.
CENTRIFUGAL WALL VENTILATORS
Description: Belt-driven or direct-driven centrifugal fans COllSlstmg of housing, wheel, fan. shaft,
bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and accessories.
B.
C.
Housing: Heavy-gage, removable, spun-aluminwn, dome top and outlet baffle; venturi inlet cone.
Fan Wheel: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.
D.
Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to housing, with the following features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.
Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings.
Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.
Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream
E.
Accessories:
1. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside fan
housing, factory wired through internal aluminum conduit.
2. Bird Screens: Removable, l/2-inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire.
3. Wall Grille: Ring type for flush mounting.
4. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in wall sleeve; factory set
to close when fan stops.
2.3 CEILING-MOUNTING VENTILATORS
I
I
-
POWER VENTILATORS
15838 - 3
2.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.5
I
A.
Description: Centrifugal fans designed for installing ill ceiling or wall or for concealed in-line
applications.
I
B.
Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulation.
I
e.
Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan wheel
shall be removable for service.
I
D.
Grille: Louvered grille with flange on intake and thumbscrew attachment to fan housing.
I
E.
Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for motor
plug-in.
I
F.
Accessories:
1. Manual Starter Switch: Single-pole rocker switch assembly with cover and pilot light.
2. Ceiling Radiation Damper: Fire-rated assembly with ceramic blanket, stainless-steel springs, and
fusible link.
3. Filter: Washable aluminum to fit between fan and grille.
4. Isolation: Rubber-in-shear vibration isolators.
5. Manufacturer's standard roof jack or wall cap, and transition fittings.
I
I
IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS
I
Description: In-line, belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, outlet guide vanes, fan
shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, mounting brackets, and accessories.
I
Housing: Split, spun aluminum with aluminum straightening vanes, inlet and outlet flanges, and support
bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting.
Direct-Driven Units: Motor encased in housing outside of airstream, factory wired to disconnect switch
located on outside of fan housing.
,I
Belt-Driven Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves, enclosure around belts
within fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan bearings extended to outside offan housing.
I
Fan Wheels: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub.
I
Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
V olume-Control Damper: Manually operated with quadrant lock, located in fan outlet.
Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections.
Fan Guards: 1/2- by l-inch mesh of galvanized steel in removable frame. Provide guard for inlet
or outlet for units not connected to ductwork.
Motor and Drive Cover (Belt Guard): Epoxy-coated steel.
I
4.
I
MOTORS
I
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Motors" for general requirements for factory-installed motors.
B.
Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B.
I
e.
Enclosure Type: Open dripproof.
I
POWER VENTILATORS
15838-4
I
I
I
2.6
I
I
I
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings
from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for
Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
B.
Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and
efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 2l 0, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for
Rating. "
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
INSTALLATION
A.
Install power ventilators level and plumb.
B.
Support units using spring isolators having a static deflection of \ti inch. Vibration- and seismic-control
devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints."
1. Secure VIbration and seismic controls to concrete bases using anchor bolts cast in concrete base.
C.
Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps.
D.
Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and spring hangers. Vibration-control
devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints."
1. In seismic zones, restrain support units.
E.
Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
F. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A.
Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make [mal duct connections with flexible
connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."
I
I
I
I
B.
Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Ground equipment.
D.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening
values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
I
I
I
A.
Equipment Startup Checks:
1.
Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
POWER VENTILATORS
15838 - 5
I
2.
Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and
electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in
motors, starters, and disconnect switches.
Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.
Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free
rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and
install belt guards.
Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected
ductwork systems are in fully open position.
Disable automatic temperature-control operators.
I
3.
4.
I
I
5.
6.
I
7.
B.
Starting Procedures:
I
1. Energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm.
2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage.
I
C.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor
rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
I
D.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
E.
Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.
I
F.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for testing, adjusting, and balancing
procedures.
I
G.
Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.
H.
Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements are made.
I
3.4 ADJUSTING
3.5
3.6
I
A.
Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B.
Adjust belt tension.
I
C.
Lubricate bearings.
CLEANING
I
A.
On completion of installation, internally clean fans according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum fan wheel and cabinet.
I
B.
After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed fInish.
Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged fInishes.
I
DEMONSTRATION
I
A.
Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain power ventilators.
I
POWER VENTILATORS
15838 - 6
I
I
I
1.
Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping,
troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment and schedules.
Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice.
I
2.
3.
I END OF SECTION 15838
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
.
POWER VENTILATORS
15838 - 7
I
I
SECTION l5855 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
I
PART 1- GENERAL
I
1.1
I
I
1.2
I
I
I
I
1.3
I
I
I
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and seneral provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for fIxed and adjustable louvers and wall vents, whether
or not they are connected to ducts.
Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for fIre and smoke dampers and volume-control dampers
not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.
Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for balancing diffusers, registers, and
grilles.
2.
3.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Diffuser: Circular, square, or rectangular air distribution outlet, generally located in the ceiling and com-
prised of deflecting members discharging supply air in various directions and planes and arranged to
promote mixing of primary air with secondary room air.
B.
Grille: A louvered or perforated covering for an opening in an air passage, which can be located in a
sidewall, ceiling, or floor.
c.
Register: A combination grille and damper assembly over an air opening.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Product Data: For each model indicated, include the following:
1. Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicate construction,
fInish, and mounting details.
2. Performance Data: Include throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings for each type of
air outlet and inlet.
3. Schedule of diffusers, registers, and grilles indicating drawing designation, room location, quan-
tity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
4. Assembly Drawing: For each type of air outlet and inlet; indicate materials and methods of as-
sembly of components.
B.
Samples for Verification: Of diffusers, registers, and grilles, in manufacturer's standard sizes, showing
the full range of colors. Prepare Samples from the same material to be used for the Work.
.
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
15855 - 1
1.5
I
I
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Product Options: Drawings and schedules indicate specific requirements of diffusers, registers, and
grilles and are based on the specific requirements of the systems indicated. Other manufacturers' prod-
ucts with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitu-
tions."
I
I
B.
NFPA Compliance: Install diffusers, registers, and grilles according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the In-
stallation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
2.2
A.
Diffusers, registers, and grilles are scheduled on Drawings.
I
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
I
A.
Testing: Test performance according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of
Air Outlets and Inlets."
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
I
I
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.3
A.
Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions,
Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards.
I
B.
Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and acces-
sories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume,
noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much
as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of the panel. Where
architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of fInal
location.
I
I
e.
Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connection to ducts and to allow service and mainte-
nance of dampers, air extractors, and fIre dampers.
I
ADJUSTING
I
A.
After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before
starting air balancing.
I
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
15855 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.4 CLEANING
A. After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed surfaces to
remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and grilles that have damaged finishes.
END OF SECTION 15855
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
15855 - 3
I
I
SECTION 15861 - AIR FILTERS
I
PART 1- GENERAL
I
1.1
I
I
1.2
I
I
1.3
I
I
I
I
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes factory-fabricated air-filter devices and media used to remove'particulate matter
from air for HV AC applications.
SUB MITT ALS
A.
Product Data: Include dimensions; shipping, installed, and operating weights; required clearances and
access; rated flow capacity, including initial and final pressure drop at rated airflow; efficiency and test
method; fIre classification; furnished specialties; and accessories for each model indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and details to illustrate component assemblies and at-
tachments.
1. Show filter rack assembly, dimensions, materials, and methods of assembly of components.
2. Include setting drawings, templates, and requirements for installing anchor bolts and anchorages.
C.
Maintenance Data: For each type of filter and rack to include in maintenance manuals specified in Divi-
sion 1.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of air filters and are
based on the specific system indicated. Other manufacturers systems with equal performance characteris-
tics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."
I
I
I
I
B.
Comply with NFP A 90A and NFP A 90B.
e.
ASHRAE Compliance: Comply with provisions of ASHRAE 52.1 for method of testing and rating air-
filter units.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
I
I
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Air Filters and Filter-Holding Systems:
AIR FILTERS 15861 - 1
2.2
2.3
I
I
a.
b.
AAF International.
Continental Air Filter Div.; NiCon Filter Corp.
Farr Co.
Flanders Filters, Inc.
International Air Filter, Inc.
I
c.
d.
e.
2.
Filter Gages:
I
a.
b.
Airguard Industries, Inc.
Dwyer Instruments Inc.
I
EXTENDED-SURF ACE, DISPOSABLE P ANEL FILTERS
I
A.
Description: Factory-fabricated, dry, extended-surface ftlters with holding frames.
B.
Media: Fibrous material formed into deep-V-shaped pleats and held by self-supporting wire grid.
I
e. Media and Media-Grid Frame: Nonflammable cardboard.
D.
Duct-Mounting Frames: Welded, galvanized steel with gaskets and fasteners, and suitable for bolting to-
gether into built-up ftlter banks.
I
FILTER GAGES
I
A.
Description: Diaphragm type with dial and pointer in metal case, vent valves, black figures on white
background, and front recalibration adjustment.
I
1.
2.
Diameter: 4-1/2 inches.
Range: 0- to 0.5-inch wg.
I
B.
Manometer-Type Filter Gage: Molded plastic with epoxy-coated aluminum scale, logarithmic-curve tube
gage with integral leveling gage, graduated to read from 0- to 3.0-inch wg, and accurate within 3 percent
of full scale range.
I
e.
Accessories: Static-pressure tips, tubing, gage connections, and mounting bracket.
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.l INSTALLATION
A.
Install filter frames according to manufacturer's written instructions.
I
B.
Position each filter unit with clearance for normal service and maintenance. Anchor filter holding frames
to substrate.
I
C. Install ftlters in position to prevent passage of unfiltered air.
D.
Install filter gage for each ftlter bank.
I
I
AIR FILTERS
15861 - 2
I
I
I
E.
Install filter gage static-pressure tips upstream and downstream from filters to measure pressure drop
through filter. Mount filter gages on outside of filter housing or filter plenum in an accessible position.
Adjust and level inclined gages.
I
F.
Coordinate filter installations with duct and air-handling unit installations.
I
3.2
CLEANING
I
A.
After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing air-handling and alI-
distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filter media.
I END OF SECTION 15861
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
AIR FILTERS
15861 - 3
I
I
I
SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART 1- GENERAL
I
1.1
I
I
1.2
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing HV AC systems to produce design objectives, in-
cluding the following:
1.
Balancing airflow and water flow within distribution systems, including submains, branches, and
terminals, to indicated quantities according to specified tolerances.
Adjusting total HV AC systems to provide indicated quantities.
Measuring electrical performance ofHV AC equipment.
Setting quantitative performance ofHV AC equipment.
Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1. Testing and adjusting requirements unique to particular systems and equipment are included in the
Sections that specify those systems and equipment.
2. Field quality-control testing to verify that workmanship quality for system and equipment installa-
tion is specified in system and equipment Sections.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce fan speed
or adjust a damper.
B.
Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and termi-
nals, according to design quantities.
C.
Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high air veloc-
ity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn from a person's
skin than is normally dissipated.
D. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable results.
E.
Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.
F.
Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In a closed sys-
tem, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.
G.
Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction side.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15990 - 1
-
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
1.4
A.
1.5
I
H.
System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced ca-
pacities in all or part of a system.
I
I.
System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a fan
when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was performance tested.
I
J.
Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the distribution
system.
I
Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of a system or equipment.
I
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agent: The entity responsible for performing and reporting the testing,
adjusting, and balancing procedures.
I
AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association.
I
NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
I
SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.
SUBMITTALS
I
Quality-Assurance Submittals: Within 30 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 2 copies
of evidence that.the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent and this Project's testing, adjusting, and bal-
ancing team members meet the qualifications specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article below.
I
B.
Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 2 copies
of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in Part 3
"Preparation" Article below. Include a complete set ofreport forms intended for use on this Project.
I
e.
Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Submit 2 copies ofreports prepared, as specified in
this Section, on approved forms certified by the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.
I
QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
A.
Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by either AABC or
NEBB.
I
B.
Certification of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Certify the testing, adjusting, and balancing
field data reports. This certification includes the following:
I
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified testing, adjusting,
and balancing reports.
2. Certify that the testing, adjusting, and balancing team complied with the approved testing, adjust-
ing, and balancing plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.
I
e.
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing."
I
D.
Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC national standards.
I
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15990 - 2
I
I
I
I
E.
Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every 6 months or more frequently if required
by the instrument manufacturer.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner may occupy completed areas of the building before Substantial
Completion. Cooperate with the Owner during testing, adjusting, and balancing operations to minimize
conflicts with the Owner's operations.
I
I
1.7 COORDINATION
I
I
I
I
A.
Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, HV AC
controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HV AC systems and equipment to support and assist
testing, adjusting, and balancing activities.
B.
Notice: Provide 7 days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.
e.
Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution.
systems have been satisfactorily completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine approved submittal data ofHV AC systems and equipment.
B.
Examine project record documents described in Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents."
c.
Examine Architect's and Engineer's design data, including HV AC system descriptions, statements of de-
sign assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and
assumptions about HV AC system and equipment controls.
D. Examine equipment performance data, including fan and pump curves
E.
Coordinate requirements in system and equipment Specification Sections with this Section.
F.
Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing, cleaning,
adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Specification Sections have been performed.
G. Examine system and equipment test reports.
H.
Examine HV AC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices, such as
test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual
volume dampers, are properly installed, and their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective
balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.
I.
Examine air-handling equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased, belts are
aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15990 - 3
1.
K.
I
Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
I
L. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:
Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.
I
3.2
M.
1.
2.
3.
Dampers and other controlled devices operate by the intended controller.
Dampers are in the position indicated by the controller.
Integrity of dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed and fully open po-
sitions.
Thermostats and hurnidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and cold
walls.
Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.
Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents.
Controller set points are set at design values. Observe and record system reactions to changes in
conditions. Record default set points if different from design values.
Interlocked systems are operating.
Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to design values.
I
4.
I
5.
6.
7.
I
8.
9.
I
Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of testing, adjusting, and balancing proce-
dures.
I
PREPARATION
I
A. Prepare a testing, adjusting, and balancing plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
B.
Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.
Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
Balance and fire dampers are open.
Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access to bal-
ancing devices is provided.
Windows and doors can be closed so design conditions for system operations can be met.
I
I
I
7.
3.3 GENERAL TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES
3.4
A.
B.
e.
Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in
AABC national standards and this Section.
I
Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent
necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe holes
and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish ac-
cording to the insulation Specifications for this Project.
I
I
Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including
damper-control positions, valve indicators, fan-speed-controllevers, and similar controls and devices, to
show final settings.
I
FUNDAMENTAL AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
I
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15990 - 4
I
I
I
A.
B.
e.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
3.5
A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended test-
ing procedures. Crosscheck the summation ofrequired outlet volumes with required fan volumes.
Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.
Check the airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air
dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
Check for airflow blockages.
Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.
CONSTANT -VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
The procedures in this Article apply to constant-volume supply-, return-, and exhaust-air systems. Addi-
tional procedures are required for variable-air-volume systems. These additional procedures are specified
in other articles in this Section.
B.
Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable rpm listed by the fan manufac-
turer.
1.
Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:
a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and upstream
from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible,
upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions.
2.
Measure static pressure across each air-handling unit component.
a.
Simulate dirty fIlter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel must
change fIlters.
3.
Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as heat recovery equipment under
fmal balanced conditions.
Adjust fan speed higher or lower than design with the approval of the Architect. Make required
adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to accommodate fan-speed
changes.
Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufactur-
ers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure
no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling and full heating modes to determine the
maximum required brake horsepower.
4.
5.
C.
Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to design airflows within
specified tolerances.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15990 - 5
3.6
3.7
I
1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust volume
dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
I
I
a. Where sufficient space in submains and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse
measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow
for that zone.
I
2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust sub-
mains and branch ducts to design airflows within specified tolerances.
I
D.
Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
1.
Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or the outlet manufacturer's written instruc-
tions and calculating factors.
I
E.
Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to design airflows within specified tolerances of design
values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at the air termi-
nals.
I
1.
Adjust each outlet in the same room or space to within specified tolerances of design quantities
without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents.
Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
I
2.
MOTORS
I
A.
Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at [mal balanced conditions and record the following data:
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.
Motor horsepower rating.
Motor rpm.
Efficiency rating if high-efficiency motor.
Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
Starter therma1-protection-element rating.
I
I
TEMPERATURE TESTING
I
A.
During testing, adjusting, and balancing, report need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the
automatic temperature-control system.
I
B.
Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of 2 successive 8-hour days,
in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of [mal temperature settings. Measure when the
building or zone is occupied.
I
1. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures
I
3 .8 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION
A.
Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.
I
B.
Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect control func-
tions.
I
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15990 - 6
I
I
I
e.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
3.9
A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements.
Verify operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).
Verify free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators.
Commn interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.
Confirm interaction of interlock and lockout systems.
Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine if the system operates on a grounded
or nongrounded power supply.
Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.
TOLERANCES
Set HV AC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1.
2.
Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans: 0 to plus 10 percent.
Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.
FINAL REPORT
A.
General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in 3-ring
binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.
B.
Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing en-
gineer.
1. Include a list of the instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
c.
Final Report Contents: In addition to the certified field report data, include the following:
1. Fan curves.
2. Manufacturers' test data.
3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
4. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include approved Shop Drawings
and Product Data.
D.
General Report Data: In addition to the form titles and entries, include the following data in the fmal re-
port, as applicable:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Architect's name and address.
6. Engineer's name and address.
7. Contractor's name and address.
8. Report date.
9. Signature of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent who certifies the report.
10. Summary of contents, including the following:
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15990 - 7
11.
12.
13.
14.
a.
b.
Design versus fmal performance.
Notable characteristics of systems.
Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents.
c.
Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.
Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from design values.
Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms, including the following:
a.
b.
Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.
Conditions of filters.
Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
Fan drive settings, including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
c.
d.
e.
f.
E.
Air-Handling Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:
1. Unit Data: Include the following:
a.
b.
Unit identification.
Location.
Make and type.
Model number and unit size.
Manufacturer's serial number.
Unit arrangement and class.
Discharge arrangement.
Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches.
Number of belts, make, and size.
Number of filters, type, and size.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
1.
J.
k.
2. Motor Data: Include the following:
3.
a.
b.
Make and frame type and size.
Horsepower and rpm.
V olts, phase, and hertz.
Full-load amperage and service factor.
Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a.
b.
Total airflow rate in cfm.
Total system static pressure in inches wg.
Fan rpm.
Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg.
Preheat coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.
Cooling coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.
Heating coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.
Outside airflow in cfm.
Return airflow in cfrn.
Outside-air damper position.
Return-air damper position.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
1.
J.
k.
1.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
15990 - 8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
F.
1.
Apparatus-Coil Test Reports: For apparatus coils, include the following:
Coil Data: Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
System identification.
Location.
Coil type.
Number of rows.
Fin spacing in fins per inch.
Make and model number.
Face area in sq. ft..
Tube size in NPS.
Tube and fID materials.
Circuiting arrangement.
e.
f.
g.
h.
1.
J.
2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Airflow rate in cfm
b. Average face velocity in ipm.
c. Air pressure drop in inches wg.
d. Outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
h. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.
1. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig.
J. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F.
1.
Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
Fan Data: Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
System identification.
Location.
Make and type.
Model number and size.
Manufacturer's serial number.
Arrangement and class.
Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches.
G.
2.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Motor Data: Include the following:
a.
b.
e.
f.
g.
3.
c.
d.
Make and frame type and size.
Horsepower and rpm.
V olts, phase, and hertz.
Full-load amperage and service factor.
Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches.
Number of belts, make, and size.
Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
Total airflow rate in cfm.
Total system static pressure in inches wg.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
a.
b.
15990 - 9
I
I
c.
d.
Fan rpm.
Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
Suction static pressure in inches wg.
I
e.
H.
Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing
the duct cross-section and record the following:
I
1. Report Data: Include the following:
a. System and air-handling unit number.
b. Location and zone.
c. Traverse air temperature in deg F.
d. Duct static pressure in inches wg.
e. Duct size in inches.
f. Duct area in sq. ft..
g. Design airflow rate in cfm.
h. Design velocity in fpm.
1. Actual airflow rate in cfm.
J. Actual average velocity in tpm.
k. Barometric pressure in psig.
I
I
I
I.
System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils of terminal units, include the following:
I
1.
2.
Unit Data: Include the following:
I
a.
b.
System and air-handling unit identification.
Location and zone.
Room or riser served.
Coil make and size.
I
c.
d.
Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
I
a.
b.
Airflow rate in cfm.
Entering-air temperature in deg F.
Leaving-air temperature in deg F.
I
c.
1.
Compressor and Condenser Reports: For refrigerant side of unitary systems, stand-alone refrigerant
compressors, or air-cooled condensing units, include the following:
I
1. Unit Data: Include the following:
2.
I
a.
b.
Unit identification.
Location.
Unit make and model number.
Manufacturer's compressor serial numbers.
Compressor make.
Compressor model and serial numbers.
Refrigerant weight in lb.
Low ambient temperature cutoff in deg F.
I
c.
d.
I
e.
f.
g.
h.
Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
I
a. Inlet-duct static pressure in inches wg.
b. Outlet-duct static pressure in inches wg.
c. Entering-air, dry-bulb temperature in deg F.
I
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15990-10
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I'
I
I
I
I
3.11
I
I
I
K.
d.
Leaving-air, dry-bulb temperature in deg F.
Control settings.
Unloader set points.
Low-pressure-cutout set point in psig.
High-pressure-cutout set point in psig.
Suction pressure in psig.
Suction temperature in deg F.
Condenser refrigerant pressure in psig.
Condenser refrigerant temperature in deg F.
Oil pressure in psig.
Oil temperature in deg F.
Voltage at each connection.
Amperage for each phase.
The kW input.
Crankcase heater kW.
Number of fans.
Condenser fan rpm.
Condenser fan airflow rate in cfrn.
Condenser fan motor make, frame size, rprn, and horsepower.
Condenser fan motor voltage at each connection.
Condenser fan motor amperage for each phase.
e.
f.
g.
h.
1.
].
k.
L
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
x.
Instrument Calibration Reports: For instrument calibration, include the following:
1. Report Data: Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Instrument type and make.
Serial number.
Application.
Dates of use.
Dates of calibration.
A.
ADDITIONAL TESTS
Within 90 days of completing testing, adjusting, and balancing, perform additional testing and balancing
to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
B.
Seasonal Periods: If initial testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures were not performed during near-
peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional inspections, testing, and adjusting during near-
peak summer and winter conditions.
END OF SECTION 15990
I
I
I
I
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15990 - 11
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Supporting devices for electrical components.
2. Electricity-metering components.
3. Concrete bases for electrical equipment.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defmed in NFP A 70,
Article 100, and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and
arrange in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical
installations that follow. Set inserts and sleeves in poured-in-place concrete, masonry work, and
other structural components as they are constructed.
B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient
flow of the Work.
C. Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility companies.
Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground and overhead utilities and
services, including provision for electricity-metering components. Comply with requirements
of authorities having jurisdiction and of utility company providing electrical power and other
servlces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Material: Cold-formed steel, with corrosion-resistant coating.
B. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel.
C. Slotted-Steel Channel Supports: Flange edges turned toward web, and 9/16-inch- diameter
slotted holes at a maximum of2 inches o.c., in webs.
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16050 - 1
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.2
A.
B.
I
1. Charmel Thickness: Selected to suit structural loading.
2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as charmel supports.
I
I
Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C-
clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring-steel clamps.
I
Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type.
I
Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
EQUIPMENT FOR UTILITY COMPANY'S ELECTRICITY METERlNG
I
I
Current-Transformer Cabinets: Comply with requirements of electrical power utility company.
Meter Sockets: Comply with requirements of electrical power utility company.
I
2.3 CONCRETE BASES
A.
Concrete Forms and Reinforcement Materials: As specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-
Place Concrete."
I
B.
Concrete: 3000-psi, 28-day compressive strength as specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-
Place Concrete."
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
3.2
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
I
I
A.
Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,
arrange and install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom.
B.
Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other
building systems and components.
I
C.
Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components.
Cormect for ease of discormecting, with minimum interference with other installations. .
I
D. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.
ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION
I
A.
Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized materials.
I
B. Dry Locations: Steel materials.
I
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16050 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
3.3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
c.
Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
D.
Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at
least four; minimum of200-lb design load.
SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components.
B.
Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. Provide
U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies and for
securing hanger rods and conduits.
C.
Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type hangers.
D.
Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent
minimum in the future.
E.
Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or clamps.
F.
Install l/4-inch- diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods.
G.
Spring-steel fasteners specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing may be
used instead of malleable-iron hangers for l-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving lighting and
receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to slotted
channel and angle supports.
H.
Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture support.
Support sheet-metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. If bar hangers
are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an
approved fastener not more than 24 inches from the box.
1.
Install metal channel racks for mounting panelboards, disconnect switches, pull and junction
boxes, and other devices unless components are mounted directly to structural elements of
adequate strength.
J.
Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core-drilled
holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fITe-rated
gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during
erection of concrete and masonry walls.
K.
Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, unless otherwise
indicated. Perform fastening according to the following:
1. Wood: Fasten with wood screws or screw-type nails.
2. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion bolts on solid masonry
units.
3. Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts.
4. Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring-tension clamps on steel.
.
!!!!
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16050 - 3
I
6.
7.
Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits, pipe
straps, or other items.
Light Steel: Sheet-metal screws.
Fasteners: Select so the load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of its
proof-test load.
I
I
5.
I
3.4 UTILITY COMPANY ELECTRICITY -METERlNG EQUIPMENT
A.
Apply firestopping to cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to
achieve fire-resistance rating of the assembly.
I
I
I
A.
Install equipment according to utility company's written requirements. Provide grounding and
empty conduits as required by utility company.
3.5
FIRESTOPPING
3.6
CONCRETE BASES
I
A.
Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger, in both
directions, than supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's anchorage
recommendations and setting templates for anchor-bolt and tie locations. Use 3000-psi, 28-day
compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement.
I
I
END OF SECTION 16050
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16050 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding requirements
specified in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements of systems described in
other Sections.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70,
Article 100, and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with UL 467.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. For insulated conductors, comply with Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
B. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation.
C. Grounding Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable.
D. Underground Conductors: Bare, tinned, stranded.
E. Bare Copper Conductors: Comply with the following:
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
2. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.
2.2 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS
A. Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and combinations of
conductors and connected items.
GROUNDING AND BONDING
16060 - 1
2.3
B.
Bolted Connectors: Bolted-pressure-type cormectors, or compression type.
I
I
I
c.
Welded Cormectors: Exothermic-welded type, in kit form, and selected per manufacturer's
written instructions.
GROUNDING ELECTRODES
I
A.
Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel.
I
B.
Size: 3/4 by 120 inches in diameter.
A. In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors.
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
3.2
3.3
B. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Use for cormections to structural steel and for underground
cormections.
I
C. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Use bolted pressure clamps.
EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
I
A.
Comply with NFP A 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding
conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NFP A 70
are indicated.
I
B.
Install equipment grounding conductors in all feeders and branch circuits.
I
I
I
I
c.
Signal and Communication Systems: For' telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other
communication systems, provide No.4 A WG minimum insulated grounding conductor in
raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring
closet, and central equipment location.
INSTALLATION
A.
Ground Rods: Install rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least
the same distance from other grounding electrodes. Drive ground rods until tops are 2 inches
below finished floor or final grade. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode
conductors. Use exothermic welds. Make cormections without exposing steel or damaging
copper coating.
I
B.
Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible. Avoid obstructing
access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
I
I
GROUNDING AND BONDING
16060-2
I
I
I
I
I
c.
Metal Water Service Pipe: Provide insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from
building's main service equipment to main metal water service entrances to building. Cormect
grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes by grounding clamp cormectors.
Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, cormect grounding conductor to street side of
fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
General: Make cormections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select
connectors, cormection hardware, conductors, and cormection methods so metals in direct
contact will be galvanically compatible. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure
high conductivity and to make contact points closer to order of galvanic series. Make
connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.
B.
Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Welds that
are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.
C.
Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No.8 A WG and larger, use pressure-type
grounding lugs. No.1 0 A WG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with
winged pressure-type connectors.
D.
Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal housings
without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit with a
grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding
bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at entrances and exits
with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to
manufacturer's published torque-tightening values.
F. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct
circumferential pressure for compression cormectors. Use tools and dies recommended by
connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a
visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor.
END OF SECTION 16060
.
-
-
.
-
.
.
.
GROUNDING AND BONDING
16060 - 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
.
I
-
-
SECTION 16075 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes electrical identification materials and devices required to comply with
NFP A 70, OSHA standards, and authorities having jurisdiction.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CABLE LABELS
A. Adhesive Labels: Preprinted, flexible, self-adhesive vinyl with legend overlaminated with a
clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating.
B. Colored Adhesive Tape: Self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches
wide.
C. Underground-Line Warning Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, vinyl tape.
1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick.
2. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service.
3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core.
4. Printed legend indicating type of underground line.
D. Tape Markers: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers
and letters.
2.2 NAMEPLATES
A. Engraved Plastic Nameplates: Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate, minimum 1/16 inch
thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16075 - 1
I
A.
Identification Materials and Devices: Install at locations for most convenient viewing without
interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
I
I
B.
Sequence of Work: If identification is applied to surfaces that reqUlre fmish, install
identification after completing finish work.
I
c.
Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before applying.
D.
Paths of Underground Electrical Lines: During trench backfilling, for exterior underground
power, control, signal, and communication lines, install continuous underground plastic line
marker located directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below fmished grade. Where width of
multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope does not exceed 16 inches
overall, use a single line marker.
I
I
I
I
E.
Color-Coding of Secondary Phase Conductors: Use the following colors for service, feeder, and
branch-circuit phase conductors:
1. 208/120-V Conductors:
a. Phase A: Black.
b. Phase B: Red.
c. Phase C: Blue.
I
2. Factory apply color the entire length of conductors, except the following field-applied,
color-coding methods may be used instead of factory-coded wire for sizes larger than
No. 10 AWG:
I
a.
Colored, pressure-sensitive plastic tape in half-lapped turns for a distance of 3
inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply
last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Use 1-inch-
wide tape in colors specified. Adjust tape bands to avoid obscuring cable
identification markings.
I
I
F.
Equipment Identification Labels: Engraved plastic laminate. Provide a single line of text with
l/2-inch- high lettering on 1-1/2-inch- high label. Use white lettering on black field. Apply
labels for each unit of the following categories of equipment:
I
I
1. Panelboards.
2. Disconnect switches.
3. Contactors.
END OF SECTION 16075
I
I
I
I
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16075 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes building wires and cables and associated cormectors, splices, and
terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defmed in NFP A 70,
Article 100, and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with NFP A 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Refer to Part 3 "Conductor and Insulation Applications" Article for insulation type, cable
construction, and ratings.
B. Conductor Material: Copper complying with NEMA WC 5, solid conductor for No. 10 AWG
and smaller, stranded for No.8 A WG and larger.
C. Conductor Insulation Types: Type THHN-THWN complying with NEMA WC 5.
2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,
and class for application and service indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUCTOR AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS
A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
B. Feeders: Type TillIN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
C. Branch Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
16120 - 1
3.2
I
D.
Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
I
I
E.
Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
INSTALLATION
I
I
A.
Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used
must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
B.
Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will
not damage cables or raceway.
I
I
C.
Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 16 Section "Electrical
Identification. "
D.
Tighten electrical cormectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values.
I
E.
Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent
or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
I
END OF SECTION 16120
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
16120 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16130 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
1.3
A.
SUMMARY
This Section includes raceways and boxes for electrical wiring.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defmed in NFP A 70,
Article 100, and marked for intended use.
Comply with NFPA 70.
COORDINATION
Coordinate layout and installation of raceways, boxes, and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fIxtures, HV AC
equipment, fITe-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
C.
D.
E.
2.2
A.
B.
A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
B. EMT and Fittings: ANSI C80.3.
1. Fittings: Compression type.
FMC: Zinc-coated steel.
LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.
Fittings: NEMA FB 1; compatible with conduit and tubing materials.
NONMETALLIC CONDUIT
RNC: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 PVC.
RNC Fittings: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit type and material.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
16130 - 1
A. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.3 BOXES
B. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, with gasketed cover.
C. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
D. Cast-Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
C.
D.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
A. Outdoors:
1. Exposed: RMC.
2. Underground: RNC.
3. COlmection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.
4. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
B. Indoors:
1. Exposed: EMT.
2. Concealed: EMT.
3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC; except use LFMC in damp or wet
locations.
4. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless
steel in damp or wet locations.
Minimum Raceway Size: l/2-inch trade size.
Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
INST ALLA TION
Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.
Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
Support raceways as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways.
Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved
portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
16130 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
F.
Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and keep
straight legs of offsets parallel.
G.
Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors where practical. Install
concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance, considering
type of building construction and obstructions.
H.
Change from RNC to RMC or EMT before rising above the floor.
I.
Install exposed raceways parallel or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members and
follow surface contours as much as possible. Run parallel or banked raceways together on
common supports. Make parallel bends in parallel or banked runs. Use factory elbows only
where elbows can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways.
J.
Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and make joints tight. Use
insulating bushings to protect conductors.
K.
Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to enter squarely
and install locknuts with dished part against box. Use two locknuts, one inside and one outside
box.
L. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly into hub
so end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align raceways so
coupling is square to box; tighten chase nipple so no threads are exposed.
M. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not
less than 200-lb tensile strength.
N. Telephone and Signal System Raceways, 2-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: In addition to above
requirements, install raceways in maximum lengths of 150 feet and with a maximum of two 90-
degree bends or equivalent. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes where necessary to
comply with these requirements.
O. Install raceway sealing fittings where required by NFP A 70.
P. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and
semirecessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or
movement; and for all motors. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations.
Q. Provide fmal protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are
without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
R. After completing installation of exposed, factory-fmished raceways and boxes, inspect exposed
finishes and repair damaged finishes.
END OF SECTION 16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
16130 - 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16140 - WIRlNG DEVICES
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Single and duplex receptacles, and ground-fault circuit interrupters.
2. Single- and double-pole snap switches and dimmer switches.
3. Device wall plates.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defmed in NFP A 70,
Article 100, and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with NFP A 70.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Bryant Electric, Inc./Hubbell Subsidiary.
2. Eagle Electric Manufacturing Co., Inc.
3. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.
4. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.
5. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div.
2.2 RECEPTACLES
WIRING DEVICES
16140 - 1
WIRING DEVICES
16140 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. Straight-Blade-Type Receptacles: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, DSCC W-C-
596G, and UL 498.
B. Straight-Blade Receptacles: Heavy-Duty grade.
C. GFCI Receptacles: Straight blade, feed-through type, Heavy-Duty grade, with integral
NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R duplex receptacle; complying with UL 498 and UL 943.
Design units for installation in a 2-3/4-inch- deep outlet box without an adapter.
2.3 SWITCHES
A. Single- and Double-Pole Switches: Comply with DSCC W-C-896F and UL 20.
B. Snap Switches: Heavy-Duty grade, quiet type, 20 A, 120/277-Vac.
2.4 WALL PLATES
A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.
1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.
2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch- thick, satin-fmished stainless steel.
3. Material for Unfmished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic.
4. Material for Wet Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and
labeled for use in "wet locations."
2.5 FINISHES
A. Color:
1. Wiring Devices: Ivory, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFP A 70.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install devices and assemblies level, plumb, and square with building lines.
B. Arrangement of Devices: Mount flush, with long dimension vertical, and with grounding
terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.
C. Remove wall plates and protect devices and assemblies during painting.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
=
B. Tighten electrical cormectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. After installing wiring devices and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for proper
polarity, ground continuity, and compliance with requirements.
B. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION 16140
WIRING DEVICES
16140 - 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
.
SECTION 16145 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following lighting control devices:
1. Outdoor photoelectric switches.
2. Multipole contactors.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defmed in NFP A 70,
Article 100, and marked for intended use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Intermatic, Inc.
2. Paragon Electric Co.
3. TORK.
B. Description: Solid state, with dry contacts rated for 1800 VA to operate contactor coils; and
complying with UL 773.
1. Time Delay: 15-second minimum, to prevent false operation.
2. Mounting: Provide with stem mounting or stem-and-swivel mounting accessories as
required to direct sensor to the North sky exposure.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
16145 - 1
1. Allen-BradleylRockwell Automation.
2. Cutler-Hammer; Eaton Corporation.
3. GE Industrial Systems; Total Lighting Control.
I
I
I
I
2.3
MULTIPOLECONTACTORS
A.
Manufacturers:
B. Description: Electrically operated and electrically held, complying with NEMA ICS 2 and
UL 508.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
16145 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served.
D. Control-Coil Voltage: Match control power source.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Wiring Method: Comply with Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." Minimum
conduit size shall be 1/2 inch.
B. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make cormections only on numbered terminal strips m
junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 16 Section "Electrical
Identification. "
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. After installing sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, adjust and test for
compliance with requirements.
B. Operational Test: Verify actuation of each sensor.
C. Remove and replace lighting control devices where test results indicate that they do not comply
with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION 16145
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
-
-
-
SECTION 16410 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes individually mounted enclosed switches used for the following:
1. Feeder and branch-circuit protection.
2. Motor and equipment discormecting means.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of switch indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers'
technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and fmishes.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defmed in NFP A 70,
Article 100, and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with NEMA KS 1.
C. Comply with NFP A 70.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches with other construction, including conduit,
piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products.
2. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D Co.
2.2
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
16410 - 1
2.3
A.
Enclosed, Nonfusible Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with lockable handle.
I
I
B.
Enclosed, Fusible Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with clips to accommodate specified fuses,
lockable handle with two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
I
ENCLOSURES
I
A. NEMA KS 1 to meet environmental conditions of installed location.
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
I
A.
Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance
with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with
installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
I
B.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, charmels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
I
c.
Identify field-installed conductors, intercormecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
I
D.
Enclosure Nameplates: Label each enclosure with engraved laminated-plastic nameplate.
E.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values.
I
F. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of enclosures. Remove paint
splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in
cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.
I
I
END OF SECTION 16410
I
I
I
I
I
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
16410 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16442 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2
1.3
A.
This Section includes panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, and associated auxiliary
equipment rated 600 V and less.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of panelboard. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical
data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and fmishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed
devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:
a. Enclosure types.
b. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
c. Short-circuit current rating of panel boards and overcurrent protective devices.
d. UL listing for series rating of installed devices.
e. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defmed in NFP A 70,
Article 100, and marked for intended use.
B.
Comply with NEMA PB 1.
C.
Comply with NFP A 70.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that
penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,
raceways, piping, and encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
PANELBOARDS
16442 - 1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
I
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
I
I
1. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products.
2. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Div.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D Co.
I
FABRICATION AND FEATURES
I
A.
Enclosures: Surface-mounted cabinets. NEMA PB 1, Type 1, to meet environmental
conditions at installed location.
I
B.
Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box
dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.
I
I
C.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel fmish over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer coat.
D.
Directory Card: With transparent protective cover, mounted inside metal frame, inside
panelboard door.
E.
Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material.
I
F.
Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment ground conductors;
bonded to box.
I
G.
Service Equipment Label: UL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards with main
service discormect switches.
I
H.
Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances required for
future installation of devices.
I
P ANELBOARD SHORT -CIRCUIT RATING
I
I
A.
UL label indicating series-cormected rating with integral or remote upstream devices. Include
size and type of upstream device allowable, branch devices allowable, and UL series-cormected
short-circuit rating.
LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
I
A.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without
disturbing adjacent units.
I
B.
Doors: Front mounted with concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed
alike.
I
DISTRIBUTION P ANELBOARDS
I
PANELBOARDS
16442-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.6
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Doors: Front mounted, secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
B.
Branch overcurrent protective devices shall be one of the following:
1. For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers.
2. For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in
circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for
removal.
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A.
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault
currents.
1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level
overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.
2. Electronic Trip Unit Circuit Breakers: RMS sensing; inverse time-current element for
low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.
B.
Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and
number of poles.
1. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, SIze, trip ratings, and material of
conductors.
2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent
lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment.
3. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
I
I
I
I
-
==
.
-
INSTALLATION
Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.
Mounting Heights: Top of trim 74 inches above finished floor.
Mounting: Plumb and rigid without distortion of box.
Circuit Directory: Create a directory to indicate installed circuit load. Use a computer or
typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
Install filler plates in unused spaces.
Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved laminated-plastic nameplate.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values.
PANELBOARDS
16442-3
H.
On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint
splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in
cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original fInish.
I
I
I
END OF SECTION 16442
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PANELBOARDS
16442-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16491 - FUSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes cartridge fuses, rated 600 V and less for use in switches.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance,
electrical characteristics, and ratings for each fuse type indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Provide fuses from a single manufacturer.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defmed in NFPA 70,
Article 100, and marked for intended use.
C. Comply with NEMA FU 1.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate fuse ratings with HV AC and refrigeration equipment nameplate limitations of
maximum fuse size.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Cooper Industries, Inc.; Bussmann Div.
Eagle Electric Mfg. Co., Inc.
F erraz Corp.
General Electric Co.; Wiring Devices Div.
Gould Shawmut.
Tracor, Inc.; Littelfuse, Inc. Subsidiary.
FUSES
16491 - 1
FUSES
16491 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES
A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuse; class and current rating indicated;
voltage rating consistent with circuit voltage.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes
and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment. Proceed with installation only
after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS
A. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK5, time delay.
B. Other Branch Circuits: Class RK5, time delay.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without
removing fuse.
B. Install labels indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch.
END OF SECTION 16491
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ii
SECTION 16511 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior lighting fixtures with lamps and ballasts.
2. Lighting fixtures mounted on exterior building surfaces.
3. Emergency lighting units.
4. Exit signs.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture scheduled, arranged in order of fixture
designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:
1. Physical description of fixture, including dimensions.
2. Emergency lighting unit battery and charger.
3. Fluorescent and high-intensity-discharge ballasts.
4. Lamps.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70,
Article 100, and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with NFP A 70.
C. NFPA 101 Compliance: Comply with visibility and luminance requirements for exit signs.
1.4 COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fIxtures and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HV AC equipment, fire-
suppression system, and partition assemblies.
I PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.
iiiii
.
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
16511 - 1
INTERIOR LIGHTING
16511 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.2 FIXTURES AND CONIPONENTS, GENERAL
A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.
B. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598.
C. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598.
D. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes:
1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent VIrgm acrylic plastic. High resistance to
yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum.
b. UV stabilized.
2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass.
2.3 FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS
A. Electronic ballasts for linear lamps shall include the following features:
1. Comply with NEMA C82.11.
2. Ballast Type: Rapid start.
3. Sound Rating: A.
4. Total harmonic distortion rating of less than 20 percent according to NEMA C82.11.
5. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.
6. Lamp Current Crest Factor: Less than 1.7.
7. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts cormected to maintain full light output on
surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail.
B. Ballasts for compact lamps in recessed fixtures shall have the follo\ving features:
1. Type: Electronic.
2. Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum.
3.. Flicker: Less than 5 percent.
4. Lamp Current Crest Factor: Less than 1.7.
5. Electronic Ballast Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.
C. Ballasts for compact lamps in nonrecessed fixtures shall include the following features, unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum.
2. Ballast Coil Temperature: 65 deg C, maximum.
2.4 HIGH-INTENSITY-DISCHARGE LAMP BALLASTS
A. General: Comply with NEMA C82.4 and UL 1029. Shall include the following features.
1. Type: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Open-circuit operation that will not reduce average life.
B. Low-Noise Ballasts: Manufacturers' standard epoxy-encapsulated models designed to minimize
audible fixture noise.
2.5 EXIT SIGNS
A. General: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors and lettering size, comply with authorities
having jurisdiction. .
B. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained power
pack.
1. Lamps for AC Operation: Light-emitting diodes, 70,000 hours minimum of rated lamp
life.
2. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type
3. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.
4. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage drops
to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay
disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on
charger.
2.6 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS
A. General: Self-contained units complying with UL 924.
1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type with minimum 1 O-year nominal life.
2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.
3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power supply circuit voltage drops
to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery
when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay
disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on
charger.
2.7 FLUORESCENT EMERGENCY LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit factory mounted within fixture
body. Comply with UL 924.
1. Emergency Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously. Connect
unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast.
2. Test Switch and Light-Emitting-Diode Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without
entering ceiling space.
3. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type with minimum seven-year
nominal life.
4. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type.
2.8 FLUORESCENT LAMPS
INTERIOR LIGHTING
16511 - 3
INTERIOR LIGHTING
16511 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. Low-Mercury Lamps: Comply with Federal toxic characteristic leaching procedure test, and
yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter, when tested according to NEMA LL 1.
B. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 32 W maximum, 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI of 75
(minimum), color temperature of 3500 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours.
C. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, average rated life
of 10,000 hours at 3 hours operation per start, unless otherwise indicated.
1. T4, Twin Tube: Rated 13 W, 825 initial lumens (minimum).
2. T4, Twin Tube: Rated 18 W, 1200 initial lumens (minimum).
2.9 HIGH-INTENSITY-DISCHARGE LAMPS
A. Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.1372, wattage and burning position as scheduled, CRI 65
(minimum), and color temperature 4000 K.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fixture.
B. Support for Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid for support.
1. Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture. Locate
not more than 6 inches from fixture corners.
2. Support Clips: .Fasten to fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture
corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.
3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans
or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-
inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.
C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
B. Verify normal operation of each fixture after installation.
C. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify
normal transfer to battery power source and retransfer to normal.
END OF SECTION 16511
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
SECTION 16750 - VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes raceways and outlet boxes to be used as pathways for voice and high-
speed data transmission wiring. Wire, cable, cormecting devices, installation, and testing for
wiring systems will be furnished by the Owner.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of voice and data communication outlets with Owner's
telecommunications and LAN equipment suppliers. Coordinate service entrance arrangement
with local exchange carrier. Meet jointly with telecommunications and LAN equipment
suppliers, local exchange carrier representatives, and Owner to exchange information and agree
on details of equipment arrangements and installation interfaces. Adjust locations of outlets
based upon the requirements of telephone switch and LAN equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MOUNTING ELEMENTS
A. Raceways and Boxes: Comply with Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes."
B. Backboards: 3/4-inch, interior-grade, frre-retardant-treated plywood.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Wiring Method: Conceal raceway where practical.
B. Raceways and Boxes: Comply with Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes."
3.2 INSTALLATION STANDARDS
A. Comply with requirements in TIAlEIA-568-A and TIAlEIA-569-A.
END OF SECTION 16750
VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
16750 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16851- FIRE ALARM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fire alarm systems.
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Noncoded, addressable system; multiplexed signal transmission dedicated to fire alarm service
only.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NFP A 72.
B. Fire alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices:
1. Manual stations.
2. Smoke detectors.
C. Fire alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:
1. Alarm notification appliances shall operate continuously.
2. Identify alarm at the F ACP and remote annunciator.
3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.
4. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire alarm mode.
D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices or actions:
1. Open circuits, shorts and grounds of wiring for initiating device, signaling line, and
notification-appliance circuits.
2. Opening, tampering, or removal of alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating
devices.
3. Loss of primary power at the F ACP.
4. Ground or a single break in F ACP internal circuits.
5. Abnormal ac voltage at the FACP.
6. A break in standby battery circuitry.
7. Failure of battery charging.
8. Abnormal position of any switch at the F ACP or annunciator.
E. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Annunciate at the F ACP and remote
annunciator.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
FIRE ALARM
16851 - 1
1.5
I
I
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings:
I
I
1. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons trained and certified by manufacturer in fITe
alarm system design.
2. System Operation Description: Detailed description for this Project, including method of
operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of operations for manually
and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs. Manufacturer's standard
descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.
3. Device Address List: Coordinate with final system programming.
4. System riser diagram with device addresses, conduit sizes, and cable and wire types and
SIzes.
5. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Include diagrams for equipment
and for system with all terminals and intercormections identified. Show wiring color
code.
6. Floor Plans: Indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device.
Show size and route of cable and conduits.
I
I
I
I
c.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For fITe alarm system. Comply with NFP A 72, Appendix A.
D.
Submittals to Authorities Having Jurisdiction: Make a submittal to authorities having
jurisdiction. To facilitate review, include copies of annotated Contract Drawings as needed to
depict component locations. Resubmit if required to make clarifications or revisions to obtain
approval.
I
I
E.
Documentation:
1. Approval and Acceptance: Provide the "Record of Completion" form according to
NFP A 72 to Owner.
2. Record of Completion Documents: Provide the "Permanent Records" according to
NFP A 72 to Owner.
I
I
I
I
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Persormel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation
of units required for this Project.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70,
Article 100, and marked for intended use.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
I
I
1. Edwards Systems Technology Inc.
FIRE ALARM
16851 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Faraday, LLC.
Federal Signal Corporation.
Fire Control Instruments, Inc.; a GE-Honeywell Company.
Fire-Lite Alarms; a GE-Honeywell Company.
NOTIFIER; a GE-Honeywell Company.
Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.; a Cerberus Division.
Silent Knight; a GE-Honeywell Company.
SimplexGrinnell LP; a Tyco International Company.
FACP
A.
General Description:
1. Modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, UL 864 listed.
2. Addressable initiation devices that communicate device identity and status.
3. Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment.
B.
Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at
the F ACP and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision. Display
alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control menu.
c.
Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control
commands.
D.
Circuits:
1. Signaling Line Circuits: NFP A 72, Class B, Style 4.
2. Notification-Appliance Circuits: NFP A 72, Class B, Style W.
3. Actuation of alarm notification appliances shall occur within 10 seconds after the
activation of an initiating device.
4. Electrical monitoring for the integrity of wiring external to the F ACP for mechanical
equipment shutdown circuits is not required, provided a break in the circuit will cause
mechanical equipment to shut down.
E.
Notification-Appliance Circuit: Operation shall sound in a temporal pattern, complying with
ANSI S3.41.
F.
Power Supply for Supervision Equipment: Supply for audible and visual equipment for
supervision of the ac power shall be from a dedicated dc power supply, and power for the dc
component shall be from the ac supply.
G.
Alarm Silencing, Trouble, and Supervisory Alarm Reset: Manual reset at the F ACP and remote
armunciator, after initiating devices are restored to normal. Silencing-switch operation halts
alarm operation of notification appliances and activates an "alarm silence" light. Display of
identity of the alarm zone or device is retained. Subsequent alarm signals from other devices or
zones reactivate notification appliances until silencing switch is operated again. When alarm-
initiating devices return to normal and system reset switch is operated, notification appliances
operate again until alarm silence switch is reset.
FIRE ALARM
16851 - 3
I
H.
Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, trouble, and
supervisory signals to a remote alarm station through a digital alarm communicator transmitter
and telephone lines.
I
I
1.
Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module.
Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signal, and digital alarm
communicator transmitter shall be powered by the 24-V dc source.
I
J.
Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries and automatic battery charger and an
automatic transfer switch.
I
1. Batteries: Sealed, valve-regulated, recombinant lead acid.
2. Battery and Charger Capacity: Comply with NFPA 72.
I
I
I
K.
Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or
glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe
appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the
system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.
2.3 MANUAL FIRE ALARM BOXES
A.
Description: UL 38 listed; finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in
contrasting color. Station shall show visible indication of operation. Mounted on recessed
outlet box.
I
I
B.
Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm. With integral addressable
module, arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the
FACP.
I
I
c.
Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.
2.4 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS
A.
General Description:
I
I
I
1. UL 268 listed, operating at 24- V dc, nominal.
2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,
or trouble) to the FACP.
3. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be .mounted
in a plug-in module that cormects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for
cormection of building wiring.
4. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to
restore them to normal operation.
5. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicating detector has operated and power-
on status.
I
I
I
B.
Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:
1. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver.
FIRE ALARM
16851 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.5
I
2.6
I
2. Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot smoke obscuration when tested
according to UL 268A.
c.
Duct Smoke Detectors:
1.
Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:
a. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver.
b. Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot smoke obscuration when
tested according to UL 268A.
2. UL 268A listed, operating at 24- V dc, nominal.
3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,
or trouble) to the FACP.
4. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted
in a plug-in module that cormects to a fIxed base. The fixed base shall be designed for
mounting directly to the air duct. Provide terminals in the fixed base for cormection to
building wiring.
5. Self-Restoring: Detectors shall not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to
restore them to normal operation.
6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicating detector has operated and power-
on status.
7. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for the
specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.
8. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.
NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A.
Description: Equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system
cormections.
B.
Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting
assembly.
c.
Visible Alarm Devices: Xenon strobe lights listed under UL 1971, with clear or nominal white
polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in
minimum 1-inch- high letters on the lens.
1. Rated Light Output: 75 candela.
D.
V oicerrone Speakers:
1. UL 1480 listed.
2. Low-Range Units: Rated 1 to 2 W.
3. Mounting: Flush.
4. Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to the acoustical environment of the speaker
location.
REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR
FIRE ALARM
16851 - 5
2.7
2.8
A.
Description: Duplicate annunciator functions of the F ACP for alarm, supervisory, and trouble
indications. Also duplicate manual switching functions of the F ACP, including acknowledging,
silencing, resetting, and testing.
I
I
I
B. Mounting: Flush enclosure, NEMA 250, Class 1.
I
I
I
I
I
c.
Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display same as the F ACP. Controls
with associated LEDs permit acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing functions for
alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals identical to those in the FACP.
DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER
A.
Listed and labeled according to UL 632.
B.
Functional Performance: Unit receives an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from the FACP,
and automatically captures one or two telephone lines and dials a preset number for a remote
central station. When contact is made with the central station(s), the signal is transmitted. The
unit supervises up to two telephone lines. Where supervising 2 lines, if service on either line is
interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, the unit initiates a local trouble signal and transmits a
signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station over the remaining
line. When telephone service is restored, unit automatically reports that event to the central
station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, the local trouble signal is initiated.
I
C.
Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger. Battery capacity is
adequate to comply with NFPA 72 requirements.
I
WIRE AND CABLE
I
A. Wire and cable for fITe alarm systems shall be UL listed and labeled as complying with
NFPA 70, Article 760.
I
I
I
I
B. Signaling Line Circuits: Twisted, shielded pair, size as recommended by system manufacturer.
C. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color-coded
insulation.
1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum.
2. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
I
A.
HV AC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet from air-supply diffuser or return-air opening.
I
I
B.
Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFP A 72 and NFP A 90A. Install sampling tubes so they
extend the full width of the duct.
FIRE ALARM
16851 - 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
C.
Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install on
flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille.
D.
Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least
6 inches below the ceiling.
E.
F ACP: Surface mount with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the fmished floor.
F.
Annunciator: Install with top of panel not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.
3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.3
3.4
I
I
I
I
A.
Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Division 16 Section "Raceways
and Boxes." Fire alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the fITe alarm
system shall be installed in a dedicated raceway system. This system shall not be used for any
other wire or cable.
B.
Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as
recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and
back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess.
Cormect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with
the fITe alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring
diagrams. Make all cormections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type
terminal blocks, or plug connectors.
C.
Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabinets, or
equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.
D.
Wiring for Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: 3/4-inch conduit between the F ACP and the
building telephone board. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for
connecting wiring as needed to suit monitoring function.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 16 Section
"Electrical Identification."
B.
Install instructions frame in a location visible from the F ACP.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
cormections.
B. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection listed in NFPA 72. Certify
compliance with test parameters.
FIRE ALARM
16851 - 7
'-
_ _ ::==::-r
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
"
I'
/'
~. ;,
C. Visual Inspection: Conduct a visual inspection before any testing. Use as-built drawings and
system documentation for the inspection. Identify improperly located, damaged, or
nonfunctional equipment, and correct before beginning tests.
D. Testing: Follow procedure and record results complying with requirements in NFP A 72.
E. Test and Inspection Records: Prepare according to NFP A 72, including demonstration of
sequences of operation by using the matrix-style form in Appendix A in NFP A 70.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain the fire alarm system, appliances, and devices.
END OF SECTION 16851
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
FIRE ALARM
16851 - 8
I'